BARN  PLANS  and 
OUTBUILDINGS 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2009  with  funding  from 

NCSU  Libraries 


http://www.archive.org/details/barnplansoutbuiOOhals 


Barn  Plans 

and  Outbuildings 


NEW   AND     REVISED    EDITION 


375 

ILLUSTRATIONS 


NEW   YORK: 
ORANGE    JUDD    COMPANY 

1914 


Copyright,  i88i 

BY 

ORANGE  JUDD  COMPANY 


Copyright,  1903 

BY 

®RANGE  JUDD  COMPANY 


Pt  in  ted  in  U.  S.  A. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

List   of  Illustrations x-xiii 

Publishers'  Announcement xiv 

Introduction xv-xvi 

CHAPTER  I— General  Farm  Barns 

Light,  Heat  and  Ventilation  of  Stables;  Barn  at 
Massachusetts  Agricultural  College;  Plank  Frame 
Barns;  How  to  Build  a  Round  Barn;  An  Up-to- 
date  New  York  Barn ;  Plan  of  Convenient  Farm 
Barn  and  Yard ;  The  Barn  of  Mr.  David  Lyman ; 
Mr.  Lawson  Valentine's  Barn ;  An  Ohio  Barn ;  A 
Missouri  Barn ;  A  Good  Farm  Barn ;  Another  Barn 
for  Mixed  Farming;  Mr.  Charles  S.  Sargent's 
Barn;  A  Cheap  but  Convenient  Barn;  A  Plan  for 
a  Small  Barn;  Another  Small  Barn;  Practical 
Enlargement  of  Old  Barns;  Remodeling  an  Old 
Barn 1-58 

CHAPTER  II— Cattle  Barns  and   Stables 

Combined  Stock  and  Hay  Barn;  A  Barn  for  Feeding 
Loose  Cattle ;  A  Circular  Barn  for  Feeding  Cattle ; 
A  Decagonal  Cattle  Barn ;  Suggestive  Plan  for  a 
Stock  Barn;  A  Rhode  Island  Cattle  Barn;  A 
Western  Cattle  Barn;  A  Second  Western  Cattle 
Barn;  Covered  Stalls  for  Cattle;  Cheap  Cattle 
Sheds  and  Barns;  Cheap  Barn  and  Connecting 
Stables;  A  Temporary  Cattle  Shed;  A  Combined 
Cow  Shed  and  Pigpen ;  Improving  Old  Stables .  .   59-85 

CHAPTER  III— Dairy   Barns 

A  Model  Dairy  Barn;  Modern  and  Sanitary  Cow 
Stable;  A  Sanitary  Cow  Barn;  An  Illinois  Dairy 
Barn;    A   Ten-Sided   Dairy  Barn;   Barn   for   One 


VI  TABLE  OF   CONTENTS 

Hundred  Cows;  Combined  Dairy  and  Fruit  Bam; 
Modern  Addition  to  a  Dairy  Barn;  An  Orange 
County,  N.  Y,,  Cow  Stable;  A  Westchester  County, 
N.  Y.,  Dairy  Barn;  Another  Orange  County, 
N.  Y.,  Dairy  Barn ;  An  Extension  Dairy  Barn ; 
Enlarging  a  Barn  for  Dairy  Purposes;  New  Style 
Calf  Pens ;  Cement  Floors  for  Cow  Stables ;  The 
Hoard  Stall  for  Dairy  Cattle 86-120 

CHAPTER   IV— Cattle    Shelters 

An    Archway    Shelter;    A    Cheap    Shelter    for    Cows; 
Building    Straw    Barns;    Cheap    Temporary    Shel-' 
ters  for  Stock;   Other   Styles  of  Temporary  Shel- 
ters; Cattle  Shelters  on  the  Plains 121-132 

CHAPTER  V— Sheep  Barns  and   Sheds 

A  Minnesota  Sheep  Barn;  A  Barn  for  Early  Lambs; 
Barn  for  Raising  Winter  Lambs ;  Sheep  Sheds 
and  Racks;  Shed  for  Soiling  Sheep;  Virginia 
Sheep  Barn;  A  Kansas  Sheep  Shelter;  A  Sheep 
Feeding  Barn;  Sheep  Shelter  on  the  Plains. .  133-153 

CHAPTER   VI— Piggeries 

A  Serviceable  and  Well  Arranged  Piggery;  A  Brick 
Piggery  for  Cold  Climates;  Twentieth  Century 
Hogpens ;  Movable  Hogpens ;  Feeding  Pen  for 
Fattening  Hogs;  Plan  of  a  Piggery;  A  Convenient 
Farm  Pigpen ;  Mr.  Crozier's  Pigpen ;  A  Comfort- 
able Pigpen ;  Pens  and  Yards  for  One  Hundred 
and  Fifty  Hogs ;  Another  Portable  Pigpen ;  Pig- 
pen, Hen  House  and  Corn  Crib  Combined ;  A 
Pigpen  and  Tool  House ;  A  Cheap  Pigpen ;  Self- 
closing  Door  for  Pigpen ;  A  Swinging  Door  for 
a   Piggery 154-186 

CHAPTER  VII— Poultry   Houses 

Scratching  Shed  Houses;  Concrete  Poultry  Houses; 
A  Movable  Poultry  House;  Three-Pen  House; 
A  Cheap  and  Convenient  Poultry  House;  An  Ohio 
Poultry     House;     Another     Clioap     Hen     House; 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS  VH 

Poultry  Houses  for  Four  Varieties;  Poultry 
House  for  a  Number  of  Breeds;  An  Incubator 
Cellar;  A  Practical  Brooder  House;  A  Cheap  and 
Economical  Brooder  House;  Small  Houses  for 
Poultry;  Cheap  Summer  Shelter  for  Chicks;  A 
Place  for  Pigeons ;  Ducks  and  Duck  Houses ;  The 
Ventilation  of  Poultry  Houses 187-212 

CHAPTER  VIII — Carriage   Houses  and  Horse  Barns 

Combination  Horse  and  Carriage  Barn ;  Stable  for  a 
Village  Lot ;  Stalls  for  Horses ;  A  Combined  Car- 
riage and  Tool  House;  A  Twenty-sided  Horse 
Barn;  A  Cheap  and  Convenient  Horse  Barn. .  213-224 

CHAPTER   IX— Corn   Houses    and   Cribs 

The  Connecticut  Corn  House;  An  Improved  Corn 
House ;  Western  Corn  Houses ;  Another  Western 
Corn  House;  Cement  Floors  Not  Suitable;  A  Con- 
venient Corn  Crib;  A  Self -Feeding  Corn  Crib; 
A  Self-Discharging  Corn  Crib;  A  Cover  for 
Corn    Cribs 225-239 

CHAPTER  X— Ice  Houses 

Ice :  Its  Uses  and  Importance ;  Plan  of  an  Ice  House ; 
A  Cheap  Ice  House;  A  Small  Ice  House;  Under- 
ground Ice  Houses;  An  Ice  House  in  the  Barn; 
A  Cheaply  Constructed  Ice  House;  Ice  Without 
Houses 240-255 

CHAPTER  XI — Ice  Houses  and  Cool  Chambers 
Several   Plans;    A    Chamber    Refrigerator 256-260 

CHAPTER     XII — Dairy     Houses,      Creameries      and 
Cheese    Factories. 

Ice  House  and  Summer  Dairy  Combined;  A  Butter 
Dairy;  A  Pennsylvania  Dairy;  A  Dairy  House  for 
Hot  Climates;  A  Farm  Creamery;  Plans  for  a 
Co-operative  Milk  Station ;  A  Modern  Cheese 
Factory 261-279 


VIU  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  XIII— Sprino  Houses 

Interior  of  Spring  House;  A  Dome-Shaped,  Concrete 
Spring   House 280-286 

CHAPTER    XIV— Granaries,    etc. 

A  Granary  with  Its  Grain  Bins;  Another  Granary 
with  Plan  of  Grain  Bins;  Plan  of  Corn  Crib  and 
Granary;  A  Measuring  Grain  Bin;  Sliding  Spout 
for  a  Barn  or  Granary;  Convenient  Grain 
Bin 287-297 

CHAPTER  XV— Smoke  Houses 

A  Convenient  Smoke  House ;  Improved  Smoke  Houses ; 
Cheap  Smoke  Houses;  Smoking  Meats  in  a  Small 
Way;  A  Smoke  House  Convenience;  An  Oven  and 
Smoke  House  Combined 298-310 

CHAPTER   XVI— Dog  Kennels 
Farm  Dog  Kennels 311-314 

CHAPTER  XVII— Bird  Houses 

Bird  Houses;  Pigeon  Houses;  A  House  for  Squab 
Raising 315-323 

CHAPTER    XVIII— Silos 

Capacity  of  Round  Silos ;  The  Stave  Silo ;  Construct- 
ing a  Round  Silo ;  A  Substantial  and  Durable  Silo ; 
The  Silo  in  Beef  Feeding;  Building  A  Cheap  Silo; 
Fastening  a  Silo  to  the  Barn ;  A  Cheap  Home- 
Made  Silo;  Dividing  a  Round  Silo;  Silos  for 
Brewers'  Grains;  Best  Hoops  for  Silo 324-342 

CHAPTER    XIX— Root    Cellars    and    Root    Houses 

Root  Cellars;  Well- Arranged  Onion  Storage  House; 
Storage  House  and  Pits  for  Celery;  Convenient 
Doors  to  a  Cellar;  A  Cave  for  Storing  Apples;  A 
Field  Root  Cellar ;  Pits  for  Storing  Roots ;  A  Cave 
for  Roots;  Preserving  Roots  in  Heaps 343-358 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS 


CHAPTER   XX — Buildings  of  Various   Kinds 

Cold  Storage  House  for  Apples;  A  Massachusetts 
Apple  House;  A  Novel  Apple  Storage  House;  An 
Apple  Evaporator;  A  Modern  Maple  Sugar  House; 
A  Modern  Bacon  Hog  Factory;  A  Connecticut 
Valley  Tobacco  Barn;  A  Well  Built  Tobacco  Cur- 
ing Barn ;  A  Farmer's  Greenhouse ;  A  House 
Apiary;  Fruit  and  Farm  Cold  Storage  House. .  359-385 


I. 

t  /%A  f 


INDEX  TO  ILLUSTRATIONS 


PAGE. 

Mass.  College  Barn. Frontispiece 

First  Floor 6 

Basement  8 

Plank  Frame  Barns,  Interior 

Bent  10 

The  Framing 11 

Model  of 12 

Thomas  Convey's 13 

Round  Barns,  Rafters 14 

Cross-Section  of  Elevation..  15 

Basement    16 

Main  Floor 1" 

Mr.  C.  E.  Colburn's  Barn 18 

Ground  Plan 19 

Second    Floor 20 

Convenient    Farm    Barn    and 
Yard    21 

Mr.  David  Lyman's  Barn 23 

Hay  Loft 24 

Feeding   Floor 25 

Basement    27 

Mr.  Lawson  Valentine's  Barn.  29 

Basement    30 

Main    Floor 31 

Horse    Stall 32 

Mr.   Kyle's  Barn 33 

Stable   Floor 34 

Main    Floor 35 

Horse    Stall 36 

Cow  Stall 36 

A  Missouri  Barn 37 

Plan   of 38 

Elevation  of  Barn 39 

Plan  of  Floor 40 

Barn  and  Stable 4 

Main    Floor 44 

Second    Story 45 

Mr.  C.  S.  Sargent's  Barn 47 

Basement  of 47 

Main  Floor 4S 

Cheap  but  Convenient  Barn..  49 

Framing  Elevation 40 

Floor  Plan 50 

A  Small   Barn 51 

Ground  Plan 52 

Loft    52 

Another  Small  Barn 54 

Floor   of "4 

Loft    of 54 


PAGE. 

Enlarging  Old   Barns 55 

Old  and  Enlarged 55 

Mr.   B.  Walker  McKeen's...  57 

Mr.  P.  H.  Reed's  Barn 59 

Section   of 60 

Floor   Plan 60 

Bents  of  Cattle  Feeding  Barns.  61 

Mr.  N.  Martin's  Barn 62 

Ground  Plan 63 

Mr.    John    C.    Baker's    Barn, 

Arrangement  of  Stalls 64 

General  View 65 

Dakota  Stock  Barn 66 

Rhode  Island  Cattle  Barn 68 

Section  69 

Plan  of  Floor 70 

Stall  and  Feeding  Apparatus  71 

"Western  Cattle  Barn 72 

Plan  73 

Elevation   74 

Covered  Cattle  Stalls 75 

Elevation  76 

Interior  77 

Cheap   Cattle  Sheds 78 

Cheap  Barn  and  Stables 80 

Cattle  Barn 80 

Temporary  Cattle  Shed 81 

Ground  Plan 82 

Bent  82 

Cow  Shed  and  Pigpen 83 

Plan   84 

Basement  Model  Dairy  Barn.  87 

Cross-Section  89 

Front   View 90 

Perspective   View 91 

Floor  Plan 91 

Sanitary  Cow  Barn 92 

Floor   Plan 93 

Illinois  Dairy  Barn 94 

Inside   95 

Ten-Sided  Dairy  Barn 96 

Second    Floor 97 

Basement  97 

Barn  for  100  Cows 98 

Floor  Plan 99 

Nova  Scotia  Barn 100 

Main  Floor  and  Basement.. loi 

N.  J.  Exper.  Sta.  Gnw  Barn..10'^ 

Floor  and  Stalls 104 

Floor  Dairy  Addition 105 

Orange  Co.  Cow  Stable 107 


X 


INDEX    TO    ILLUSTRATIONS 


PAGE. 

Covered  Feeding  Floor 165 

A  Piggery 166 

Ground  Plan  of 167 

Front   Partition 16S 

Col.  F.  D.  Curtis'  Piggery 169 

Plan  of  Cellar 170 

Main  Floor 171 


PAGE. 

Westchester  Co.  Dairy  Barn. 

Basement    lOS 

Section   108 

General  View 109 

Plan  of  Floor 110 

Orange  Co.  Dairy  Barn Ill 

Main  Floor 112 

Basement    112JMr.  Wm.   Crozier's  Piggery... 172 

Plan  of  Dairy  Barn 113     Plan   of 172 

Dairy  Barn Ill     Interior  of 173 

Ground  Plan  Enlarged  Barn.ll5!Plan  of  Pigpen 174 

Pennsylvania  Barn 116|Pigpens.  Plan  of 176 

Wire  Calf  Partitions 116|    Section   of 177 

Cement  Floors 117  Safeguards   177 

Hoard  Dairy  Stall 119lExterior  of  Pigpen 178 

Frame  for  Archwav  Shelter.. 122  A  Portable  Pigpen 179 

Archwav  Under  Stack 122     Yard  for 179 


Cheap  S%ielter,  End  View  and 

Ground  Plan 124 

Straw  Barns 125 

Shelter  of  Poles 126 


Pigpen   180 

Side  View  of 181 

Ground  Plan  of  Pigpen  and 
Tool    House 1S2 


Shelter  Covered  with  Straw.. 127, Pigpen  and  Tool  House 182 

Cheap  Board  Shelter 128iCheap  Pigpen 183 

Shelter  Added  to  Side  of  Barn.128     Side  of 183 

Temporarv  Cattle  Shelters.... 129!Self-Closing  Door  to  Pigpen. .185 

Cattle  Shed  Covered  with  Hay.130  Swinging  Door  for  Pigpen 185 

Cattle  Shelter  for  the  Plains. 130|Poultry      House,      Scratching 

Straw  Shelter  for  Cattle 131         Shed,  Open 187 

Minnesota  Sheep  Barn 133|    Closed  Front 188 

Floor  Plan 134, Concrete  Poultry  House 188 

Sheep   Barn 135  Mass.  Scratching  Shed  House. 1S8 

Ground  Plan  and  End  View.l36|    Front  View 189 

Sheep   Barn 138  Movable  Poultry  House 191 

Ground  Plan 139|Three-Pen   House 192 

Front    Elevation 139iPoultry  House,  Ground  Plan. 193 

Side  Section 1401    Section  of 193 

Door  14l|    Front   View 194 

Basement    141iMr.    J.     H.    Kemp's     Poultry 

Shed,  Pen  and  Rack  for  Sheep. 143|        House  195 

Stied  for  Soiling  Sheep 144  Hen  House,  Section  of 197 

Yard    l-!5  Hen  House,  Plan  of 197 

Plan  of  Shed 145, Poultry  House.  Plan  of 198 

Virginia  Sheep  Barn 146     Plan  of  Roosts 199 

Mr.  Geo.  Grant's  Sheep  Corral. 148|    Roosts  for  Heavy  Fowls 199 

Mr.W.  B.Shaw's  Sheep  Sheds.149  Poultry     House     for     Several 


Sheep  and  Hog  Barn 150 

Sheep  Feeding  Barn 151 

Sheep  Shelter 152 

Concentric  Sheep  Shelter 152  Incubator  Cellar 

Tenn    College  Hog  House 155  Bank  Brooder  House 


Breeds   200-1 

Ground  Plan  of 202 

Section   of 203 

203 

204 


Little's    Brooder 


Interior  15d  Mr.     J.     R. 

Cross-Section  156!        House  

Swing  Door  156  Summer  Poultry  House. .. 

Ground  Plan 157  Ctieap  Shelter  for  Chicks. 

Minn.  Exper.  Farm  Hog  Barn. 159  Pigeon  Loft 

Ground  Plan ir,9  Duck   House. 


.206 
.207 
.208 
.209 
.210 

Twentieth  Century  Hogpens.. 160     Ground  Plan... ^ 211 

TVi<5Consin  Hog  House H'l  Mass.  College  Horse  Barn. ...214 

Ground  Plan 162     Floor  Plan.....     21o 

Wigwam  House 163, Small  Carriage  House 215 

Movable    Pens 164;    Floor  Plan 216 


Xll 


INDEX    TO    ILLUSTRATIONS 


PAGE. 

Stalls  for  Horses 217 

Wagon  House,  Plan  of 219 

Upper   Floor 219 

Hoist  for 219 

Front   View 220 

Mr.  J.  C.  Baker's  Horse  Barn. 221 

Floor  Plan 222 

Mr.  Z.  Mulhall's  Horse  Barn. 223 

Connecticut  Corn  House 22.5 

Tin  Pan  for  Post 225 

Two  Corn  Cribs  Roofed  Over.226 

An  Improved  Corn  House 22S 

A  Large  Western  Corn  House.230 

End  View  of 231 

Cross-Section  of 232 

Another  Western  Corn  House.233 

Corn  Crib,  Framework  of 234 

Studding  23.5 

Small    Crib 23 

A  Self-Feeding  Corn  Crib 2.36 

Section  of  Corn  Crib 238 

Board  Rafter  for  Corn  Crib... 238 

Cover  for  Corn  Crib 239 

Frame  of  Ice  House 242 

Section  of  Ice  House 243 

Door  for  Ice  House 214 

Cheap  Ice  House 245 

Ground  Plan 24^) 

Mr.     D.     G.     Mitchell's     Ice 

House  246 

Walls  of  Ice  House 21S 

Vertical  Section 248 

Small  Ice  House 249 

Underground  Ice  House 2,50 

Framing   of 251 

Plan  of  Ice  House 251 

Ice  House  in  Barn 252 

A-Shaped   Ice  House 253 

An  Ice  Stack 254 

View  of  Cool  Chambers 256 

Ice  House  and  Milk  Room 25' 

Another  Ice   House  and   Cool 

Room    2.58 

Ice  House  and  Refrigerator. ..259 
Ice    House    and    Dairy    Com- 
bined     261 

Ground   Plan 262 

Plan  of  Upper  Part 262 

Section   of 263 

A  Butter  Dairy 264 

Interior  of  Milking  Room... 265 

Ice  House  of 266 

A  Pennsylvania  Dairy  House. 268 

Plan    of ". 269 

Doors   Open 270 

Doors    Closed 270 

An  Australian  Dairy 271 

Model   Farm  Creamery 272 

Interior   272 

Co-operative  Milk  Station 275 

Floor  Plan 276 


PAGE. 

Magaw  Cheese  Factory 278 

Floor  Plan 278 

Interior     of      Spring     House; 

High  Troughs 280 

Low  Troughs 281 

Exterior  of  Spring  House 282 

Spring    House,    Front    Eleva- 
tion  of 284 

Ground  Plan  of 285 

Sectional  View  of 286 

A   Granary 288 

Bag    Sling 289 

Grain   Bin 289 

Section   of 290 

Ventilator   for 291 

Section  of  Granary 292 

Plan  of  a  Granary 293 

Arrangement  of  Bins  in  Gran- 
ary    293 

Plan  of  Crib  and  Granary 294 

Corn  Crib   and   Granary 294 

A  Measuring  Grain  Bin 295 

Sliding  Spout 296 

A  Grain  Bin 297 

Interior  of  Smoke  House 299 

An  Improved  Smoke  House... 299 

Interior    of 300 

Hook   for 301 

"^Vooden  Smoke  House 302 

Cheap  Smoke  House 303 

Section   of 303 

The  Arch 303 

Frame  for  Arch 303 

A  Pennsylvania  Smoke  House.304 
Substitute  for  Smoke  House. 305 
A  Smoke  House  Convenience. 306 

Smoke  House  and  Oven 307 

Rear  View  of 308 

Smoke  House  and  Oven  Com- 
bined    309 

A  Dog  Kennel 311 

A    Neat 31fi 

A  Cheap 313 

Kennel,  wifh  Yard,  for  Dogs. 313 

Bird    Houses 315 

Framework  of  Bird  House 316 

Bird  House,  Complete SH 

Rustic  Pigeon  House 318 

Log  Cabin  Pigeon  House 318 

Swiss  Pigeon  Cottage 319 

A  Neat  Pigeon  House 320 

Interior  Large  Pigeon  House. 320 

Interior  Pigeon  House 322 

Pigeon    House    and    Covered 

Fly   322 

Modern  Round  Silo 327 

Construction  328 

Daniel  Brothers'  Brick  Silo... 331 
Mr.  Humphrey  Jones's  Silos.. .336 

Square    Silo 3.37 

Tying  a  Silo 338 


INDEX    TO    ILLUSTRATIONS 


PAGE. 

Octagonal  Silo 339 

Dividing  a  Silo 33'j 

View  of  Silo 341 

Manner  of  Covering 342 

Root   Cellar 343 

Stone  Facing  for 344 

Excavation    345 

Complete   345 

Onion   Storage  House 347 

Celery  Storage  House 348 

Celery  Trench 349 

Hatchway  350 

Apple  Cave  Entrance 351 

A  Field  Root  Cellar 352 

Section   of 352 

Shutter  for  Pit 354 

Section  of  Root  Pit 354 

Prairie  Root  Cellar 355 

Cave  for  Roots 356 

A  Root  Heap 357 

Covering,  etc 357 

Mr.   J.   H.    Dunn's   Cold   Stor- 
age   House 361 

Mr.  J.  W.  Clark's  Apple House.363 
Section  364 


PAGE, 

Mr.  A.  H.  Hill's  Apple  House, 

Floor  Plan 365 

Apple    Evaporator 367 

Floor  Plan 368 

End   View 368 

Mr.    A.    J.    Harmon's    Maple 

Sugar    House , 370 

Floor   Plan 370 

Bacon  Factory 371 

Mr.  C.  M.  Hubbard's  Tobacco 

Barn    373 

Ventilator  373 

Plan  of  Bents 374 

Ventilator   Hook 375 

Sideboards    375 

Double  Doors 375 

Mr.    V.    J.    Clark's    Tobacco 

Shed    377 

A  Farmer's  Greenhouse 377 

A  House  Apiary 379 

Interior  380 

Cold    Storage    House,    Cross- 
Section   382 

Longitudinal  Section 384 


vl 


.     ^JKi    X.- 


PUBLISHERS'  ANNOUNCEMENT 

Works  upon  Barns  and  Outdoor  Buildings  have  hitherto 
been  so  expensive  as  to  limit  their  circulation  to  compara- 
tively few  in  number.  Their  prices  have  ranged  from 
five  dollars  upward.  Twenty  years  ago  Orange  Judd 
Company  published  Barn  Plans  and  Outbuildings,  a 
volume  of  235  pages  with  257  engravings.  This  work  was 
prepared  largely  by  Dr.  Byron  D.  Halsted.  Since  then 
many  changes  have  taken  place  in  style  and  construction 
of  buildings  and  in  the  attention  given  to  ventilation, 
sanitary  arrangements,  heat,  light,  etc.  The  book  has 
been  revised  and  greatly  enlarged  so  as  to  bring  it  down 
to  date,  and  it  gives  the  most  modern  styles  and  plans 
of  buildings  of  diiferent  kinds.  This  revision  has  been 
done  by  Edwin  C.  Powell,  Associate  Editor  of  American 
Agriculturist  weeklies.  Every  professional  builder,  and 
every  person,  be  he  farmer  or  otherwise,  who  intends  to 
erect  a  building  of  any  kind,  can,  in  this  book,  secure  a 
wealth  of  designs  and  plans,  for  a  very  small  sum. 


INTRODUCTION 

The  proper  and  economical  erection  of  Barns  and  Out- 
buildings requires  far  more  forethought  and  planning 
than  was  ordinarily  given  to  their  construction.  A  barn 
once  built  is  not  readily  moved,  or  altered  in  size  and 
shape,  and  the  same  may  be  said  of  a  corn  house,  a  poultry 
house,  or  even  a  pigpen. 

Only  the  most  general  rules  can  be  laid  down  to  guide 
one  in  the  selection  of  a  site  for  barns  and  outbuildings. 
Much  depends  upon  the  wants  to  be  consulted  and  met. 
Individual  taste  may,  and  often  does,  have  much  to  do  in 
determining  decisions.  The  approved  style  of  construc- 
tion was  formerly  to  locate  the  barn  upon  a  rise  of  ground 
where  a  cellar  could  be  built  opening  upon  the'  lower 
ground  to  the  rear,  in  which  were  kept  animals  and  vehicles. 
This  is  not  the  best  plan  from  a  sanitary  point  of  view 
unless  there  is  a  clear  space  back  of  the  wall.  The  use  of 
hay  forks  for  unloading  forage  does  not  make  it  so  essen- 
tial to  drive  in  higher  than  the  first  floor  with  loads.  The 
old  practice  of  scattering  buildings  over  the  farm  has  been 
found  more  inconvenient  and  expensive  than  to  group 
them  near  each  other.  The  smaller  risk  of  fire  where  the 
buildings  are  scattered  is  not  enough  to  compensate  for 
the  extra  labor  in  taking  care  of  the  stock  nor  of  the  incon- 
venience or  cost  of  maintenance  and  repair.  All  the  build- 
ings are  more  or  less  dependent ;  the  corn  crib  and  grana- 
ries bear  certain  relations  to  the  pigpen,  the  poultry 
house,  etc.  The  same  pump  may  serve  the  sheep,  cattle 
and  other  stock,  provided  they  are  housed  close  by  it,  and 
therefore  near  one  another. 


XVI  INTRODUCTION 

The  farmer  who  intends  to  erect  a  building  should  first 
consider  the  amount  he  wishes  to  store  in  it.  This  calcu- 
lation must  be  based  upon  the  present  and  prospective 
size  of  his  farm,  the  number  of  acres  of  each  crop,  the  kind 
and  number  of  head  of  live  stock,  the  system  of  farming, 
etc.  It  is  not  always  easy  to  go  into  every  minute  detail 
of  this  sort,  but  it  is  far  better  to  consider  the  matter 
thoroughly  and  base  the  size  of  the  buildings  required 
upon  the  calculations  made,  than  upon  none  at  all.  In 
constructing  farm  buildings,  the  error  usually  made  is 
on  the  side  of  too  small  structures,  as  the  thousands  of 
lean-to  sheds,  "annex"  stables,  hay  stacks,  etc.,  throughout 
the  country  testify  to. 

After  the  site  and  size  have  been  carefully  decided  upon, 
there  is  still  much  to  be  done  to  make  the  outbuildings 
present  a  neat  appearance.  Barns  can  be  pleasant  objects, 
and  impart  an  impression  of  comfort  and  completeness 
upon  all  who  see  them.  Their  attractiveness  will  depend 
upon  the  symmetry  and  exterior  finish  of  the  buildings 
themselves,  their  grouping,  the  planting  of  shade  trees, 
etc.  The  projecting  cornice  and  cupola  cost  little,  but 
add  much  to  the  appearance  of  a  building. 


CHAPTER  I 

GENERAL  FARM  BARNS 

With  the  increase  of  wealth,  and  we  may  add  of  good 
sense  and  enlarged  ideas,  among  the  farmers  of  the 
country,  there  is  a  gradual  hut  very  decided  improvement 
in  farm  architecture.  The  old  custom  was  to  build  small 
barns,  to  add  others  on  three  sides  of  a  yard,  perhaps  of 
several  yards,  and  to  construct  sheds,  pigpens,  corn 
houses,  and  such  minor  structures  as  might  seem  desirable. 
In  the  course  of  a  few  years  the  group  of  roofs,  big  and 
little,  span  and  lean-to,  in  the  rear  of  a  large  farmer's 
dwelling,  would  present  the  appearance  of  a  small  crowded 
village.  Compared  with  a  well  arranged  barn,  a  group 
of  small  buildings  is  inconvenient  and  extremely  ex- 
pensive to  keep  in  good  repair,  besides  adding  much  to  the 
labor  of  doing  chores. 

LIGHT,    HEAT    AND    VENTILATION    OF    STABLES 

In  the  construction  of  stables  for  live  stock,  the  proper 
lighting,  heating  and  ventilation  must  be  borne  in  mind, 
as  well  as  the  arrangement  of  the  stables  for  convenience 
in  feeding.  These  matters  are  not  of  such  great  im- 
portance for  horses,  sheep  and  feeding  cattle  as  for  milch 
cows.  In  the  construction  and  arrangement  of  the  dairy 
barn,  they  are  of  prime  importance,  not  only  as  regards 
the  healthfulness  of  the  cows,  but  the  profit  to  be  derived 
from  them.  If  the  barn  is  well  built,  and  of  size  propor- 
tionate to  the  number  of  cattle  kept,  the  heating  will  take 
care  of  itself,  for  the  warmth  of  the  animals  will  maintain 
a  proper  temperature.  The  majority  of  barns  are  poorly- 
lighted  and  badly  ventilated. 


S  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

In  planning  a  cow  stable  500  cubic  feet  of  air  space  is 
sufficient  for  eacb  animal.  If  tbe  cows  stand  in  a  double 
row,  and  the  stalls  are  three  and  one-half  feet  wide,  this 
will  require  a  width  of  thirty-five  feet  for  a  hight  of  eight 
feet,  which  is  plenty  high  enough  for  all  practical  purposes. ' 
There  should  be  about  thirty-six  square  feet  of  window - 
surface  for  every  5000  cubic  feet  of  air  space,  or  one  square 
foot  to  140  cubic  feet. 

The  King  system  of  ventilation,  worked  out  by  Prof. 
F.  H.  King  of  Wisconsin,  can  be  used  only  in  a  very  thor- 
oughly built  stable.  The  essential  feature  of  it  is  the 
control  of  the  inflow  and  outflow  of  air  through  ventilating 
tubes  governed  by  dampers.  Windows  and  doors  must  be 
made  as  tight  as  possible,  and  the  stable  should  be  ceiled 
overhead.  The  sides  must  be  double  boarded,  with  an  air 
space  between  inside  and  outside  ceiling.  An  opening  is 
left  in  the  siding  near  the  ceiling,  and  a  corresponding 
opening  outside  the  stable  near  the  sill,  to  bring  in  air 
from  the  outside.  These  openings  are  controlled  by  damp- 
ers and  are  protected  by  fine  wire  netting.  The  ventilating 
flue  should  be  made  perfectly  tight  and  extend  from  within 
a  foot  of  the  floor  out  through  the  roof  at  the  ridge.  There 
should  be  no  metal  work  in  this,  for  the  moisture  would 
condense  on  the  metal  in  cold  weather  and  drip.  This 
tube  should  be  at  least  two  feet  square  and  a  wooden 
damper  should  be  arranged  in  it  to  control  the  ventilation. 

The  proper  ventilation  of  cow  stables  is  thus  described 
by  Dr.  James  B.  Paige,  professor  of  veterinary  science  of 
the  Massachusetts  Agricviltural  College:  "Every  shaft  or 
duct  should  be  so  constructed  that  it  may  be  easily  cleaned 
in  every  part.  Neglect  of  this  precaution  often  renders 
them  useless.  They  soon  become  completely  stopped  with 
collections  of  cobwebs  and  dust.  To  insure  at  all  times  the 
desired  action  of  a  shaft  or  tube,  either  as  inlet  or  outlet, 
cowls  are  sometimes  attached  to  the  upper  end.  There 
are  two  varieties,  tlie  fixed  and  movable.  Tlie  principles 
of  action  vary  according  to  the  pattern.    Some  are  so  con- 


LIGHT,      HEAT      AND      VENTILATION  3 

structed  as  to  produce  an  upward  circulation  by  the  Arch- 
imedean screw  principle,  the  motor  force  being  a  mechan- 
ism which  is  operated  by  the  wind.  In  other  kinds  the 
force  of  the  wind  is  so  directed  across  the  open  end  or 
side  that  air  is  either  driven  through  the  tube  into  the 
building  or  is  aspirated  out  of  it.  So  far  as  I  have  ob- 
served none  are  absolutely  positive  in  their  action. 

"The  stationary  variety  has  the  advantage  over  the  mov- 
able kind  in  that  it  is  entirely  autoraatic,  acting  with  the 
wind  in  any  direction,  and  is  less  liable  to  get  out  of  order 
than  any  movable  pattern.  I  have  considered  somewhat 
at  length  the  construction,  location,  use  and  action  of 
ventilating  tubes  on  account  of  its  being  necessary  to  make 
use  of  them  under  certain  conditions,  although  I  never  rec- 
ommended their  use,  if  a  better  plan  can  be  followed.  My 
preference  is  for  the  Sheringham  valve  system  of  inlets 
and  outlets,  or  another  system  which  I  shall  describe 
later  on. 

"The  Sheringham  valve,  a  patented  device  of  English 
origin,  is  in  principle  a  window,  either  single  or  double, 
hinged  at  the  bottom,  swinging  in  at  the  top,  having  when 
open  the  triangular  spaces  between  the  edge  of  the  sash 
and  the  edge  of  the  window  casing  closed  with  wood  or  a 
piece  of  sheet  metal.  The  action  of  this  valve  is  similar  to 
that  of  a  partially  open  window  hinged  at  the  bottom 
swinging  inward  at  the  top. 

"The  wind  striking  against  the  oblique  window  surface 
is  deflected  from  its  straight  course  and  is  thrown  into  the 
upper  part  of  the  building,  and  gradually  finds  its  way  to 
the  floor,  where  it  comes  in  contact  with  the  animals.  The 
closing  of  the  triangular  spaces  on  the  sides  prevents  down- 
ward drafts  directly  upon  occupants  of  the  stable. 

"All  the  material  required  to  convert  a  common  sliding 
sash  into  a  Sheringham  valve  is  a  seven-eighths-inch  board, 
eight  to  ten  inches  wide,  as  long  as  the  sash  and  planed  at 
both  sides,  two  or  three  strips  of  one-half- inch  material 
one  and  one-quarter  inches  wide,  a  pair  of  butts  and  an 


4  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

old-fashioned  spring  barrel  bolt.  The  eight-inch  board 
is  cut  lengthwise  between  diagonally  opposite  comers. 
These  pieces  are  nailed  to  the  inside  edges  of  the  casing. 
The  narrow  strips  of  material  are  nailed  to  the  inside  edges 
of  the  boards  first  described.  These  overhang  the  inner 
edges  and  serve  to  prevent  the  windows  from  swinging 
too  far  in.  The  barrel  bolt  is  put  into  place  in  the  sash 
and  several  holes  bored  for  it  in  the  triangular  side  pieces. 
The  hinges  are  fastened  on,  the  window  stops  of  the 
original  window  removed,  and  the  valve  is  complete. 

"The  form  of  stable  best  adapted  to  ventilation  with 
this  arrangement  is  one  not  more  than  forty  or  fifty  feet 
wide,  of  any  length  desired.  A  monitor  roof  is  desirable 
but  not  essential.  The  animals  should  be  arranged  in  rows 
on  either  side  facing  a  central  drive  or  passageway.  There 
should  be  four  rows  of  valves,  two  below,  one  on  either  side 
in  rear  of  the  animals,  situated  three  and  one-half  or  four 
feet  from  the  floor,  and  two  above  near  the  plates,  or  better 
in  the  sides  of  the  monitor  roof,  provided  the  building 
is  constructed  on  that  plan.  The  lower  row  of  valves  on 
the  windward  side  of  the  building  should  be  open  to  admit 
fresh  air,  those  above  on  the  opposite  side  to  allow  for  the 
escape  of  the  foul  air.  By  having  numerous  valves,  each 
of  which  is  opened  but  a  little,  the  incoming  current  of 
air  is  evenly  distributed  throughout  the  building  and  objec- 
tionable drafts  prevented. 

"Another  plan  of  ventilation  particularly  applicable  to 
stables  with  straight  walls,  with  manure  sheds  on  either 
side,  provides  for  the  introduction  of  fresh  air  through 
openings  in  the  manger  fronts  and  the  escape  of  foul  air 
through  windows  or  cupola  openings  above.  This  system 
of  inlets  is  only  used  to  good  advantage  in  those  barns 
where  the  stable  part  is  separate  from  the  storage  portion. 
There  should  not  be  a  cellar  under  the  stable.  The  ar- 
rangement of  the  animals  should  be  the  same  as  in  the 
stables  where  the  Sheringham  valve  system  is  emi)loyed. 

"XJnder  the  floor  of  the  central  driveway  running  length- 


MASSACHUSETTS      COLLEGE      BARX  6 

wise  of  the  building  there  should  be  a  space  or  chamber 
having  outside  openings  at  both  ends  of  the  building.  This 
space  should  be  about  two  or  two  and  one-half  feet  deep 
and  of  the  same  width  as  the  driveway  above.  The  open- 
ings at  the  end  may  be  of  any  convenient  size,  preferably 
not  smaller  than  six  feet  long  by  one  foot  wide.  The 
open  space  under  the  central  section,  which  serves  as  a 
fresh  air  chamber,  must  be  completely  separated  from  the 
two  side  spaces  under  the  stall  floors.  Fresh  air  from  the 
air  chambers  is  taken  into  the  stable  through  the  manger 
fronts,  which  are  built  in  the  form  of  boxes,  there  being 
an  opening  at  the  bottom  into  the  fresh  air  chamber  and 
another  at  the  top  and  into  the  stable.  With  this  arrange- 
ment, air  is  brought  into  the  building  and  delivered 
directly  in  front  of  the  occupants  at  the  point  where  it 
is  most  needed.  From  contact  with  the  animals  it  becomes 
heated,  rises,  and  with  the  impurities  that  it  has  received 
from  the  animals  escapes  through  the  outlets  above. 

"This  system  possesses  the  advantage  of  being  quite 
automatic.  The  air  is  brought  in  through  numerous  small 
openings,  preventing  uncomfortable  drafts.  It  is  intro- 
duced at  just  that  point  where  it  is  most  needed  and  each 
animal  gets  its  supply  of  fresh  air  regardless  of  its  position 
in  the  stable.  In  remodeling  old  stables  to  improve  sani- 
tary conditions  about  them,  more  especially  to  provide 
effective  ventilation,  one  or  a  combination  of  the  systems 
mentioned  may  be  employed.  As  to  which  system  is  intro- 
duced must  necessarily  depend  upon  existing  conditions. 
In  building  a  new  barn  it  is  very  easy  to  provide  for 
proper  ventilation." 

BARN   AT    MASSACHUSETTS   AGRICULTURAL    COLLEGE 

The  first  of  the  views  presented  (Frontispiece)  gives 
an  idea  of  the  appearance  of  the  barn  from  the  campus. 
Three  of  its  component  parts  only  are  shown:  viz.,  the 
main  or  storage  portion,  fronting  east ;   the  cow   stable, 


6 


iJAKX     PLANS     AND     OLTBUlLUIiNGS 


the  winv!:.  with  monitor  roof ;  and  the  sheep  bani,  so  called 
on  the  plans,  which,  however,  accommodates  young  cattle 
nnd  bulls  on  the  same  floor  with  the  sheep,  and  below  in 
the  basement  has  pens  for  swine,  swill  room,  slaughter 
room  and  root  cellar.  Reference  to  the  main  floor  plan. 
Figure  1,  will  make  the  arrangement  clear.  It  will  be  noted 
that  the  location  of  the  cow  stable,  box  stables  f.nd  sheep 


} — r 


Fig.     1 — MAIN     FLOOR     PLAN    MASSACHUSETTS     AGRICULTURAL 
COLLEGE    BARN 


barn,  near  the  storage  barn,  is  such  as  to  protect  them 
in  large  measure  from  the  cold  winds  of  winter.  Large 
yards  both  for  cattle  and  sheep  lie  between  and  south  of 
the  cow  stable  and  sheep  barn. 

The  main  floor  and  basement  plans  make  the  chief 
features  of  the  storage  part  of  the  structure  sufficiently 
clear.  The  large  doors  in  the  east  end  give  access  to  the 
upper  floor,  which  is  twenty-two  feet  above  the  main  floor 
of  the  building.  This  elevation  is  reached  by  a  drive  with 
very  moderate  grade.    This  arrangement  makes  it  possible 


MASSACHUSETTS       COLLEGE      BARX  I 

to  store  liay,  silage,  grain,  stable  absorbents  and  bedding 
with  a  minimum  of  expense  for  labor.  On  the  right,  as  one 
enters  these  large  doors,  are  traps  communicating  with 
large  bins  below  for  grain,  which  is  drawn  out  through 
chutes  into  feed  trucks  on  the  main  floor.  On  the  left  are 
traps  through  which  sawdust,  dry  earth,  plaster  and  similar 
materials  may  be  dumped  into  rooms  conveniently  acces- 
sible from  the  stable.  Near  the  east  end  is  a  set  of  hay 
scales.  On  the  right,  just  beyond  the  traps  for  grain,  is 
liberal  floor  space  for  the  operation  of  heavy  barn 
machinery.  There  is  ample  room  for  hay,  of  which  150 
tons  can  be  stored  below  this  floor  and  ninety  tons  above 
it.    The  silos  will  hold  about  350  tons. 

There  is  no  basement  under  the  cow  stable,  and  the 
cement  passages  and  gutters  are  built  upon  solid  earth 
and  masonry.  The  cement  floors  iinder  the  shed  roof 
at  the  south  end  are  nine  feet  below  the  stable  floor,  thus 
making  it  possible  to  dump  manure  directly  into  a  cart 
or  manure  spreader  from  platforms  built  out  from  the 
doors  at  the  ends  of  the  passages  behind  the  cattle.  The 
manure  is  brought  out  in  low  barrows  with  water-tight 
boiler-iron  bodies. 

The  roof  has  been  constructed  with  a  view  to  making  it 
non-conductive.  Beginning  with  the  outer  surface  there  is, 
first,  the  steel,  then  building  paper  and  inch  boards ;  second, 
a  six-inch  air  space;  third,  building  paper  and  matched 
boards ;  fourth,  an  inch  and  one-half  air  space ;  and,  lastly, 
lath  and  plaster. 

This  stable  will  accommodate  sixty-five  cows,  and  fur- 
nishes 1233  cubic  feet  of  air  space  to  each.  A  leading 
idea  in  planning  the  interior  has  been  to  secure  smooth, 
hard  surfaces,  all  readily  accessible  to  facilitate  cleaning. 
All  ceilings  and  the  walls  of  the  monitor  are  of  adamant 
plaster,  which  has  been  painted ;  the  lower  walls  are  plain 
North  Carolina  matched  pine  sheathing,  which  has  been 
oiled.     The  upper  windows  are  all  hinged  at  the  bottom. 


8 


BARX     PLANS     AND     OnTBUILDIXGS 


and  are  moved  by  a  ventilating  apparatus  by  means  of 
cranks  operated  from  the  floors.  The  upper  sashes  in 
the  lower  windows  are  also  hinged  at  the  bottom,  and  are 
individually  moved  by  means  of  transom  lifts.  The 
lower  sashes  slide  into  the  partitions,  and  they  are  pro- 
tected by  iron  grates.  Trap  doors,  which  are  moved  by 
means  of  an  arrangement  of  cords  and  pulleys,  are  placed 
in  the  cupolas. 

There  are  in  the  wing  known  as  the  sheep  barn  two 
large  and  five  small  pens  for  sheep.    The  capacity  is  about 


SFffffI 


4+f 


Fig.  2 — ^BASEMENT  PLAN  OF 
BARN  AT  MASSACHUSETTS 
AGRICULTURAL     COLLEGE. 


seventy-five  animals.  The  large  pens  are  provided  with 
patent  sheep  racks.  They  have  also  troughs  with  running 
water.  Large  doors  at  the  south  end  give  access  to  a 
sheltered  and  dry  yard.  The  stable  in  this  wing  will 
accommodate  twenty  young  cattle,  and  at  the  end  are  four 
box  stalls  for  bulls. 

The  entire  basement.  Figure  2,  has  a  solid  cement  floor. 
In  the  pens  for  pigs  the  floor  slopes  from  each  side  toward 


PLANE     FRAME    BARNS  9 

the  half-round  gutter  which  passes  through  the  middle, 
leading  to  the  manure  pit  outside.  About  one-half  the 
floor  space  in  each  pen  is  covered  by  a  raised  plank  floor, 
and  the  gutter  has  a  hinged  plank  cover. 

Both  in  the  basement  and  on  the  first  floor  doors  and 
passages  are  so  arranged  that  one  can  drive  through  with 
carts  or  wagons.  The  loft  above  the  sheep  will  hold  forty 
tons  of  hay,  and  can  be  filled  by  the  use  of  a  horse  fork 
working  through  large  trap  doors.  Nine  box  stalls  occupy 
the  lean-to  between  the  cow  stable  and  the  sheep  barn, 
and  extend  across  the  north  end  of  the  latter. 

Accommodations  for  instruction  in  matters  pertaining 
to  the  dairy,  as  well  as  for  manufacturing  milk  into  butter, 
etc.,  are  provided  in  a  wing  which  lies  north  of  the  storage 
bam.  The  plans  make  the  general  arrangement  clear. 
The  ice  room  has  a  capacity  of  about  300  tons.  A  part 
of  this  space  is  used  for  a  cold-storage  room. 

PLANK    FRAME    BARNS 

With  the  scarcity  of  heavy  timber  and  consequent 
cost  it  is  time  farmers  who  are  to  erect  barns  should  give 
some  study  to  the  newer  methods  of  framing,  where  no 
timber  is  thicker  than  two  inches,  and  from  six  to  eight 
inches  wide.  The  use  of  modern  hay  and  grain  elevating 
machinery  calls  for  barns  with  open  centers.  Upper  cross- 
ties,  collar-beams,  etc.,  are  in  the  way,  and  are  quite  un- 
necessary. The  plank  frame  which  is  here  illustrated  is 
the  newest  thing  in  barn  framing,  and  at  the  same  time 
is  very  much  stronger  than  the  old-fashioned  frame  made 
of  square  timber  of  eight  to  twelve  inches  on  a  side.  It 
is  about  half  as  costly,  and  a  first-class  carpenter  is  not 
required  to  erect  it. 

In  the  plank  frame  there  are  no  timbers  larger  than 
two  by  eight  inches.  These  are  doubled  and  trebled  where 
great  strength  is  required.  Where  tensile  strength  is 
required,  a  two  by  eight  is  nearly  as  good  as  an  eight-inch 
square   stick  tenoned  and   fastened   in   the  post  mortise 


10 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


with  a  pin.  In  this  frame  there  is  no  mortise  nor  tenons. 
The  frame  is  put  together  with  spikes.  Hay  is  taken 
through  the  open  center  driveway  with  bridge,  or  more 
conveniently  at  end  of  barn,  where  the  center  is  open  to 
the  peak.     The  advantages  of  this  alone  are  manifold. 

The  barn  of  John  L.  Shawver  of  Bellefontaine,  O.,  is 
shown  in  the  accompanying  illustrations.  As  to  the  frame, 
while  it  saves  some  labor  to  have  the  timbers  of  specified 
lengths,  it  is  not  necessary  that  they  should  be  so.  The 
frame  may  be  constructed  entirely  of  plank  eight  feet  in 
length,  or  any  other  given  length,  from  the  fact  that  a 
splice  may  readily  be  made  at  any  point. 


Fig.   3 INTERIOR   BENT  OF  A  BASEMENT  BARN 


The  foundation  being  completed,  the  bents  are  con- 
structed upon  the  ground,  the  sills  of  the  first  bent  resting 
upon  the  foundation  at  the  proper  place  and  the  top  of 
the  bent  resting  upon  a  temporary  scaffold  at  the  end  of 
the  foundation.  The  second  bent  is  constructed  with  the 
sills  at  the  proper  place  and  the  top  of  the  bent  resting 
upon  the  bent  already  made.  Thus  the  carpenters  proceed 
until  all  the  bents  are  completed.  In  raising,  the  bent 
last  made  is  raised  first,  carefully  plumbed  and  firmly 
stayed.  The  next  bent  is  then  raised,  and  after  plumbing 
it  the  side  timbers  are  placed  in  position. 


PLANK     FRAME     BARXS 


11 


Figure  3  represents  an  interior  bent  in  a  basement  barn 
plank  frame.  There  may  or  may  not  be  sills  in  the  base- 
meiit  to  suit  the  pleasure  of  the  owner.  If  there  are  no 
sills  the  posts  may  stand  on  stone  pillars.  The  posts,  1, 
are  made  of  two  by  eight-inch  plank,  two  pieces  extending 
to  the  plates  and  one  piece  to  the  joist  bearers,  3.  The 
short  posts,  £,  extend  to  the  floor  and  both  joist  bearers 
and  joists  are  secured  to  them,  while  the  braces,  4>  make 
the  posts  rigid  and  support  the 
joist  bearers;  5  represents  the 
ends  of  the  joists  and  6  the 
floor  level;  7,  the  purlin  posts, 
are  secured  to  the  main  posts 
and  joist  bearers  and  reach  the 
roof  supports,  8,  just  beneath 
the  purlin  plates,  9.  The  roof 
supports,  8,  are  secured  to  the 
side  posts  and  purlin  posts  and 

QT-^~->..^^^  meet    at    the    comb    with    any 

J  !«=>-       ^^^  desired   pitch.     Then    they   are 

secured  together  by  the  collar 
beams,  10,  which  are  two  by 
twelve  inches  and  five  or  six 
feet  long. 

The  main  ties,  11,  consist  of 
single  plank  two  by  eight 
Fig.  4— THE  FRAMING  inches,  secured  to  both  posts 
and  purlin  posts,  upon  which  rest  the  sub-supports 
secured  at  one  end  to  the  purlin  post  and  at  the  other 
to  the  collar  beams.  The  stays,  12,  consist  of  two  planks 
each  two  by  six  inches,  to  the  lower  end  of  which,  at  13, 
the  purlin  braces  are  secured.  In  the  frame  one  secures 
a  thoroughly  braced  bent  with  very  little  labor,  and  at 
the  same  time  there  is  no  timber  in  the  interior  to  be  in 
the  way. 

Figure  4  shows  the  manner  of  putting  the  timbers  to- 
gether, sills,  posts   and  joist  bearers  being  represented. 


12  BARN     PL.V.NS     AXD     OUTBUILDINGS 

Plank  two  by  four,  two  by  six  or  two  by  eight  inches  is 
used  for  packing  in  the  posts  of  the  end  bents,  and  the 
basement  posts  throughout. 

The  purlin  plates  are  made  of  two  sets  of  two  by  eight 
inch  plank  with  a  two-inch  space  between  them,  into 
which  the  couplings,  six  or  eight  feet  in  length,  are  entered, 
thus  firmly  combining  one  section  with  the  next.  The 
purlin  braces  also  enter  this  space  at  the  proper  dis- 
tance from  each  roof  support,  where  they  are  then  spiked. 


PLANK    FRAME    BARN 


the  lower  end  of  these  braces  being  secured  to  the  lower  end 
of  the  stays.  The  upper  ends  of  the  purlin  posts  are  cut 
so  as  to  form  saddles,  into  which  the  purlin  plates  drop 
to  position. 

If  a  gambrel  roof  is  desired  the  purlin  posts  are  placed 
at  the  proper  angle  and  extended  above  the  roof  support 
at  a  sufficient  distance  to  give  the  pitch  desired  for  both 
sections  of  the  roof.     At  this  point  the  stays  meet  the 


PLANK    FRAME    BARNS 


13 


posts  and  short  two  by  eight  inch  plank  are  inserted  and 
the  saddles  cut  in  a  similar  manner  to  those  of  the  plain 
gable  roof. 

Figure  5  shows  the  model  of  a  forty  by  sixty-foot  plank 
frame  barn,  with  nine-foot  basement  and  twenty-foot 
superstructure. 

Another  style  of  construction  was  followed  by  Thomas 
Convey  of  Wisc(msin  in  building  his  barn,  forty  by 
sixty  feet  and  forty-four  feet  high.  Figure  6,  the 
left  hand  cut,  is  intended  to  represent  the  end  bent. 
lie  says:  "I  do  not  claim  anything  original  in  this 
except  that  the  bent  is  held  in  place  the  same  as 
the  sides    by    four    two    by    eight    inch    pieces,    two    on 


Fig.    G — CONSTRUCTION    OF    THOMAS    CONVEY's    BARN 

each  center  post  extending  from  near  the  top  of  post? 
in  about  twelve  feet  to  sills  running  lengthwise  of  build- 
ing beneath  the  floor.  If  desired  the  tie  beam  in  end  bent 
need  not  be  continuous.  Where  it  is  necessary  to  take  in 
hay  from  outside  building,  a  series  of  doors  would  be  pref- 
erable. It  is  unnecessary  to  outline  manner  of  putting 
in  girths  to  nail  on  lumber,  as  any  carpenter  can  readily 
do  it.  Care  shoiild  be  taken  to  leave  place  on  top  of  post 
to  bolt  the  first  pair  of  rafters  that  they  may  be  flush  with 
outside  of  frame. 

"The  principle  of  construction  in  the  right  hand  cut  of 
Figure  6  is  to  get  each  bent  sufficiently  strong  that  not 


14 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


only  the  bent,  but  timbers  between  bents,  will  be  rigid. 
h  is  made  of  several  two  by  eight  inch  pieces.  I  use  three 
pieces  eighteen  feet  long  on  each  side  and  three  pieces 
twelve  feet  long  in  the  center.  This  gives  two  feet  of  a 
splice  at  each  joint.  There  is  a  two-inch  space  between 
except  where  spliced.  The  posts  are  twenty  feet  high, 
two  two  by  eight  inch  pieces  being  used  on  each  side  with 
two-inch  space  between.  The  girths,  a,  to  hold  post  in 
place,  are  twenty-two  feet  long.  Leave  a  space  of  one  foot 
on  top  of  post  on  inside  to  bolt  a  two  by  eight  inch  joist 
both  on  inside  and  outside  of  post  to  carry  plate.  The 
lower  end  of  girth  a  runs  down  between  spaces  in  tie  beam, 
h,  just  twelve  feet  from  the  outside  of  post." 

HOAV    TO   BUILD   A   ROUND    BARN 

The  accompanying 
illustrations,  Figures 
Y,  8,  9  and  10,  are 
of  plans  for  a  six- 
teen-sided barn,  cir- 
cumscribed  by  a 
circle  with  a  radius 
of  thirty  feet.  There 
is  no  economy  in 
building  a  strictly 
round  barn,  as  curved 
walls,  sills,  cornice 
and  roofing  are  very 
expensive  and  offset 
the  trifling  gain  in 
floor  space. 

The  basement  floor  is  two  feet  six  inches  below  grade, 
and  is  made  of  a  four-inch  layer  of  cinder  concrete,  cov- 
ered by  a  two-inch  plank  floor  where  cows  stand.  The 
stable  proper  has  a  capacity  of  forty  head.  Beside  this, 
the  basement  contains  two  large  compartments  for  a  hos- 


Fig.    7 — POSITION  OP  RAFTERS 


A     ROUND     BARN 


15 


pital,  a  calf  pen,  feed  bins,  and  grain  bin,  all  handy  for 
feeding  stock.  Both  these  bins  have  chutes  from  larger 
bins  above.  Two  hay  chutes  are  centrally  located,  and 
run  directly  to  the  mow.  A  stanchion  lever  near  the  main 
door  makes  it  possible  to  release  all  cows  at  once.  A  stair 
runs  from  near  the  door  to  main  floor,  which  is  used  as  a 
stable,  with  stalls  for  eight  horses.    It  has  a  harness  closet, 


tLJi 


Fig.     S CROSS-SECTION     OF     ELEVATION 


feed  bin  and  large  granary.  A  large  open  floor  may  be 
utilized  for  storage,  grinding  or  other  purposes — more 
stable  room  if  needed.  There  is  no  stair  to  mow  on  plan, 
but  sufficient  room  to  insert  one. 

The  mow  is  covered  by  a  self-supporting  roof.    A  double 
plate  rests  on  the  studding,  supporting  a  system  of  rafters, 


16 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


whieli  in  turn  support  another  plate,  and  so  on.  The  roof 
plan  is  shown  in  Figure  7.  An  octagonal  king  post  runs 
down  in  the  center  to  support  one  end  of  the  hay  track, 
the  other  end  of  which  is  supported  by  a  car  attached  to 
a  circular  track,  thus  allowing  it  to  swing  around  like  a 


•iprr  : 


Covy 
stable 


--TP-'ai 


n't  II 
I)  I  h  , 

*!  ■  H  ■\ 


'!  I' 

''  ''  ., 
|i  M  U 


^F'a^s 


Fig.    9 — ^ARRANGEMENT   OF   THE   BASEMENT 

clock  hand,  and  deliver  hay  at  any  point  in  the  mow.  The 
track  is  steadied  by  an  auxiliary  arrangement  at  its  center. 
It  can  be  operated  by  the  man  in  the  mow  without  inter- 
fering with  unloading  operations.  To  make  the  car  return 
easier,  the  pivoted  end  is  hung  six  inches  lower  than  the 
other. 


A      ROUND      BARN 


17 


This  barn  is  framed  after  the  balloon-frame  system, 
md  may  be  considered  an  example  of  it.  The  outside 
walls  consist  of  two  by  eight  inch  studding,  three  at  each 
angle,  with  nail  girths  between.  The  plates  and  sills  are 
double,  of  two  by  eight  inch  stuff,  lapped  and  well  spiked 


DrtuewaiJ 


Fig.    10 — PLAN    OF    MAIN    FLOOR 

at  the  angles.  The  stability  of  the  roof  depends  on 
the  security  with  which  its  plate  is  spiked  at  angles, 
and  sheathing  nailed  to  hip  rafters.  Of  course  the  in- 
side framing  is  as  ordinarily  made,  except  that  instead 
of  tenoning  girths  to  posts,  posts  are  cut  off,  and 
girths  laid  across  on  hanger-plates.     When  girths  cut  over 


A    NEW    YORK    BAR.N" 


19 


posts,  fish-plates  tie  them.  All  bracing  is  done  with  two 
by  eight  inch  scantling  spiked  on.  See  Figure  8.  The 
ground  plans,  Figures  9  and  10,  and  elevation  here  illus- 
trated are  drawn  to  a  scale.  The  cut  showing  portion  of 
rafters  is  drawn  on  a  much  smaller  scale.       The  cost  of 


ter/Bara 


ISL 


Ll 


jrg 


Lb^ 


M 


H 


Jfi 

•    ' 

r--!^'^ 

Bull 

-  -J 


©( 


-4 


Fig.    12 — GROUND    PLAN   OF    MR.    COLBURN^S   BARN 

this  barn,  including  $120  for  labor,  is  $2550,  but  this  will 
vary  somewhat  with  the  cost  of  labor  and  material. 

AN    UP-TO-DATE    NEW    YORK    BARN 


Figures  11,  12  and  13  show  the  live  stock  and  hay  barn 
of  C.  E.  Colburn  of  Portlandville,  N.  Y.  The  main  barn 
is  thirty-six  by  100  feet  in  size,  with  horse  stable  thirty 
by  forty  feet,  calf  barn,  hog  house  and  manure  cellar 
attached,  Figure  12.  Adjoining  the  horse  stable  are  two 
round  silos.  The  floors  of  all  the  buildings,  except  the 
horse  stable,  are  cemented.  A  barn  for  young  stock  accom- 
modates ten  yearlings  and  four  bulls,  the  calf  barn  twenty 
cows  with  stanchions  in  which  to  feed  them.  The  main 
barn  has  fifty-one  individual  stalls  and  one  box  stall.  The 
water  tank  is  over  the  separator  room  and  holds  fifty-two 
barrels.    A  bull  on  a  tread  power  is  used  to  run  the  sepa- 


20 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


rator  and  pump  the  water.  The  water  from  the  eaves  is 
piped  to  an  underground  drain,  and  with  gutters  in  the 
cow  stable,  there  is  no  leaching  of  liquids,  and  the  outside 
yard  is  dry  all  the  time. 

There  are  three  ventilating  shafts  on  each  side  of  the 
stable,  which  come  down  to  within  six  inches  of  the  floor 

on  the  east  side,  and  the 
top  of  the  wall  on  the 
west  side.  The  basement 
in  the  cow  stable  is  nine 
and  one-half  feet  in  clear, 
and  ceiled  with  Georgia 
pine.  The  horse  stable 
and  calf  barn  are  also 
ceiled  in  the  same  way. 
They  are  oiled  with  a 
hard  finish.  The  horse 
stable  accommodates  eight 
horses  and  hay  is  fed  from 


Fig.  13- 


-PLAN    OF    SECOND 
FLOOR 

chutes  in  floor  above.  Feed  bins  are  on  the  floor  above  the 
basement,  as  shown  in  Figure  13.  The  silos  are  filled  from 
the  barn  floor,  which  is  fifteen  feet  above  the  bottoms  of  the 
silos.    This  saves  the  use  of  long  elevators. 

In  feeding  the  ensilage,  it  is  put  in  bushel  crates,  which 
are  set  upon  trucks  and  run  through  the  feeding  alley, 
which  makes  a  short  job  of  the  feeding.  The  horse  manure 
is  used  in  the  gutters  behind  the  cows,  and  all  goes  to 
the  manure  pit,  which  is  drawn  out  once  a  week  when 
weather  is  suitable.  The  cost  of  this  barn  complete,  in- 
cluding water  pipes,  eaves  troughs,  etc.,  was  about  $6000. 
It  is  a  very  handy  and  comfortable  barn,  and  as  it  is 
unnecessary  to  step  outside  to  do  any  of  the  chores,  work 
can  be  quickly  done  and  without  inconvenience  in  bad 
weather. 


CONVENIEKT   FARM  BARN  AND  YARD 


21 


PLAN    OF    CONVENIENT    FARM    BARN    AND    YARD 

The  accompanying  illustration,  Figure  14,  shows  the 
ground  plan  of  a  very  convenient  barn  with  end  elevation. 
It  also  shows  plan  of  granary,  chicken  house  and  yards 
surrounding  the  building.  The  end  elevation  needs  no 
particular   explanation.       Aa  shows  the  construction   of 


I-SO 


"^~n 

r"-^ 

r^-^ 

p-^ 

; 

1 

I 

) 

, 

L 

B 

"ITc 

^T' 

t 

s 

30.50 

15-20 

\     11- -Jo 

10  "SO  J 

II. vo 

F 

40-G2 

pun  rwni'  nooK  wn)  \XMi'. 


Fig.    14 SUGGESTED    ARRANGEMENT    FOR    FARM    BUILDINGS 


frame  and  location  of  window  in  the  end,  B  is  the  feed 
room,  C  is  the  cow  stable,  D  is  the  open  cow  shed  and  E 
is  the  pig  room.  In  the  ground  plan  A  shows  the  main 
floor  of  the  barn,  thirty  by  thirty  feet,  which  is  used  for 
storing  hay.     However,  a  part  at  N  is  reserved  for  the 


22  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

work  room  and  at  M  as  a  harness  room.    In  one  corner  the 
stairway  leads  to  the  upper  story. 

The  horse  stalls  at  /  are  six  in  number.  5  is  a  feed 
room  fifteen  by  twenty  feet  and  can  be  used  for  a  box  stall 
if  necessary.  K  is  the  calf  room  and  C  the  cow  stable. 
D  is  open  cow  shed  and  E  the  hogpen.  F  is  the  open  yard 
between  granary  G  and  barn.  The  chicken  house  H  is 
nine  by  fourteen  feet,  S  is  the  chicken  yard,  I,  twenty-five 
by  thirty  feet,  is  the  wagon  shed.  The  dimensions  are 
indicated  on  the  sketch,  which  of  course  can  be  changed 
to  suit  individual  tastes.  The  whole  arrangement  is  simply 
suggestive.  It  works  well  on  a  South  Dakota  farm.  The 
corn  crib  is  a  separate  structure  and  is  off  to  the  right. 
Of  course  if  it  is  desirable,  the  corn  crib  can  be  arranged 
within  the  building  and  also  in  the  granary.  In  the 
granary  plan  0  can  be  used  as  a  corn  crib,  with  P  devoted 
exclusively  to  small  grains  and  B  for  tools. 

THE    BARN    OF    MR.    DAVID    LYMAN 

Among  the  many  large  and  exi^ensive  barns  now  scat- 
tered through  the  country,  there  are  few  more  thoroughly 
satisfactory  to  old  school  farmers  with  broad  ideas  than 
one  built  by  the  late  Mr.  David  Lyman  of  Middlefield,  Ct. 
Mr.  Lyman  required  a  very  large  barn  for  his  farm  pur- 
poses simply,  and  built  one,  a  front  view  and  interior  plan 
of  which  are  here  given.  The  elevation  of  the  bnilding, 
Figure  15,  shows  entrances  to  its  two  main  floors;  there 
is  a  basement  below. 

The  TJiter,  or  Hay  Floor — This  floor  is  shown  in 
Figure  16;  all  the  hay,  grain  and  straw  are  stored  there. 
It  maintains  the  same  level  throughout.  Two  threshing 
Roors  cross  the  building,  and  are  entered  from  the  high 
ground  on  the  west  by  a  very  easy  ascent.  The  main 
entrance  crosses  over  an  engine  room,  seen  in  Figures  15 


24 


BARN     tLANS    AND    OUTBUILDINaS 


and  17.    This  room  is  built  of  stone,  arched  above,  and  is 
roomy  as  well  as  secure. 

By  means  of  a  hay  fork  and  a  number  of  travelers,  the 
hay  is  taken  from  the  loads  and  dropped  in  any  part  of 
the  immense  bays.     The  forks  are  worked  by  one  horse, 


TO'' 


HAY     BAY 


n 

y^lTILATOR      D 


STAIRS  TO    MOW 


"I'll'"""" 


STAinS  TO  CUPHLft 


VENTILftTOR  Q 

HAY      BAY 


n 

VENTILATOR 


Fig.    16 — PLAN    OF   II AY   FLOOR 

attached  to  a  hoisting  machine,  of  which  there  are  two, 
placed  near  the  great  doors  during  the  haying  season,  as 
indicated  by  the  letters  marked  U,  P,  in  the  plan. 
Figure  16. 

On  the  main  floor  are  bins  for  grain  and  ground  feed, 
provided  with  chutes  connecting  them  with  the  feeding 


Fig.    17 PLAX    OF    FEEDING 


FLOOR 


26  BARX      PLANS     AND     OrTBMILDlXGS 

floor.  There  are  hay  scales,  also — a  fixture  in  one  of  the 
floors — which  afford  the  means  of  being  very  accurate  in 
many  things,  in  regard  to  which  guess  work  is  ordinarily 
the  rule.  The  great  ventilators,  so  conspicuous  in  the  cut, 
pass  from  the  feeding  floor  to  the  roof,  and  are  furnished 
with  doors  at  different  elevations,  quite  to  the  top  of  the 
mow,  tln;s  forming  convenient  chutes  to  throw  down  hay 
or  straw.  A  long  flight  of  stairs  passes  from  the  principal 
barn  floor  to  the  cupola,  from  which  a  magnificent  view 
is  obtained  of  the  whole  farm  and  surrounding  country. 

The  Feedlng  Floor  is  entered  by  several  doors.  Two 
double  doors  open  upon  a  spacious  floor  in  the  rear  of  the 
horse  stalls,  which  extends  through  the  middle  of  the  main 
barn.  The  northwest  corner.  Figure  IT,  is  occupied  by  a 
large  harness  and  tool  room,  with  a  chimney  and  a  stove. 
On  the  right  of  the  front  entrance  is  the  carriage  room, 
which  is  closed  by  a  sliding  door,  or  partition.  There 
is  room  on  the  open  part  of  this  floor,  behind  the  horse 
stalls,  and  adjacent,  to  drive  in  three  wagons  at  a  time, 
and  let  the  horses  stand  hitched.  Between  the  ox  stalls  in 
the  south  wing,  is  a  ten-foot  passageway  through  which 
carts  with  roots  or  green  feed  may  be  driven,  the  stairs 
in  the  middle  being  hinged  at  the  ceiling  and  fastened 
up.  The  stalls  are  seven  feet  wide,  and  arranged  to  tie 
up  two  cattle  in  each.  A  gutter  to  conduct  off  the  urine 
runs  along  behind  each  range  of  stalls,  and  there  are 
well  secured  traps,  one  in  about  every  fifteen  feet,  through 
which  the  manure  is  dropped  to  the  cellar.  The  letter  C, 
wherever  it  occurs  in  Figure  17,  indicates  a  trap  door 
of  a  manure  drop.  The  letter  D  is  placed  wherever  there 
arc  doors  which,  in  the  engraving,  might  be  taken  for 
windows. 

The  cattle  pass  to  the  yards  through  doors  in  the  ends 
of  the  wings.  The  south  yard  is  nearly  upon  a  level  with 
the  floor,  sloping  gradually  away  toward  the  south  and 


MR.      DAVID      LYMAN  S      BARN 


27 


east ;  but  the  large  barn  yard  is  on  the  level  of  the  manure 
cellar,  and  an  inclined  way  gives  access  to  the  yard  on 
the  east  side,  from  the  cow  stalls.  Three  roomy,  loose 
boxes  are  provided,  one  for  horses,  and  two  as  lying-in 
stables  for  cows.     Near  the  points   marked   W   and  F, 


a       □        c 


■3       □        : 


SLIDING   GATE 


WATER 
TROUGH 


PLAN    OP    BASEMENT 


stands  the  hydrant  for  flowing  water,  and  the  trough  for 
mixing  feed,  and  here,  too,  the  chutes  for  grain  and  cut 
feed  discharge  from  the  floor  above. 

Ventilation  and  Light — Four  immense  ventilating 
trunks,  four  feet  square,  rise  from  the  feeding  floor 
straight  to  the  roof.     These  are  capped  by  good  ventila- 


28  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

tors  of  the  largest  size,  and  cause  a  constant  change  of 
air  in  the  stables,  the  draft  being  ordinarily  sufficient  to 
be  felt  like  a  fresh  breeze,  by  holding  the  hand  anywhere 
within  a  few  feet  of  the  openings.  This  keeps  the  air  in 
the  whole  establishment  sweeter  and  purer  than  in  most 
dwellings.  The  windows  on  all  sides  of  this  floor  are  of 
large  size,  with  double  sashes,  hung  with  weights. 

Thk  Barn  Cellar — This  is  arranged  for  hogs,  roots 
and  manure.  The  fixed  partitions  in  the  cellar  are  only 
two,  one  enclosing  the  root  cellar,  and  the  other,  outside 
of  that,  shutting  off  a  wide,  cemented  passageway,  ex- 
tending from  the  door  at  the  northeast  corner,  around 
two  sides  of  the  root  cellar,  as  shown  in  Figure  18.  The 
rest  of  the  cellar  is  occupied  by  the  manure,  and  hogs 
are  enclosed  in  different  parts  of  the  cellar,  according 
to  convenience. 

Size  of  Barn — The  building  covers  more  than  one- 
fifth  of  an  acre  of  land,  and  thus  there  is  over  three-fifths 
of  an  acre  under  a  roof.  The  main  barn  is  fifty-five  by 
eighty  feet.  The  wings  are  each  fifty-six  feet  long,  the 
south  one  being  thirty-five  wide,  and  the  east  wing  thirty- 
one  and  one-half  feet  wide.  The  four  leading  points 
sought  for  and  obtained  were:  First,  economy  of  room 
under  a  given  roof;  second,  plenty  of  light;  third,  plenty 
of  air  and  ventilation,  which  would  draw  off  all  delete- 
rious gas  as  fast  as  generated,  and  fourth,  convenience  to 
save  labor.  Saving  of  manure  and  many  other  things 
were  of  course  included.  The  windows  are  all  hung  with 
pulleys,  and  are  lowered  in  warm  days  in  winter,  and 
closed  in  cold  days.     This  is  important. 

MR.     LAWSON     valentine's    BARN 

The  perspective  view  and  plans  here  given  represent 
the  fine  barn  on  "Houghton  Farm,"  the  property  of  the  late 
Lawson  Valentine,  Mountainville,  Orange  County,  N.  Y. 


r/'ATiW  'It 


30 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


It  is  located  on  a  hillside,  and  is  supplied  with  water 
brought  from  springs.  The  barn  is  handsomely  propor- 
tioned, and  with  its  slated  roof  and  red-painted  walls, 
with  black  trimmings,  presents  a  fine  appearance.  It  is 
admirably  adapted  for  keeping  a  large  number  of  horses, 
and  a  good  model  for  any  well-to-do  farmer  desiring  a 
handsome  and  useful  barn.  In  its  general  plan  it  may  be 
followed  on  a  smaller  scale  by  anyone  having  horses  and 
cattle  for  which  to  provide  stabling  and  shelter. 

The  building  is  110  feet  long  by  fifty-five  feet  wide, 
with  twenty-foot  posts,  and  is  forty  feet  from  the  main 
floor  to  the  ridge.    It  rests  on  a  stone  basement  ten  feet 


Fig.    20 — PLAN   OF   BASEMENT 


high  in  the  clear;  this  basement  provides  comfortable 
and  convenient  stabling  for  the  owner's  fine  stud.  The 
division  is  shown  at  Figure  20;  a,  a,  are  the  horse  stalls; 
h,  the  harness  room,  four  by  twenty-five  feet;  c,  stairs; 
d,  box  stalls,  ten  and  one-half  by  fourteen  and  one-half 
feet;  e,  e,  cow  stalls,  with  permanent  partitions  and  ad 
instable  mangers;  g,  g,  gates  for  separating  the  cattle 
department  from  the  horses.  Figure  21  shows  a  plan  of 
the  main  floor;  a,  is  the  tool  room;  h,  contains  a  horse 


MR.     LAWSON     VALENTINE  S     BARN 


31 


power  for  driving  a  feed  cutter,  thresher,  etc. ;  c,  is  tised 
as  a  stowage  room  for  cut  feed,  etc.;  d,  is  the  grain  room, 
provided  with  bins  and  convenient  chutes;  e,  is  a  room 
for  a  keeper;  which  also  contains  closets  for  the  nicer 
harnesses.  The  letters  Y ,  V,  V,  V,  indicate  the  ven- 
tilators; S,  shows  the  large  platform  scales.  The  floor 
of  the  basement  is  made  of  brick,  laid  on  edge  in  mortar, 
underlaid  by  concrete.  Figure  22  represents  one  of  the 
horse   stalls.      The   upper  portion   consists   of   iron    rods 


IIO'O" 

Eig.    21 — PLAN    OF    MAIN    FLOOR 


extending  from  the  top  of  the  sides  to  a  railing  two  feet 
above.  The  front  is  provided  with  screen  doors.  The 
stall  is  nine  by  four  and  one-half  feet,  and  the  manger 
is  one  foot  nine  inches  from  front  to  back.  An  iron 
feed  trough  for  grain  occupies  one  end  of  the  manger, 
indicated  by  the  dotted  line  at  O.  The  remainder  is  taken 
\xp  by  the  hay  box,  H,  the  bottom  of  which  is  shown  by 
the  dotted  line.  A  door  in  front  allows  for  cleaning  out 
the  feed  box,  and  opens  to  a  closet.  The  box  stalls  are 
also  provided  with  the  iron  rods  for  a  top  finish,  so  that 
A  person  can  easily  see  into  them  without  entering.     The 


32 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


interior  exposed  wood  work  is  varnished,  making  a  neat 
and  substantial  finish.  Opening  into  the  basement,  and 
extending  nearly  to  the  roof,  are  four  ventilating  flues, 
each  four  feet  square.  Their  outer  edge  is  on  a  line  with 
the   driveway,   and   the   inner   side   has   openings   fitted 


Fig.    22 — ^VIEW    OF    HORSE    STALL 

with  doors  opening  inwards,  at  various  hights,  which  make 
the  flues  serve  as  convenient  hay  chutes  to  the  floor  below. 

AN    OHIO    BARN 


The  accompanying  engravings  are  of  a  barn  built  by 
Mr.  K^yle,  Greene  County,  Ohio.  The  basement  is  sixty 
feet  long,  twenty-four  feet  wide,  and  seven  feet  high  in  the 
clear;  the  walls  contain  seventy  perches  of  stone  work. 
The  floor  above  is  supported  by  two  rows  of  pillars, 
Figure  23.  Those  in  the  outside  row  are  two  by  six  feet, 
the  inside  ones  being  two  feet  square.  The  barn  is  forty- 
eight  feet  wide.  The  floor  of  the  cow  stable,  which  is 
directly  over  the  basement,  rests  upon  joists  that  are  laid 


AN      OHIO      BARN 


33 


upon  cross  sills,  and  reach  from  the  ends  of  the  front 
pillars  to  the  rear  ones.  The  joists  rest  upon  the  cross 
sills  as  far  as  the  latter  reach,  and  then  upon  the  pillars. 
The  cross  sills  are  ten  inches  square.  There  is  thus 
a  drop  of  ten  inches  in  the  floor  upon  which  the 
cows  stand  and  immediately  behind  them.  This  drop, 
h,  Figure  24,  is  four  feet  wide,  and  forms  a  passage  in 


Fig.    23 — PERSPECTIVE    VIEW    OF    MR.    KYLE's    BARN 


which  the  manure  collects,  and  from  which  it  may  be 
pushed  through  the  side  of  the  drop  to  the  basement' 
below.  The  liquids  from  the  cows  drain  through  this 
open  space  upon  the  manure  in  the  basement.  The  floor 
upon  which  the  cows  stand,  seen  at  g,  is  six  feet  wide. 
A  passageway,  seen  above  the  arches  in  Figure  23,  leads 
from  the  stable  door  to  the  barn  yard.  There  are  four- 
teen stalls  for  cows,  g,  Figiire  24.  ea'^h  of  which  is  four  feet. 


34 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


wide.  The  partitions  between  tlie  stalls  are  formed  ir, 
the  manner  shown  in  Figure  27.  In  each  stall  is  a  mangel- 
and  a  feed  box.  The  cows  are  tied  by  means  of  ropes 
around  their  necks.  There  is  a  passage,  f.  Figure  24,  be- 
tween the  cow  stable  and  the  horse  stable,  c.  In  the  latter 
there  are  seven  single  horse  stalls,  and  two  closed  loose 
boxes.     Each  single  stall  is  five  feet  wide.     When  the 


Fig.    24 PLAN    OF    STABLE    FLOOR 


horse  stable  is  cleaned,  a  wagon  is  driven  into  the  shed 
behind  it,  h ;  the  manure  is  thrown  into  the  wagon,  and 
at  once  hauled  wherever  it  may  be  wanted.  The  floor  of 
the  horse  stable  is  on  the  ground.  The  partitions  between 
the  horse  stalls  are  made  as  shown  in  Figure  26.  The  shed, 
h,  Figure  24,  is  for  storing  tools  and  wagons,  or  housing 
sheep,  and  has  a  door,  a,  at  each  end.     One  door  opens 


AN      OHIO     BARN 


35 


into  a  yard,  through  which  the  road,  seen  in  the  engrav- 
ing, runs.  Here  the  straw  and  cornstalks  are  stacked, 
and  a  great  portion  of  them  are  here  fed  to  the  stock  to 
make  manure.  No  water  from  the  barn  runs  into  this 
yard,  or  on  to  the  manure.  The  stables  are  eight  feel 
high,  and  the  barn  reaches  eighteen  feet  above  the  stables. 
The  plan  of  the  barn  floor  is  shown  at  Figure  25 ;  at  a  is 


m 


m 


m 


Fig.   25 PLAN    OF   BARN    FLOOR 


the  main  floor;  at  h,  1),  are  the  entrance  doors,  to  which  a 
sloping  driveway,  abutting  against  the  wagon  shed,  leads. 
The  rear  doors,  c,  c,  are  hung  upon  rollers,  and  in  Figure  23 
are  seen  partly  open.  At  d  is  the  trap  for  hay,  leading  to 
the  feed  passage  below,  and  e,  e,  are  traps  for  straw  used  for 
bedding,  leading  into  the  stables.  The  granaries  are  seen 
at  f,  f,  and  there  are  spouts  from  these,  leading  into  the 


r,G 


BARN      PLANS     AND     OCTBUILDINGS 


v/agoii  shed,  so  that  sacks  upon  the  wagon  can  he  filled 
from  the  spouts.  The  passage  to  the  granaries  is  at  r/ ; 
it  is  eight  feet  wide,  and  a  work  bench  with  tools  is  kept 
here.  The  staircase  leading  down  to  the  feed  passage  is 
seen  at  h.  The  trap  doors  are  double,  and  on  hinges. 
The  floor  is  also  double,  so  that  no  dust  can  fall  through 
to  the  floor  below,  nor  any  disagreeable  vapors  arise 
therefrom.     This  story  is  eighteen  feet  clear,  there  be- 


Fiff.   26 — HORSE   STALL 


Fig.   27 — cow    STALL 


ing  a  truss  roof  whicli  is  self-suiiporting.  The  roof  is 
shingled  with  pine  shingles,  and  the  whole  of  the  barn  is 
covered  with  pine  weather  boarding,  and  painted.  The 
total  cost  of  this  barn  was  $1200,  in  addition  to  the  owner's 
work,  and  the  value  of  the  frame  timber,  which  was  cut 
upon  the  farm. 

A     MISSOUIU     BARN 


The  barn  shown  in  the  following  engraving,  Figure  2S. 
was  built  by  Mr.  William  B.  Collier  of  St.  Louis,  on  his 
country  estate  in  Audrain  County,  Mo.,  and  has  been  re- 
garded by  well-informed  people  as  one  of  the  best  barns 
in  the  state.  The  building  is  eighty-four  feet  sqiiare. 
and  nearly  fifty  feet  in  extreme  bight,  not  including  the 
collar;  it  fronts  the  south.  There  are  eighty-four  stalls, 
arranged  as  in  the  ground  i)lan   (Figure  29),  there  being 


A     illSSOURI     BAliN 


S? 


two  rows  of  liorse  stalls  on  ono  side  and  three  rows  of  cattle 
stalls  on  the  other.  The  proportions  of  the  interior  are 
as  liberal  of  space  as  those  of  the  barn  itself.  The  cen- 
tral driveway  or  barn  floor  is  sixteen  feet  wide.  The  car- 
riage and  wagon  rooms  on  each  side  the  floor  are  both 
twenty  feet  square.  Large  loose  boxes  are  for  the  accom- 
modation of  stallions.  The  various  passageways  betweer 
the  rows  of  stalls,  and  at  the  rear  of  them,  are  four  feet 


Fig.   2S — .V   :\iissnri;r   bakx 

wide,  while  the  horse  stalls  are  nearly  six  feet,  and  the 
stalls  for  two  cows  eight  feet  in  width.  The  two  spaces 
enclosed  between  dotted  lines  on  the  barn  floor  indicate 
the  position  of  the  hoist  ways  under  the  skylights  for  hay 
and  grain.  The  spaces  at  either  end  outside  these  hoist- 
ing spaces  are  floored  over  above  the  great  doors,  and  are 
finished  off  as  granaries  for  keeping  the  supply  of  oats, 
meal,  etc.,  required  for  the  stock.  On  each  side  of  the 
barn  is  a  rain  water  cistern,  twelve  feet  nine  inches  in 


as 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


diameter,  and  twenty-five  feet  deep;  these  are  connected 
by  a  pipe,  passing  underground  across  the  front  of  the 
barn.  There  are  seven  windows  on  each  side,  and  sis 
besides  the  five  sliding  doors,  in  each  gable.  These,  with 
the  three  great  ventilators,  afford  unusual  provision  for 
pure  air.     The  cattle  are  fed  from  the  floor  above.     The 


BARN      FLOOR 


r 


Fig.     29 — PLAN     OF     BARN 


passage  between  the  rows  of  horse  stalls  is  for  feeding. 
The  building  stands  upon  fifty-four  stone  pillars,  and  has 
a  tight  board  floor,  any  part  of  which  may  be  easily  re- 
newed, as  occasion  may  require.  "With  a  large  corn  house, 
thirty-five  feet  square,  not  seen  in  the  engraving,  this 
barn  cost  $9000. 


A       GOOD       FARM       BARN 


39 


A    GOOD    FARM    BARK 

The  following  plan  (Figure  30)  is  of  a  simple  and  inex- 
pensive barn.  The  size  is  forty  by  fifty-five  feet;  it  has 
a  large  shed  attached  for  cattle.  The  fifteen-foot  barn 
floor,  see  Figure  31,  is  of  good  medium  width ;  if  wider  the 
room  would  not  be  wasted.  On  the  left  are  the  horse  stalls, 
five  feet  wide.  There  might  be  five  stalls  four  feet  wide, 
but  for  a  large  horse  the  width  ought  to  be  about  five 

et.  The  whole  space  given  to  horses  is  fifteen  by  twenty 
feet.    Beyond,  the  floor  widens  seven  feet,  and  the  rest  of 


Fig.    30 — ELEVATION    OF    BARN 


the  left  side  is  devoted  to  cattle  stalls,  twenty-five  feet, 
giving  room  for  six  cow  and  ox  stalls,  and  two  passage- 
ways, one  of  which  may  be  closed  and  made  a  stall  for  a 
cow.  The  seven-foot  space  affords  abundant  room  for 
hay  cutter,  feed  box  and  accompaniments,  located  close 
to  both  cattle  and  horses ;  and  if  cattle  are  fed  in  the  shed 
on  feed  prepared  in  the  feed  box,  a  passage  at  the  rear  con- 
ducts conveniently  to  their  mangers.  A  three-foot  square 
trunk  ascends,   from  over  the   seven   by  twenty-five-foot 


40 


BAEN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


space  in  front  of  tlie  cow  stalls,  to  the  roof,  securln.u 
abundant  ventilation,  and  affording  a  chute,  throujdi 
which  hay  or  straw  niay  be  readily  dropped  from  the 
mow;  or  corn  cobs  and  other  matters  from  the  granary. 


> 

< 

03 

t- 

^<2 

o 

o  -1  □ 

> 
< 

s 

'm 

■/^ 

<--ij  gi----> 


13X25  FT. 


-? 

in 

- 

in 
in 

... 

^ 

m 

The  right  side  of  the  barn  floor  is  occupied  hy  a  hay 
bay.  There  is  a  tight  ceiling  of  matched  boards  over  the 
stables,  at  a  liight  of  ciglit  feet.  The  posts  are  sixteen 
feet  to  the  eaves.     The  roof  is  what  is  usually  ('ailed  lialf- 


A       GOOD       FARM        BARN  41 

pitch,  move  Lisliii^^-  than  if  flatter.  A  suhstautial,  tight 
floor  is  hiid  iipuu  tlie  straining  beams  of  the  roof.  This 
may  be  extended,  if  desired,  through  the  entire  length 
of  the  barn,  or  only  from  one  end  to  over  the  barn  floor. 
In  it  is  a  large  trap  door  directly  over  the  threshing  floor. 
A  small  gable  with  a  door  in  it,  over  the  great  doors, 
affords  communication  with  the  front  of  the  barn,  so  that 
grain  in  bags  or  barrels  may  be  raised  or  lowered  as  well 
here  as  through  the  trap  door.  This  floor  is  the  granary 
or  corn  loft,  easily  made  rat  proof,  close  under  the  roof, 
and  consequently  very  hot  in  sunshiny,  autumn  weather. 
Corn  in  the  ear  is  easily  hoisted  by  horse  power  from  the 
wagons,  and,  if  spread  on  the  floor  not  more  than  a  foot 
thick,  it  will  cure  much  sooner  and  more  perfectly  than  in 
cribs.  This  grain  floor  is  reached  by  a  stairway  from  the 
floor  over  the  stables ;  under  the  stairs  is  a  chute,  or  chutes, 
for  conducting  the  shelled  corn,  etc.,  to  the  feeding  floor. 
This  arrangement  requires  strong  posts  and  roof  framing, 
but  not  stronger  thaii  for  a  slate  roof  of  a  I'^ss  pitch, 
for  such  a  roof  will  support  double  the  weight  likely  to 
be  placed  on  the  floor.  !N"ot  only  is  the  roof  constructed 
to  bear  the  weight  of  the  slates,  but  of  two  feet  of  snow, 
and  the  force  of  high  winJ.s  in  addition.  The  weight  of 
grain  will  only  give  increased  steadiness,  a  large  part 
being  borne  by  the  posts,  the  floor  preventing  all  racking. 
The  shed  is  thirty  by  forty  feet,  with  twelve-foot  front, 
and  eight-foot  rear  posts,  open  in  front,  and  having  win- 
dows in  the  back.  At  the  rear,  a  passageway  four  feet 
wide  communicates  with  the  cow  stable  in  the  barn,  and 
forms  the  feeding  alley  to  the  loose  boxes  in  the  shed. 
Cattle  will  not  suffer  in  such  a  shed,  left  entirely  open, 
in  the  severest  winter  weather,  but  it  is  best  to  close  the 
front  by  boarding,  and  doors,  having  large  windows  for 
light  and  air.  The  pigi:»ens  are  placed  contiguous  to  the 
barn   yard,   so  that   the   swine   mav  be   allowed   the  free 


42  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

range  of  the  compost  heaps,  at  least  in  their  own  corner. 
In  the  hog  house  is  a  steam  boiler;  and  a  pipe,  boxed 
and  packed  in  sawdust,  and  laid  underground,  crosses 
the  yard  to  the  feeding  floor,  for  steaming  and  cooking 
the  fodder  for  the  cattle.  By  this  arrangement  the  swine 
are  located  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the  granary 
and  root  cellar.  But  this  is  not  a  serious  inconvenience, 
and  it  is  best  to  remove  any  source  of  danger  from  fire 
as  far  away  as  possible. 

The  root  cellar  is  seven  feet  deep  under  the  hay  bay,  on 
the  right  side  of  the  barn.  There  are  two  chutes  from 
the  floor  to  the  cellar,  and  there  is  a  stairway  as  indicated. 
Besides,  access  is  had  by  a  cellarway,  on  the  eastern  side. 

This  plan  may  very  readily  be  reduced,  to  say  thirty  by 
forty-two  feet,  making  the  floor  twelve  feet,  the  bay 
fifteen  feet,  four  horse  stalls  eighteen  feet,  and  four  cow 
stalls  twelve  feet,  in  a  line  across  the  left  side — the  floor 
being  fifteen  feet  wide  in  front  of  the  cow  stable,  and 
other  contractions  made  in  the  same  proportions. 

ANOTHER     BARN     FOR     MLXED     FARMING 

Very  many  farmers  desire  a  barn  for  mixed  husbandry, 
for  storing  hay  and  grain,  for  keeping  stock,  and  all  the 
labor-saving  implements,  with  a  good  root  cellar  in  a 
convenient  place,  and  a  yard  for  manure.  The  follow- 
ing plan,  Figure  32,  shows  such  a  barn.  Its  cost  ranges 
from  $1500  to  $2500,  according  to  the  price  of  materials 
and  the  amount  of  finish  put  upon  the  work.  In  most 
places,  where  stone  for  the  lower  story  and  lumber  can  be 
cheaply  procured,  $1500  will  be  sufficient  to  build  a  barn 
fifty  feet  square,  inchiding  everything  needed.  This  is 
not  a  basement  barn,  being  made  on  level  ground.  Partly 
underground  stables  are  not  generally  desirable,  on  account 
of  dampness,  too  much  warmth  in  winter  and  lack  of 
ventilation.    But  a  slight  rise  of  ground,  which  may  be 


BARN      FOR      MIXED     FARMING 


43 


availed  of,  for  an  easy  ascent  to  the  barn  floor,  is  a 
convenience,  although  not  at  all  necessary.  This  may 
be  readily  made  by  using  the  earth  from  the  root 
cellar  (which  should  be  two  or  three  feet  below  the  sur- 
face) to  fill  in  the  ascending  roadway.  The  stable  floor 
is  thus  on  a  level  with  the  ground,  and  windows  on  eact 


Fig.  32 — ELEVATION  OF  BARN  AND  STABLE 

side  furnish  ample  light  and  ventilation.  The  founda- 
tion walls  are  of  stone,  sunk  three  feet  below  the  surface. 
Drains  from  the  bottom  of  the  foundation  would  be  found 
of  great  use  in  keeping  the  stables  perfectly  dry  at  all 
seasons.  Below  the  ground,  the  walls  may  be  built  of  dry 
work,  but  above  the  surface  the  best  of  mortar  should  be 
used  in  the  building.     Much  of  the  solidity  and  dura- 


44 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBLILULVGS 


bilitj'  of  a  buiLliiifi'  depends  upon  llie  excellence  of  tlv- 
mortar.  The  stable  walls  are  so  built  that  the  bai'u  ovei 
hangs  the  entranceways  six  feet,  which  gives  protection 
against  rain  or  snow,  as  well  as  prevents  drifting  of  either 
into  the  open  upper-half  of  the  doors  or  windows,  tlui; 
permitting  ventilation   in   stormy  weather,  and  allownig 


Ig.   66 PLAN   OF    yiMS    FhOOU   OF   BARN 


aomfortable  access  from  one  door  to  another.  The  plan 
shown  in  Figure  33  gives  the  arrangement  of  stalls  and 
passages.  The  horse  stable,  A,  B,  has  two  double  stalls 
and  a  loose  box  for  a  mare  and  colt.  C,  C,  is  the  cow 
stable,  with  stalls  fm-  twenty-two  cows,  arranged  so  that 
the  animals'  hcnds  in  the  rows  are  toward  each  other, 
with    a    central    feed    passage   between.     The    ventilators 


BARN      FOK      MIXED      FARMING 


45 


ami  straw  chutes,  D,  D,  carry  off,  tbrougli  the  cupolas  on 
the  top  of  the  building,  all  the  effluvia  from  the  stables; 
the  straw  for  bedding  is  thrown  down  through  them  from 
the  mows  or  barn  floor  above.  The  compartments,  E,  F, 
are  for  calves  or  a  few  ewes  with  early  lambs,  which  may 
require  extra  care  and  protection.  The  root  cellar,  G,  is 
entered  from  the  feeding  room,  which  also  communicates 
directly  with  each  compartment.     The  cistern,  H,  is  sunk 


M        "        L-i             '^U 
S 

P 

JR 

p 

i\i 

M 

N 

— 

a 

r 

:r 

p 

Fig.     34 — SECOND    STORY    OF    BARX 

twelve  feet  beneath  the  floor  of  the  root  cellar,  and  re-" 
ceives  the  whole  of  the  water  shed  from  all  the  roofs.  It 
is  prevented  from  overflowing  by  an  outlet  into  the  drain, 
which  runs  beneath  the  stable  floor.  The  pump,  I,  is  in 
the  feed  passage.  J  is  the  chute  by  which  cut  hay  or  fodder 
is  thrown  down  from  the  barn  floor.  L  is  the  feed-mixing 
box,  or  steam  chest,  if  steaming  is  practiced,  and  M,  the 
stairs  to  the  barn  floor  above.     On  this  floor.  Figure  34, 


46  BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

are  four  bays  for  hay,  straw,  etc.  a  large  threshing  floor, 
with  a  cross  hall  for  a  cutting  machine,  and  a  chute,  0,  to 
pass  the  cut  feed  below.  A  door  in  this  cross  hall  opens 
into  the  barn  yard,  by  which  straw  may  be  thrown  out 
for  litter.  A  door  at  the  rear  of  the  threshing  floor  opens 
into  the  upper  part  of  the  open  shed,  where  hay,  straw 
or  fodder  may  be  stored.  The  cutting  machine  is  shown 
at  K,  with  grain  bins  or  boxes  for  feed  at  N,  N,  N.  The 
bays  are  marked  P,  P;  Q  is  the  threshing  floor.  R,  R, 
are  hay  chutes  and  ventilators,  which  are  carried  up  level 
with  the  plates,  doors  being  made  in  them,  through 
which  to  pass  the  hay  either  from  the  barn  floor  or  the 
mows;  S  is  the  straw  bed,  with  open  traps  to  pass  straw 
or  fodder  into  the  racks,  shown  beneath,  in  Figure  33. 

The  open  shed  seen  in  the  rear  of  the  barn  yard  is  for 
the  purpose  of  airing  stock  in  stormy  weather,  and  is 
furnished  with  a  straw  rack  for  feeding  them.  The  barn 
is  calculated  for  a  farm  of  from  100  to  200  acres  of  good 
land. 

MR.   CHARLES   S.   SARGENt's   BARN,  BROOKLINE,  MASS. 

The  barn  of  Mr.  Charles  S.  Sargent  has  become  well 
known.  Figure  35  shows  the  east  side  of  the  barn,  the 
down-hill  side,  with  the  cart  entrances  to  the  manure 
cellar  and  wagon  shed.  Figure  36  shows  the  arrangement 
of  the  cellar,  which,  aside  from  the  usual  appliances  of  a 
farm  barn,  has  a  steam  boiler  for  cooking  hay,  etc. 
Figure  37  is  the  main  floor,  containing  six  box  stalls,  and 
stabling  for  ten  cows.  The  cow  room,  which  is  ceiled  on 
the  walls  and  overhead  with  varnished  pine,  and  has  its 
windows  protected  by  green  blinds,  is,  without  being  ex- 
travagant or  "fancy,"  very  neatly  and  perfectly  adapted 
to  its  uses.  The  mangers  are  of  Cottam's  patent,  much 
used  in  England,  consisting  of  two  iron  feed  tubs,  with 
an   iron   water    trough   between   them   for   each   pair   of 


rig.    35 — ELEVATION    OF    MR.    CHARLES    S.    SARGENT  S    BARN 


Pig.    36 — BASEMENT    OF    MR.    SARGENT's    BARN 


48 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OLTBUILUIXGS 


c^ws.  A  low  partition  separates  each  double  stall  from 
its  neighbor.  The  box  stalls  are  fitted  with  rocking 
mangers,  which  move  back  and  forth  through  the  parti- 
tion, so  that  feed  can  be  supplied  from  the  passageway. 
This  bam  is  a  capital  model  for  any  amateur,  small,  or 


Fig.  37 — PLAN  OF  MAIN  FLOOR  OF  MR.  SARGENT's  BARN 

'•fancy"  farmer  to  follow,  as  it  has  all  the  conveniences 
needed  and  none  of  the  ornaments  that  one  too  often  sees 
on  barns  of  its  class.     It  is  good,  cheap  and  useful. 

A     CHEAP     BUT     CONVENIENT     BARN 

A  small  barn,  well  arranged,  is  often  more  serviceable 
than  a  larger  and  more  costly  one.  On  many  farms  stock 
is  kept  in  a  poor  shed  or  given  no  shelter  at  all,  the  owner 
fooling  that  he  cannot  afford  to  biiild  a  barn.  In  a  few 
years   the  loss   caused  by   shrinkage   of   niilli,    additional. 


i 


m 

1 

Fig.  38 — FRONT  AND  END  ELEVATIONS 


Fig.  39 — END  ELEVATION  OF  FRAMING 


60 


BARX     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


feed  to  keep  stock  warm,  damage  to  exposed  feed  aud 
to  farm  machinery  will  amount  to  more  than  the  cost 
of  a  structure  built  according  to  the  plans  presented  in 
Figures  38,  39  and  40  by  Teeple  &  Brandt  of  Champaign, 
111. 

This  barn  will  hold  four  horses,  two  cows,  and  has  bins 
for  corn,  oats  and  mill  feed  on  the  first  floor,  besides  an 


tu    "  '    L. 


\-" 


;^=ft 


,Q,<}w  :>TAii.> 


\i 


r^ 


conn      CRiB. 


L- 


«  tb 


fX5  5'>Ct 


dE 


FA!>V'»  *»» 


*TAfcU 

STAOitfc 


~;-»«~|-  i^tr  *    ■  j 


d 


FIRST  FLOOR  PLAN. 
Fig.    40 — FLOOR    PLAN    Oi"    A    CONVENIENT    SMALL    BARN 


oi)en  floor  eight  feet  eight  inches  by  twelve  feet,  which 
can  be  used  for  storing  machinery  or  any  other  similar 
purpose.  The  mow  will  hold  hay,  sheaf  oats,  straw, 
slu-edded  fodder,  etc.  The  opening  is  directly  over  the 
l)assageway  and  the  feed  is  thrown  down  where  it  can 
readily  be  put  into  the  mangers. 

The  frame  of  the  barn   is   mortised  and  tenoned  to- 
gether with  the  exception  of  the  braces,  which  arc  sawed 


A      SM^VLL      BARN 


61 


to  fit  snugly  and  are  spiked  securely  in  place  with  twenty 
penny  nails.  The  cost  of  material  is  $191.83.  To  this 
must  be  added  $100  more  to  cover  the  cost  of  carpenter 
work  and  laying  of  the  stone.  If  the  farmer  can  do  a 
part  of  the  carpenter  work,  the  cost  of  the  barn  can  be 
still  further  reduced.  In  many  instances  a  farmer  with 
his  grown  sons  can  aid  materially  in  this  direction,  and 
it  is  always  advantageous  to  acquire  a  handy  use  of  tools 
for  just  svich  work.  The  cost  of  nails,  door  hangers, 
hinges,  etc.,  is  much  the  same  in  all  parts  of  the  country, 
while  in  some  sections  it  will  be  found  necessary  to  allow 
a  little  more  for  the  lumber. 


Fig.  41 A  SMALL  CHEAP  BARN 


A  PLAN  FOR  A  SMALL  BARX 


There  are  many  small  farmers,  villagers,  gardeners,  etc., 
who  wish  only  barn  room  enough  for  a  single  horse  and 
carriage  and  a  cow.  To  such,  the  requirements  are  cheap- 
ness and  durability,  combined  with  convenience;  an.l 
with  these  points  in  view,  a  plan.  Figure  41,  is  given  of  a 


52 


BARN      PLANS     AND    OUTBUILDINQS 


small  barn,  designed  by  Prof.  G.  T.  Fairchild,  late  of  the 
Michigan  Agricultural  College.  The  engraving  gives  a 
view  of  the  barn  from  the  front;  vs^hile  plain  in  its  con- 


CARRIAGE 
RfiONl. 

W 

• 

8TA 

7 

BLE 

7 

7 

Xn 

o 

tn 

.£^ 

s 

o 

Fig.    42 — GROUND    PLAN    OF    BARN 

struetion,  it  is  pleasing  in  outline.  The  first  floor. 
Figure  42,  is  twenty  by  twenty-eight  feet,  and  eight  feet 
between  joints.    A  large  sliding  door,  a,  nine  feet  wide. 


Fig.     43 — THE     LOFT 


admits  the  carriage  with  the  horse  attached,  whfch,  when 
unhitched,  is  led  through  the  sliding  door,  Tj,  into  the  stable. 
The  small  stable  door,  c,  opens  by  hinges  frward,  while 


ANOTHER     SMALL     BARN  S3 

the  back  door,  d,  opening  to  the  manure  yard,  moves  upon 
rollers.  Two  small  windows,  e,  e,  give  sufficient  light  to 
the  stable.  The  hay  racks  and  feed  boxes  for  the  stalls  are 
shown  at  f,  j,  f,  each  having  a  hay  chute  leading  from  the 
floor  above.  The  grain  bins  are  neatly  arranged  under 
the  stairway,  these  being  three  in  number,  ranging  in 
capacity  from  fifty  to  ten  bushels.  The  second  story,  or 
hay  loft,  Figure  43,  is  six  feet  from  floor  to  plates,  and  gives 
ample  room  for  the  storage  of  hay  and  straw.  The  stairs 
are  in  one  corner,  a,  and  out  of  the  way;  h,  the  door 
for  the  admittance  of  hay  and  straw;  c,  c,  c,  ends  of  the 
hay  chutes;  d,  ventilator;  e,  e,  windows.  The  ventilator 
serves  the  purpose  of  a  chute  for  throwing  down  the 
straw  used  for  bedding.  It  has  a  number  of  openings 
for  this  purpose  at  various  hights,  including  one  at  the 
bottom  for  cleaning  out  the  dust,  chaff,  etc.,  which  are 
constantly   accumulating   in   the   loft. 

The  cost  of  this  barn  will  vary  according  to  the  locality 
and  the  price  of  lumber,  etc.  The  estimate  for  it  in 
Michigan  was  $300,  above  the  foundation,  with  two  coats 
of  paint;  but  in  most  states  the  lumber  would  cost  more 
than  in  Michigan,  and  the  estimate  would  be  correspond- 
ingly increased. 

ANOTHER     SMALL    BARN 

The  barn,  the  outside  appearance  of  which  is  shown  in 
Figure  44,  in  its  arrangements,  obviates  the  necessity  of 
going  behind  the  horses  when  feeding,  which  is  often  de- 
sirable, as  in  families  having  no  hired  help,  the  feeding  is 
sometimes  intrusted  to  children.  The  ground  floor, 
Figure  45,  is  eighteen  by  twenty-four  feet,  eight  feet  be- 
tween joints.  The  carriage  room,  C,  is  thirteen  by  eighteen 
feet,  with  sliding  doors  ten  feet  wide.  The  horse  is  led 
through  the  door  D,  from  the  carriage  room  to  the  stable. 
The  box  B,  containing  food,  connects  by  two  spouts  with 


54 


BARX     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


grain  bins  in  the  loft.  The  hay  chute  is  shown  at  S,  and  is 
between  the  mangers.  The  harness  closet,  H,  is  placed 
under  the  stairway.     A  window,   W,  gives  light  to  the 


Pig.    44 — A    SMALL    BARN 


feed  rooms  and  the  stalls.  The  loft.  Figure  4G,  is  six  and 
one-half  feet  high  to  the  plates,  and  with  a  three-quarter 
pitch  to  the  roof,  there  is  ample  room  for  hay  and  straw. 


D 

11' 
r 

?<18' 

1       , 

13':<18' 

c 

< 

E 

3 

1     H 

s 

m 

I.OFT 

ii 

1 
11 

Fig.  45 — FLOOR  PLAN  OF  BARN   Fig.  4() — PLAN  OF  TlIF  LOFT 

The  harn  is  built  of  hemlock,  sided  with  soven-eighth-incli 
dressed  boards,  twelve  inches  wide,  and  battened.  It 
cost,  complete  and  jiaintcd,  in  tlie  neighboi'hood  of  $200. 


ENLARGING      OLD      BARNS 


55 


PRACTICAL   ENLARGEMENT   OF    OLD    BARNS 

It  is  quite  a  common  practice  to  build  low,  shed-roofed 
additions  to  the  sides  of  barns  when  it  is  desired  to  secure 
more  room.  This  gives  the  desired  addition  of  ground 
floor  space,  but  does  not  secure  added  storage  room  that 
could  be  secured  as  well  as  not,  and  at  almost  no  added 
cost,  were  the  additions  made  according  to  the  plan  sug- 
gested at  the  right  in  Figure  47.  Here  the  roof  is  ex- 
tended down  over  the  addition  without  a  break,  making 
a  better  looking  building  and  one  much  more  serviceable 
than  by  the  common  plan.  The  space  in  the  tops  of  the 


Fig.  47 — TWO  WAYS  ov  enlarging  old  barns 

additions  opens  into  the  scaffolds,  or  the  second  floor  space 
of  the  old  barn,  and  gives  so  much  more  added  storage 
capacity. 

The  cuts  given  in  Figure  48  show  a  very  practical 
7nethod  of  enlarging  a  barn  whose  capacity  has  become 
too  small.  At  the  left  is  seen  the  common  form  of  barns, 
with  the  driveway  lengthwise,  straight  through  the 
middle— an  extravagant  use  of  space.  At  the  right  is 
shown  two  "shed-roof"  additions  placed  upon  the  ends, 
the  roofs  being  made  continuous  with  the  newly  con- 
structed additions  to  the  old  roof.  The  feeding  floor 
and  driveway  is  thus  changed  to  a  crosswise  position  of 
the  barn,  taking  less  space  and  affording  greater  room 
on  either  side  for  stock  and  fodder.  If  the  barn  has  a 
second  floor  the  new  arrangement  will  afford  much  greate. 


56 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


space  above,  while  the  whole  of  this  space  above  the  main 
floor  will  be  finely  lighted  from  all  sides.  Though  the 
remodeled  barn  is  changed  greatly  in  appearance,  the 
additions  are  of  a  nature  to  make  the  expense  compara- 
tively light. 

A  plan  frequently  followed  in  enlarging  a  barn  is  to 
shove  out  the  end  and  side,  and  to  cover  with  a  flat  tin 
roof  connected  with  the  former  building  at  the  plate. 
This  gives  floor  room  and  some  room  for  hay  and  grain, 
but  there  is  nearly  always  a  scarcity  of  mow  room,  and 
this  style  of  enlargement  does  not  permit  of  storing  away 
much  hay  under  the  low  roof.  It  is  depth  and  hight  which 
compact  hay  and  vastly  increase  the  capacity  of  the  barn. 


Fig.  48 — THE  OLD  AND  THE  ENLARGED  BARN 


A  few  years  ago  F.  G.  Homan  of  New  York  had  occa- 
sion to  enlarge  his  barn,  which  was  twenty-six  by  forty 
feet,  with  a  double-pitch  roof.  He  wanted  more  room  for 
both  stalls  and  fodder.  He  added  fourteen  feet  to  the 
width,  thus  making  the  barn  forty  by  forty  feet,  but 
instead  of  putting  on  a  shed  roof  he  lowered  one  side  of 
the  shingle  roof,  and,  sliding  it  onto  the  new  plate,  raised 
it  to  the  same  pitch  as  before,  and  then  connected  the 
two  sections  with  a  nearly  flat  tin  roof,  forming  an  end 
view  like  the  one  shown  in  the  left  side  of  Figure  47, 
The  dotted  line  indicates  the  former  shape  of  the  barn. 
He  has  never  been  able  to  raise  enough  to  fill  this  barn. 
There  seems  to  be  no  end  to  its  capacity,  for  the  addition. 


llEMODELlNa     AN     OLD     BARN 


67 


IS  practically  in  the  center  and  is  forty  by  fotirteen  by 
twenty-four  feet.    The  expense  of  the  alteration  was  $184. 

REMODELING    AN    OLD    BARN 

In  enlarging  the  farm  work  and  dairy  at  "The  Pines," 
B.  Walker  McKeen  of  Fryeburg,  Me.,  found  that  the  old 
barn,  Figure  49,  thirty-six  by  forty-eight  feet  in  size,  was 
not  large  enough.  The  timbers  were  sound  and  the  roof 
was  well  covered.  A  silo  was  needed  first,  so  that  was 
built  as  a  separate  building,  twelve  feet  from  the  north 
side  of  the  barn.  One  end  of  the  barn  was  thirteen  feet 
from  the  ell  of  the  house,  and  the  next  move  was  to  put  a 
joint  thirteen  feet  wide  and  four  feet  longer  than  the 


riecr 
U           -1 

C'v-f^     Hartfi. 

M.lk 

5,/; 

i'        Tooi>.        i 

2n:   1  P'-      "'" 

lllllllll 

1.              A 

[-■q 

ri,„ 

1     '  ' 

1 1 

"lljjj" 

Fig.  49 — OLD  BARN 


Fig.  50 — BARN  REMODELED 


north  end  of  the  barn  in  that  space.  The  first  floor  is  a 
carriage  house,  and  the  second  floor  a  workshop  and  grain 
room,  while  the  third  floor  is  used  for  a  corn  chamber. 
The  carriage  house  opens  on  one  side  into  the  horse  stable 
and  on  the  other  side  into  the  ell  of  the  house. 

The  next  move  was  to  put  two  joints  of  twelve  feet  each 
onto  the  other  end  of  the  barn,  the  first  floor  being  de- 
signed for  cows,  and  the  second  for  the  storage  of  hay. 
This  addition,  together  with  the  twelve  feet  next  the  main 
floor,  gave  a  space  thirty-six  feet  square.  Through  the 
center  of  this  space  from  the  main  floor  to  the  end  of  tlie 


58  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

barn  was  made  a  feeding  floor  six  feet  wide,  and  on  each 
side  of  this  floor  a  tieup  for  cows.  In  this  way  there  was 
obtained  seventy-two  feet  of  room  for  tying  the  animals, 
and  each  tieup  was  fifteen  feet  wide. 

A  lean-to  was  then  run  from  the  four-foot  extension 
the  whole  length  of  the  north  side  of  the  barn,  filling  the 
space  between  the  barn  and  the  silo.  The  thirty-six  feet 
of  tiev;p  space  next  the  lean-to  addition  was  left  without 
siding,  and  the  lean-to  was  divided  into  three  pens,  each 
twelve  feet  square.  This  gives  a  space  of  thirty-six  by 
forty-eight  feet  for  the  cattle.  It  is  shut  off  from  the 
main  floor  of  the  barn  by  three  sliding  doors — one  at  the 
end  of  the  feeding  floor,  and  one  at  the  end  of  each  tieup. 
It  is  well  supplied  with  windows  of  good  size.  The  old 
barn  would  hold  but  nine  cows;  this  holds  twenty  very 
comfortably.  The  horse  stable  in  the  old  barn  was  also 
remodeled  and  later  a  romid  silo  was  built  in  a  portion 
of  the  large  hay  bay.  Floor  plan  of  the  barn  as  remodeled 
ia  shown  in  Figure  50. 


CHAPTER  II 

CATTLE  BARNS   AND   STABLES 

co:mbixed  stock  and  hay  barx 

Tlie  new  barn  of  P.  H.  Reed  of  Aroostook  County,  Me., 
Fi^ire  51,  is  seventy-five  by  seventy-eight  feet  in  size, 
and  forty  feet  from  floor  to  peak.    It  contains  room  for 


L_. 


Fig.    51 — KORTHERN    MAINE    STOCK    AND    HAY    BARN 

a  large  amount  of  hay,  some  tools,  and  a  herd  of  Shorthorn 
cattle.  Three  large  box  stalls,  see  Figure  52,  are  provided 
for  bulls,  and  stanchions  for  about  twenty  head.  The 
cattle  side  of  the  barn  is  floored  over,  and  hay  is  put 


60 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


above  the  stock.  A  large  space  between  the  cattle  and 
the  main  floor  is  thus  provided  for  the  storage  of  wagons, 
tools  and  grain.  All  hay  and  grain  are  handled  with  horse 
forks,  and  after  the  mows  are  full  to  the  plate,  poles  are 


J^T] 


//oy  8  a  us 


j  /Voor     I 


Fig.  52 — P.  H.  reed's  barn    Fig.  53 — floor  of  cattle  barn 

placed  across  the  main  floor  for  scaffolds.  At  the  left  of 
the  large  barn  is  the  granary,  and  at  the  right  sheep  barn 
and  house. 

A  barn   for  feeding  loose  cattle 


A  barn  thirty  or  thirty-two  feet  wide  is  the  most  con- 
V^enient  size  for  feeding  loose  cattle.  It  can  be  made  of 
any  length  desired.  The  posts  may  be  either  sixteen  or 
eighteen  feet  high,  and  the  roof  constructed  with  long 
and  short  rafters,  and  braced  so  as  to  make  it  self- 
supporting.  This  does  away  with  the  cross-ties  and  per- 
mits working  a  hay  fork  to  advantage.  Hay  stored  above 
is  thrown  through  chutes  into  the  central  feeding  alley, 
as  shown  at  the  left  in  Figure  54,  and  thence  placed  in 
two  long  mangers,  Figure  53,  in  which  grain  may  also 
be  fed.  The  openings  to  the  barn  may  be  at  the  ends  or 
sides,  and  wagons  can  be  driven  through  to  remove  the 


STOCK     AXD      HAY    BARN 


QL 


manure.    No  floor  other  than  hard  clay  is  necessary  where 
cattle  run  loose. 

With  a  thirty-foot  barn,  the  long  rafters  should  be 
sixteen  feet  and  the  short  rafters  ten  feet.  If  we  enclose 
an  eighty-foot  court  on  three  sides  with  this  building, 
making  the  back  side  thirty-two  feet  wide,  we  will  have 
space  for  300  tons  of  alfalfa  hay.  A  self-feeder,  as  shown 
in  the  cross-section  at  the  right  of  Figure  54,  may  be 
used.     The  continuous  chute  is  thirty  inches  wide  and 


Fig.  54 BENTS  OF  BARNS  FOR  CATTLE  FEEDING 


the  manger  four  and  one-half  feet  wide.  The  chute 
reaches  within  two  inches  of  the  top  level  of  the  manger. 
Doors  in  the  chute  admit  of  hay  being  thrown  in  at  any 
level.  No  permanent  mangers  should  be  put  in  a  barn 
of  this  construction,  but  good,  strong  feed-racks  three  and 
one-half  by  eight  feet  can  be  set  where  convenient  and 
readily  moved.  The  side  opposite  the  manger  can  be  left 
open,  if  desired,  but  gates  should  be  arranged  so  that  the 
cattle  can  be  shut  out  when  putting  in  ensilage,  for 
instance. 


62 


BARN      PLANS      AND     UUTBLILDIXGS 


A    CIRCULAR    BARN    FOR    FEEDING    CATTLE 

Circular  barns,  also  those  containing  from  eight  to 
sixteen  sides,  are  theoretically  much  cheaper  to  construct 
than  square  or  oblong  buildings,  because  they  cover  the 
greatest  area  with  the  least  material.  In  practice,  how- 
ever, the  construction  of  circular  barns  presents  some 
features  which  add  to  the  expense  of  building  them,  so 


->»^Nf«»>.- 


Fig.    55 — BEEF    FEEDING    BARN    AND    SILOS 


that  they  have  been  many  years  in  coming  into  favor. 
A  number  of  such  barns  have  been  built  in  the  west  and 
are  giving  evident  satisfaction.  The  barn  of  N.  Martin 
of  Oswego,  111.,  is  used  for  feeding  beef  cattle.     It  has 

two  silos  attached,  as  shown  in  Figure  55.    The  basement 


DECAGONAL      CATTLE      BARN 


63 


is  used  for  cattle  and  the  superstructure  for  the  storage 
of  fodder. 

Two  straight  double  rows  of  stalls  extend  across  the  barn, 
those  on  the  inside  being,  of  course,  considerably  shorter 
than  those  in  the  middle.  Large  doors  are  provided  so  that 
a  horse  and  wagon  may  drive  through  to  clean  out  the 
gutters.     Chutes  are  arranged  over  the  feeding  alleys,  so 


Fig.    56 — GROUND    PLAN 

that  the  feed  is  dropped  in  front  of  the  cattle  and  dis- 
tributed with  the  least  amount  of  labor.  Figure  56  shows 
the  interior  arrangement. 

A    DECAGONAL     CATTLE    BARN 


The  ten-sided  cattle  barn  of  Jolm  C.  Baker  of  iMan- 
hattan,  111.,  shown  in  Figures  57  and  58,  is  rather  novel, 
but  decidedly  convenient.  As  Mr.  Baker  is  a  lumberman, 
as  well  as  a  stock-raiser,  he  has  opportunity  to  procure 
lumber  cheaply  and  so  has  iised  an  abundance  of  material 
in  his  buildings.    This  barn  is  eighteen  feet  on  each  sidQ, 


64 


BAEN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


or  180  feet  around  it.  It  contains  eighteen  box  stalls, 
nine  by  twelve  feet,  with  a  door  into  each  stall  from  the 
inside,  also  a  window  in  each  stall.  These  stalls  are 
suitable  for  a  cow  and  calf  or  two  or  three  head  of  smaller 
cattle.  There  is  an  octagon  of  stanchions  in  the  center 
which  holds  sixteen  head  of  cattle.  This  barn  is  twenty- 
two  feet  to  eaves.  Lower  story  outside  wall  is  packed 
with  hemlock  two  by  fours  laid  flat.    The  stalls  are  made 


Fig.     57 — ^ARRANGEMENT    OF    CATTLE     STALLS 


©f  two  by  fours  packed  solid  two  and  one-half  feet  high, 
and  then  one  is  left  out  every  other  time  and  blocks  put 
in,  leaving  the  walls  of  the  stall  more  open.  The  upper 
three  feet  of  stalls  is  put  in  with  the  two  by  fours  four 
inches  apart.     Mr.  Baker  writes: 

"I  cannot  see  any  way  this  barn  can  be  better  for  its 
size  for  breeding  stock.  The  upper  story  is  fourteen  feet 
high  and  I  drive  into  it.  We  clean  out  with  a  cart  and 
drive  in  when  the  cattle  in  the  center  are  let  out.  This 
barn  is  sided  with  shiplap  and  painted.  We  have  chutes 
for  feeding  from  above.     One  rack  does  for  two  stalls. 


STOCK      FARMER  S      BARN 


65 


They  are  built  into  the  stall  and  outside  walls  and  the 
lower  two  feet  is  furnished  with  one-inch  iron  pipe  for 
racks  and  feed  box  which  runs  across  next  to  outside  wall. 


Fig.    58 — AN    ILLINOIS    BREEDING    CATTLE    BARN 

This  barn  is  for  cattle  only.     In  two  places  I  have  out- 
side doors  out  of  stalls.     There  are  inside  doors  also." 

SUGGESTH'E  PLAN  FOR  A  STOCK  BARN 


A  Dakota  farmer  wants  a  plan  for  a  general  farm 
b&rn,  the  dimensions  to  be  fifty  by  100  feet.  Frank 
Huhlin  of  Ohio  has  prepared  three  plans,  all  of  the  same. 


66 


BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


outside  dimensions.  In  Figure  59,  Fig  1  and  Fig  2  are 
where  there  is  no  bank,  and  it  is  not  necessary  to  bridge 
in  order  to  enter  the  second  floor.  It  is  possible  to  drive 
into  the  basement  and  elevate  the  fodder  and  feed 
to  the  second  floor  by  horse  power,  such  as  hay  foi.ks. 
Fig  3  is  where  there  is  a  bank,  so  that  a  load  can  l)e 
driven  in  onto  the  second  floor.  Plans  1  and  2  could 
have  a  bridge  or  bank  at  the  end  of  the  barn,  so  that 
wagon  can  be  driven  to  second  floor. 

Fig  1  and  Fig  3  are  devoted  entirely  to  stock,  while 
Fig  2   is  a   general  purpose   barn,   with   space  for   tools, 


Fig.  59 PLANS  FOR  A  DAKOTA  STOCK  BARN 


farm  machinery  and  shop.  Fig  4  shows  a  cross-section 
of  the  barn  at  one  of  the  bents.  The  hight  of  basement 
should  be  nine  feet.  The  jilans  are  for  stone  as  high  as 
basement,  with  timber  above,  but  the  frame  could  be 
made  all  the  way  from  the  ground  on  the  same  priiu-iple. 
The  side  posts  can  be  of  any  desired  length.  The  plan 
is  for  side  posts  sixteen  feet  to  eaves. 

In  building  the  framework,  use  two-inch  plank  for 
all  heavy  timbers,  nailing  them  together  and  using  bolts 
in  a  few  places.  Six  horse  stalls,  with  two  box  stalls  for 
sick   animals,   arc   sufficient    for  work  horses  on   a   farm 


A    DAKOTA    BARN  67 

■with  a  barn  of  that  size.  In  Fig  1,  the  large  part  of 
the  barn  witliout  any  division  is  for  cattle  or  sheep,  as 
the  owner  may  choose.  Put  in  feed  mangers  and  par- 
titions at  owner's  option.  Chutes  should  be  made  where 
most  convenient.  The  large  feeding  pen  is  fifty  by  sixty- 
eight  feet.  Fig  2  is  the  same  as  Fig  1,  except  that 
it  is  more  of  a  general  purpose  barn,  twenty  feet  being 
taken  off  the  end  for  tools  and  farm  machinery.  There  is  a 
door  from  the  stable  into  this  part  for  convenience.  The 
large  rolling  doors  on  the  feeding  pens  in  both  plans  are 
for  driving  in  to  remove  manure.  They  are  twelve 
feet  wide. 

Fig  3  has  the  same  number  of  horse  stalls,  but  they 
are  arranged  along  one  side,  owing  to  there  being  no 
general  driveway  through  it.  The  other  side,  marked 
cows  or  young  stock,  is  so  situated  that  it  can  be  cleaned 
out  at  the  same  time  as  the  horse  stable.  The  other  end 
of  the  barn  is  for  feeding  cattle  or  sheep,  as  in  the  other 
two  plans.  If  this  is  to  be  made  a  general  purpose  barn, 
the  machinery,  tools  and  shop  can  be  put  on  the  second 
floor.  The  framework  is  made  according  to  timber  used. 
There  should  be  eight  bents  for  the  100  feet  arranged  to 
suit  the  openings.  The  posts,  as  shown  in  Fig  4,  should 
not  be  more  than  ten  feet  apart.  Above  the  basement, 
the  frame  is  made  self-supporting,  so  there  are  no  inside 
timbers  to  bother. 

These  are  good  basement  plans  for  a  practical  barn. 
:,nd  so  inexpensive  that  almost  any  farmer  can  utilize 
lliem.  Actual  figures  cannot  be  given  that  would  apply 
f)  all  localities.  The  dotted  lines  in  Fig  4  show  extra 
braces  in  the  end  bents.  These  are  put  in  to  keep  the 
ends  from  being  pushed  out.  As  to  grain  bins,  they  are 
not  marked  in  any  of  the  plans.  They  are  a  matter  of 
choice  with  different  persons, 


68 


teARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


A    RHODE    ISLAND    CATTLE    BARN 

The  illustrations,  Figures  60,  61,  62,  63,  are  of  a  cattle 
barn  on  Dr.  C.  F.  Heyward's  farm  at  Newport,  R.  I.  It 
has  stalls  for  twenty  cows,  four  oxen  and  two  horses,  and 
will  stow  about  ten  tons  of  hay  in  the  bays,  and,  in  an 
emergency,  five  more  on  the  threshing  floor.  It  is  in- 
tended to  keep  the  main  store  of  hay  in  a  hay  barn  already 
standing  and  in  Dutch  hay  covers.     On  this  place,  there 


PERSPECTIVE    VIEW    OF    BARX    FROM    THE    REAR 


being  a  large  amount  of  pasture  land,  it  is  not  intended 
to  soil  the  stock,  and  the  object  has  been  only  to  fur- 
nish comfortable  quarters  for  the  cattle,  where  they  may 
be  conveniently  fed  and  milked  with  the  least  expense 
possible.  Everything  is  built  in  the  plainest  manner, 
and  as  cheaply  as  permanent  usefulness  would  allow. 
The  cost  of  the  building,  including  cellar,  foundation 
walls,  etc.,  was  about  $1500.  Figure  60  gives  a  per- 
spective view  of  the  barn,  and  Fifrure  61  a  cross-section. 


RHODE    ISLAND    CATTLE    BARN 


69 


The  barn  stands  sideways  against  a  gentle  slope,  the 
fall  being  about  five  feet  in  thirty-six  feet — the  width 
of  the  barn.  A  small  amount  of  artificial  grading  brings 
the  cattle  floor  on  one  side,  and  the  manure  cellar  on 
the  other,  to  the  ground  level.  Under  the  cattle  and 
horse  stalls  there  is  a  large  cellar  for  manure,  with 
two  wide  entrances  for  carts.  Beneath  the  threshing 
floor  there  is  a  root  cellai*,  and  under  the  principal  hay 
bay  a  storage  room  for  plows,  harrows,  etc.  The  general 
arrangement  of  the  cattle  floor  and  hay  room  is  shown  in 


Fig.     61 — SECTION     OP    BARN 


Figure  62.  The  ox  and  horse  stables  open  into  a  small 
yard,  separated  from  the  cow  yard.  The  animals  have 
access  to  the  latter  through  the  doors  at  the  end  of  the 
building.  The  feeding  passage  is  not  wide  enough  for 
a  cart,  but  allows  a  team  to  pass,  when  unhitched  from  a 
loaded  cart  or  wagon,  standing  upon  the  threshing  floor. 
The  features  of  this  stable  are  the  arched  floor  and  the 
arrangements  for  tying  and  feeding.  The  main  timbers 
supporting  the  floor  are  twenty-eight  feet  long,  running 
across  the  building.     There  are  two  of  them,  one  about 


TO 


BARN      PLAXS      AND    OLTBL'ILDIXGS 


one-tliird.  the  distance  from  either  end  of  the  ct)W  room. 
These  are  supported  each  by  two  ten-inch  chestnut  tim- 


r 

t 

r 

4'2" 

6G 

6' 

66" 

^2" 

5' 

^^— 

o 
70 

o 

o 

r-- 

-n 

m 

Q- 

1— -^ 

(/I 

a 

z 

-0 

00 

> 

r- 

> 

-n 

c/1 

1/1 

o 

H 

i/^ 

> 

> 

C3 

J-; 

1— 
c/) 

r-i 

i  D 

o 

i/> 

X) 

r    -^ 

D    o 

g^ 

■ZL 

V 

_      jq    - 

^ 

» 

r~ 

•n 

a 
30 

N 

r 

H 

X 

X 

o 

31 

sa 

!                X 

I/) 

r 

EC 

!             ^ 

Z 

!                           DO 

o 

I 
> 

CI 

1       ^ 

?> 

•< 

a 

n 

a 

> 

71 

■< 

1 

V 

JSfh 


FigC.     62 PLAX     OP    FLOOR    OF    BARX 

hers,  resting:   on    foundation   stones,   and   standing;   under 
tlie  lines  of  the  upright  post^j  to  wliicli  the  cattle  are  tied. 


K 


RHODE    ISLAND    CATTLE    BARX 


71 


Before  these  were  put  in,  and  after  the  outside  of  the 
building  was  finished,  the  cross  timbers  were  screwed  tip 
in  the  middle  as  much  as  they  would  bear,  having  a 
crown  of  about  six  inches,  giving  an  arch-like  form 
to  the  floor — the  middle  of  the  feed- 
ing passage  being  six  inches  higher 
than  the  outside  of  the  passage  be- 
hind the  cattle.  The  floor  joists 
were  then  notched  in  to  these  tim- 
bers and  to  the  end  sills,  to  a  uni- 
form depth,  as  far  back  as  the  rear 
of  the  floor  on  which  the  cattle 
stand.  At  this  point  a  drop  of 
four  inches   is   given  by  spiking  a 


Fig.  63 SECTION  OF  STALL  WITH  FEEDING  APPARATUS 

scantling  against  the  floor  joists.  From  this  point  the 
passage  floor  rises  to  the  side  of  the  building.  This  gives 
good  drainage,  simplicity,  and  sufficient  strength.  The 
construction  of  this  floor  and  of  the  feeding  apparatvis 
is  shown  in  Figure  61,  the  details  being  more  clearly  set 
forth  in  Figure  63.  There  are  no  partitions  between  the 
cattle,  save  the  bars  which  separate  the  oxen  from  the 
cows.  The  feed  rack  consists  of  strips  of  Georgia  pine, 
three  inches  wide  and  one  inch  thick.  In  front  of  it 
there  is  a  shutter  three  feet  wide,  hinged  at  the  bottom, 
which  may  be  turned  flat  against  the  slats  when  hay  is 
not  being  fed,  or  may  be  dropped  back  the  length  of  the 
chain  which  supports  it  when  necessary 


72 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


A    WESTERN    CATTLE    BARN 


The     barn     and 
sheds  shown  in  the 
engraving,     Figure 
64,  are  well  adapt- 
ed   for    the    keep- 
ing    of      a      large 
nnmber     of     cattle 
in    an    economical 
manner.    The  barn 
is  wholly  appropri- 
«  ated    to    hay    and 
g  grain;   the  yard  is 
H  spacious,    and   sur- 
^  rounded    on    three 
sides     with     sheds, 
either      closed      or 
^  open,  in  which  the 
■H/'iJI  ■<  stock  is  kept.     The 
<^JIl  Ju  barn  is  raised  three 
\<^iy.l    .  feet    from   the 
'0\V^^  c^  ground    and    rests 
^^   ^    ^ ^        on  posts   of  brick- 

'"  lihli  f-— "^^  iMlilM  vV        thus  gained  is  used 

as  a  shelter  for 
those  hogs  which 
have  the  run  of  the 
yard.  The  yards 
are  well  littered 
with  straw  and  the 
remains  of  the 
corn  fodder  fed  to  the  stock,  by  which  means  a  large 
quantity  of  manure  is  accumulated.     The  plan  here  given 


WESTERN     CATTLE     BARN 


73 


is  equally  well  adapted  to  a  large  or  small  farm,  as  it  may- 
be extended  at  will  to  accommodate  any  required  number 
of  cattle. 

A    SECOND    WESTERN    CATTLE     BARN 

Figure  65  presents  a  plan  of  a  stock  barn,  costing  from 
$1500  to  $2000.  To  feed  cattle  profitably,  they  need  to 
be  comfortably  placed,  kept  quiet,  with  every  facility 
for  getting  in  and  out  of  their  stalls,  and  to  have  no  an- 


Fig.   65 — PLAN   OF   A   WESTERN   CATTLE  BARN 


noyance  or  excitement.  In  this  plan  there  is  a  vast  sav- 
ing of  work  of  a  disagreeable  character  through  the  win- 
ter, and  when  the  manure  is  moved  in  the  spring,  it  is  in 
far  better  condition  than  if  it  had  been  exposed  to  the 
snow  and  frost  for  several  months.  A  cattle  barn  should 
always  be  laid  out  with  this  object  in  view. 

Figure  65  shows  the  ground  plan  of  the  barn.  It  is 
made  in  two  wings,  facing  the  northeast  and  north- 
west.    At  the  north  corner  is  a  square  room,  which  may 


74 


BARN     PLANS     A.NU     OUTIU  ILDINQS 


be  used  as  a  store  room,  feed  room,  or  for  any  otlier 
l)urpose.  From  this  room  passages  run  right  and  left, 
from  which  the  cattle  are  fed;  these  ought  to  be  about 
six  feet  wide.  There  should  be  as  many  windows  in 
these  passages  as  will  give  needful  light  and  ventilation 
through  the  stable.  The  stalls  with  racks  or  feed  troughs 
opening  into  the  passages  are  in  the  rear,  and  the  doors 
from  the  stalls  open  into  the  yard.  These  doors  shouhl 
hang  upon  rollers,  and  when  pushed  back  at  least  one- 
half  of  the  front  of  the  sheds  should  be  open.     Figure  GG 


Fii 


00 


-KLE\ATIO.\     OF     BARX 


shows  the  elevation  of  the  sheds  and  the  arrangement 
of  the  yard.  The  yard  will  face  the  south  and  east,  and 
sliould  have  a  manure  vault  in  the  center,  into  which 
drains,  shown  by  dotted  lines,  Figure  65,  carry  off  the 
liquids  from  the  stable.  The  yard  may  be  fenced  in,  and 
feeding  racks  may  be  placed  around  it,  in  which  in  line 
weather  fodder  can  be  given  to  the  stock.  The  upper  stoi*y 
is  for  storing  hay,  and  at  the  center  of  the  building  a 
windmill  should  be  erected  to  pump  water  for  the  stock 
from  n  cistern  or  well  beneath,  or  it  could  furnish  power 
to  cut  feed  if  necessary.     These  extra  conveniences  will 


I 


COVERED  CATTLE  STALLS 


iO 


more  than  pay  for  themselves  in  the  course  of  one  season, 
ill  the  saving  of  lahor  and  in  tlie  increased  growth  of  the 
stock.  A  trough  of  water  might  run  through  every  stall, 
so  that  the  cattle  can  he  watered  when  required,  with- 
out being  removed  or  unfastened. 

COVERED  STALLS  FOR  CATTLE 

The  use  of  covered  stalls  for  feeding  cattle  and  pre- 
serving manure  is  becoming  very  general  among  the 
better  class  of  English  farmers.  Occasionally  they  are 
adopted  by  farmers   in  this   country   with   the. best  re- 


I 


/ 


V ^ 

Fig.     67 — PLAN     OF     STALLS 


suits.  Figure  C7  shows  the  ground  plan  of  a  shed  con- 
taining fourteen  stalls,  each  ten  feet  square,  with  a  pas- 
sageway in  the  center  four  feet  wide.  Figure  68  shows 
the  elevation  of  the  building  with  the  arrangement  of  the 
doors.  It  is  of  two  stories,  the  upper  one  being  used  for 
the  storage  of  straw,  hay  or  roots  or  the  preparation  of 
feed.  Figure  69  shows  the  interior  of  the  building,  with 
some  of  the  stalls  upon  one  side.  With  these  views,  the 
following  short  description  will  be  more  readily  under- 
stood. The  structure  here  given  is  seventy  feet  long  by 
twenty-four  feet  wide,  having  seven  stalls  upon  each  side. 
It  is  built  of  plain  boards  and  scantling,  and  one  of  the 
cheapest  character  will  answer  every  purpose  as  well  as 


76 


BARX     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


the  most  costly  building,  tlie  shelter  and  preservation  of 
the  manure  being  the  chief  objects  in  view.  There  is  a 
door  at  tlie  rear  of  each  stall  divided  into  upper  and  lower 
halves,  so  that  the  upper  one  may  be  opened  for  air  and 
ventilation.  There  is  a  large  door  at  both  ends  of  each 
row  of  stalls,  and  the  divisions  between  the  stalls  are 
made  of  movable  bars.  These  bars  being  taken  away,  a 
wagon  may  be  driven  through  the  building  from  end  to 
end  for  the  removal  of  the  manure.  The  floors  of  the 
stalls  are  sunk  three  feet  below  the  surface.  Here  the 
cattle  are  fed  and  well  bedded  with  straw.     If  the  straw 


Fig.  68 ELEVATION  OE  COVERED  CATTLE  STALLS 


is  cut  into  lengths  of  at  least  three  inches,  the  manure  is 
so  much  the  better  for  it.  The  litter  and  the  manure  re- 
main in  the  stall  during  the  whole  winter,  and  as  they 
gradually  accumulate  and  the  floor  rises,  the  bars  are 
raised.  Each  bar  fits  into  sockets  in  the  posts  of  the 
building,  and  is  held  into  its  place  by  pins.  The  feed 
trough  is  made  to  slide  up  and  down,  upon  iron  bars,  as 
may  be  needed.  There  is  also  a  rack  slung  from  the  roof 
or  ceiling  above,  between  each  pair  of  stalls,  for  long  straw 
or  hay,  which  is  given  once  a  day  to  the  stock. 


78 


BARN     PLANS     .VND     OUTBUILDINGS 


CHEAP    CATTLE    SHEDS    AND    BARNS 

Much  money  is  wasted  in  building  sheds  and  barns  of 
needlessly  heavy  timber.  No  timber  should  be  larger  or 
stronger  than  is  sufficient  to  hold  up  the  roof,  and  four 
by  four  studding,  or  posts,  will  do  this.  Where  strong 
winds  prevail,  much  may  be  saved  by  having  the  buildings 
low.  Indeed,  there  is  a  saving  anywhere,  by  having 
everything  as  near  the  ground  as  possible.    The  common 


70 — PLAN    OF    CATTLE    SHED 


idea  that  high  buildings  are  the  cheapest  because  roof 
space  is  thus  saved,  is  erroneous,  and  it  should  not  bo 
forgotten  that  a  three-story  barn  must  necessarily  have  a 
very  strong  and  heavy  frame  to  support  its  own  weight, 
as  well  as  the  side  thrust  and  weight  of  its  contents.  A 
studding  two  by  four  inches  will  be  strong  enough  for  a 
hay  shed  eight  feet  high  at  the  eaves,  while  one  sixteen 
feet  high  will  spread,  and  sometimes  burst,  with  six  by  six 
timbers.     Thus  it  mnv  very  often  be  found  better  to  take 


CHEAP     CATTLE     SHED  79 

up  more  ground,  and  make  twice  or  three  times  as  much 
roof  surface,  than  it  would  be  to  save  in  floor  and  roof 
space,  by  building  higher.  The  plans  here  given  are  of 
cattle  sheds,  recently  built  at  a  cost  of  only  $15  per  head 
of  the  cows  sheltered,  and  for  comfort  and  convenience 
they  are  all  that  can  be  desired.  To  accommodate  ten 
cows  in  a  shed  costing  $150  is  often  more  desirable 
than  to  build  a  baru  costing  $1500  that  will  supply  no 
more  room.  Where  economy  must  be  very  closely  consid- 
ered, this  matter  is  well  worth  studying,  and  the  sketches 
presented  will  furnish  a  very  good  text  for  it.  Figure  70 
shows  a  plan  of  a  shed  having  forty-one  box  stalls,  each  six 
by  eight  feet,  and  separated  by  boarded  partitions  four  and 
one-half  feet  high.  Tlie  shed  is  nine  feet  high  in  the  front, 
seven  feet  in  the  rear,  twelve  feet  wide  and  ninety  or 
100  feet  long.  The  roof  is  of  boards.  The  frame  is 
made  of  posts  set  in  the  ground,  with  a  two  by  four- 
inch  plate  and  girths  of  the  same  size  where  needed.  There 
is  a  feed  passage  wliich  traverses  the  whole  length,  lead- 
ing from  a  room  in  one  end.  A,  Figure  70,  for  preparing 
the  feed.  There  is  p  feed  trough  in  each  stall.  A  bar 
or  pole  is  fastened  along  the  whole  range  of  stalls,  eighteen 
inches  from  the  top  of  the  front  partition,  by  which  the 
cattle  are  prevented  from  approaching  the  front  too  closely, 
and  mounting  the  feed  troughs,  or  putting  their  feet  into 
them.  The  cows  are  kept  loose  in  the  stalls,  unless 
otherwise  desired,  in  which  case  they  can  be  fastened  to 
rings  screwed  to  the  sides  of  the  stalls.  A  cistern,  which 
collects  the  water  from  the  roof,  is  made  at  B.  The  front 
of  each  stall  has  a  double  door,  so  made  that  the  upper 
part  may  be  left  open  for  ventilation.  Ventilating  aper- 
tures may  be  made  above  each  door,  for  use  in  cold 
weather.  The  sheds  are  arranged  in  a  square,  with  a  gate 
at  one  side  for  the  entrance  of  wagons  into  the  interior 
yard.  The  yard  will  give  room  for  exercise,  and  racks 
jnay  be   provided   in    it.   for   feeding   green   fodder^,   hay 


80 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


or  straw.  The  plan  is  admirably  adapted  for  the  soiling 
system  of  feeding,  and  the  making  of  a  large  quantity 
of  manure,  while  forty  or  fifty  cows  are  provided  with 


Fig.  71 SECTION  OF  BARN  AND  STABLE 

comfortable  room,  at  a  cost  of  $600  or  $750.  In  many 
cases  the  value  of  the  manure  saved  by  soiling  cattle  in 
such  a  shed  will  repay  its  whole  cost  in  one  year. 

CHEAP    BARN    AND    CGNNECTINQ    STABLES 

Figure  71  shows  a  section  of  a  cheap  barn  and  stables 
conne''.ted.     The  building  may  even  be  brought  lower  at 


1 

Fig.     72 — PLAN     OF     A     CATTLE     BARN 

the  eaves,  and  provide  pens  for  pigs  and  calves,  or  sheep, 
or  open  sheds  for  tools,  etc.  In  this  way  it  is  protected 
from-  sweeping,  winds,,  which   can  liave-  but   little .  effect 


TEMPORARY        CATTLE        SIIEU 


81 


upon  it.  The  central  space  is  used  for  storing  hay  or 
grain,  or  for  threshing,  and  the  side  spaces  for  stabling 
cattle.  Three  and  one-half  feet  in  length  of  floor  space 
will  accommodate  two  head,  so  that  a  seventy-foot  barn 
will  hold  forty  head,  and  provide  abundant  room  foi 
the  crop  of  100  acres,  at  a  cost  of  about  $10  per  running 
foot.  Light  timber  only  is  needed,  and  rough  posts  set 
in  the  ground  will  make  the  basis  of  the  frame.  The 
plan  of  the  building  is  shown  in  Figure  72.  It  is 
arranged  to  be  seventy  feet  long  and  fifty  feet  wide,  with 
the  central  space  twenty-six  feet,  and  the  wings  each 
twelve  feet;  wide  doors  are  made  at  each  end,  and  also 
through  the  center,  and  the  stanchions  or  stalls  in  the 
center  are  movable. 

A    TEMPORARY    CATTLE    SHED 

A  farmer  in  Greenvale,  W.  Va.,  made  a  shed  for  cattle 
which  is  to  serve  him  until  he  can  build  a  good  barn.    The 


Fig.    73 — PERSPECTIVE    VIEW    OF    CATTLE    SHED 

shed  is  111  feet  long  by  twenty-six  feet  wide,  and  a  cis- 
tern receives  the  water  from  the  roof.  The  posts  arc 
fourteen  feet  long,  and  there  is  a  space  above  for  holding 
forty  tons  of  hay,  and  a  room  below,  seven  feet  high, 
which  will  accommodate  sixty  sheep,  twenty  calves  and 
twenty  other  cattle.  The  frame  consists  entirely  of  poles 
and  posts  which  were  cut  in  the  woods,  and  put  up 
without  hewing.  The  plates,  rafters,  etc.,  were  sawed. 
Qne   side    and    two   ends   arc   boarded   up;    the   vest   13 


82 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


covered  with  clapboards.  The  cistern  is  so  arranged 
that  the  water  will  run  out  into  a  trough  until  it  is 
empty,  without  having  to  draw  or  pump  it.  Figure  73 
gives  a  view  of  one  side  of  the  shed.     The  side  braces 


Fig.    74 — GROUND    PLAN    OF    CATTLE    SHED 


are  poles  eight  feet  long.  They  rest  at  the  foot  on 
the  cross  piece  at  the  middle  of  the  post,  and  are  halved 
in  and  spiked  to  the  post,  and  the  upper  end  supports 
the  plate  in  the  middle.  Figure  74  shows  the  ground  plan, 
on  which  1,  2,  3,  J^,  5  and  6  are  lots  opening  into  all  the 
fields  on  the  farm;  7  is  the  cistern,  A  is  for  sheep,  B  and 


75 — DIAGRAM    OF    BENT 


G  are  for  cattle,  and  D  and  E  are  driveways.  Figure  75 
shows  the  end  and  middle  bents.  The  long  brace  is 
halved  into  the  inside  post,  in  the  joist,  and  in  the  top 
of  the  outside  post,  and  fastened  with  sixty-penny  spikes 
at  each  place. 


cow     SHED    AND     PIGPEN 


83 


A  COMBINED  COW   SHED  AND   PIGPEN 

Figures  '76  and  77  illustrate  a  combined  cow  shed 
and  pigpen  belonging  to  Mr.  F.  E.  Gott,  Spencerport, 
N.  Y.  It  consists  of  an  open  shed,  with  a  box  pen  for 
the  cow  on  one  side,  and  the  pigsty  on  the  other — the 
whole  shed  being  twenty  feet  long  and  fourteen  broad, 
and  all  covered  by  one  roof.  It  is  constructed  of  hemlock 
lumber,  and  should  not  cost  over  $50.  The  outward 
appearance  of  the  shed  is  shown  in  Figure  76.  The 
posts  in  front  are  twelve  feet  in  hight,  and  the  rear  ones 


Fig.    76 — FRONT   VIEAV    OF    COW    SHED   AND    PIGPEN 


eight.  The  boards  are  put  on  vertically,  and  battened  on 
the  joints.  The  roof  is  made  of  rough  boards  laid 
double,  and  breaking  joints,  so  that  it  will  not  leak. 
The  box  for  the  cow  is  eight  by  ten  feet,  six  feet  and 
four  inches  high,  and  has  a  feed  passage  four  by  eight 
feet  adjoining  it.  The  middle  portion  of  the  building  is 
an  open  shed,  seven  by  fourteen  feet,  and  is  used  for 
storing  muck,  protecting  the  manure  heap  from  the  rains, 
etc.  The  pigpen  occupies  the  left  end  of  the  building, 
and  is  separated  from  the  central  or  shed  portion  by  a  low 
partition,  while  the  cow  stfill  is  boarded  up  to  the  roof. 


84 


BARN     PLANS     A\U     OUTBUILUIXQS 


The  floor,  being  six  feet  and  ten  inches  from  the  ground, 
provides  storage  room  between  it  and  the  roof  in  which 
to  put  hay.  It  would  be  better  to  have  the  posts  two 
feet  higher,  thus  providing  a  loft  in  which  over  a  ton  of 
hay  could  be  stored.     The  ground  plan  of  this  cheap  and 


FEED 
ROOM 


OPEN  SHED. 
7X14' 


MEAL 
BOX 


FEEDJNd 

PASSAGE. 

4-  X  8 


STALL  FOR  COW 
8  >'10 


/ 


Fig.    77 PLAN    OF    COW    SUED    AND    PIGPEN 


convenient  building  is  shown  in  Figure  77,  the  positioa 
of  the  doors,  meal  boxes,  open  shed,  feed  rooms,  etc;., 
being  given. 

ILIPHOVLNG    OLD    STABLES 

There  are  thousands  of  old  and  poorly  constructed 
stables,  sheds  and  the  like  all  over  the  northern  states  in 
which  cattle  are  kept  during  the  winter.  These  are  often 
so  cold  that  the  ground  freezes  solid.  Such  shelter  is 
very  inadequate  and  results  from  a  lack  of  building 
material  in  many  of  the  prairie  states  and  also  neglect 
of  farmers  to  provide  comfortable  stables  oven  when  the 
)naterial  is  at  hand.  On  nil  farms  where  grain  is  raised 
these  stock  barns  can  be  made  comfortable  with  the 
straw.  If  it  can  be  baled  so  much  the  better.  Place  a 
layer  of  bales  on  the  inside  of  the  barn  wall  just  as  you 


A     STKAW     BARX  85 

would  lay  brick,  omitting  of  course  the  mortar.  When 
the  top  is  reached  place  a  board  or  rail  on  the  top  bales 
to  keep  them  in  place. 

If  it  is  impracticable  to  have  the  straw  baled  it  can 
still  be  used  with  good  results.  Build  a  fence  as  high 
as  the  wall  of  the  building  five  or  six  feet  outside  of  it 
and  have  it  made  comparatively  tight  by  placing  the  poles 
or  boards  used  not  more  than  one  foot  apart.  Fill  in  the 
open  space  between  the  fence  and  the  building  with  straw 
and  tramp  it  do\\Ti  as  solidly  as  possible.  If  flax  straw 
can  be  used  this  makes  the  best  kind  of  filling.  It  is 
impossible  for  the  wind  to  blow  through  this,  and  tho 
stable  will  be  as  warm  as  need  be. 


CHAPTER   m 
DAIRY  BARNS 

A     MODEL     DAIRY     BARN 

The  buildings  for  a  dairy  need  not  be  elaborate  or 
expensive,  but  should  be  such  as  will  give  thorough  pro- 
tection to  the  cows  and  their  feed,  and  so  arranged  that 
the  work  can  be  done  conveniently  with  the  smallest 
amount  of  time  and  labor.  They  should  be  well  lighted 
and  ventilated  and  need  to  be  warmly  built.  In  Farmers' 
Bulletin  151  of  the  United  States  Department  of  Agricul- 
ture, by  S.  M.  Tracy,  a  description  of  a  model  barn  is 
given,  which  is  illustrated  in  Figure  78.  There  are 
serious  objections  to  having  hay  stored  over  the  cow 
stable,  both  on  account  of  making  the  stable  too  low  and 
because  of  the  great  amount  of  dust  and  litter  which 
usually  sifts  through  onto  the  cows  and  into  the  milk 
pails,  while  the  feed  itself  is  apt  to  become  tainted  by 
the  odors  of  the  stable.  Better  ventilation  can  be 
obtained  and  better  health  can  also  be  secured  with  a 
one-story  structure. 

Whether  the  stable  is  a  separate  building,  or  the  base- 
ment story  of  a  barn,  the  general  plan  and  arrangement 
of  the  stable  may  be  the  same.  The  stable  should  be  at 
least  thirty-two  feet  long  and  of  the  desired  width.  It 
makes  little  difference  whether  the  cows  face  the  center 
or  the  outside.  In  the  upper  diagram  of  the  cut  of  a 
single  story  building,  the  cows  face  the  outside,  with  an 
eight-foot  driveway  through  the  middle,  to  allow  the  use 
of  a  wagon  in  cleaning.     The  feeding  alley.  A,  is  three 


MODEL     DAIRY    BARN 


87 


and  one-half  to  five  feet  wide;  manure  gutter,  E,  is  two 
feet  wide;  stalls  seven  feet  deep,  of  which  the  manger, 
D,  is  two  feet  wide  and  stalls,  C,  five  feet.  This  may 
be  reduced  to  four  feet  six  inches,  or  even  less,  for  animals 
of  the  smaller  breeds  or  cows  below  medium  size.  Four 
box  stalls,  twelve  feet  square,  are  at  one  end.  The  width 
of  the  stalls  should  be  from  three  to  four  feet,  varying 
with  the  size  of  cows,  and  kind  of  stall  used. 


^^ 


'^^^vjr. 


\. 


■j^i-i-i-Hci-i-[-ri-i-i-i^i-i-[-iciii 


E. 


Fig.    78 GROUND    PLAN    OF    A    MODEL   DAIRY    BARN 


This  plan  may  be  varied  by  making  the  stalls  face  the 
central  passageway,  an  arrangement  preferred  by  many 
where  the  stable  occupies  the  lower  story  of  a  barn. 
Twenty-five  or  more  stalls  may  be  placed  in  each  row, 
but  when  more  than  double  that  number  is  desired,  it  is 


88  BARN     I'LAXS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

usually  desirable  to  make  the  building  cross,  X,  or  T 
shape,  with  the  different  wings  meeting  at  the  grain  room. 

Another  plan  that  is  frequently  adopted  for  a  dairy 
and  feed  barn  combined,  is  to  construct  lean-to 
sheds  for  the  cow  stables  along  one  side  and  one  or 
both  ends  of  the  hay  barn,  with  a  feeding  alley  next 
the  barn  wall,  as  shown  in  the  lower  part  of  the  cut. 
There  should  be  convenient  doors  for  egress  and  ingress 
to  both  barn  and  stable.  This  barn  is  thirty  feet  wide 
and  seventy-five  feet  long,  with  cow  sheds  sixteen  feet 
wide.  The  feeding  alley  is  four  feet,  passageway,  F, 
next  the  outer  Avail,  four  feet,  manure  gutter,  E,  and 
stalls  and  mangers,  C  and  D,  the  same  as  in  the  other 
barn. 

The  best  floor,  and  in  the  long  run  the  most  economical, 
is  one  built  of  concrete.  At  any  rate,  the  manure  gutter 
and  a  foot  on  each  side  of  it  should  be  built  of  concrete. 
Bricks  set  on  edge  and  bedded  in  cement  are  sviitable  for 
this  purpose.  The  floor  may  be  made  of  plank,  but  heavy 
clay  mixed  with  gravel  and  well  tamped  down  will  do 
nearly  as  well.  The  stalls  should  have  a  slope  of  not 
more  than  two  inches  from  front  to  rear,  and  for  the 
manure  gutter,  one  inch  to  twenty  feet  is  sufficient.  The 
bottom  of  the  manger  should  be  from  three  to  six  inches 
above  the  floor  of  the  stall,  and  the  manger  large  enough 
to  hold  the  feed.  It  may  be  one  foot  wide  at  the  bottom, 
two  feet  at  the  top,  and  one  and  one-half  to  two  feet  deep. 

MODERN    AND    SANITARY     COW    STABLE 

In  the  dairy  and  stock  judging  barn  of  the  Wisconsin 
Agricultural  College  at  Madison  the  cow  stable  is  in  a 
wijig  of  the  main  barn.  The  floor  is  made  of  Portland 
cement  and  crushed  granite,  with  a  slightly  sloping 
surface  leading  all  water  used  in  washing  or  scrubbing 
to    the    sewer    drains.     The    manure    gutters    behind   the 


SANITARY      COW      STALL 


89 


cows  are  sixteen  inches  wide,  with  the  bottom  sloping 
tliree-fourths  of  an  inch  to  the  rear  side  and  one  and  one- 
]ialf  inches  of  slope  toward  the  center  of  the  stable  where 
a  trap  can  be  opened  connected  with  a  sewer  to  be  used 
only  in  flushing  out  the  stable  with  water.  The  floor  of 
the  cow  stalls  is  raised  fotir  inches  above  the  other  parts 
of  the  stable  floor,  including  the  walk  behind  the  cows, 
making  the  manure  gaitter  eight  inches  deep  on  the  side 
to   the   cow   and  only   four   inches   deep   on   side   to   the 


M/Tmm 


•  fj  C  G'o^cly. 


CROSS-SECTIOX    OF   IMTROVKD   COW    STALL 


passage  behind.  This  gives  all  the  advantage  of  a 
gutter  eight  inches  deep  and  at  the  same  time  facilitates 
the  removal  of  tlie  manure,  and  lessens  the  liability  to 
danger  from  cows  stepping  suddenly  into  a  deep  trencli 
as  they  pass  onto  or  back  from  the  ])latforni  on  which 
they  stand. 

The  mangers  are  built  ;ip  from  and  composed  of  the 
same  material  as  the  floor.  A  cross-section  of  the  floor 
and  mangers  of  the  cow  stable  is  shown  in  Figure  79. 
The   side   of    the   manger   next   to   the    cow,    g,.   is   eight 


90 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


inches  high  and  three  inches  thick,  rounding  down  into 
the  bottom  as  shown  at  E.  The  front  side  of  the 
manger,  f,  is  sixteen  inches  high  and  built  in  a  similar 
manner.  This  manger  is  two  feet  and  six  inches  wide  and 
reaches  from  one  end  of  the  stable  to  the  other.  It  is 
used  both  as  a  feeding  manger  and  as  a  watering  device. 
It  may  not  be  out  of  place  to  here  state  that  this  means 
of  watering  cows  is  just  as  convenient  and  satisfactory 
as  any  of  the  individual  watering  devices,  while  it  is 
more  cleanly  and  wholesome.  The  water  flows  into  the 
manger  at  either  end  from  a  pipe,  and  as  the  mangers 
slope  toward  the  center  from  both 
ends  it  is  very  readily  drained 
into  the  sewer  by  opening  a 
valve  after  the  cows  have  had 
sufficient   time   to   drink. 

The  stable  is  arranged  for 
thirty-six  cows  in  stalls,  eighteen 
on  either  side  of  the  center  pas- 
sage, with  the  two  rows  of  cows 
facing  each  other.  The  center 
passage  is  ten  feet  wide,  so  that 
a  team  may  be  driven  through 
Fig.  80— FRONT  VIEW  OP  ^0  feed  green  crops  taken  direct- 
cow  STALL  b'   fi'om   the   fields.      The   stalls 

are  constructed  of  gas  pipe  posts 
with  framework  of  gates  and  panels  of  channel-iron 
supporting  a  mesh  of  No.  7  woven  steel  wire.  Figures 
SO  and  81  show  how  the  posts  are  anchored  in  a  cement 
foundation.  The  letter  C  indicates  the  framework  ex- 
tending the  length  of  each  row  of  stalls  to  support  the 
front  part  of  the  side  panels  and  give  them  rigidity. 
D  indicates  the  swinging  panel  which  may  be  moved 
(see  p,  Figiire  79)  to  suit  the  length  of  the  cow,  forcing 
a  small  cow  to  stand  well  back  in  her  stall  so  that 
the  droppings   arc  received   into  the  manure  gutter   nnd 


SANITARY      COW      STALL 


91 


not  on  the  floor  of  the  stall.  The  side  panels  of  the 
stalls  are  hinged  to  accommodate  the  milkers  and  allow 
the  cows  to  pass  out  without  backing  over  the  manure 
gutter. 


Fig.  81 PERSPECTn'E  VIEW  OF  IMPROVED  COW  STALL 


Fig.  82 FLOOR  PLAN  OF  IMPROVED  COAV  STALL 


Figure  82  shows  the  floor  plan  of  cow  stall  and  Figure 
79  a  cross-section  of  cow  stall  and  stable  floor,  showing 


92  BARX      PLANS      AND     OUTBLILUIXUS 

location  of  manger  and  manure  gutter:  A,  gate;  B,  frout 
side  panel;  C,  framework  .supporting  side  panel;  D, 
swinging  panel;  E,  manger;  f,  g,  sides  of  manger;  //, 
manure  gutter ;  I:,  h,  gate  bars ;  m,  pin  arranged  with  a 
spring  for  fastening  gate;  n,  eye  for  chain;  li,  arrange- 
ment for  moving  swinging  panel. 

A    SANITARY   COW   BARN 

The  cow  barn  of  William  Burgess  of  Trenton,  X.  J,. 
shown  in  Figures  83  and  84,  is  fifty  by  thirty  feet,  con- 


Tn^^ 


w^m 


(A. 


Fig.    83 — A    SANITARY    COW    BARN 

taining  two  rows  of  stanchions,  fifteen  on  each  side.  The 
feeding  floor  runs  between.  The  feed  trough  is  of 
t.'oment,  and  is  slightly  pitched  to  one  end.  This  also 
acts  as  a  water  trough,  which  is  flushed  three  times  a 
day,    making    tlie    same    perfectly    clean    before    feeding. 


ILLINOIS     DAIKV     BARN 


93 


There  is  iiotliing  in  the  way  of  feed  or  hay  in  the 
building.  In  a  separate  building,  close  by,  is  a  feed 
room  and  place  for  keeping  the  barn  implements.  The 
milk  house,  cooling  and  sterilizing  departments  are  150 
lect  from  the  barn  in  a  separate  building.  The  silo  and 
fodder  lofts  are  200  feet  from  the  cow  barn,  connected 
'.vith  the  same  by  a  tramway.  The  barn  is  lighted  by 
ten  windows  on  each  side  and  three  at  each  end.     The 


Door- 

f* 

reedi' 

7^  rioojy 

<0 

reed 

Trough                                          ?      1 

5ta 

l.h 

J 

.1 

^      1 

Tig.    S-i FLOOR    PLAN    OF    A    SANITARY    COW    BARN 

entire  surface  of  the  barn  is  flushed  and  scrubbed  every 
day,  keeping   it   in  a  perfectly   sanitary   condition. 

AN    ILLINOIS    DAIRY    BARN 


The  dairy  barn  of  H.  A.  Browning  of  Elgin,  111.,  Fig- 
ures 85  and  86,  is  sixty  by  seventy-two  feet,  and  has  a 
stone  basement  which  is  eight  feet  high  in  the  clear. 
The  posts  of  barn  above  basement  are  eighteen  feet  high. 
The  frame  is  built  of  fine  timbers,  mostly  eight  by  eight 
inches,  sills  and  plates  six  by  eight  inches,  rafters  two 
by  six  inches,  braces  four  by  six  and  four  by  four  inches. 


94 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


girths  four  by  six  inches.  The  barn  is  sheathed  outside 
with  ten-inch  shiplap  siding.  The  barn  will  stable 
eighty-two  cows  and  has  besides  two  large  box  stalls. 
The  basement  has  two  driveways,  four  rows  of  stanchions, 
and  three  feeding  alleys.  The  stable  is  ceiled  overhead 
and  has  a  complete  system  of  ventilation.  The  entire 
basement  has  cement  floors. 


Fig.    85 AN    ILLINOIS    DAIRY    BARN 


The  barn  above  basement  has  room  for  over  100  tons 
hay,  feed  room,  grain  bins,  grinding  and  stalk  cutting 
machinery,  but  no  silos.  The  small  building  shown  in 
Figure  85  is  a  milk  house  and  is  not  attached  to  barn. 
This  building  is  fourteen  by  twenty-four  feet,  has  a 
cement  cooling  vat  that  will  hold  forty  eight-gallon  cans, 
cement  floor,    and  is  supplied  with  water  from  a  cistern 


ANOTHER     ILLINOIS     BARN  95 

and   well   located   on   higher   ground   and   piped   to    vat. 
The  barn  cost  about  $2500  to  build. 

A     TEN-SIDED     DAIRY     BARN 

A  dairy  barn  decagonal  in  form,  each  of  the  sides  being 
sixteen  feet,  was  built  by  P.  H.  Monroe  of  Plainfield, 
111.,  and  is  shown  in  Figures  87,  88  and  89,  The  base- 
ment is  eight  feet  in  the  clear,  and  the  studding  for  the 


Fig.    86 — INSIDE    AN    ILLINOIS    DAIRY    BARN 

two  upper  stories  twenty-four  feet.  The  studding  is  of 
pine  two  by  six  inches,  joists  two  by  eight,  beams  and 
posts  two  by  eight  and  two  by  six.  It  is  covered  with 
drop  siding.  The  silo  is  built  of  two  by  fours,  spiked 
together  edgewise.  There  is  a  concrete  walk  six  feet 
wide  behind  the  cows,  sloping  two  inches  from  wall  to 
rear  end  of  platform,  which  is  of  board  flooring.     The 


96 


BARN      PLANS     AND     orXBUILDINOS 


basement  is  ventilated  by  a  chute  sliown  near  d  in  Fig- 
ure 88,  which  extends  to  dormer  window  in  loft.  Fresh 
air  is  admitted  by  four  openings  in  the  side  wall  of  base- 
ment stable.  The  basement  will  accommodate  twenty- 
five  cows  and  bull,  and  the  temperature  in  the  coldest 
weather  never  falls  below  fifty  degrees.     In  the  basement 


Fig.    87 — TEN-SIDED    ILLINOIS    DAIRY    BARN 


plan.  Figure  89,  a  is  the  walk,  h  platform  for  the  cows, 
c  mangers,  d  feeding  alley,  e  meal  and  bran  bin,  f  feed  alley 
and  trolleyway  for  silage,  g  calf  pens,  h  shed  for  young  cat- 
tle, i  silo  sixteen  feet  in  diameter  by  thirty-two  feet  high. 
*S^  shows  the  location  of  joists  and  beams  supporting  the 
floor  above.  In  the  plan  of  the  first  story.  Figure  S8,  are 
shown  the  five  horse  stalls,  and  d  is  the  space  for  storage  of 


BARiN"     FOR     OXE      111IM)REL)      COWS 


97 


vehicles  and  other  farm  implements.  The  dotted  line 
sliows  the  location  of  beams  supporting  the  floor  above. 
The  space  above  this  is  used  for  the  storage  of  hay  and 
fodder. 


Fig.    89 — BASEMENT    PLAN    OF    ILLINOIS    DAIRY    BARN 
BARN  FOR  ONE   HUNDRED  COWS 

The  barn  shown  by  Figures  90  and  91  was  designed  by 
Joseph  E.  Wing  of  Ohio.  An  examination  of  the  plans 
will   show   many  points   of  advantage.      The   barn   is   to 


98 


BARN     PLAKS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


hold  100  COWS  with  some  of  their  calves,  heifers,  calving 
cows  and  bulls.  There  must  then  be  nearly  100  stalls 
and  a  number  of  box  stalls  as  well.  The  box  stalls  must 
be  of  easy  access  to  the  other  stalls,  for  often  it  is  desired, 
especially  with  cows  of  the  beef  breeds,  to  allow  calves 
to  go  to  their  mothers  periodically  and  back  again  to  their 
quarters.  There  is  need  of  abundant  light  and  air  and 
of  convenience  of  feeding  and  cleaning  out.  All  these 
things  are  well  embodied  in  this  plan.  And  it  is  not  an 
expensive  barn  to  build,  considering  the  room  in  it.  Then 
there  is  the  neat  sunny  open  court  which  can  and  should 
be  extended  by  building  either  an  open  shed  or  a  high 


Fig.     90 PERSPECTrSE    VIEW     OF     100-COW    BARN 


tight  board  fence,  continuing  the  west  wall  on  down  to 
shut  off  the  too  rough  breezes.  In  this  court  there  is  a 
large  cement  water  trough.  Many  do  not  consider  the 
plan  of  watering  in  the  stable  the  best  under  ordinary 
conditions  and  think  the  little  airing  the  cows  get 
stepping  out  to  water  is  good  for  them  and  profitable  in 
the  long  run. 

Play  is  taken  in  at  three  points,  at  each  end  of  the 
ell  and  at  the  center  of  the  connecting  wing.  This 
driveway  will  bo  closed  in  winter  or  when  hay  is  not 
being  put  in,  and  feed  rooms  or  one  feed  room  and  ime 
large  box  stall  made  therein.  A  hoist  here  takes  tip  grain 
and  ground  feed  to  bins  over  the  driveway.  Tt  would 
be  an  excellent  plan  to  erect  a  grinding  and  pumping 
windmill    here,    and    arcln'tofturally   it   might   be    a    help 


A      NOVA      SCOTIA      BARN 


99 


to  erect  over  this  doorway  and  bin  room  a  gable  like  the 
others,  only  carrying  it  up  a  little  higher,  which  would 
give  more  room  and  light  above. 

The  only  criticism  of  this  plan  is  that  it  is  a  bit  narrow, 
thirty  feet,  but  with  the  manure  carriers  and  feed  carriers 
in  use  nowadays  one  need  not  drive  either  before  or 
behind  the  cows.     Windows  should  be  put  in  with  sashes 


nd  CI 

i   

?  


1 

^ — 
j — 

1 

Fig.  91 — FLOOR  PLAN  OF  100-COW  BARN 

almost  continuous,  three  feet  high,  hinged  at  the  bottom 
edge  and  opening  inward  at  the  top,  a  whole  row  all 
turned  at  one  movement  of  a  crank,  a  shaft  with  arms 
thereon  running  through  to  operate  the  affair.  A  venti- 
lating system  as  described  on  Page  106  should  be  arranged 
for. 

COMBINED    DAIRY    AND     FRUIT    FARM 


In  the  Annapolis  valley  of  Nova  Scotia,  John  Don- 
aldson recently  built  a  circular  roofed  barn,  which  is  a 
combination    of    stock    barn    and    apple    house,    as    the 


A    Nova    sco'iia    barn 


101 


accompanying  plans,  Figures  92  and  93,  show.  lie 
claims  that  the  circular  roof  is  a  cheap  roof  in  construc- 
tion, and  it  certainly  has  great  storage  capacity  under- 
neath. The  barn,  which  is  fifty-two  by  ninety  feet  in 
size,  has  no  hay  in  the  first  story  or  basement,  yet  has  a 
capacity  of  200  tons.  There  are  no  cross  timbers  inside 
of  the  roof,  whioli  makes  it  very  convenient  in  mowing 
away  the  hay. 

The  basement  walls  are  of  solid  concrete,  as  is  also 
the  inner  wall  surrounding  the  apple  cellar.  The  walls 
are  fourteen  inches  thick  at  the  bottom  and  taper  to  ten 
inches  at  the  top,  with  a  hight  of  eight  feet.  It  took 
110  barrels  Portland  cement  and  sixty-two  loads  gravel 


CATTLE   MAnuPE 

9 

^            APfLC    CtLLAR 

Hens 

t     J 

.^       none  wnuPC 

1 

^                            i 
ere.             - 

Fig.     93— MAIN     FLOOR    AND    BASEMENT    PLANS    OF    NOVA 
SCOTIA     BARN 


to  construct  them.  The  labor  cost  of  building  the  cement 
walls  was  $70  and  the  total  cost  about  $380.  The  outside 
doors  nearly  all  slide,  and  the  stable  doors  are  fitted  with 
patent  hangers  which  make  them  very  tight.  The 
stables  are  sheathed  throughout,  well  ventilated  and 
furnished  with  plenty  of  light.  The  building  is  well 
lighted  throughout,  for  there  are  630  panes  of  glass  in 
the  building,  the  smallest  being  eight  by  ten  inches  in 
size.     The   barn   cost   complete   about   $3000. 

A  good  water  supply  has  been  put  in.  A  windmill 
forces  the  water  into  a  large  tank  over  the  horse  stable. 
The  cow  stable  is  supplied  with  basins  which  are  always 


102  BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

full  of  water.  A  good  herd  of  Jersey  cows  are  kept. 
Mr.  Donaldson,  has  three  ends  in  view  in  keeping  stock. 
They  are  the  converting  of  raw  material  on  the  farm 
into  marketable  products,  as  a  means  of  supplying  ferti- 
lizer and  as  a  direct  source  of  farm  income. 

As  the  plans  show,  in  Figure  93,  a  large  space  in  the 
barn  is  devoted  to  the  storage  of  apples,  which  constitute 
one  of  the  chief  sources  of  farm  income  in  the  Annapolis 
valley.  The  apples  are  largely  packed  by  the  growers  on 
the  farm,  and  the  packing  season  extends  over  several 
months  of  the  year.  Thus  the  packing  of  apples  and 
the  feeding  and  milking  of  dairy  cows  furnishes  plenty 
and  profitable  employment  during  the  long  winter 
months.  The  storage  of  everything  under  one  roof 
facilitates  work  and  also  reduces  the  expense  of  keeping 
up  farm  buildings. 

MODERN   ADDITION    TO   A   DAIRY   BARN 

The  New  Jersey  Experiment  Station  built  a  frame 
structure  thirty-eight  feet  long  by  thirty-two  feet  wide, 
projecting  at  right  angles  from  the  main  barn.  It  is 
one  story  high,  the  loft  connecting  with  the  second  story 
of  the  main  building,  so  that  coarse  foods  can  easily  be 
transferred  to  the  feeding  floor  of  the  new  structure. 

The  plan  of  the  main  floor  is  shown  in  Figure  96.  The 
ceiling  is  sheathed  with  matched  lumber.  The  floor  is 
made  of  Portland  cement  and  coarse  gravel  (one  part  to 
eight)  three  inches  thick.  This  is  covered  with  a  layer 
of  Portland  cement  one  inch  thick,  making  the  total 
thickness  of  the  floor  four  inches.  The  maniTre  gutters 
are  sixteen  inches  wide  and  five  inches  deep.  A  slightly 
sloping  surface  in  the  stalls  and  gutters  leads  all  water 
to  the  trap  doors,  where  it  is  conducted  to  cemented 
tanks  below. 


104 


BAUX      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


The  inangers  are  built  in  and  composed  of  the  same 
material  as  the  floor.  A  cross-section  of  the  floor  and 
mangers  of  the  stable  is  shown  in  Figure  95.  The  depth 
of  the  manger  is  three  inches  in  the  center,  rounding 
up  to  the  level  of  the  floor.  The  width  is  one  foot  ten 
inches.  It  is  used  only  as  a  feeding  manger,  the  water 
being  supplied  in  individual  basins,  which  work 
automatically. 

The  stable  contains  thirteen  stalls  in  two  rows,  which 


Fig.    95 — CROSS-SECTION    OF    FLOOR   AND    STALLS 


face  each  other,  besides  two  special  stalls  for  bulls  and 
two  box  stalls,  which  may  be  used  either  for  calves  or 
older  animals.  The  feeding  floor  is  seven  feet  wide.  The 
two  bull  stalls,  as  well  as  the  calf  pens,  are  constructed 
of  spruce  posts,  with  framework  of  gas  pipe.  Figure  94. 
The  cows  arc  fastened  simply  with  a  bow  chain,  attached 
on  either  side  to  a  spruce  post  five  inches  in  diameter. 
The  bull   stalls  are   connected  with  outside  pens,  twelve 


A     Ki:W     JKRSKV   BARN 


10^ 


by  twenty-six   feet,   where    the   animals    are   turned   out 
every  day  for  exercise. 

Under  the  barn  is  a  basement  divided  into  two  rooms, 
one  of  which  is  used  for  storing  wagons  and  farm  tools, 


Fig.    96 — FLOOR    PLAN    OF    DAIRY    ADDITION 


while  the  other  contains  the  manure  pits.  These  pits 
are  frequently  cleaned,  but  the  cement  floor  above  pre- 
vents odors  from  reaeliing  the  main  floor;  hence  the 
arrangement   is  a   sanitary   one. 


106  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

The  system  of  ventilation  originated  by  Prof.  King 
vvas  used  in  this  barn,  and  is  shown  in  Figure  95.  A 
single  ventilating  flue,  DE,  rises  above  the  roof  of  the 
barn,  and  is  divided  below  the  roof  into  two  arms,  AAD, 
which  terminate  near  the  level  of  the  stable  door,  AA. 
These  openings  are  provided  with  valves,  which  may  be 
opened  and  closed  at  will.  Two  other  ventilators  are 
placed  at  BB,  to  be  opened  when  the  stable  is  too  warm, 
but  are  provided  with  slides,  to  be  closed  at  other  timoe. 
C  is  a  direct  ventilator,  leading  into  the  main  shaft  and 
opening  from  the  ceiling,  to  admit  a  current  of  warm 
air  at  all  times  to  the  main  shaft,  to  help  force  the 
draft.  The  ventilating  shafts  are  made  of  matched 
boards  carefully  placed,  so  that  the  flue  is  air-tight. 
They  are  six  by  sixteen  inches  and  open  into  a  chamber 
above  the  roof,  three  feet  square.  The  fresh  air  enters 
the  stable  on  either  side  of  the  barn,  as  shown  in  the  plan 
at  FG,  and  the  foul  air  is  sent  out  at  AA. 

The  silo  is  circular  in  form,  twelve  feet  inside  diameter 
and  thirty  feet  deep,  with  a  brick  foundation  ten  inches 
wide,  carried  six  feet  below  the  surface  of  the  ground. 
The  bottom  is  cemented  and  is  five  feet  below  the  sills, 
which  are  made  of  two  by  six-inch  studding,  cut  on  the 
slant  of  the  radius  of  the  silo  circle,  imbedded  in  mortar 
and  toe-nailed  together.  The  plates  are  made  in  the 
same  way  and  spiked  to  studs,  which  are  two  by  six,  and 
eighteen  inches  apart.  The  lining  consists  of  two  thick- 
nesses of  half-inch  boards  (the  inner  layer  of  pine  and 
the  outer  one  of  spruce),  with  tarred  paper  between, 
painted  inside  with  gas  tar  and  gasoline,  mixed  in  the 
proportion  of  two  to  one.  The  siding  consists  of  one 
layer  of  inch  hemlock  boards,  nailed  to  braces  between 
studs  and  covered  with  cedar  shingles.  Holes  bored 
between  each  stud  and  covered  with  wire  netting  permit 
a  circulation  of  air  between  the  siding  and  lining,  which 
aids   the   preservation   of   the   latter.     The     structure     is 


A      KEW      YORK      BARN 


107 


roofed  with  dormer  window  for  filling  and  with  ventilating 
cap,  and  is  joined  to  the  barn  by  a  passage,  also  roofed. 
The  silo  is  emptied  by  means  of  the  "Schlichter  method" 
of  continuous  opening,  the  silage  dropping  through  a 
chute  two  feet  square,  upon  the  floor  of  the  passageway, 
from  which  it  is  conveyed  to  the  mangers  of  the  animals. 

AK    ORANGE     COUNTY,    N.     Y.,     COW     STABLE 

A  portion  of  the  cow  stables,  built  on  at  the  north  end 
of  the  barn,  on  an  Orange  County,  N.  Y.,  dairy  farm,  is 


Fig.    97 INTERIOR    OF    ORANGE    COUNTY    COW    BARN 

shown  in  Figure  97.  The  feeding  floor  is  ten  feet  wide 
and  each  side  twelve  feet  for  stable.  The  main  barn  is 
sixty  by  forty  feet,  the  cattle  barn  sixty  by  thirty-four 
feet,  with  a  milk  room  on  the  west  side  twelve  feet  square. 
The  cow  stable  is  a  one-story  structure,  with  a  fourteen- 


108 


BAKX      I'LAXS     A.NU     Ol'TBllUtlXCiS 


foot  monitor  roof,  five  window  ventilators  on  each  side 
overhead,  three  doors  at  the  north  end  (two  for  cattle  to 
enter),  a  smooth,  clean  floor,  the  Buckley  basin  watering 
device,  regulated  by  a  tub  of  water  in  the  milk  room, 
Smith's  swing  stanchions,  and  a  manure  gutter  in  rear 
of  cows. 

The  labor  of  ventilation,  watering,  feeding  and  clean- 
ing the  stables  is  here  reduced  to  a  minimum.  The 
main  barn  is  packed  full  of  hay  annually.     It  also  con- 


-1 

^^■"" 

CL 

C 

1 

u-  ■                               1 

n 


Fig.  98 PLAN  OF  BASEMENT 


Fig.  99 — SECTION 


tains  stables  for  six  horses,  bedding  material  for  cows 
and  feed.  A  circular  silo,  forty  feet  in  diameter  and 
high  to  hold  150  tons,  opens  into  the  main  barn. 

A    WESTCHESTER    COUNTY,    N.    Y.,   DAIRY    BARN 


The  general  style  of  one  of  the  best  dairy  barns  is 
shown  in  the  four  illustrations  which  follow.  It  belongs 
to  Mr.  Edward  B.  Brady  of  Westchester  County,  N.  Y. 
Figure  100  rei)resents  the  elevation  of  the  barn.  It  is 
situated  upon  the  side  of  a  hill,  in  which  the  basement 
stable  is  placed.  This  basement  is  of  stone,  and  nine  feet 
high.  The  barn  is  twenty  feet  high  above  the  stables, 
eighty  feet  long,  and  twenty-eight  feet  wide.  The  yard  is 
surrounded  with  a  stone  wall,  and  a  manure  pit  is  dug 
under  tlie  center  of  the  building,  largo  enough   to  back  a 


110 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


wagon  into.  The  basement  has  four  doors,  and  is  amply 
lighted  and  ventilated.  The  floor  is  divided  in  the  center 
by  a  wide  feed  passage,  upon  each  side  of  which  are 
stanchions  to  hold  the  cows.  There  are  no  feed  troughs, 
but  the  feed  is  placed  upon  the  floor  before  each  cow. 
The  stanchions  are  made  of  oak,  are  self-fastening  by 
means  of  an  iron  loop,  which  is  lifted  by  its  beveled  end 
as  the  stanchion  is  closed — falling  over  and  holding  it 
securely.  The  space  between  the  stanchions  for  the  cow's 
neck  is  six  inches.  Each  cow  has  a  space  of  three  feet,  and 
there  are  no  stalls  or  partitions  between  them.  The  floor 
upon  which  the  cows  stand  is  four  and  one-half  feet  wide. 


3  [ 


Fig.    101 — PLAN    OF    FLOOR 


To  the  rear  is  a  manure  gutter,  eighteen  inches  wide,  and 
six  inches  deep,  and  behind  the  gutter  a  passage  of  three 
feet  and  six  inches — in  all  giving  a  space  of  fourteen  feet 
from  the  center  of  the  feed  passage  to  the  walls  upon 
either  side.  This  is  shown  in  the  plan,  Figure  98,  in 
which  a  is  the  grain  pit,  h  the  spring  house,  c  the  feed 
passage,  and  d  the  manure  gutters.  The  same  is  seen  in 
cross-section  in  Figure  99.  The  barn  floor,  shown  in  Fig- 
ure 101,  has  four  bays  and  three  floors.  Two  of  the  floors 
have  sliding  doors,  opening  into  the  barn  yard,  and 
spacious  windows  above  them,  as  seen  in  Figure  100. 
Chutes  are  made  in  the  floors,  by  which  hay  is  thrown 
down  into  the  feed  passage.  These  also  serve  for  ventila- 
tion, in  connection  with  the  cupolas  upon  the  roof. 


ANOTHER     NEW      YORK     BARN 


111 


ANOTHER    ORANGE    COUNTY^    N.    Y.,    DAIRY    BARN 

The  accompanying  engravings  illustrate  a  milk  dairy- 
barn,  belonging  to  J.  E.  S.  Gardner  of  Orange  County, 
N.  Y.  The  barn  is  110  feet  long,  thirty-two  feet  wide, 
twenty  feet  high,  with  a  basement  nine  feet  high.  The 
building  is  on  a  slope,  facing  west.  In  front  is  a  pit  for 
preserving  brewers'  grains,  thirty  feet  long,  nine  deep, 
and  sixteen  wide.  The  interior  arrangements  are  very 
convenient.      Figure   103   shows   the   main   floor.      There 


Fig.    102 VIEW    OF   AN    ORANGE    COUNTY'^    N.    Y.^    BARN 


are  six  horse  stalls,  sixteen  feet  long,  with  a  manure 
chute  in  the  center,  leading  to  the  manure  pit  in  the  base- 
ment beneath;  a  driving  floor,  twenty  feet  wide,  with 
stairs  and  feed  room,  and  a  hay  mow,  seventy-two  by 
thirty-two  feet,  with  hay  chutes  leading  to  the  feeding 
floor  below.  Figure  104  shows  a  plan  of  the  basement, 
in  which  are  thirty-six  stanchions  along  the  center,  with 
doors  at  each  end.  In  front  of  the  cows  is  an  alley,  six- 
teen feet  wide,  for  feeding,  through  which  a  wagon  can 
be  driven  from  end  to  end.     Behind  the  stanchions  is  a 


112 


BARN      PLANS     AiM)     OUTBUIMJINGS 


standing  platform  for  the  cows,  with  a  drop  fifteen  inches 
wide,  then  a  walk  of  three  feet,  and  a  manure  pit  seven 
and  one-half  feet  wide  and  four  feet  deep,  with  a  cement 
Jioor.     In  the  rear  are  several  sliding  doors,  one  in  each 


,  MANURE  SHOOT 

Ifeed 

L 

BAY    MOW 
73X3£ 

FLOOR 

■-   a: 

.    o 

HAr  SHOOr               HAY  SHOOT 

n           n 

STAIRS 

mill 

■ M 

Fig.    103 — PLAN    OF    MAIN    FLOOR 


1                                              MANURE 

PIT                          mUMURE  shootI 

1 

iiiiinMiiiiMi'i''miiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 

1                          -TOw"- 

1  CELLAR 

i'ig.     104 PLAN     Ul'    BASKiMENT 

bent,  for  removing  manure.  The  pit  for  grains  is  covered 
with  raih'oad  iron  and  flagging.  A  perspective  view  of 
the  barn,  showing  its  situation,  is  given  in  Figure  102. 

AN     EXTENSION     DAIRY     BARN 


A  cow  barn  that  can  be  easily  extended  as  the  herd 
may  be  enlarged  will  be  found  very  convenient  by  many. 
The  size  of  a  herd  is  frequently  restricted  by  the  accom- 
modations afforded  by  the  barn,  and  when  an  increase 
might  otherwise  be  desirable,  it  is  found  objectionable  on 
this  account.  It  is  not  always  possible  to  pull  down  one's 
barns  to  build  larger,  but  when  it  is  convenient  to  add 
to  them  at  either  end,  increased  room  can  be  gained  with 
but   little   outlay.     A   dairv  barn   is   herewith   illustrated 


ENLARGING      A      DAIRY      BARN 


113 


that  can  be  extended  to  any  desirable  limits  without 
changing  the  plan.  In  these  days  of  steam,  and  all  kinds 
of  machinery,  there  is  no  difficulty  in  using  long,  narrow 
buildings,  for,  with  the  hay  fork  and  the  hay  carrier,  the 
forage  can  be  readily  stored  in  the  longest  barn  and 
dropped  wherever  it  is  desired,  without  trouble,  and  by 
using  a  tram  road  and  light  feed  cars,  300  cows  can  be 
fed  from  a  central  feed  room  as  easily  as  thirty  can  be 
in  the  old-fashioned  way.  Figure  105  is  the  plan  of  a 
cow  barn  that  will  be  found  as  convenient  for  a  small 
herd  of  twenty  or  thirty  cows  as  for  one  of  ten  times 


Eig.     105 PLAN     OP     DAIRY     BARN 


that  number.  The  building  may  be  twenty-four  or 
forty-two  feet  wide.  The  plan  shown  is  forty-two  feet 
in  width,  and  accommodates  two  double  rows  of  cows. 
If  room  for  only  one  double  row  is  desired,  twenty-four 
will  answer,  but  thirty  is  better.  The  plan  gives  a  cen- 
tral passage  for  feeding,  six  feet  wide,  with  a  tram  roadway 
laid  down  in  it.  On  each  side  of  this  are  the  double 
rows  of  stalls,  with  a  feed  trough  for  each.  The  floors  on 
which  the  cows  stand  are  seven  feet  wide,  which  gives 
room  for  a  gutter  behind  each  row,  and  for  a  feed  trough 
four  feet  wide,  divided  lengthwise  into  two  by  a  suffi- 
ciently high  partition,  each  part  being  two  feet  wide.  The 
feed  is  readily  thrown  into  these  troughs  from  the  central 
passage,  along  which  the  feed  car  can  be  drawn  by  a  small 
horse,  or  be  pushed  by  a  man,     A  turn  table  is  provided 


114 


BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


in  the  center  of  the  passage,  to  admit  of  a  car  being 
brought  with  empty  milk  cans  from  the  wash  house  in 
the  rear,  or  with  the  full  ones  to  the  milk  house  after 
milking.  The  doorways  are  made  very  capacious,  and 
the  doors  are  double;  the  doorways  may  be  left  open 
during  the  summer,  the  doors  being  fastened  back  against 
the  wall.  The  upper  floor  is  kept  for  hay,  fodder  and 
feed;  these  being  placed  at  each  end,  leave  the  center 
open  and  free  for  cutting  and  mixing  the  feed.  Here 
should  be  a  fodder  cutter  and  a  large  mixing  box,  in  the 


Fig.     106 — VIEW    OF     DAIRY    BARN 


side  of  which  there  should  be  a  spout  to  carry  feed  to  the 
car  on  the  floor  below.  If  the  food  is  steamed,  the  boiler 
can  be  kept  in  a  rear  building,  not  shown  in  the  plan, 
the  steam  being  carried  to  an  engine,  which  would  work 
the  fodder  cutter,  and  the  steamer,  both  on  the  upper 
floor.  This  would  be  i)referab]e  to  having  the  boiler  in 
the  main  building,  and  would  avoid  much  risk  from  fire. 
In  Figure  lOG  is  shown  the  elevation  of  the  building.  The 
central  door  above  is  for  tlio  admission  of  feed  to  the  bins. 
A  door  is  provided  at  each  end  for  unloading  fodder,  a 
hay  fork  and  a  hay  carrier  being  used  for  tlie  unloading. 
There  should  be  ample  ventilation  provided  by  means  of 


ENLARGING       A       BARN 


116 


shafts,  and  these  cau  also  be  utilized  for  dropping  hay  to 
the  floor  beneath.  When  an  extension  is  desired,  it  is 
only  necessary  to  add  a  bent  or  two  at  each  end,  carry 
out  the  roof  and  floor,  and  remove  the  ends. 

ENLARGING  A  BARN  FOR  DAIRY  PURPOSES 

A  common  barn  can  be  easily  and  cheaply  changed  into 
a  dairy  barn  of  large  capacity  by  employing  such  a  plan 
as  that  shown  in  the  perspective  view  of  Figure  107.  Two 
wings,  fifteen  feet  wide,  with  shed  roofs,  are  extended 
out  at  right  angles  from  each  side  of  the  old  barn  at  one 
end.  The  interior  arrangement  is  shown  in  the  floor  plan 
on  the  left.     A  feed  car,  with  a  track,  is  arranged  for 


;., 

(^ 

^1 

::__, 

" 

M 

c-  ; ; 

^c^ 

:!•; 

!  j 

^.■?,. 

r.;;p,. 

■^,,::r:-::::::.:r--.n^v,::T:r-:-::::- 

11 1 1  i.un  iiiiiTiiiiiiiii  II  nil 

Ca.it 'z.     wt«.//i. 

Fig.  107 GROUND   PLAN  AND   PERSPECTRE  OF  ENLARGED   BARN 


the  feed  floor  and  the  feeding  alley  in  front  of  the  cows. 
A  double  silo,  grain  room  and  calf  pens,  with  lofts  over 
them,  occupy  one  side  of  the  barn  proper,  while  calf  pens 
and  a  hay  bay  occupy  the  other  side.  Thus  the  main  barn 
is  used  mainly  for  the  storing  of  feed,  while  the  addition 
is  given  up  to  the  stalls.  The  expense  of  such  a  plan  will 
be  very  much  less  than  would  be  entailed  by  the  building 
of  a  new  barn,  or  even  a  lengthening  of  the  old  one,  while 
the  plan  shown  herewith  gives  a  much  more  convenient 
arrangement  than  could  otherwise  be  had. 

An  enterprising  Pennsylvania  farmer  recently  decided 
to  abandon  general  farming  and  make  a  specialty  of  dairy- 
ing.    This  necesoitated  additional  quarters  for  the  cows 


IIG 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


and  they  were  put  on  as  an  ell  to  the  old  bam  in  the  way 
shown  in  Figure  108.  The  addition  is  one-story,  with 
an  abundance  of  light,  and  is  devoted  entirely  to  stalls, 
the  feed  being  stored  in  the  main  barn  and  brought  to 
the  addition  on  the  second  floor  from  the  second  floor 
of  the  barn.     It  is  then  put  down  into  the  mangers  by 

chutes.  The  addition  has 
two  rows  of  stalls  facing  a 
feed  floor.  Where  a  cellar 
can  be  provided  under  the 
addition  the  manure  can 
easily  be  disposed  of. 
Otherwise  it  must  be 
wheeled  out  each  day  to  a 
manure  shed.  Space  in  the 
bam  proper  is  reserved  for  the  rearing  of  calves. 


Fig.    108 PENNSYLVANIA 

BARN 


M  If. 


NEW  STYLE  CALF  PENS 

The  ordinary  calf  pens  in  barns  are  dark,  gloomy  places, 
wholly  unsuitable  for  the  growth  of  calves.  Let  in  the 
light  by  taking  down  a  part 
of  the  high  board  sides  and 
replace  it  with  one-inch 
heavy  wire  poultry  netting, 
as  shown  in  Figure  109. 
With  the  small  mesh  calves 
will  not  get  their  feet 
through  it.  The  pens  will 
thus  be  made  much  more 
light,  cheerful  and  wholesome. 


Fig.  109 — WIRE  CALF 
PARTITIONS 


CEMENT  FLOORS  FOR  COW  STABLES 

Much  more  durable  than  wood  and  more  cleanly  when 
properly  made  are  cement  floors.  The  construction  of 
these  is  simple,  yet  a  few  principles  must  be  carefully 


CEMENT      STABLE       FLOORS  117 

followed.  Excavate  to  the  proper  depth  and  level  the 
floor.  Fill  with  from,  two  to  four  inches  of  concrete  made 
by  mixing  small  or  crushed  stones  or  gravel  with  cement. 
The  gravel  must  be  free  from  earth,  else  the  cement  will 
not  stick.  One  part  cement  to  six  parts  of  coarse  material 
is  sufficient  for  the  foundation.     Mix  the  two  together. 


Fig.    110 — SHOWING    PARTITION    AND    CEMENT    FLOORS 

then  wet  with  water,  and,  after  spreading,  pack  it  down 
with  a  rammer. 

The  finishing  coat  should  be  made  of  sharp,  fine  sand 
and  Portland  cement,  using  two  parts  sand  to  one  part 
cement.  It  is  absolutely  necessary  that  the  sand  be  free 
from  earth.  Lay  the  finishing  coat  in  sections  in  order 
to  get  it   smooth   and  of  uniforna  thickness.     Begin  at 


lis  BARN     PLxVNS     AND     OL'JBllLblNUS 

one  end  of  the  building,  and  three  or  four  feet  from  the 
side,  lay  down  a  strip  of  scantling  one  inch  thick.  Fill 
this  space  with  cement  and  smooth  it  off  with  a  board 
float.  If  a  steel  trowel  is  used,  it  will  make  the  surface 
so  smooth  that  cattle  will  slip  on  it.  Next  remove  the 
strip  and  lay  another  section  three  or  four  feet  wide,  and 
so  on  until  the  floor  is  completed. 

The  floor  should  be  kept  wet  and  allowed  to  dry  slowly, 
when  it  will  be  much  harder  and  will  not  crack  a.s  if  dried 
quickly.  In  Figure  110  the  gutter  is  made  of  cement  and 
the  edges  next  the  cows  are  rounded  to  prevent  breaking. 
Many  use  two  by  six-inch  joist  for  the  edge  and  set  it 
in  cement,  as  it  will  not  wear  out  where  the  cows  stand. 
To  hold  partitions,  before  laying  cement,  set  a  wooden 
block  or  drive  in  an  iron  rod.  Iron  is  better,  for  it  will 
not  rot  out.  One-inch  pipe  cut  fifteen  inches  long  i^ 
suitable  for  this  purpose. 

THE    HOARD    STALL    FOR    DAIRY    CATTLE 

This  stall,  Figure  111,  was  perfected  by  ex-Governor 
W.  D.  Hoard  of  Wisconsin,  one  of  the  most  eminent  dairy 
authorities  of  this  country.  After  many  years  of  experi- 
menting with  different  kinds  of  stalls  and  fastenings, 
he  has  adopted  this  one.  A  closely  boarded  partition 
about  four  feet  high  forms  the  front  of  the  stall.  Each 
cow  has  three  and  one-half  feet  in  width.  The  floor  is 
made  tight  and  there  is  no  drop  in  the  rear  of  the  cows, 
except  the  thickness  of  one  plank,  which  is  the  double 
floor  of  the  stall.  The  feeding  rack  is  constructed  for 
two  purposes:  (1)  To  contain  any  hay  or  roughage  tliiit 
may  be  fed  the  cow.  The  slats  arc  put  on  wide  enougii 
so  the  cow  can  easily  get  her  nose  between  them.  (2)  To 
force  the  cow  when  standing  to  stand  with  her  hind  feet 
in  the  rear  of  the  cross  bar  across  the  stall  floor. 

In  constructing  the  feeding  rack  nail  a  two  by  eight-inch 
piece  of  scantling  edgewise  against  the  board  partition. 


Hoard    dairv     stall 


119 


Tliis  constitutes  the  bottom  of  the  rack  and  should  be 
placed  about  forty  inches  from  the  floor.  Piace  the  top 
scantling-  about  two  feet  from  the  partition.  This  makes 
the  feeding  rack  eight  inches  wide  at  the  bottom  and 
two  feet  wide  at  top.  In  the  center  of  the  bottom  scant- 
ling fasten  a  ring  to  tie  the  halter  to.     Fasten  the  cow 


Fig.     Ill — THE     HOARD     DAIRY     STALL 

with  a  common  web  halter,  she  wearing  the  head  piece 
all  the  time ;  the  halter  end  of  the  rope  has  a  safety  snap 
to  fasten  into  the  ring  of  the  halter  under  the  throat.  To 
prevent  the  cow  from  getting  loose  it  is  well  to  divide 
the  end  of  the  rope  into  two  strands  each  six  inches 
long  and  put  a  snap  in  each,  fastening  both  into  the 
ring  when  tying  the  cow. 


120  BARN     PL.VNS     AXD     OUTBUILDINGS 

The  grain  and  ensilage  box  is  placed  on  that  side 
of  the  stall  opposite  to  the  one  the  cow  usually  lies  on. 
If  she  lies  on  her  left  side,  place  the  grain  box  on  the  right 
side,  as  seen  in  the  engraving.  This  box  is  large  enough 
to  contain  the  ensilage  and  grain  feed,  and  is  reached  by 
an  opening  in  the  partition.  It  is  best  to  have  the  feed 
box  slant  down  toward  the  cow,  so  that  all  the  feed  wilJ 
easily  work  down  to  the  end  nearest  her.  The  box  should 
be  long  enough  to  extend  from  the  partition  into  the 
stall  as  far  as  the  upper  part  of  the  feed  rack  project9 
and  about  eighteen  or  twenty  inches  wide  and  sixteen 
inches  deep.  If  placed  sufficiently  slanting,  the  feed  will 
easily  work  down  to  the  lower  end  next  the  cow,  so  that 
she  will  not  need  to  bring  her  hind  feet  onto  her 
bedding  in  order  to  reach  the  contents  of  the  box. 

In  placing  the  bar  across  the  stall  bring  the  cow's  head 
squarely  up  against  the  feeding  rack;  then  just  forward 
of  her  hind  feet  nail  down  a  two  by  three-inch  scantling. 
rill  the  space  forward  of  the  bar  with  bedding,  which, 
being  without  waste,  will  last  till  entirely  worn  out.  In 
this  way  each  cow  has  her  bed  in  true  proportion  to  her 
length.  It  should  be  made  fresh  once  a  week,  however, 
for  the  sake  of  health.  This  stall  is  commended  to  all 
dairymen  who  are  looking  for  a  clean,  comfortable  method 
of  stabling  dairy  cows. 


-/ 


CHAPTER  IV 

CATTLE  SHELTERS 

With  winter  come  the  piercing  winds,  the  intense  cold, 
and,  unless  well  protected,  the  greatest  suffering  that  the 
farm  animals  experience  during  the  whole  year.  It  is 
the  season  when  to  keep  the  stock  warm  is  no  less  a  mat- 
ter of  economy  than  to  keep  them  well  fed;  in  fact,  they 
are  fed  in  a  great  measure  to  keep  up  the  animal  heat, 
the  food  serving  much  the  same  end  that  coal  does  to  the 
furnace.  This  being  true,  it  is  reasonable  to  infer  that 
an  animal  will  require  less  food  to  maintain  the  proper 
temperature  of  the  body  were  it  warmed  in  part  by  other 
means.  The  inference  is  a  true  one,  as  thousands  of  ex- 
periments show;  in  fact,  it  goes  without  questioning  that 
farm  stock,  when  sheltered  from  the  cold  of  winter, 
require  considerably  less  food  to  keep  them  in  a  good, 
thriving  condition  than  do  those  animals  that  are  con- 
tinually exposed  to  the  weather.  Shelter  then  has  much 
more  in  its  favor  than  simply  the  humane  side,  which 
alone  is  enough  to  warrant  the  comfortable  protection  of 
animals.  There  is  an  appeal  to  the  pocket  as  well  as  to 
sympathy  in  the  lowing  of  the  shivering  herd.  All 
farmers,  and  especially  those  in  the  newer  portions  of  the 
west,  do  not  have  stables  for  their  cattle  or  snug  sheds  for 
their  sheep.  Stock  raisers  are  called  upon  to  make  the 
winter  as  comfortable  as  possible  for  their  animals,  with 
the  limited  means  at  their  command.  Sheds  of  poles 
with  roofs  of  straw  are  extensively  used,  and  with  profit. 


Fig.    112 — PENS   AND    FRAME   OF   ARCHWAY   FOR   A   SHELTER 


Fig.    113 — THE    ARCHWAY    UNDER    THE    STACK    COMPLETE 


CHEAP      CATTLE      SHELTERS  123 


AN     ARCHWAY     SHELTER 


An  archway  shelter,  under,  or  through  a  straw  stack,  is 
an  inexpensive  and  vahiable  device  for  stock  protection. 
The  skeleton  frame  of  such  a  one  is  given  in  Figure  112. 
It  consists  of  two  rail  pens,  of  the  ordinary  sort,  for 
the  bottoms  of  small  stacks,  placed  near  enough  to- 
gether so  that  the  archway  of  poles  can  be  made  between 
them,  in  the  manner  shown  in  the  engraving.  The  lower 
end  of  each  pole  is  set  a  short  distance  in  the  ground, 
resting  near  the  middle  on  the  top  rail  of  the  pen, 
crossing  its  neighbor  pole  from  the  other  pen,  and  fast- 
ened to  it  with  wire  at  the  top  and  also  to  the  rider. 
Over  this  structure  the  straw  stack  is  built,  and  when 
finished  has  the  appearance  shown  in  Figure  113.  In  this 
way  a  snug  shelter  of  considerable  size  can  be  made  be- 
neath the  stack,  under  which  the  cattle  gladly  take  refuge 
in  stormy  weather.  The  structure  is  a  permanent  one, 
the  rails  and  poles  remaining,  if  necessary,  from  year  to 
year,  or,  if  taken  down,  to  be  rearranged  again  in  a  short 
time,  just  before  the  threshing  is  done.  Such  an  arch- 
way shelter  would  not  be  out  of  place  in  many  a  well- 
kept  barn  yard.  If  the  stack  is  a  long  one,  a  double  arch- 
way may  be  made,  and  each  will  save  many  steps  in  doing 
the  work  of  the  barn  yard. 

A    CHEAP    SHELTER    FOR    COWS 

A  farmer  and  his  boys  can  put  up  a  decent  stable  at 
a  cost  of  $3  to  $4  a  cow.  To  be  sure,  such  a  stable  will 
not  look  as  large  and  pretentious  as  a  $400  or  $500  barn, 
but  it  will  do  just  as  well  for  awhile.  If  cheapness  is 
to  be  the  watchword,  here  is  a  plan  given  by  S.  M. 
Henderson  of  Illinois  that  will  help  many  a  poor  farmer. 
If  good  posts  are  to  be  had  get  them  nine  feet  long.  Sup- 
pose you  have  four  cows.     Build  your  stable  eight  feet 


124 


BARN     PLANS     AM)     OUTBUILDINGS 


wide,  sixteen  feet  long  and  seven  feet  high.  The  posts 
will  be  just  about  four  feet  apart  all  around  the  building. 
Spike  two  by  fours  on  top  for  plates.  Nail  on  girths  at 
the  ends  of  the  building  and  side  up  with  twelve-inch 
boards.  Instead  of  siding  up  the  two  sides,  make  a  door 
for  each  cow  to  enter  her  stall  on  one  side,  while  the 
other  side  is  for  the  manger.  This  manger  may  be  made 
three  feet  wide  and  three  feet  deep,  either  flaring  or 
straight.  Remember  now,  that  this  manger  is  outside  the 
stable,  as  shown  in  Figure  114.  The  depth  of  manger 
next  to  the  cow  should  be  about  two  feet.     Now  hinge  a 


flAHCEft              3                \ 

i 

,..^:.... 

....•/'-... 

_.f..^ 

8   <#.•••■  1 

n 

H\i 

Fig.  114 END  VIEW  AND  GROUND  PLAN 


big  door  up  next  the  plate,  letting  the  lower  end  rest  on 
outside  of  manger.  This  makes  a  flaring  side  to  the 
stable.  To  get  hay  or  fodder  into  the  manger,  or  to  clean 
the  same,  raise  this  big  door  and  hook  it  up  with  a  big, 
strong  hook  to  a  post  set  especially  for  the  purpose.  Make 
the  stalls  four  feet  high. 

Now  for  the  roof.  A  ten-foot  two  by  four  cut  through 
the  middle  will  make  a  pair  of  rafters.  Nine  pairs,  spaced 
two  feet,  are  sufficient.  The  ends  of  the  manger  may  be 
sided  up  if  desired,  and  the  swinging  side  or  door  never 
let  down  lower  than  the  outside  of  manger.  This  door 
may  be  cut  into  two  sections  if  too  heavy  to  handle.  If 
good  posts  cannot  be  had  to  set  in  the  ground  use  sawed 


BUILDING    STRAW    BARNS  125 

posts  and  set  the  building  on  blocks  or  stones.  In  this 
case  drive  half -inch  iron  pins  in  bottom  ends  of  posts  and 
fit  them  into  holes  bored  or  drilled  into  the  foundation. 

BUILDING    STRAW    BARNS 

In  the  Dakotas  and  Minnesota  the  common  practice 
i-s  to  burn  the  straw,  and  in  many  states  further  east 
much  straw  is  also  burned  or  allowed  to  waste.  This  can 
be  readily  worked  up  into  barns.  The  neatest  way  to 
build  a  straw  barn  or  to  line  one  is  to  bale  the  straw  and 
build  walls  of  it,  just  as  if  so  many  large  bricks  were 
being  used,  until  the  hight  of  the  wall  is  reached,  as  seen 


Fig.  115 TWO  STYLES  OF  STRAW  BARNS 

at  the  left  in  Figure  115.  Then  with  poles  or  scantlings 
for  rafters,  cover  with  straw  or  slough  hay,  and  a  very 
warm  barn  will  result.  Provision  must  be  made  for  doors 
and  windows,  as  desired.  Leave  a  hole  the  proper  size  for 
a  window  and  nail  up  a  casing  to  fit  it.  One-inch  material 
will  do  for  the  window  casing,  but  two-inch  is  better 
for  the  door  casings,  as  they  must  be  stronger,  to  support 
the  weight  of  the  door. 

With  more  work  and  a  larger  outlay  for  lumber  or  poles, 
as  warm  a  house  can  be  built  from  unbaled  straw,  as  shown 
at  the  right  in  Figure  115.  To  do  this,  set  two  rows  of 
posts  firmly  in  the  ground,  two  and  a  half  feet  apart 
(inside  measure).  Let  these  enclose  a  space  the  size  of 
the  building  desired.     Set  them  three  to  four  feet  apart 


126 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


in  the  row,  and  board  up  with  fence  boards  or  poles  placed 
on  the  inside  of  the  posts  and  ten  to  twelve  inches  apart. 
Tie  the  two  rows  of  posts  together  by  nailing  crosspieces 
at  the  top  so  there  will  be  no  spreading.  Then  fill  the 
space,  a  few  inches  at  a  time,  with  straw  and  tread  it 
down  or  tamp  with  a  heavy  timber.  Put  on  a  roof  as 
described  above.  Cut  out  lioles  for  the  windows  and 
doors,  case  them  up,  and  the  result  will  be  a  comfortable 
stable.  Many  a  barn  built  of  lumber  and  costing  a  con- 
siderable sum  of  money  is  not  so  warm  as  a  straw  or 
sod  barn. 


Fig.   116 — SHELTER  OF    POLES    AND    BOARDS 


CHEAP     TK.MPORAUV     SHELTERS    FOR     STOCK 


Wlienever  it  is  found  practicable,  the  shelter  should  be 
located  upon  the  east  cv  south  side  of  a  forest,  or  a  hill, 
in  order  that  the  force  of  the  bleak  winds  may  be  broken 
as  much  as  possible.  A  cheap  shelter  may  be  made  of 
poles,  as  shown  in  Figure  116,  covered  with  straw  or  refuse 
hay.    Two  crotched  posts,  eight  feet  in  length,  are  set  two 


CHEAP      TE-MPORARV       SHELTERS  127 

feet  in  the  ground,  and  from  twelve  to  twenty  feet  apart. 
These  are  connected  at  the  top  by  a  strong  pole,  upon 
which  rest  the  upper  ends  of  other  poles,  twelve  or  fifteen 
feet  in  length.  The  ends  of  this  shelter  are  boarded  up 
as  shown  in  Figure  11Q.  A  warm  and  comfortable  shelter 
is  illustrated  in  Figure  117.  Six  strong  posts  are  set  in  the 
ground,  forming  the  corners  and  sides  of  an  enclosure, 
about  twelve  by  fifteen  feet,  and  six  feet  high.  These 
are  boarded  up  on  three  sides,  and  roofed  with  strong 


Fig.     117 SHELTER    COVERED     WITH     STRAW 

planks  or  poles;  the  whole  is  overlaid  with  straw.  The 
covering  is  best  and  most  economically  done  at  threshing 
time,  by  building  the  framework  in  the  barn  yard.  A 
cheap  board  shelter  is  shown  in  Figure  118.  In  making 
one  after  this  plan,  fourteen  feet  wide,  the  highest  part 
should  be  eight  feet  and  the  lowest  about  five  feet,  using 
sixteen-foot  boards  for  roofing,  which  will  project  upon 
each  side.  The  roof  can  be  of  matched  lumber,  or  rough 
boards  battened.  Almost  any  farmer  is  enough  of  a 
mechanic  to  construct  such  a  shelter,  and  it  will  be 
found  serviceable  as  well  as  neat  in  appearance. 


128  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

It  often  happens  that  those  who  have  the  most 
improved  barns  and  other  outbuildings  desire  to  feed 
for  a  few  months  an  extra  number  of  sheep  or  cattle, 


"Eig.    118 — CHEAP  BOARD  SHELTER 


Fig.  119 — SHELTER  ADDED  TO  BARN 

but  have  not  sufficient  convenient  shelter.  This  may  be 
provided  by  a  temporary  addition  to  a  large  building,  as 
in  Figure  119,  in  which  Z*  is  a,  post  set  in  the  ground,  B, 


CHEAP      TEMPORARY      SHELTERS 


129 


board  roof,  and  D  a  post  of  the  main  building.  This 
structure  can  occupy  the  end  or  side  of  a  building,  as  may 
be  most  convenient,  and  may  be  so  arranged  that  hay  and 
grain  can  be  fed  directly  from  the  large  building  without 
passing  out  of  doors.  The  only  trouble  with  shelters 
of  this  kind  is,  farmers  find  them  so  convenient,  that 
they  are  tempted  to  let  them  remain  for  years,  and 
so  become  permanent  instead  of  temporary.  Unless 
they  are  constructed  of  a  material,  and  in  a  manner  not 
to  detract  from  the  appearance  of  larger  buildings,  they 
should  be  removed  as  soon  as  they  have  served  the 
immediate  purpose  for  which  they  were  erected. 

OTHER     STYLES     OF     TEMPORARY     SHELTERS 

Two  cheap  and  convenient  shelters  are  shown  in  Figure 
120.     The  square  shelter  is  suitable  for  all  kinds  of  live 


Fig.    120 CHEAP^    TEMPORARY    CATTLE    SHELTERS 


stock,  and  is  adapted  only  for  summer  use.  Four  posts 
are  set  in  the  ground  and  two  posts  placed  on  top  of  these. 
On  this  are  laid  square  edged  boards  with  slant  enough  to 
carry  oS  the  water.  Boards  are  also  nailed  on  two  sides 
to  give  shelter  from  the  prevailing  winds.  The  A-shaped 
shelter  can  be  made  a  movable  affair.  It  is  adapted  only 
for  small  animals,  like  sheep  or  hogs.  Two  erotched 
sticks  are  set  in  the  ground  and  a  rail  laid  in  the  crotches. 
A  couple  of  old  doors  will  answer  for  the  sides,  using 
care  to  drive  two  or  three  sticks  each  side  in  the  ground 


130 


BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


to  prevent  them  fi-om  spreading  apart  and  falling  on  the 
animals.  A  cleat  or  wire  should  be  nailed  over  the  top 
to  hold  them  together  in  high  winds. 


rig.    121 CATTLE    SUED    COVERED    WITH    HAY 


Fig,    122 — CATTLE    SHELTER    FOR    THE    PLAINS 


CATTI,E    SHELTERS    OX    THE    PLAINS 


Tn  the  far  western  grnzinji'  regions,  where  the  natural 
protection  of  riivincs,  grcvos  of  timber,  cte.,  it  is  not  avail- 


132  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

able,  shelters  of  the  kinds  shown  in  Figures  121,  122  and 
123  may  be  provided.  Poles  are  set  in  the  ground  in 
rows  sixteen  feet  apart,  and  twelve  feet  apart  in  the  rows. 
Cross  beams  or  poles  are  spiked  to  these  to  hold  a  frame 
of  lighter  poles,  and  others,  placed  sloping,  are  laid  upon 
the  north  side,  as  shown  in  Figure  121.  Piles  of  hay  are 
spread  over  these  frames,  as  seen  in  Figure  122.  They 
furnish  at  the  same  time  shelter  from  storms  and  feed 
for  the  protected  animals.  A  large  number  of  these  shel- 
ters are  often  made  on  the  range,  and  some  of  them  are 
hundreds  of  feet  in  length,  and  so  curved  as  to  protect 
from  northwest  and  east  winds.  One  of  these  large  three- 
sided  enclosures  is  shown  in  Figure  123.  After  a  severe 
storm  the  shelters  are  fixed  up  by  packing  more  hay  on 
the  sloping  poles,  to  furnish  feed  for  the  cattle,  and  when 
the  next  storm  comes  the  shelters  are  acceptable  both  as 
a  source  of  food  and  for  protection.  Those  who  have 
traveled  over  the  large  cattle  ranges  of  Kansas,  Ne- 
braska, Colorado  and  Wyoming  must  have  often  been 
struck  with  the  skill  displayed  in  the  construction  of 
jhelterg. 


CHAPTER  V 
SHEEP  BARNS  AND  SHEDS 

A    MINNESOTA    SHEEP    BARN 

The  sheep  barn,  Figure  124,  at  the  Minnesota  Experi- 
ment Station  at  St,  Anthony  Park,  Minn.,  built  in  1894, 
is  of  frame  construction.  Posts  are  two  by  four  inches, 
twelve  feet  long,  covered  up  on  the  outside  with  drop 
siding.  The  inside  is  sheathed  with  flooring  only  part 
way  up  in  the  lower  story.  The  first  story  is  eight  feet 
in  the  clear,  and  is  used  for  housing  the  sheep.  The  upper 
story,  four  feet  clear  at  the  plates,  is  used  for  storage  of 
fodder.  A  hay  track  runs  through  the  entire  building. 
There  is  ample  room  to  store  forty  tons  of  forage  and 
bedding.  The  floor  is  of  dirt  except  the  feeding  alley 
through  the  center,  which  is  planked  over,  Figure  125. 
A  silo  at  the  end  of  the  barn  affords  storage  room  for 
thirty-five  tons  of  silage  and  is  found  to  be  a  very  useful 
part  of  the  equipment.  It  is  made  of  three  by  four-inch 
plank,  beveled  on  the  inner  edges.  These  are  held 
together  in  stave  fashion  by  iron  hoops.  The  part  of  the 
silo  that  is  covered  by  the  bam  has  one  thickness  of 
staves  and  is  kept  perfectly  tight.  The  exposed  portion 
of  the  silo  is  furred  out  with  inch  strips,  covered  with 
flooring  and  paper,  and  shingled  over  that.  A  root  cellar 
is  also  provided  under  the  feed  room,  large  enough  for 
storing  twenty  to  twenty-five  tons  of  roots. 

A   BARN    FOR   EARLY    LAMBS 

For  a  sheep  barn  in  which  to  winter  ewes  due  to  lamb 
fr©m  January  to  April,  the  plans  of  one  sho\vii  in  Figures 


134 


BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBllLDINGS 


126  and  127,  designed  liy  Prof.  John  A.  Craig  of 
Iowa,  are  well  adapted  for  this  purpose.  When  allowed 
to  remain  in  a  pasture  over  night,  sheep  are  found  to 
seek  the  highest  knoll  to  sleep  upon.  Such  places  are 
dry  and  well  ventilated.  Experience  has  taught  the 
shepherd  that  these  are  the  two  most  essential  things 
in  choosing  a  place  to  house  sheep.  A  sheep  barn 
usually  must  be  near  the  other  farm  buildings  to  be 
convenient  for  the  owner,  but  in  so  far  as  that  require- 


Fig.    124 — MODERN    SHEEP   BARN   IN   MINNESOTA 


ment    allows    a    choice,    select    the    highest,    driest    land 
available. 

The  only  way  to  have  a  sheep  barn  dry  is  to  secure 
good  natural  drainage  and  to  provide  amide  moans  for 
ventilation.  The  chief  errors  in  providing  for  ventila- 
tion in  barns  are  the  lack  of  sufficient  means  for  changing 
the  air  and  provision  for  partially  closing  the  ventilators 
when  extremely  cold  weather  occvirs  and  when  high  winds 
prevail.  In  addition  to  the  above,  another  mistake  is 
frequently  made  by  arranging  the  ventilation  so  that 
drafts  of  air  will  pass  directly   upon   the  sheep. 


BARN      FOR     EARLY      LAMBS 


135 


Sunshine  is  a  good  thing  to  provide  in  abundance,  as 
it  proves  a  great  stimulant  to  early  lambs  and  seems 
to  give  them  vigor  and  strength,  while  older  sheep 
evidently  enjoy  it  and  no  doubt  are  benefited  by  it.  In 
building  a  barn,  ample  provision  for  storing  hay  or  other 
forage  should  be  made,  as  it  costs  comparatively  little  to 
add  a  few  feet  in  hight  to  a  building  when  a  mow  floor 
and  roof  will   be   required   anyway. 

A  good-sized  lambing  pen  will  be  needed.  The  lambing 
pens  should  be  arranged  with  enough  partitions,  station- 
ary and  movable,  to  accommodate  several  ewes  at  a  time. 
They  should  be  placed  adjoining  the  shepherd's  room  so 


Fig.     125— FLOOR    PLAN    OF    MINNESOTA     SHEEP    BARN 


that  his  stove  can  bo  utilized  in  warming  them,  should 
they  require  it.  Lambing  pens  allow  a  ewe  to  be  alono 
with  her  lamb  for  several  hours  after  its  birth.  Build  the 
lambing  pons  heavy  and  strong  so  that  the  temporary 
]\nrtitions  Avill  be  well  supported  by  them  and  so  breeding 
rams  may  be  safely  kept  in  them  when  they  arc  not 
needed  for  ewes  and  lambs. 

Do  not  neglect  to  provide  a  room  for  the  shepherd,  as 
you  can  then  reasonably  expect  him  to  stay  with  his 
flock  during  the  night  if  there  is  likely  to  be  need  of  him. 
It  will  enable  him  to  take  a  weak,  cold  lamb  to  the  fire 
:Mid    to    give    it    warm   milk,    which    will     save    the    life 


136 


BARN     PLANS    AND     OUTBUlLDtNGS 


of  many  a  lamb  if  they  can  be  supplied  when  neededi 
This  barn  plan  economizes  outside  wall  space.  One 
feeding  alley  serves  for  two  sets  of  pens.  Each  pen  will 
accommodate  twenty-five  ewes,  allowing  about  fourteen 
square  feet  to  each.  One  and  one-third  feet  at  the  feed 
rack  is  sufficient  space  for  each  ewe.  The  plan  also  allowa 
the  feed  racks  to  constitute  the  partitions  between  the 
pen    and    the    feeding    alley,    which    has    the    further 


»1 


Fig.     126 — THE     COMPLETED     SHEEP    BARN 


advantage  of  making  the  feed  manger  very  convenient. 
The  feed  chutes  are  arranged  at  each  end  of  the  four- 
foot  alleyway  so  that  hay  can  be  dropped  through  them 
into  a  very  convenient  place  for  feeding  it  to  the  stock. 
The  division  into  four  pens  holding  twenty-five  ewes 
each  will  be  found  very  convenient,  as  that  will  allow 
the  ewes  to  be  divided  into  four  groups  and  fed  according 
to  their  respective  needs. 

A  good  feature  of  this  barn  plan  is  its  ventilating  tubes, 
which  are  arranged   to   carry  the  air  up  to  and  out   at 


BARX    FOR    WIXTER    LAMBS 


137 


tlie  cupolas.  The  tubes  are  made  by  nailing  inch  boards 
together  in  the  form  of  boxes  or  tubes,  which  follow  the 
roof  under  the  sheathing  and  open  into  the  cupolas.  At 
the  bottom  of  the  tubes  a  sliding  or  tilting  shut-off  is 
arranged  so  that  the  degree  of  ventilation  can  be  gauged 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  weather  and  the  number 


Fig.    127 GROUXD    PLAN    AND    END    VIEW    OF    FRAME 

of  animals  housed.  A  hay  door  is  arranged  at  the  end 
of  the  barn  so  that  hay  may  be  carried  in  upon  a  track 
with  a  fork  or  with  slings. 


BARN    FOR    RAISING    WINTER    LAMBS 

Raising  winter  lambs  has  become  an  important 
industry.  It  is  necessary  for  this  purpose  to  have  a 
barn  that  can  be  kept  warm.  A  sheep  barn  and  fixtures 
to  accommodate  100  ewes  are  represented  in  Figures 
128  and  129,  which  give  a  perspective  view  and  ground 
plan.  The  ground  floor  is  divided  into  six  pens,  each 
sixteen  feet  square,  with  a  four-foot  alley  extending 
through  the  middle.  Each  pen  will  accommodate  sixteen 
to  eighteen  ewes.  The  alley  H  is  necessary  in  feeding 
the  animals  and  as  a  playground  for  the  lambs,  for 
without  such  exercise  they  would  not  develop  properly. 
The  fold  should  be  nine  feet  high  and  either  boarded  on 
the   outside   with   matched   lumber,    or   battened   on    the 


loo  BAHN      PLAINS     AND     OUTBLILDIXGS 

inside  and  lined  with  sheathing  paper.  Tlie  posts  are 
twenty  feet.  At  the  end  of  the  second  floor  opposite  the 
hay  door  a  grain  room  is  partitioned  off,  with  stairs,  E, 
leading  to  it  from  below.  It  contains  three  bins,  for 
various  kinds  of  grain  used.  As  this  is  mixed  by  weight, 
scales  are  placed  here.  After  it  is  mixed,  the  grain  is 
thrown  in  a  chute  to  be  spouted  below  as  needed. 

In  the  center  of  the  second  floor  is  an  opening  five  feet 
square  over  the  square  marked  D,  over  which  is  placed  a 


Fig.    128 PERSPECTIVE    VIEW    OF    SHEEP    BARN 


closed,  pyramidal  fodder  chute  and  foul-air  escape  five 
feet  square  at  the  base  and  four  at  the  apex,  which 
reaches  the  cupola.  The  chute  has  doors  in  the  side 
through  which  to  throw  down  fodder.  The  windows  of 
the  fold  are  made  to  slide,  and  by  the  use  of  them  and 
the  chute  the  atmosphere  is  kept  at  the  right  temperature, 
which  is  about  fifty  degrees.  A  slide,  made  to  be  worked 
from  overhead  in  the  fold,  opens  or  closes  the  draft  in  the 
chute.  The  hay  loft  is  reached  through  doors  in  the 
partition  of  the  grain   room.     A   stairway  and   ])latform 


BARN    FOR    WINTER    LAMBS 


139 


at  the  end  of  the  building  (not  shown  in  the  engraving), 
on  the  outside  and  adjoining  the  grain  room,  facilitate 
replenishing  the  bins  with  grain. 

Double  racks,  A,  are  the  division  fences  between  the 
pens.  The  bed  pieces  of  these  are  scantling  two  by  four 
inches  set  edgewise.  They  are 
beveled  on  the  lower  edges  and 
the  rack  slats  are  nailed  to  the 
beveled  faces.  The  slats  are 
two  feet  ten  inches  long,  placed 
three  inches  apart,  and  the  rack 
spreads  two  feet  ten  inches  at 
the  top.  The  bottoms  of  the 
bed  pieces  are  eighteen  inches 
from  the  ground.  Feeding  troughs  are  fastened  to  the 
racks  at  the  lower  ends  of  the  slats.  For  convenience  in 
filling,  the  alley  ends  of  the  racks  are  left  open.     The 


Fig.    129 — GROUND    PLAN 


f««f»f*l*  ■n^^^T'P 


\  \  \ 


Fig.  130 — FRONT  ELEVATION  OF  fSHEEP  BARN 


other  ends  of  them  abut  against  the  walls  of  the  build- 
ing. There  are  movable  troughs,  C,  in  the  alley  for  the 
lambs,  which  reach  them  through  openings  under  or 
at  the  sides  of  the  alley  ends;  of  the  racks.     Tn  the  end 


140 


Barn    plans    and    outbuildings 


pens  half  racks,  B,  are  spiked  against  the  ends  of  the 
building.  This  system  of  racks  and  troughs  economizes 
space  better  than  any  other.  The  alley  fences  are  three 
feet  high  and  wired  loosely  to  posts  driven  in  the  ground. 
The  pens  are  kept  well  bedded,  and  the  manure  should  be 
frequently  removed. 

Unless  sheep  are  carefully  provided  for,  there  is  sure 
to  be  trouble  and  loss  in  the  flock.     If  it  was  figured  up 


Fig.   131 — SIDE   SECTION   OF  BARN 

how  much  money  may  be  made  yearly  by  good  care  out 
of  $100  invested  in  sheep,  as  compared  with  the  profit 
from  $100  invested  in  cows,  or  a  mare,  the  balance  would 
generally  be  in  favor  of  the  sheep.  During  the  winter 
season,  the  keeping  of  sheep  requires  much  oare  and 
skill,  and,  with  a  large  flock,  but  little  success  can  be  had 
without  a  good  sheep  barn.     Such  a  barn,  having  many 


BARN    FOR    AVLXTER    LAMBS 


141 


conveniences  both  for  the  flock  and  their  owner,  is  here 
illustrated.  It  consists  of  a  barn,  shown  in  Figure  130, 
about  twenty  feet  wide,  sixteen  feet  high  from  basement 
to  eaves,  and  as  long  as  is  desirable.  This  is  intended  to 
store  the  hay  or  fodder.  The  posts,  sills  and  plates  are 
all  eight  inches  square,  and  the  girths  and  braces  four 
inches  square.  The  beams,  two  by  ten,  are  placed  six- 
teen inches  apart,  and  cross- 
bridged  with  strips,  three  inches 
wide.  The  hay  is  piled  inside, 
so  that  a  passageway  is  left  over 
the  feed  passage  below,  in  which 
there  are  trap  doors.  The  hay  is 
thrown  down  through  these  doors, 
and  falls  upon  a  sloping  shelf,  which  carries  it  into 
the  feed  racks  below ;  see  Figure  131.  The  basement  under 
the  barn  is  eight  feet  high,  and  is  of  stone  on  three  sides; 
the  front  is  supported  by  posts,  eight  inches  square,  and 
eight  feet  apart.    Between  each  pair  of  posts,  a  door  is 


mmmii, 


Fig.  132— DOOR 


w^mw^^mwmTO'^'^^^^w^^^k'^■A^^^^^^■^^'^^v<^^^'^:^■^^^^^^^^ 


(I. 


c  W^  c 


Fig.  133 — PLAN  OF  BASEMENT  TO  SHEEP  BARN 


hung  upon  pins,  Figure  132,  which  fits  into  grooves  upon 
the  posts,  so  that  the  door  may  be  raised  and  fastened., 
held  suspended  half  way,  shut  down,  or  removed  alto- 
gether. By  this  contrivance  at  least  half  the  front  of  the 
basement  must  be  left  open,  whether  the  sheep  be  shut 
in  or  out.     The  floor  of  the  basement  is  slightly  sloping 


142  liXns      I'LA.NS     A.NU     OLTBUILDIXGS 

from  rear  to  front,  so  that  it  will  always  be  dry.  Figure 
133  gives  the  plan  of  the  basement.  The  feed  passage  is 
shown  at  c;  the  stairway  to  the  root  cellar  at  h,  and  the 
root  cellar  at  a.  Figure  131  gives  a  section  of  the  whole 
barn.  The  hay  loft  is  above,  and  the  passageway  and 
the  doors  are  shown,  by  which  the  hay  is  thrown  down 
to  the  feed  racks  below.  The  sloping  shelf,  by  which  the 
hay  is  carried  into  the  feed  racks,  is  also  seen.  Below 
the  feed  rack  is  the  feed  trough  for  roots  or  meal.  A 
door  shuts  off  this  trough  from  the  sheep  at  the  front, 
while  the  feed  is  being  prepared,  and  when  it  is  ready, 
the  door  is  raised,  and  held  up  to  the  feed  rack  by  a 
strap  or  a  hook.  The  feed  rack  is  closely  boarded  behind, 
and  this  back  part,  which  is  in  the  feed  passage,  slopes 
toward  the  front,  so  as  to  carry  the  hay  forAvard  to  the 
bottom.  The  front  of  the  rack  is  of  iipright  slats, 
smoothly  dressed,  two  inches  wide  and  placed  three 
inches  apart.  The  boards  of  the  feed  tro;igh  are  smoothly 
dressed  and  sandpapered,  and  all  the  edges  are  rounded,  so 
that  there  is  nothing  by  which  the  wool  may  be  torn  or 
rubbed  off  from,  the  necks  of  the  sheep.  The  root  cellar 
is  at  the  rear  of  the  basement,  and  is  reached  by  the 
stairs  already  mentioned.  A  barn,  large  enough  to  ac- 
commodate 100  sheep,  may  be  built  for  about  $500  to  $600. 

SHEEP  SHEDS  AXD  RACKS 

Sheep  that  are  not  being  prepared  for  market  do  not 
thrive  well  during  winter,  unless  they  have  exercise  and 
a  well  ventilated  shed.  Such  a  building  may  be  of  any 
hight,  but  the  floor  need  not  be  more  than  six  feet  from 
the  ground,  which  gives  a  large  amount  of  storage  room 
for  hay.  The  tl(M.i-  should  lie  of  matched  boards,  or  the 
cracks  should  be  otherwise  closed  up  to  prevent  hay  seed 
or  chaff  from  dropjiing  upon  the  wool.  The  front  of  the 
shed  is  boarded  to  within  a  few  feet  of  the  ground,  leav- 


SIIEEl'     bllEUi^     ANU     HACKS 


143 


ing  that  space  open,  that  the  sheep  may  go  in  or  out  when 
they  please.  The  feeding  rack  is  placed  round  three 
sides  of  the  shed,  and  slopes  forward  so  that  the  sheep 
can  consume  the  last  mouthful  of  hay  contained  in  it.  It 
is  made  so  high  that  the  sheep  cannot  reach  over  the 
front  of  it  and  pull  the  hay  out  over  each  other's  wool. 
Three  and  one-half  feet  is  the  right  hight  for  large  sheep. 
The  slats  are  placed  three  inches  apart,  which  prevents 
the  sheep  from  pushing  their  heads  through,  and  wearing 
the  wool   from   their   necks.     Everything   about   a   sheep 


SHED,    PEN    AND    RACK    FOR    SHEEP 


pen  should  be  smooth,  leaving  no  rough  splinters  to  catch 
and  tear  the  wool.  The  pen  and  yard  should  be  kept  well 
littered.  This  shed,  shovni  in  Figure  134,  is  arrange;! 
especially  to  keep  the  wool  clean  and  free  from  hay  seed, 
clover  heads  and  dust,  and  that  the  sheep  may  be  out- 
doors or  indoors  as  they  wish,  and  according  to  the 
weather. 

SHED    FOR    SOILING    SHEEP 

When  it  is  desirable  to  keep  sheep  in  yards  near  the 
barn,  for  the  purpose  of  soiling,  a  structure  can  be  made 
as  follows :     A  green  paddock  of  about  an  acre  is  divided 


14-i 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


by  fences  into  four  parts,  as  shown  in  the  illustrations. 
A  partly  open  shed  with  feed  racks  all  around  it  is  placed 
in  the  center.  For  fifty  sheep  a  building  twenty  feet 
square  is  amply  large.  A  door  from  each  quarter  of  the 
paddock  opens  into  this  shed.  As  one  quarter  is  used, 
the  doors  opening  to  the  other  are  closed. 


Fig.  135 — ^A  SHED  FOR  SOILING  SHEEP 


Figure  136  shows  the  yards  with  the  shed  in  the  center. 
The  outer  gates  are  at  a,  opening  into  the  lane.  The 
gates,  h,  h,  lead  into  the  rear  quarters.  The  doors  of  the 
shed  are  at  c,  c.  Figure  137  shows  an  enlarged  view  of 
a  plan  of  the  shed.  Figure  135  gives  the  elevation  of 
the  shed,  with  a  large  double  doorway  closed  by  half- 
doors,  and  open  at  the  top.     There  are  also  large  open 


A      SUMMER      SHEEP      SHED 


M5 


windows,  so  that  the  shed  is  airy.  Tliere  is  no  provision 
for  water  in  the  yards,  and  this  is  the  best  phm,  as  tlie 
yards  are  kept  dry,  and  it  necessitates  at  least  so  much 


Fig.  137 — PLAN  OF  SHED. 


.exercise  as  will  be  derived  from  driving  the  sheep  to  water 
twice  a  day.  The  change  of  yards  is  needed  to  keep 
,t]iera  dry  and  free  from  jniid  in  wet  WQiithcr,     The  crops 


146 


BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


that  may  be  usefully  fed  in  such  a  yard  are  rye,  clover, 
grass,  rape,  mustard,  peas  and  oats,  barley  and  tares, 
turnips,  or  any  others  that  are  used  when  sheep  are  fenced 
by  hurdles. 

VIRGINIA  SHEEP  BARN 

A  Virginia  sheep  barn,  which  possesses  many  conven- 
iences, is  shown  in  the  accompanying  plan,  Figure  138. 
The  yard,  a,  is  100  feet  square,  divided  by  a  hurdle  fence 


d 

i    1 

t 

\               1 

4 

r 

c 

d 

c 

i 

i 

d 

i 

a 

^ 

(L 

Y 

i 

t 

i: 

> 

\ 

i 

{ 

Fig.  138 VIRGINIA  SHEEP  BUILDING 


(shown  by  the  dotted  lines)  into  as  many  portions  as 
may  be  desired.  The  entrance  is  at  &,  where  there  is  a 
gate  hung  upon  a  post,  c,  in  such  a  way  as  to  open  or 
close  each  half  of  the  yard.  The  yard  is  enclosed  on 
three  sides  by  a  shed,  ten  feet  high  to  the  eaves,  with  a 
double  roof.  The  ground  floor,  seven  feet  high,  is  ap- 
propriated for  sheep  pens,  and  the  three  feet  above  for  a 


KANSAS   SHEEP   SHELTER  14Y 

hay  loft.  The  shed  is  twelve  feet  wide,  and  has  a  row  of 
separate  pens,  six  feet  wide,  upon  the  north  side.  On 
the  other  sides  there  are  narrow  doors  for  the  sheep,  seen 
at  dj  d,  and  sliding  shutters,  e,  e,  eight  feet  long,  and 
three  and  one-half  feet  high,  which  are  also  used  for 
entrances  to  the  shed.  The  yard  is  closed  at  the  front 
by  a  fence  ten  feet  high.  There  are  no  outside  win- 
dows, and  but  two  doors,  and  only  one  of  these,  that  at 
f,  is  locked  from  without,  so  that  the  turning  of  one  key 
on  the  outside  secures  the  whole  from  trespassers.  There 
is  a  second  yard  150  by  135  feet,  upon  the  south  side  of 
the  sheep  yard,  with  an  open  shed  facing  the  south,  and 
divided  into  pens  nine  feet  deep,  for  cows  or  sheep,  and  a 
pigpen  thirty-five  feet  square,  at  the  southeast  of  the 
sheep  yard.  These  sheds  are  made  of  inch  boards,  nailed 
up  and  down  upon  the  framework,  and  the  roof  is  of 
boards   with  sufficient  pitch  to  shed  rain  perfectly. 

A  KANSAS  SHEEP  SHELTER 

The  shelter  or  corral  represented  in  Figure  139  is 
©ne  built  by  Mr.  George  Grant  of  Victoria,  Kan.  The 
walls  are  of  stone,  covered  with  a  peaked  roof.  It  is 
square  in  shape,  with  sides  about  570  feet  long.  A  com- 
modious house  of  two  stories  is  built  at  one  corner,  for 
the  shepherds. 

Another  plan  of  a  shelter  is  given  in  Figure  140 — that 
of  Mr.  W.  B.  Shaw  of  Syracuse,  Kan.  As  at  Victoria, 
the  buffalo  grass  here  furnishes  the  chief  pasturage.  The 
shed  is  made  of  cotton-wood  poles  and  coarse  hay  from 
the  river  bottom,  and  surrounds  an  enclosure  200  feet 
long  by  100  feet  wide.  We  see  the  stackyard  for  hay  at 
a;  the  horse  barn  at  5;  the  poultry  house  at  c;  the  water 
trough  and  pump,  operated  by  a  windmill,  at  d;  the  sheep- 


\y.    B.     SHAW'S     SHEEP    SHEDS 


149 


fold  at  e,  and  the  feeding  yard  with  hay  stacks  and  racks, 
at  f.  Around  the  feeding  yard  are  sheds  with  a  single 
roof  sloping  outward. 


-^ 


Fig.    140— SHEEP    SHEDS    OF    W.    B.    SHAW,   SYRACUSE,    KAX. 


A    COMBIXATIOX    SHEEP    BARN    AND    HOGPEN 

Where  one  wislies  to  change  from  general  farming  tc 
live  stock  keeping,  there  is  often  a  lack  of  proper  build- 


150 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


ings.  Figure  141  shows  an  inexpensive  way  of  convert- 
ing a  small  barn  into  a  commodious  building  for  sheep 
and  hogs,  and  providing  ample  space  for  necessary  feed. 
Sixteen-foot  additions  are  built  on  each  side  of  the  barn. 
One  side  may  be  devoted  to  sheep  and  the  other  to  hogs. 


/-/oo         7f=fO<-yO^S' 


P^ij^oe  /y/ty^ 


Sfss^of  fv^r     r-off  /^^r 


llllliillliiillliniiiiiiiiimiiiiiiniiMiiMiMiiimi'iiiTmn 


rig.    141 COMBINED    SHEEP    AND    HOG    BARN 


A  passageway  is  left  next  the  old  barn  to  use  in  feed- 
ing. The  main  part  may  be  divided  as  it  is  the  most 
convenient 

A    SHEEP     FEEDING    BARN 


There  are  many  old  farms  about  the  country  that  are 
being  utilized  as  sheep  farms,  sheep  now  being  increas- 
ingly profitable  as  stock  and  exceptionally  well  fitted  to 
bring  up  an  old  run-down  farm.  On  most  of  these  old 
farms  there  is  now  a  small  barn — too  small  to  be  used 
for  any  serious  sheep  farming  enterprise.  The  plans 
seen  in  Figure  142  show  how  such  old  barns  can  be  fitted 
up  cheaply  to  accommodate  a  large  flock  of  sheep.  Side 
wings  arc  built  at  an  angle  as  shown,  an  alleyway  beinc; 
left  for  a  track  on  which  the  feed  car  runs.  The  main 
barn  is  iised  for  the  storage  of  hay,  fodder  and  grain. 


SHELTER     ON     THE     PLAINS 


151 


The  buildings  form  a  sheltered  yard  in  front,  which  will 
be  especially  useful  in  winter.  Of  course,  if  desired,  the 
wings  could  be  attached  at  right  angles  to  the  barn,  but 
this  would  not  afford  the  excellent  sheltered  yard.  A 
perspective  view  of  such  a  barn  and  the  ground  plan  are 
shown. 


Fig.    142 — CHEAP    BARN    FOR    SHEEP    FEEDINQ 


SHEEP     SHELTER     ON     THE     PLAINS 


The  climate  of  the  western  plains  is  arid  and  exhila- 
rating, the  soil  dry  and  porous,  the  herbage  short,  sweet 
and  nutritious.  Aromatic  plants,  which  are  healthful 
for  sheep,  abound,  and  the  main  obstacle  which  has 
hitherto  presented  itself,  to  interfere  with  the  complete 
success  of  those  v/ho  are  engaged  in  sheep  raising,  has 
been  the  snow  storms  which  have  overwhelmed  the  flocks. 
Ordinary  buildings  are  frequently  out  of  the  question, 
both  from  want  of  material,  and  the  funds  wherewith  to 
erect  them.  The  flocks  may  be  sheltered  from  the  driving 
tempest  of  snow  or  sleot  by  means  of  walls  which  are 
semi-circular  in  shape,  and  consist  of  stones  roughly  laid 
i;p,  or  of  sods  cut  from  the  plains  and  piled  five  feet  high. 
The  outside  of  the  curve  is  always  placed  toward  the 
north  or  northwest,  the  direction  from  which  the  pre- 
vailing storms  blow.     Where  the  flocks  are  small,  a  few 


Fig.    143 — SEMI-CIRCULAR  SHEEP   SHELTER 


Fig.   144 — CONCENTRIC  SHEEP  SHELTER 


S^IIELTER     OX     THE    PLAINS 


153 


walls  are  sufficient,  scattered  about  in  convenient  and 
accessible  places,  generally  wliere  the  configuration  of 
the  ground  gives  additional  shelter,  as,  for  instance,  on 
the  southern  slope  of  a  hill,  or  where  a  grove  helps  to 
break  the  force  of  the  storm.  One  of  these  semi-circular 
shelters  is  seen  in  Figure  143.  Figure  144  shows  a  more 
elaborate  one,  suitable  for  larger  flocks,  and  also  designed 
as  a  protection  against  storms  from  whatever  direction 
they  may  come.  This  latter  shelter  consists  of  two  hnlf- 
circles,  with  entrances  flanked  and  protected  by  other 
walls,  so  that  the  flock  is  harbored  on  all  quarters.  Very 
often  an  inner  circle  is  built,  which  again  adds  to  the 
protection  and  increases  the  amount  of  shelter. 


CHAPTER  VI 

PIGGERIES 

Because  swine  are  blessed  with  keen  appetites,  strong 
digestion  and  hardy  constitutions  capable  of  resisting  a 
great  amount  of  neglect  and  ill-usage,  they  have  been,  and 
in  too  many  instances  are  yet,  the  worst  used  animals  kept 
for  the  profit  of  man.  And,  as  if  to  add  to  the  abuse, 
their  endeavors  to  make  the  best  of  ill-treatment  have  been 
charged  to  the  account  of  their  natural  uncleanliness ;  and 
the  idea  that  wholesome  meat  cannot  be  made  by  feeding- 
animals  with  garbage  has  caused  pork  to  become  the  hor- 
ror of  dietetic  reformers,  who  pronounce  it  unfit  for 
human  food.  It  were  as  wise  to  condemn  the  use  of  milk, 
and  to  pronounce  cows  unfit  for  civilized  communities, 
because  some  individuals  persist  in  confining  them  in  filthy 
stables  and  dosing  them  with  distillery  slops.  In  his 
native  state,  the  hog  is  as  dainty  in  his  tastes  as  other 
animals,  and  his  lair  is  found  in  a  dry  situation,  well 
cushioned  with  clean  leaves,  unsoiled  by  any  neglect  of 
his  own.  It  would  be  within  the  mark  to  say  that  in 
most  instances  twenty  per  cent  of  saving  can  be  effected 
in  food,  and  in  additions  to  the  manure  heap,  by  a  well 
regulated  building  for  the  accommodation  of  swine. 

A    SERVICEABLE    AND    WELL    ARRANGED    PIGGERY 

The  hog  barn  recently  built  by  the  Tennessee  Agri- 
cultural College  at  Knoxville,  shown  in  Figures  145, 
146,  147,  148  and  149,  may  well  serve  as  a  model  for 
those  who  want  a  serviceable,  cheap  and  well  arranged 
piggery.      The   barn  is   eighteen  by   eighty   feet,  with  a 


Fig.   145 — HOG   HOUSE   AT  TENNESSEE   AGRICULTURAL   COLLEGE 


Fig.     146 — INTERIOR     OV     TENNESSEE     HOG     HOUSE 


156 


BARX      PLANS     AXD     OUTBUILDINGS 


feed  room  in  one  end  sixteen  by  eighteen  feet  and  sixteen 
pens  seven  by  eight  feet,  and  a  foTir-foot  passage  down 
the  center.  Eight  of  these  pens  are  intended  for  fattening 
animals  and  are  of  sufficient  size  to  accommodate  four  or 


Fig.     147 — CROSS-SECTIOX     SHOWING     CONSTRUCTION 

five  large  hogs.  The  feeding  troughs  are  stationary. 
Hinged  gates  are  swung  from  above  directly  over  them, 
so  adjusted  that  the  feeding  can  be  done  from  the  outside. 
The  doors  to  the  pens  are  four  feet  wide  and  opposite  each 


6'Z 


M 


y-, 


Fig.  148 — SWING  nooR 


other,  so  that,  if  desirable,  hogs  can  be  transferred  across 
the  passage  to  the  open  yards  without  any  difficulty.  The 
])uilding  is  capable  of  housing  and  caring  for  a  large 
number  of  hogs  where  a  breeding  herd  is  maintained,  or 
it  would  be  equally  useful  and  advantageous  on  a  farm 


A       BKICK       WGGKKV 


151 


where  pork  production  was  the  chief  end  in  view.     The 
completed  building  cost  $400. 

The  dimensions  are  as  follows:  Length  over  all,  100 
feet;  length  of  pens,  eighty-two  feet;  feed  room,  floored, 
eighteen  feet  square ;  floor  in  pens  and  feeding  alley,  width, 
ten  feet;  width  of  doors  to  pens,  four  feet;  hight  of  pens, 
three  feet  six  inches;  length  of  feeding  trough,  five  feet 
nine  inches;  width  of  feeding  trough,  ten  and  one-half 
inches;  windows  alone  on  north  side  and  windows  above, 
with  doors  below  on  south  side,  containing  glass,  two  feet 
ten   inches   by   three   feet  four   inches;   four  by  six-inch 

^OU  TMePH  FRon  T 


Feed        Room 


$         /  E       ^  reedm^Allei/ 


-J&'ol 


S-sArioored. 


^ 


3 


az-o~ 


-/OO-O 


Fig.    149 — GROUND    PLAN    OF    TENNESSEE    PIGGERY 

sills,  two  by  six-inch  rafters,  two  by  four-inch  studding, 
seven-eighths  by  ten  or  twelve-inch  siding,  seven-eighths 
by  two-inch  strips  for  battens  and  a  matched  room  for 
feed  room.  The  pens  are  ten  feet  three  inches  by  seven 
feet  in  size. 

A    BRICK    PIGGERY    FOR    COLD    CLIMATES 


The  hog  house  of  the  Minnesota  Experiment  Station 
at  St.  Anthony  Park,  shown  in  Figures  150  and  151, 
is  built  of  brick  and  is  102  feet  in  its  longest  dimensions 
by  twenty-eight  feet  wide.  A  wing  to  be  put  on  the  east 
end  in  the  near  future  will  be  used  for  feeding  experi- 
ments or  for  breeding  pens  if  necessary.     The  walls  arc 


168  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUiLDlNGS 

nine  inches  thick,  being  made  out  of  ordinary  building 
brick,  with  an  inch  of  air  space  in  the  center.  This  has 
proved  a  very  satisfactory  wall,  and  seems  to  be  frost 
proof.  The  house  is  dry  and  well  ventilated  during  the 
winter.  The  ceiling  is  eight  feet  in  the  clear  and  good 
storage  room  is  provided  above  for  straw  and  feed. 

The  pens  are  eight  and  one-half  by  eleven  feet,  with 
solid  partitions  between  them  of  two-inch  planks,  dressed, 
and  painted.  The  fronts  are  made  of  heavy  wire  mesh, 
giving  good  light  and  aiding  materially  in  ventilating  the 


Fig.    150 — HOG   BARN    AT    MINNESOTA    EXPERIMENT    FARM 

building.  The  floors  are  cement,  except  in  the  corners  of 
the  breeding  pens,  where  a  nest  five  by  six  feet  has  been 
left  with  a  dirt  floor.  This  is  to  guard  against  rheumatism 
in  the  winter  time,  and  is  satisfactory  except  that  the 
hogs  sometimes  root  up  the  nest  considerably.  A  few  of 
the  pens  have  been  paved  with  brick  within  two  inches 
of  the  top  of  the  floor,  and  bedding  kept  over  that.  For 
summer  this  is  entirely  satisfactory.  A  slight  raise  in 
the  floor  around  the  outside  of  the  nest  prevents  the  water 
running  into  it  and  insures  a  dry  nest  always. 

Immediately  over  each  nest  and  opening  into  the  loft 
is  a  trap  door  a  foot  and  n  half  square.     During  warm 


MINNESOTA       HOG      BARN 


159 


weather  and  even  in  the  winter  time  this  is  left  open  to 
provide  good  ventilation  and  make  a  convenient  way  of 
getting  bedding  into  the  nest  without  littering  up  the 
house.  Sliding  doors  at  the  outside  connect  with  brick 
paved  yards  that  are  on  a  slightly  lower  level  than  the 
cement  floor.  The  aim  has  been  in  the  construction  of 
the  house  and  yards  to  make  them  easy  to  disinfect  and 


MINNCSOTA    EXPERinCNT    FflPM 
cnouMD    Pi-^N     or  moc    hou^c 


Fig.    151 — GROUND    PLAN    OF    MINNESOTA    HOG   BARN 


clean.  This  can  be  done  by  turning  water  on  the  floor 
in  the  feeding  alley  and  washing  out  over  the  brick  paved 
yards.  The  feed  rooms  are  convenient  to  the  pens,  and 
in  consideration  of  the  addition  to  be  made  to  the  house 
they  are  centrally  located  as  may  be.  A  scale  in  the 
middle  of  the  feeding  alley  makes  a  very  convenient  place 
for  weighing  hogs  at  any  time,  and  in  connection  with  the 
feeding  experiments  and  records  of  growth  made,  which 


160 


BARN     PLANS     A-MJ     OUTBUILDINGS 


are  always  kept  at  this  station,  could  hardly  be  dispensed 
with.  Steam  is  conducted  to  the  cooking  room  from  the 
central  plant,  so  that  hot  water  or  steam  may  be  had 
when  wanted.  There  is  a  root  cellar  beneath  the  farrowing 
pens  and  feed  room,  which  is  a  very  useful  feature  of 
the  building. 


Fig.    152 — WINTER    AND    SUMMER     HOGPENS 


/}^}?^}}W?)}JW/^}^/^^//^/777r77. 


^//cY   4frr 


i  ffoon7> 


^'■ 


J 


c/rr/j 


Fig.  15o--  GROUND  PLAN  OK  TWENTIETH  CENTURY  HOG  HOUSE 


TWENTIETH     CENTURY     HOGPENS 

The  plans  of  hogpens  shown  in  Figures  152  and  153 
are  largely  original  with  -T.  A.  Macdonnld  of  Prince 
Edwnrd  IsLtjkI     They  comprise  a  movable  house  six  by 


WISCONSIN     HOG     HOUSE 


161 


six  feet,  which  can  be  placed  anywhere  on  the  farm 
during  summer,  and  drawn  into  a  partially  open  shed  for 
winter  quarters.  With  chain  attached  these  small  houses 
may  be  drawn  by  a  horse  anywhere.  The  front  and  back 
sills  are  raised  two  inches  above  lower  edge  of  the  side 
sills  so  as  not  to  obstruct  when  moving  from  place  to  place. 
The  large  building,  half  the  front  of  which  is  open, 
as  in  Figure  152,  is  required  for  winter  and  spring.  The 
small  houses  are  drawn  from  their  summer  stands  in 
the  pasture  fields  through  the  six-foot  open  front  of  each 
pen  and  put  in  place  as  shown  for  a  sleeping  room.    In 


-^•• 


154 — TEN-SIDED    WISCONSIN    HOG    HOUSE 


this  large  building  or  shed  the  floor  should  be  of  cement, 
but  it  does  well  without  any  floor  except  for  the  alley. 
Strong  woven  wire  fencing  divides  the  pens  and  extends 
out  to  form  yards.  A  feed  room  attached  to  shed  would 
be  an  advantage.  These  small  six-foot  houses  make  a 
much  better  sleeping  place  than  an  ordinary  pen,  and  are 
also  the  best  for  sows  to  farrow  in. 


A     SATISFACTORY     HOG     HOUSE 


A  ground  plan  and  elevation  of  the  hog  house  of  A.  N. 
Portman  of  Stockbridge,  Wis.,  built  in  1894,  are  shown^ 


162 


BARN      PLAKS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


at  Figures  154  and  155.  It  is  an  ideal  one.  The  chimney 
is  directly  behind  the  ventilator  and  cannot  be  seen  in  the 
picture.  It  is  halfway  down  the  roof.  Here  he  can  feed 
fifty  to  sixty  hogs  of  all  ages  in  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes. 
The  house  is  forty  feet  in  diameter,  sides  ten  feet  long  and 
six  feet  six  inches  high  to  ceiling.  The  rafters  from  each 
corner  run  to  the  center,  and  those  between  are  spiked  onto 
the   main   rafter.     There  is  a  ventilator  sixteen   inches 


Fig.  155 — GROUND  PLAN 


square  in  center,  slatted  on  four  sides  to  keep  rain  and 
snow  out  and  to  let  out  steam,  etc.,  which  may  gather.  A 
large  trap  door  is  directly  over  the  cooker.  It  is  opened 
when  water  is  taken  from  the  tank  and  all  steam  goes  out 
direct.  After  the  water  handling  is  done  the  trap  door  is 
closed  up  and  all  heat  is  kept  in.  This  door  is  three  by  six 
feet. 

MOVABLE     HOGPENS 

Movable  or  portable  pens  are  very  desirable  for  hogs. 
They  can  be  taken  to  a  field  where  it  is  desirable  to  turn 


MOVABLE       HOGPENS  163 

the  hogs  io  pasture,  and  made  to  provide  sleeping  quarters. 
Small  pens  are  also  very  desirable  for  sows  about  to 
farrow.  They  can  be  placed  in  small  fields  or  in  different 
portions  of  a  large  field,  and  a  sow  confined  in  each  one. 
A  good  pattern  of  a  movable  hogpen  is  shown  at  the  left 
in  Figure  157.  It  is  six  by  twelve  feet  in  size,  four  feet 
high  in  the  rear  and  six  feet  in  the  front.  The  sills  are 
two  by  four-inch,  which  are  mounted  on  two  by  eight-inch 
joists  that  are  rounded  at  each  end  so  they  may  be  drawn 
easily  with  a  pair  of  horses. 

E.  W.  Brown,  a  well-known  western  hog  raiser,  keeps 
about  fiifty  sows  and  breeds  the  old  sows  twice  a  year.  The 
gilts,  however,  are  allowed  to 
farrow  but  once  the  first  year 
and  twice  thereafter.  He  keeps 
only  five  or  six  hogs  together  in 
one  lot  and  uses  the  wigwam 
house,  of  which  he  has  several 
kinds,  one  of  which  is  shown 
in  Figure  156,  These  houses 
are  built  eight  by  eight  feet 
Fig.  156— WIGWAM  HOUSE  square.  The  floor  is  on  two 
by  four-inch  runners.  Lum- 
ber for  the  roof  is  eight-foot  stuff  put  on  weather  board 
fashion.  The  house  is  about  seven  feet  high  in  the 
middle,  the  roof  coming  down  to  the  floor  on  the  outside. 
There  is  a  door  and  a  window  in  front  and  a  door  in  the 
rear,  so  that  when  both  doors  are  open  the  cool  breeze  blows 
through  and  the  hogs  enjoy  it  hugely.  When  the  old  sows 
farrow  two  of  them  are  placed  in  one  house,  and  by  means 
of  partition  board  the  interior  is  arranged  so  the  pigs  will 
not  be  hurt.  As  soon  as  the  pigs  are  old  enough  so  there 
is  no  danger  of  their  being  crushed,  they  are  given  the 
run  of  the  entire  house  with  a  fourteen  by  fourteen-foot 
yard.  Here  they  are  left  until  they  can  make  good  use 
of  grass  and  then  they  are  turned  to  pastures. 


164 


BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


At  the  right  in  Figure  157  is  shown  an  improved  A- 
shaped  hogpen,  the  improvement  consisting  in  the  shoes 
that  allow  it  to  be  moved  from  one  place  to  another,  in 
the  swinging  door  at  the  end,  and  especially  in  the  hing- 
ing of  the  side,  which  permits  it  to  be  raised  and  the 
interior  cleaned  out  whenever  necessary.  When  the  side 
swings  down  again  into  place  the  upper  end  fits  up  under 
the  short  boards  at  the  top.  This  house  need  not  be 
more  than  five  feet  high  from  ground  to  peak,  and  with 
it  the  hogs  can  be  moved  about  from  one  feeding  ground 
to    another    as   desired.     Use    single   boarding,   but   have 


Fig.  157 — TWO  TYPES  OF  MOVABLE  PENS 


the  boards  tongued  and  grooved,  and  well  covered  with 
paint.  The  building  will  then  be  water-tight  and  will 
last  for  years.  Make  the  floor  space  of  a  size  to  accom- 
modate the  number  of  hogs  to  be  kept. 

FEEDING     PEN     FOR     FATTENING     HOGS 

Feeding  floors  are  becoming  more  and  more  popular 
among  western  stock  raisers,  and  as  tliero  is  so  nuicli  at 
stake  in  feeding  hogs  no  effort  should  be  spared  to  keep 
them  healthy.  When  the  hogs  are  fed  on  the  grounil 
there  is  great  danger  of  inviting  disease.  A  feeding  floor, 
therefore,  is  very  desirable.  To  insure  perfect  healthful- 
ness  it  should  be  three  or  four  feet  above  the  ground, 
so  that  perfect  ventilation  is  secured  and  the  harboring 


CONVENIENT       PIGGERY 


166 


of  rats  and  mice  made  impossible.  The  floor  can  bo 
made  of  inch  himber  and  any  desired  size.  A  strong 
board  fence  must  be  put  up  all  around  it  to  prevent  the 
hogs  being  crowded  off  and  injured. 

At  one  end  of  the  pen  an  approach  should  be  built 
up  to  the  gate,  which  can  be  closed  while  the  feed  is 
being  placed  on  the  floor.  At  the  other  end  of  the  floor  a 
crib  or  pen  is  located  in  which  the  feed  is  stored.  The 
floor  must  be  cleaned  after  each  feeding.  Put  a  long- 
handled  fork  through  the  middle  of  a  board  about  three 
feet  long  and  six  inches  wide.  With  this  the  cobs  and 
uneaten  portion  of  the  feed  can  be  quickly  pushed  off. 


Fig.  158 — COVERED  FEEDING  FLOOR 

Hogs  should  never  be  fed  unclean  material.  Figure  158 
illustrates  the  arrangement  of  the  feeding  floor  and 
feeding  pen.     This  floor  is  partially  under  roof. 

PLAN    OF    A    PIGGERY 


Figure  159  represents  the  elevation  of  a  piggery.  The 
main  building  is  twenty-two  by  fifty  feet,  and  the  wing 
twelve  by  sixteen  feet.  It  is  supplied  with  light  and  air 
by  windows  in  front,  ventilators  on  the  roof,  and  by 
hanging  doors  or  shutters  in  the  upper  part  of  the  siding 
at  the  rear  of  each  stall  or  apartment.  These  last  are 
not  seen  in  the  on^ravinfr. 


160 


BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


Figure  160  shows  the  ground  plan.  The  main  building 
has  a  hall,  H,  six  feet  wide,  running  the  entire  length. 
This  is  for  convenience  of  feeding  and  for  hanging  dressed 


hogs  at  the  time  of  slaughtering.  The  remainder  of  the 
space  is  divided  by  partitions  into  apartments.  A,  B,  for 
the  feeding  and  sleeping  accommodation  of  the  porkers; 


A       CONVENIENT        PIGGERY 


167 


these  are  each  eight  by  sixteen  feet.  The  rear  divisions  of 
the  apartments,  B,  B,  are  intended  for  the  manure  yards. 
Each  division  has  a  door,  D,  D,  to  facilitate  the  removal 
of  manure,  and  also  to  allow  ingress  to  the  swine  when 
introduced  to  the  pen.  The  floors  of  each  two  adjoining 
divisions  are  inclined  toward  each  other,  so  that  the  liquid 


X' 


J^ 


\ 


V 


Fig.     160 GROUND     FLOOR    OF     PIGGERY 


excrement  and  other  filth  may  flow  to  the  side  where  the 
opening  to  the  back  apartment  is  situated.  Two  troughs, 
8,  T,  are  placed  in  each  feeding  room.  That  in  the  front, 
8,  is  for  food,  T,  for  clear  water,  a  full  supply  of  which  is 
always  allowed.  This  is  an  important  item,  generally 
overlooked;  much  of  the  food  of  swine  induces  thirst, 
and  the  free  use  of  water  is  favorable  to  the  deposition 
of  fat. 


168  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUlLDINGvS 

The  wing,  W,  is  twelve  by  sixteen  feet.  This  answers 
for  a  slaughtering?  rf>oni.  In  one  corner,  adjoining  the 
main  hall,  is  a  well  and  pump,  P,  from  which,  by  means 
of  a  hose,  water  is  conveyed  to  the  troughs.  At  the  oppo- 
site corner,  K,  is  a  large  iron  kettle,  set  in  an  arch,  for 
cooking  food,  and  for  scalding  the  slaughtered  swine.  In 
many  localities  it  would  be  a  desirable  addition  to  have 
this  wing  built  two  stories  high,  the  upper  part  to  be  used 
for  storing  grain  for  the  hogs.  A  cellar  also  should  be 
made  underneath  the  piggery  for  receiving  roots. 


Fig.    161 FRONT    PARTITION    OP    PIGGERY 

An  excellent  arrangement,  shown  in  Figure  161,  is 
adapted  to  facilitate  the  cleaning  of  the  troughs,  and  the 
transferring  of  the  hogs  to  the  main  hall  at  slaughtering. 
The  front  partition  of  each  apartment,  F,  is  made  sepa- 
rate, and  hung  so  as  to  be  swung  back  and  fastened  over 
the  inside  of  the  trough,  T,  at  feeding  time,  or  when 
cleaning  the  trough.  It  may  also  be  lifted  as  high  as  the 
top  of  the  side  partition,  //,  when  it  is  desired  to  take 
the  hogs  to  the  dressing  table.  Triangular  pieces,  E,  E, 
are  spiked  to  each  front  partition,  and  swing  with  it, 
forming  stalls  to  prevent  their  crowding  while  feeding. 
These  pieces  are  sup])orted,  when  the  apartment  is  closed, 
by  notches  in  the  inner  edge  of  the  trough,  made  to  re- 
ceive them. 


170 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


A     CONVENIENT     FARM     PIGPEN 

Herewith  are  given  the  plans  and  a  view  of  a  con- 
venient pigpen,  upon  the  farm  of  the  late  Colonel  F.  D. 
Curtis  of  Charlton,  Saratoga  County,  N.  Y.  The  build- 
ing, shown  in  Figure  162,  is  forty-eight  feet  long,  twenty- 
two  feet  wide  and  twelve  feet  high.  There  is  an  upper 
floor  over  the  pens,  which  is  used  as  a  store  room  for  meal, 
corn,  etc.,  and  a  cellar  beneath,  used  for  storage  of  roots, 
and  for  cooking  and  preparing  food.  There  is  a  cistern 
in  the  cellar,  into  which  water  from  the  roof  is  collected, 
and  a  pump,  by  which  the  water  may  be  run  into  the 


Fig.     103 — PLAN     OF     CELLAR    OF     PIGPEN 


feed  kettle,  or  to  the  pens  above.  The  arrangements  are 
made  with  a  view  to  the  convenient  handling  and  feeding 
of  the  stock,  as  well  as  to  the  most  perfect  sanitary  con- 
ditions. The  building  is  warm  enough  to  prevent  freez- 
ing in  the  coldest  winter  weather,  so  that  young  pigs,  if 
desired,  may  be  reared  without  difficulty,  even  during 
winter.  The  outer  and  inner  walls,  and  the  floor  of  the 
upper  room,  are  all  of  matched  boards.  The  floor  of  the 
pens  is  double,  there  being  first  a  floor  of  hemlock  boards, 
with  matched  joints,  put  together  with  hot  pitch.  The 
whole  of  this  floor  is  thoroughly  coated  with  hot  coal  tar, 
and  a  second  floor  of  one  and  one-half-inch  hemlock  plank, 


COL.     CURTIS      PIGGERY 


171 


with  matched  joints,  also  filled  with  tar,  is  finally  laid 
down.  This  gives  a  floor  that  is  not  only  very  durable, 
clean  and  wholesome,  but  it  is  perfectly  waterproof,  and 
prevents  any  drip  of  moisture  into  the  cellar.  The  cellar 
floor  is  shown  in  Figure  163.  At  R,  R,  are  bins  for  roots. 
The  roots  are  unloaded  into  the  bins  through  the  cellar 
windows,  by  means  of  spouts  which  direct  them  into  the 
bins  below.  At  F  is  the  feed  box;  at  T,  T,  feed  tubs 
for  mixing  feed;  at  C,  the  cistern;  P,  the  pump;  K,  the 
kettle,  set  in  brick,  with  chimney  behind  it.  At  5  is  a 
spout,  also  seen  in  Figure  164,  by  which  meal  is  dropped 
from  the  upper  floor  to  the  feed  box,  the  kettle  or  the 


L 


=^    F=dl — (iM 


3       Za  ZX 


ZS         ZJ 


Fig.    164 PLAN    OF    MAIN    FLOOR    OF    PIGPEN 

feed  tubs;  at  C  is  the  root  cutter.  The  whole  of  the 
cellar  floor  is  covered  with  cement.  The  main  floor  is 
shown  at  Figure  164.  The  pens  are  seen  arranged  on  one 
side.  Each  one  is  provided  with  a  fender,  F,  for  the  pro- 
tection of  young  pigs  against  being  overlaid  by  the  sows, 
and  a  cast  iron  feed  trough,  having  a  spout  which  projects 
through  the  front,  for  the  purpose  of  carrying  feed  into 
the  trough.  At  i7  is  a  hatchway  for  hoisting  meal  or 
corn  into  the  room  above;  A  is  a  spout  to  bring  feed 
from  above.  This  building  has  been  found  very  con- 
venient in  use,  and  it  is  so  arranged  that  it  may  be  ex- 
tended, if  desired,  to  accommodate  a  larger  number  of 
animals. 


172 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


MR.     CROZIER's     pigpens 


Mr.  William  Crozier  of  Beacon  Stock  Farm,  Northport, 
L.  I.,  has  a  long  range  of  pigpens.  The  elevation,  Figure 
lfi5,  the  ground  plan,  Figure  166,  and  a  view  of  the  inte- 


Fig.    165 — FRONT   VIEW    OF    PIGGERY 

rior  of  the  building,  Figure  167,  show  the  simple  arrange- 
ment. The  building  is  placed  against  a  bank,  which  has  a 
brick  retaining  wall  that  answers  as  the  rear  wall  of  the 
building,  and  is  nine  feet  high.     The  building  is  sixteen 


Walk 


\Steainmq  i 


Pen 


Pen 


en 


^en 


Pi 


en 


Fig.    166 — PLAN    OP    PIGGERY 


feet  wide,  with  the  front  side  six  and  one-half  feet  high. 
The  pens,  see  Figure  1 GG,  are  ten  by  twelve,  and  three  feet 
high,  with  a  four-foot  walk  at  the  rear  of  them.  The 
doors,  of  which  each  pen  has  one  opening  into  the  yard. 


COMFORTABLE      PIGPEN 


173 


are  in  halves.  The  ui)per  half  may  be  left  open  to  admit 
light  and  air,  while  the  lower  half  is  kept  closed,  if  it  is 
desired,  to  prevent  egress.  At  one  end  of  the  building  is 
a  room  furnished  with  apparatus  for  steaming  food.  The 
feeding  is  done  from  the  walk,  the  food  being  placed  in 
small  portable  troughs,  which  can  be  readily  cleaned. 


Fig.    167 — INTERIOR    OF    PIGGERY 


A     COMFORTABLE     PIGPEN 

The  plan,  Figure  168,  combines  the  requisites,  with 
many  of  the  conveniences,  of  a  desirable  pigpen.  The 
engraving  shows  one  complete  pen  with  its  divisions.  A 
row  of  these  pens  may  be  built  as  a  long  shed,  and  the 
description  of  one  will  answer  for  all.  The  pen  is  twenty 
feet  long  from  front  to  rear,  by  eight  feet  wide.  The 
posts  at  the  front  are  ten  feet  high,  and  at  the  rear  seven 
feet.  A  feed  passage  runs  along  the  front  of  the  pens, 
shown  at  a.  The  feeding  and  sleeping  apartment  is 
shown  at  h.     At  c  is  a  passage  which  also  runs  along  the 


174 


BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


whole  building,  but  which,  when  closed  by  the  doors,  d, 
makes  the  passage  a  part  of  the  yard,  d.  The  feed  pas- 
sage, a,  is  three  feet  wide.  The  feeding  place,  h,  is  ten 
feet  deep  by  eight  feet  in  width;  the  passage,  c,  is  three 
feet  wide,  and  the  yard,  d,  four  feet,  making  the  whole 
space  of  the  yard  seven  by  eight  feet  when  the  passage  is 
closed.  When  the  passage  is  opened  the  door,  d,  closes 
the  opening  from  the  yard  into  the  feeding  place,  and  the 
occupants  of  the  pens  are  shut  up.  Any  pig  that  may 
have  to  be  moved  from  one  pen  to  another  can  then  be 


Fig.    168 — PLAN    OF    PIGPEN 


driven  without  any  difficulty  wherever  it  may  be  desired. 
A  swinging  door  in  the  rear  may  be  made  to  allow  the 
pigs  to  pass  in  or  out  of  the  barn  yard  or  the  pasture,  if 
one  is  provided  for  them.  But  generally  it  will  be  found 
better  to  have  the  pens  built  upon  one  side  of  the  barn 
yard,  so  that  the  pigs  may  be  used  to  work  up  any  mate- 
rials for  manure  or  compost  that  may  be  at  hand  for  the 
purpose.  The  floor  of  the  pen  should  be,  in  part  at 
least,  of  plank;  that  of  the  yard  may  be  of  pavement, 
of  cobble-stone  or  of  cement,  but  should  be  so  laid  that 
it   cannot  be  torn   up.     A   tight   roof  should   cover   the 


FOR     MANY     HOGS  175 

whole,  and  sliding  windows  at  the  rear  and  front  will 
provide  good  ventilation.  This  is  very  important  for 
the  comfort  of  the  animals  in  hot  weather.  The  floor  of 
the  pens  should  slope  backward  at  least  two  inches  in  ten 
feet,  and  the  yards  ought  to  be  well  drained.  A  bar  is 
fixed  around  the  bottom  of  the  pen  about  six  inches 
above  the  floor,  and  projects  about  six  inches  from  the 
side,  for  the  purpose  of  preventing  the  young  pigs  from 
being  overlaid  by  the  sow  and  smothered.  A  large  quan- 
tity of  waste  material  may  be  worked  up  in  these  yards, 
and  will  add  much  to  the  comfort  and  cleanliness  of  the 
pigs.  The  framework  of  these  pens  should  be  of  six  by 
six  timber  for  the  sills,  four  by  four  for  the  posts,  and 
two  by  four  for  the  girths  and  tops  and  bottoms  of  the  par- 
titions. The  whole  quantity  of  lumber  needed  for  one 
complete  pen  would  be  1200  feet,  consisting  of  eighty 
linear  feet  of  six  by  six  timber,  sixty-one  linear  feet  of 
fovir  by  four  posting,  and  seventy-seven  linear  feet  of  two 
by  four  scantling,  104  feet  surface  of  two-inch  plank,  and 
500  feet  of  boards  if  the  roof  is  of  shingles.  A  row  of  ten 
of  these  pens,  making  a  building  eighty  feet  long,  able  to 
accommodate  fifty  or  sixty  pigs,  would  cost  about  $360 
completed. 

PENS    AND    YARDS    FOR    150    HOGS 

The  pens  are  built  in  a  range  on  each  side  of  a  central 
feed  house,  shown  in  the  corner  of  Figure  169.  This 
house  is  a  two-story  building.  In  the  upper  part  feed  is 
stored,  to  be  cooked  or  prepared  on  the  lower  floor.  A 
stairway  in  one  corner  leads  to  the  upper  story.  Opposite 
to  the  stairs,  and  at  the  right  of  the  doorway,  is  a  pump 
connected  with  a  cistern,  which  receives  all  the  flow  from 
the  roof.  The  water  is  shed  from  the  rear  of  the  roof,  so 
that  none  escapes  into  the  yard.  A  hose  is  connected  with 
the  pump,  which  serves  to  convey  water  into  the  feed 
trou^^hs  in  both  wings  of  the  pens,  for  cleansing  them  and 


176 


BARX     I'LANS     AND     OUTBUILUINGS 


to  supply  the  animals  with  drinking  water.  Opposite  the 
pump  is  the  boiler  or  the  mixing  vat.  As  a  boiler 
will  be  found  indispensable  at  times,  one  should  be  pro- 
vided at  the  outset,  as  it  may  be  used  for  soaking  or  other 
wise  preparing  food  when  not  needed  for  heating  purposes, 
A  passageway  leads  on  either  hand  from  the  feed  room 
down  the  row  of  pens.  The  arrangement  of  the  pens 
is  illustrated  in  Figure  170 ;  the  passageway  is  at  a,  the 
feed  trough  with  spout  at  h.    The  troughs  are  protected  by 


Fig.    169 — PLAN    OF    PIGPENS 


cross  strips  fastened  from  the  partition  wall  to  the  edge 
r)f  each,  as  shown  by  the  dotted  lines,  so  as  to  prevent 
the  hogs  from  lying  in  them.  At  c  is  a  sliding  door,  l)y 
which  access  can  be  gained  from  pen  to  pen  all  through 
the  range  when  necessary  for  the  purpose  of  changing  or 
otherwise  managing  the  occupants;  at  ci  is  a  slatted  ven- 
tilator fixed  in  the  wall  over  each  door,  also  shown  in 
P^igure  172.  The  yard  and  pens  shown  in  the  left-hand 
lower  corner  of  Figure  1(10  mi-o  for  brood  sows  with  pigs. 


SAFEGUARDS    IN    THE    PIGPEN 


177 


vvhich  are  kept  separate  from  the  rest  of  the  herd.  The 
pens  are  arranged  as  the  others,  with  the  addition  of  safe- 
guards for  the  young  pigs  placed  around  the  walls,  about 
eight  inches  above  the  floor  and  six  inches  from  it,  and 
attached  to  it  by  means  of  iron  straps.  See  Figure  171. 
These  are  to  prevent  the  pigs  from  being  crushed  by  the 
sows  when  they  lie  down,  as  is  often  the  case  when  no 
protection  is  furnished.  At  Figure  172  is  seen  the  eleva- 
tion of  one  wing  of  the  range  with  the  feed  house.  The 
shed  is  made  from  twelve  to  sixteen  feet  wide,  twelve  feet 
high  in  front  and  eight  feet  in  the  rear.  Each  pen  should 
be  at  least  eight  feet  wide,  which  would  give  from  sixty 
to  100  square  feet,  accommodating  five  or  six  pigs.    Sheds 


Fig.  170 — SECTION  OP  PEN 


Fig.  171 SAFEGUARDS 


100  feet  long,  with  yards  covering  the  included  ground, 
would  give  room  for  a  herd  of  150  pigs.  The  front  doors 
of  the  pens  are  made  double,  shutting  against  each  second 
post,  and  opening  from  each  other.  One  fastening  answers 
for  all  the  four  doors ;  this  consists  of  a  semi-circular  piece 
of  hard-wood  plank,  which  turns  on  a  bolt.  "Wlien  at  rest 
it  falls  so  as  to  fasten  the  four  doors,  and  can  be  turned 
right  or  left  in  an  instant  to  open  either  pair.  This  should 
be  secured  firmly  with  a  strong  bolt  having  a  large  head. 
The  floors  of  the  pens  may  be  made  of  hydraulic  lime  con- 
crete, thoroughly  saturated  with  gas  tar.  Such  a  floor  is 
always  dry,  clean  and  perfectly  impenetrable  either  by 
vfirmin.ox-by  the  swine..   An  occasional  dressing  of  hot- 


118 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


gas  tar  will  keep  lice  and  fleas  at  a  distance,  and  thus 
promote  the  health  and  growth  of  the  herd.  Another 
method  of  making  the  floor  is  to  use  double  hemlock 
plank,  laid  so  as  to  break  joints,  and  satvirated  with  hot  gas 
tar.  This  is  water  and  vermin  proof,  and  also  saves  all  the 
liquid  manure.  To  do  this  most  effectively,  the  floor  is 
sloped  for  two  or  three  inches,  and  a  slightly  hollowed  gut- 
ter conveys  the  drainage  into  the  outer  yard,  which  should 
be  paved  with  cobble  stone  or  cemented,  if  possible,  or 
otherwise  well  bedded  with  litter  or  other  absorbents. 
The  best  absorbent  is  dry  swamp  muck ;  when  this  cannot 


Fig.    172 — EXTKRIOR    VIEW    OF    PENS 

be  provided,  hard-wood  sawdust,  sand,  dry  earth  or  litter 
from  the  stables  may  be  kept  in  the  yard.  This  should 
be  turned  over  and  well  mixed. 


ANOTHER     PORTABLE     PIGPEN 

Where  a  single  family  pig  is  kept,  provision  for  chang- 
ing the  locality  of  the  pen  is  often  necessary.  It  may 
be  placed  in  the  garden,  at  the  time  when  there  are  waste 
vegetables  to  be  disposed  of,  or  it  may  be  penned  in  a 
grass  lot.  A  portable  pen,  with  an  open  yard  attached,  is 
seen  in  the  accompanying  illustrations.  Figure  173  pre- 
sents the  pen,  the  engraving  showing  it  so  clearly  that  no 
description  is  needed.     The  yard,  seen  in  Figure  174,  is 


PORTABLE     PIGPEN     AND     YARD  179 

placed  with  the  open  space  next  to  the  door  of  the  pen, 
so  that  the  pig  can  go  in  and  out  freely.  The  yard  is 
attached  to  the  pen  by  hooks  and  staples,  and  both  of  them 
are  provided  with  handles,  by  which  they  can  be  lifted 
and  carried  from  place  to  place.     Both  the  yard  and  pen 


rig.    173— A    PORTABLE    PIGPEN 


Fig.    174 — YARD    TO    PORTABLE    PIGPEN 

should  be  floored  to  prevent  the  pig  from  tearing  up  the 
ground.  The  floors  should  be  raised  a  few  inches  from 
the  ground,  that  they  may  be  kept  dry  and  made  durable. 

PIGPEN,     HEX     HOUSE     AND     CORX     CRIB     COMBINED 

The  accompanying  engravings  present  plans  for  erect- 
ing in  a  hillside,  under  one  roof,  the  three  important 
farm  buildings  named  above.  The  pigpen  shown  in  front 
view.  Figure  175,   is  constructed  of  sto\it   framing,   and 


180  BARX     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

where  it  comes  in  contact  with  the  hillside  is  protected 
by  dry  stone  walls.  The  roof  of  the  sleeping  room,  B. 
Figure  176,  forms  the  floor  of  the  hen  house,  G.  To 
prevent  the  dirt  from  one  room  being  thrown  into  the 
other,  the  door  of  communication  between  them  is  raised 
six  inches  from  the  floor,  and  an  inclined  plane  with 
a  cleat  is  placed  on  either  side  to  make  it  easy  of  ingress 


Fig.    175 — FRONT  VIEW   OF    PIGPEN^   ETC. 

and  egress.  The  feeding  room.  A,  is  protected  from  the 
weather  by  the  corn  loft  floor  and  the  overhanging  eaves. 
The  hen  house  is  situated  immediately  over  the  sleeping- 
room  of  the  pigpen.  It  is  ventilated  by  a  wire  sash 
window  at  H,  and  provided  with  perches  eighteen  inches 
from  the  floor  at  the  lowest  point,  and  nest  boxes  on  two 
sides,  which  are  reached  by  doors  on  the  outside,  each 
door  being  a  hinged  plank  the  entire  width  of  the  build- 


PIGPEN     AKD     TOOL     HOUSE 


ISl 


ing.  By  this  arrangement  of  the  nests,  the  room  need  not 
be  entered  in  quest  of  eggs.  The  roof  of  the  hen  house 
forms  an  angle  of  about  forty  degrees;  this  being  also 
the  floor  of  the  rear  of  the  corn  crib,  it  aids  by  its  slope 
in  readily  filling  the  crib.  The  corn  crib  is  approached 
at  the  rear,  where  a  slatted  door,  corresponding  with 
the  large  slatted  front  window,  gives  sufficient  ventilation 


Fig.    176 — SECTIONAL  VIEW  OF   BUILDING 

for  the  corn.  At  F  is  the  platform  from  which  to  fill 
the  crib.  The  building  is  ten  feet  wide  by  fifteen  feet 
in  length,  but  may  be  made  larger  if  desired. 

A   PIGPEN   AND   TOOL   HOUSE 


A  pigpen  with  the  upper  part  arranged  for  the  storage 
of  small  tools,  seed  sowers  and  cultivators  is  here  given. 


1S2 


BAUX     plans     and     OLTBllLm-NGs. 


The  upper  iloor,  seven  feet  liigh,  is  open  over  the  passage, 
as  shown  in  Figure  177,  which  is  a  section  of  the  inside 
of  the  huildhig;  tliere  is  a  stairwi^y  provided  at  the 
end    of    the    passage.      The    larger    tools    are    taken    up 


Fig.   177 — END  AND   SECTIONAL   VIEW 

through  a  door  at  the  end  of  the  huilding.  The  pen 
itself  has  some  conveniences  which  may  be  mentioned. 
The  plan  of  it  is  given  in  Figure  178.  The  pens  are 
arranged  on  one  side  of  the  passage,  with  doors  opening 


6 

h 

r<7\ 

•-"TV 

iinniMi,.-' 

Fig.    178 — THE    GROUND    PLAN 


into  it,  so  as  to  reach  across  and  close  it  when  necessary. 
It  is  thus  easy  to  get  access  to  each  separate  pen  or  from 
one  to  another.  The  doors  swing  both  ways,  either  into 
the  passage  or  into  the  pen  as  shown  at  n:  swinging 
diiors,  at  7>,  7^  give  access  to  the  yards. 


1 


*    CHEAP    PIGPEN 


183 


CL 


I 


A     CHEAP     PIGPEN 

The  plan  here  presented  is  of  a  convenient  pigpen  that 
will  cost  less  than  twenty-five  dollars,  exclusive  of 
labor.  Xine  posts  of  cedar  or  chestnut  are  set 
one  foot  in  the  ground,  and 
project  as  far  above  the  sur- 
face. They  are  arranged  as  in 
Figure  179.  Four  by  four- 
inch  sills  are  laid  upon  the 
posts,  with  a  cross  sill  in  the 
center,  and  halved  together  at 
the  joints.  No  wall  posts  are 
II ^('(1,  the  stout  boarding  being 
made  to  serve  the  purpose. 
The  structure  is  eight  feet 
each  way,  or  can  be  made  when 
built  to  suit  the  ordinary  length  of  boards.  To 
put  up  the  walls  begin  at  the  bottom,  fastening 
on  the  corner  boards  first,  and  nailing  their  edges 
firmly  together.  Two  by  four-inch  strips  serve  as 
plates.     Two    by    six-inch    floor    beams    are    laid    upon 


TTrnni^ 


Fig.    179 — iM.Ax  OF  PIG 

PEN 


Fig.    180 — ^VIEW    OF    PIGPEN 


the  sills,  sixteen  inches  apart,  and  the  floor  upon 
these.  Two  bj'  four-inch  rafters  are  plaoed  four 
feet  apart,  upon  which  three  tw^elve-inch  boards  are  laid, 
one  at  the  peak,  one  at  the  eaves  and  one  between  these 


184  BARN     PLAKS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

two.  The  roof  boards  proper,  eight  feet  long,  are  put  on 
lengthwise  of  the  rafters  and  battened.  Spaces  for  the 
doors  and  windows  should  be  left  or  cut  in  the  boards  as 
they  are  nailed  on.  There  should  be  two  small  windows, 
placed  as  thought  most  desirable.  The  interior  division 
should  be  as  shown  in  Figure  179.  The  feeding  place  is 
at  a,  in  which  is  a  trough,  with  a  sloping  board  in  the  pas- 
sage, c,  by  which  to  pour  in  the  slop.  A  sleeping  room  is 
at  h,  the  partitions  of  which  should  be  four  feet  high.  A 
few  loose  boards  will  be  required  for  a  floor  in  the  loft  to 
make  a  space  for  storing  corn  for  feed.  The  building  is 
raised  one  foot  from  the  ground  for  the  sake  of  avoiding 
rats  and  other  vermin.  A  sloping  gangway  leads  to  the 
yard,  into  which  it  is  convenient  to  have  a  gate  from 
the  outside. 

SELF-CLOSING    DOOR    FOR    PIGPEN 

A  warm,  dry  pen  is  necessary  for  the  health  and  comfort 
of  a  pig.  Cold  and  damp  induce  more  diseases  than  are 
charged  to  these  causes.  Neither  the  winter  snow  nor  the 
spring  and  summer  rains  should  be  allowed  to  beat  into 
the  pen.  But  the  difficulty  is  to  have  a  door  that  will 
shut  of  itself  and  can  be  opened  by  the  animals  whenever 
they  desire.  The  engraving.  Figure  181,  shows  a  door  of 
this  kind  that  can  be  applied  to  any  pen,  at  least  any 
to  which  a  door  can  be  affixed  at  all.  It  is  hung  on  hooks 
and  staples  to  the  lintel  of  the  doorway,  and  swinging 
either  way  allows  the  inmates  of  the  pen  to  go  out  or  in, 
as  they  please — closing  after  them.  If  the  door  is  in- 
tended to  fit  closely,  leather  strips  two  inches  wide  shoiald 
be  nailed  around  the  frame  of  the  doorway,  then  as  the 
door  closes  it  presses  tightly  against  these  strips. 

A   SWINGING   DOOR    FOR   A   PIGGERY 

The  illustration,  Figure  182,  is  of  a  swinging  door  for 
a  piggery,    which    is    intended  to    be    used    in  connec- 


Fig.    181 — SELF-CLOSING   PEN   DOORS 


Eig.    182 — ^A    SWINGING    DOOR    FOR    A    PIGGERY 


l&G  BARN     I'LAKS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

lion  with  a  feud  trouyli.  The;  en{;i-aving  shows  a 
portion  of  the  front  wall  or  partition  of  the  pen.  The 
door  is  hnng  upon  hickory  pins  set  into  the  frame,  one 
upon  each  side.  It  may  be  easily  swung  back,  so  as  to 
permit  access  to  the  trough  for  pouring  food  into  it,  and 
at  the  same  time  close  it  against  the  pigs.  The  door  is 
held  in  place  by  a  bolt  sliding  in  a  slot,  when  in  either 
position,  as  shown  in  the  engraving.  In  a  piggery,  the 
pens  would  be  most  conveniently  arranged  on  each  side 
of  a  passageway,  with  feed  troughs  opening  into  the 
passage,  by  doors  of  the  style  here  described. 


CHAPTEPt   YII 

POULTRY   HOUSES 

Poultry  liouses  may  be  expensive  buildings — or  suitable 
accommodations  that  answer  the  purpose  equally  well 
can  be  very  cheaply  made.  The  essential  requisites  are 
a  warm,  dry,  well-lighted  and  ventilated  shelter,  that  will 
insure  comfort  in  winter,  with  convenient  arrangements 
for  roosts,  feeding  space  and  nest  boxes.  In  winter 
light  and  warmth  are  of  the  first  importance.  Fowls  will 
neither  lay  nor  keep  in  health  when  confined  in  cold,  wet 
and  dark  apartments.  "Windows  facing  the  south  or 
southeast,  large  enough  to  admit  the  sun  freely,  should 
be  provided,  and  made  to  open  so  that  a  free  circulation 


Fig.    183 OPEX    FROXT   SCRATCHING    SHED    HOUSE 

of  air  can  be  secured  in  summer.  They  should  be  placed 
about  eighteen  inches  from  the  floor,  which  will  give  the 
best  light  in  winter,  and  should  not  be  too  large.  While 
glass  admits  much  heat  in  the  daytime,  it  radiates  as 
much  at  night  and  makes  the  house  too  cold. 


SCRATCHIXG    SHED    HOUSES 


The  latest  idea  in  building  poultry  houses  is  to  provide 
an  open  shed  attached  to  the  roosting  room,  in  order  that 
the  fowls  may  have  a  place  for  exercise  in  the  open  air 


188 


BARX     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINOS 


during  the  winter  months.  If  the  floor  is  kept  covered 
with  several  inches  of  straw,  chaff,  leaves  or  other  light, 
dry  material,  and  the  whole  grain  is  scattered  in  this, 
the  fowls  will  get  abundant  exercise  in  scratching  for 
their  feed.     This  keeps  them  warm  as  well  as  busy,  and 


Fig.    184 CLOSKD    FRONT    SCRATCHING    SHED    HOUSE 

they  are  healthier  for  it.     They  also  lay  more  eggs,  and 
for  breeding  purposes  the  eggs  are  more  fertile. 

It  costs  rather  more  to  build  a  house  of  this  character, 
but  many  practical  poultry  keepers  hold  that  the  extra 
return  pays  a  good  profit  on  the  investment.  Many  styles 
of  such  buildings  have  been  put  up.     The  best  plan  is  to 


Fig.  185 — GROUND  PLAN 


Fig.   186 — CONCRETE  HOUSE 


plan  an  open  shed  at  the  end  of  the  house,  then  two 
roosting  rooms,  followed  by  two  scratching  sheds  and 
another  roosting  room. 

There  are  various  methods  employed  to  enclose  the  front 
of  the  shed  during  stormy  and  very  severe  cold  weather. 
Some  use  screens,  which  are  hinged  at  the  top  and  let 
down.    These  are  covered  with  oiled  muslin,  which  allows 


SCRATCHING    SHED    HOUSE  189 

some  light  to  enter.  Others  employ  swing  doors  to  en- 
close half  the  shed  and  side  up  the  other  half,  putting  in 
a  large  window.  Figures  1S3  and  1S4  show  the  two  styles. 
In  Figures  185  and  1S7  are  shown  the  style  of  houses 
built  by  the  Massachusetts  Agricultural  College  at 
Amherst.  These  houses  are  twelve  by  eighteen  feet,  hav- 
ing a  roosting  room  occupying  ten  feet  of  the  space  and 
scratching  sheds  the  balance.  Two  doors  with  large  win- 
dows are  used  to  close  the  open  shed  when  needed.     The 


Fig.    187 — ^A    MASSACHUSETTS    SCRATCHIXG    SHED    HOUSE 

house  is  thoroughly  well  built,  being  sided  with  inch 
boards  and  covered  with  building  paper  and  then  shingled. 
Such  a  house  will  easily  accommodate  twenty-five  to 
thirty  fowls. 

CONCRETE    POULTRY    HOUSES 

E.  W.  Geer  of  St.  Francois  County,  Mo.,  has  solved  the 
problem  of  eggs  in  winter,  and  sound,  unfrosted  combs 
in  the  spring.     He  has  accomplished  th's  by  means  of 


lyU  BARN     PLu\NS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

concrete  poultry  houses  that  are  free  from  dampness  in 
the  most  rainy  seasons,  and  as  warm  inside  in  the  coldest 
days  as  a  cellar.  See  Figure  186.  "Where  building  mate- 
rials, such  as  stones,  sand,  cement  and  lime,  can  be  easily 
and  cheaply  had,  such  a  building  can  be  erected  at  a  cost 
not  greatly  exceeding  a  wooden  house.  Make  the  neces- 
sary excavation  and  lay  the  foundation.  Set  studding  for 
uprights  four  inches  wider  than  the  width  of  the  wall; 
plumb  the  studding  and  fasten  securely  with  stay-laths. 

On  the  inside  of  each  stud  place  a  one  by  two-inch 
strip,  and  against  this  put  one-inch  boards  fifteen  to 
twenty  inches  wide,  which  will  make  the  two  sides  of  a 
box  in  which  the  M'all  is  to  be  laid.  Drive  a  nail  near  the 
top  edge  of  the  board  through  it  and  the  one  by  two-inch 
piece  into  the  studding.  When  a  section  of  the  wall  is 
laid  and  has  set,  pull  out  this  nail,  knock  out  the  one  by 
two-inch  piece  and  raise  the  board,  fastening  it  as  before. 
Continue  in  this  way  until  the  wall  is  completed. 

A  wall  eight  inches  thick  is  heavy  enough  for  all  small 
buildings,  such  as  chicken  houses,  pigi)ens,  etc.  The 
mortar  is  made  as  follows :  In  a  large,  flat  box  slake  a 
barrel  of  good  stone  lime,  using  plenty  of  water  so  that 
it  does  not  burn.  Let  this  stand  for  several  hours  until 
thoroughly  slaked  and  cooled,  then  mix  with'  it  twelve 
barrels  sharp  sand  or  gravel,  and  one-half  barrel  Rosendale 
cement.  This  should  be  made  to  the  consistency  of  mortar. 
Unless  some  cement  is  used  the  chickens  will  pick  out  the 
mortar.  The  cost  will  depend  largely  on  the  price  of 
material  and  labor  and  vary  from  three-quarters  to  two 
cents  per  cubic  foot  of  wall. 

A    MOVABLE    POULTRY    HOUSE 

On  the  ipiajority  of  farms  where  grain  is  raised  there 
is  more  or  less  wasted  each  year  that  nothing  but  a  fowl 
will  ]iif'k  up.     This  often  happens  in  whoat  fields.     The 


MOVABLE  POILTRY  HOUSE 


191 


hen  house  shown  in  Figure  1S8  is  designed  to  meet  the 
demand  for  a  movable  house,  and  was  gotten  up  by  a 
practical  Michigan  poultry  raiser.  The  house  is  built  as 
light  as  the  necessary  strength  will  allow.  The  length  is 
twelve  fet't  and  a  little  less  than  six  feet  wide  in  the  clear. 
The  hight  from  the  sill  to  eaves  is  five  feet,  and  seven  and 
one-half  feet  from  sill  to  gable.  The  door  is  six  feet  high 
and  two  feet  wide. 


Fig.     188 — POULTRY     HOUSE     ON     WHEELS 


The  house  is  sided  with  matched  stuff,  without  any 
inner  ceiling;  the  floor  is  single,  also,  as  it  is  designed 
purely  for  warm  weather  use,  though  the  owner  has  no 
trouble  in  keeping  Cochins  in  it  during  the  winter  time. 
The  roof  is  tarred  paper,  which  is  painted  once  a  year. 
The  rear  wheels  are  from  an  old  mowing  machine ;  the 


192 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


forward  ones  from  a  grain  binder  truck.  The  rear  axle 
is  a  heavy  iron  rod  securely  bolted  to  the  bottom,  while 
the  front  axle  is  of  wood. 

THREE-PEN    HOUSE 

The  house  shown  in  Figure  189,  which  is  unique,  com- 
pact, economical  and  convenient,  is  particularly  adapted 
to  a  city  or  village  lot.  It  is  neat  and  ornamental  and  is 
recommended  for  the  fancier  who  wishes  to  make  special 
matings  or  keep  two  or  three  breeds.  It  can  be  built  ten  by 
twelve  feet  or  larger  if  desired.    The  sides  may  be  of  plain 


.^.»,»....o* 


r  \ 


:     Y<ir^ 


Yi>-J 


— ^ 
/  I 


/     i 


Y^\ 


Fig.  189 — CONVENIENT  HOUSE  FOR  THREE  FLOCKS 


clapboards  or  of  shingles  laid  over  matched  siding  with 
paper  between.  The  roof  is  also  shingled  and  can  be  sur- 
mounted with  a  small  cupola  for  a  ventilator.  The  pens 
and  yards  are  divided  as  shown.  A  house  of  this  shape 
ten  by  twelve  feet  would  easily  accommodate  thirty  fowls, 
although  eight  in  each  pen  would  undoubtedly  prove  more 
satisfactory. 


A  CHEAP  AND  CONVENIENT  POULTRY  HOUSE 

The  plan,  Figure  190,  of  a  poultry  house  will  be  found 
convenient  when  two  varieties  of  fowls  are  kept,  yards 
being  made  in  front  of  each  compartment  for  an  out-door 


CHEAP  POULTRY  HOUSE 


193 


range,  when  it  is  necessary  to  keep  them  in  confinement. 
The  ground  plan,  shown  in  the  figure,  is  ten  by  twenty- 
nine  feet;  apartments  for  fowls  ten  by  twelve  feet;  A, 
outside  door;  B,  hall,  to  provide  for  storing  feed,  giving 
access  to  the  nests  without  entering  the   apartments  in 


— 

— 

— 

= 

--^ 

1— 

1— 

H 

—i 
-> 

^]= 

0 

r 

*— 

'/ 

— ( 

- 

rB  "1 

L 

"^              c                  ^_ 

JJ 

4- 

"Ti    u    1 

D 

r 

_A_ 

Fig.    190 — GROUXD    PLAN    OF    A    POULTRY    HOUSE 

which  the  fowls  live.  Slatted  gates,  six  and  one-half  feet 
high,  are  placed  at  C;  the  space  above  the  gates,  and 
above  the  nest  boxes,  should  be  slatted  to  allow  circula- 
tion of  air.    Large  windows  are  in  the  side  at  D,  D;  nest 


Fig.    191 VERTICAL    SECTION    THROUGH    THE    HOUSE 


boxes  at  E,  and  roosts  at  F,  The  back  nests  are  four  feet 
high;  front  nests,  two  feet;  with  large  Asiatic  fowls,  the 
roosts  should  be  made  nearer  the  floor.  If  but  a  single 
variety  is  kept,  the  hall  and  compartment  at  one  end  will 
answer  the  purpose,  and  the  door,  A,  Figure  190,  opening 


194 


BARX      PhA.NS     AM)     OUTBUILUUNGS 


at  one  side,  may  be  placed  at  the  end.  Figure  I'Jl  sliowt- 
a  section  through  the  middle  of  the  house — from  0  to  P, 
in  Figure  190.  The  slats  in  front  of  the  nest  boxes  are 
marked  II ;  other  letters  as  in  Figure  190.  The  front  ele- 
vation, nine  feet  high,  is  shown  in  Figure  192.  The  doors, 
G,  G,  for  fowls,  are  near  the  main  door,  A,  and  within 
reach  from  the  hall,  so  that  one  can  readily  close  them 
without  going  into  the  fowl  apartment.  An  opening  with 
a  sliding  shutter  that  can  be  partly  or  entirely  closed 
from  the  alley  may  be  made  over  the  main  door,  A,  for 
the   purposes    of    ventilation.      The    nest    boxes    may    be 


Fig.    192 — FRONT    VIEW    OF    POULTRY    HOUSE 


one  foot  wide  and  sixteen  inches  high.  For  convenience 
in  cleaning,  the  nest  boxes  should  be  made  in  sections,  so 
that  they  can  be  readily  taken  apart.  The  architectural 
liiiish  of  the  exterior  is  a  matter  oi'  laste,  and  may  cou- 
foi'iu  to  that  of  the  surrounding  buildings.  Poultry 
liouses  are  freciuently  made  as  a  lean-to  against  other 
buildings,  Imt,  nil  things  considered,  it  is  best  to  have 
them  apart,  and  l)y  themselves.  They  are  not  desirable 
near  the  horse  stable,  as  vermin  are  liable  to  get  on  the 
horses  unless  care  is  constantly  exercised  in  their  exter- 
mination. 


196  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

AN    OHIO    POULTRY    HOUSE 

The  engraving,  Figure  193,  represents  tlie  poultry  house 
of  Mr.  J.  H.  Kemp  of  Germantown,  Ohio,  which  the 
owner  regards  as  cheap  and  convenient.  It  was  built 
upon  a  raised  bank,  and  has  a  trench  around  it  which  keeps 
the  interior  always  dry.  The  house  is  seventy-two  feet 
long  and  twelve  feet  wide,  and  is  divided  into  nine  apart- 
ments, each  eight  by  twelve  feet.  Eight  varieties  of  fowls 
were  kept  in  it  when  the  owner  was  actively  pursuing 
operations.  The  runs,  as  shown  in  the  foreground,  are 
eight  by  seventy  feet,  and  each  one  has  two  plum  trees  in 
it,  which  furnish  both  shade  and  fruit;  the  plums,  it  is 
said,  are  not  injured  by  insects.  There  is  no  room  lost 
by  alleys  or  passages  inside  of  the  house;  entrance  is 
gained  by  doors  which  pass  into  each  pen  and  run.  To 
preserve  cleanliness,  every  part  of  the  building  is  made 
accessible,  and  ventilation  is  secured  by  two  cupolas.  The 
rear  part  of  the  house  is  five  feet  high,  and  the  front, 
which  faces  the  south,  is  eight  feet  in  hight.  There  is 
a  stout  roof  of  glass  on  the  south  side,  and  a  large  win- 
dow, furnishing  abundant  light  to  each  apartment. 

ANOTHER  CHEAP  HEN  HOUSE 

j-he  house.  Figure  194,  is  ten  feet  wide  and  twelve  feet 
long.  A  passageway  four  feet  wide  runs  along  the  south 
side,  in  which  are  windows ;  this  is  formed  by  a  parti- 
tion three  feet  high,  which  extends  from  near  the  door  to 
the  rear,  and  supports  the  lower  side  of  a  sloping  floor, 
that  rises  to  the  eaves  on  the  north  side.  The  roosts 
are  fixed  above  this  sloping  floor,  and  the  droppings  of 
the  birds  fall  upon  the  floor,  which,  being  sprinkled  with 
plaster,  they  roll  down,  or  are  easily  scraped  off.  There 
is  a  ledge  at  the  front  edge,  which  prevents  their  going  to 
the  floor.  Under  this  sloping  floor  the  space  is  divided 
by  a  partition,  making  a  nest  room  about  six  feet  square. 


ANOTHER    CHEAP    HOUSE 


197 


and  a  setting  room  five  by  six  feet,  which  is  also  used  for 
a  storeroom  for  grain,  eggs,  etc.  This  setting  room  is 
entered  by   another  door  and  lighted  by   a   pane   in  the 


Fig.    194 — SECTION    OF    HEN    HOUSE 


WOOR 

w 

w 

w 

1 

a 

VCS  T  BOXES 

1 

a« 

.  ^^^^    lJS 

Eig.     195 PLAN    OF    HEN    HOUSE 

g*able  end.  The  nest  boxes  slide  through  the  partition 
into  the  setting  room,  but  there  is  no  access  for  the  fowls, 
except  when  sitting.     At  these  times  hens  are  moved,  if 


198 


BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


they  happen  to  be  in  boxes,  against  the  side  building,  and 
made  to  occupy  those  in  the  partition.  The  back  end  of 
the  four-foot  passageway,  Figure  195,  is  used  as  a  feeding 
floor,  and  here  stands  the  water  fountain.  The  use  of 
plaster  on  the  sloping  floor  under  the  roosts  is  excellent. 
Nothing  can  .be  better,  but  fine,  dry  road  dust,  swept  up 
on  a  hot  day,  is  very  good. 


POULTRY     HOUSES     FOR     FOUR    VARIETIES 

To  keep  several  kinds  of  poultry  in  one  building,  but 
In  different  yards,  is  sometimes  troublesome  to  the  inex- 


EB 


Fig.    19<! — I'LAN     OK    llOLSK    AND    YAKDS 

perienced  fancier.  It  is  necessary  to  be  done,  however,  if 
each  variety  is  to  be  kept  pure.  A  method  of  arranging 
a  poviltry  house  for  four  varieties  is  shown  in  Figure  19G. 
There  is  a  square  yard,  divided  into  four  ]nirts  by  cross- 
fences,  and  a  house  in  the  center,  also  divided  into  four 
apartm(Mits.  Tlie  division  and  outer  fences  should  be 
sufliciently   high    to   prevent   the  birds   from   flying   over 


HOME     FOR     FOIR     BREEDS 


199 


them ;  wire  netting  six  feet  high  would  be  required  for 
the  lighter  varieties.  Five  feet  high  would  be  ample  hight 
for  the  heavier  kinds,  as  the  Asiatic  fowls  or  Plymouth 
Rocks.  Doors  and  windows  are  made  in  each  apartment, 
as  may  be  desired.  A  passageway 
is  made  from  the  front  gate  to  the 
yard,  which  leads  to  a  central  room, 
as  shown  in  Figure  197.  Around 
this  central  room  are  the  nests,  which 
are  reached  by  small  doors  opening 
into  them.  Roosts  are  put  up  in 
each  apartment,  as  seen  in  Figure 
197.  For  the  large  fowls,  low  roosts 
should  be  used,  as  they  cannot  reach 
high  ones  without  a  ladder,  and  in 
dropping  from  the  latter  they  are  apt  to  suffer  injury. 
A  roosting  frame  for  some  Light  Brahmas  is  shown  in 
Figure  198.  It  is  made  of  chestnut  strips  two  inches 
square,  with  the  edges  of  the  upper  part  rounded  off  some- 
what, to  make  them  easy  to  the  feet  of  the  fowls.  Three  of 
these   strips   are   fastened   to   frames  made   of   the   same 


pniriq 
rTT-j  dd 


Fig.     197 — PLAN  OF 

ROOSTS 


Fig.  198 — LOW  ROOSTS   for  heavy  fowls 


material  for  supports.  The  whole  is  fastened  to  tlie  wall 
by  rings  fixed  in  staples,  so  that  it  can  be  turned  up 
and  held  against  the  wall  by  a  hook.  It  is  twelve  feet 
long,  three  feet  wide  and  sixteen  inches  from  the  floor. 
This  is  frequently  too  liigh   for  some  of  the  heaviest  of 


200 


Barn    plAns   And    ouTfeutLDiNGS 


the  fowls,  which  have  to  be  provided  with  stools  upon 
which  to  step  up  to  the  perches.  A  poultry  house  suit- 
able for  keeping  several  kinds  separate  is  shown  in  Figure 
199.  Originally  this  was  made  for  a  kennel,  but  it  is 
perfectly  well  adapted  for  poultry.  Its  peculiarly  French 
appearance  gives  it  a  picturesqueness  which,  with  many 
persons,  would  rather  add  to  its  attractiveness  than  other- 


Fig.    199 — HOUSE   AND    YARDS    FOR    SEVERAL   BREEDS 


wise,  but  the  style  of  the  building  may  be  varied  to  suit 
any  circumstances.  It  is  divided  into  a  number  of  apart- 
ments, each  leading  into  a  yard,  which  is  planted  with 
fruit  trees.  The  yards  radiate  fan-wise  from  the  building, 
and  occupy  a  square  piece  of  ground.  The  apartments 
communicate  with  the  front  of  the  building,  and  a  room 
may  be  there  made  from  which  each  can  be  reached. 


HOUSE  FOR  SEVERAL  BREEDS 


201 


POULTRY    HOUSE    FOR   A    NUMBER    OF    BREEDS 

The  plan,  Figure  200,  is  of  a  compact  and  convenient 
house  for  small  stocks  of  fancy  and  other  fowls.  The 
length  of  the  building  is  forty-five  feet  and  its  width 
ten  feet.  It  is  divided  into  nine  apartments,  each  five  feet 
wide.  The  house  is  entered  at  one  end,  as  shown  in  the 
figitre,  and  a  passageway  two  feet  wide  extends  through 
it  on  the  north  side.     See  Figure  201.     The  interior  parti- 


Fig.   200 — POULTRY   HOUSE   FOR  A  NUMBER  OF  BREEDS 


tions,  including  the  long  one,  are  of  one  and  one-half  by 
one-inch  pine  strips;  the  outside  is  entirely  of  one-inch 
hemlock  boards  battened.  The  roof  is  pine  flooring, 
tongued  and  grooved,  and  for  each  apartment  a  three  and 
one-half  by  six-foot  hot-bed  sash  is  set  in  the  roof.  The 
posts  which  support  the  ridge  of  the  roof  are  eight  feet 
long,  the  front  wall  or  side  being  only  two  and  one-half 
feet  to  the  plate.  The  yards  are  much  longer  than  is 
possible  to  show  in  such  a  small  picture  as  Figure  200,  and 


202 


BARN     PLANS     AND     orTBUILniNGS 


are  five  or  ten  feet  wide.  The  paling  surrounding  them 
is  of  one  and  one-half  by  one-inch  strips.  A  brook  runs 
through  the  yards,  affording  an  abundance  of  fresh  water, 
which  is  a  great  source  of  health,  and  of  success  in  rais- 
ing fowls.  The  floor  of  the  house  is  a  dry  gravel  bed, 
covered  with  sand.  The  roosts  are  low,  as  repres:.ented  in 
Figure  202.  They  are  made  of  round  sticks,  about  two 
inches  in  diameter,  and,  beneath  them,  troughs  of  two 
boards   nailed   together,    catch   all   the   droppings.      The 


I 


9in. 


Bin 


\\      —  —  ,' 





• !— J'      i  - 

1 ' '           1 

sf   i-^ 

—  5l— 

J^L...,...*  d    tt.. 

....jmtt       J     ' 

,  4! 

1 

•*.*■'  ro  othfr  ena. 
Fig.    201 — GROUND   PLAN    OF   THE    POULTRY    HOUSE 


nests  and  feeding  boxes  stand  upon  the  sand,  and  are  fre- 
quently moved  to  prevent  food  getting  xmder  them,  or  the 
groimd  becoming  moist,  and  affording  a  harbor  for  insects. 
Ventilation  is  secured  by  openings  in  the  short  pitch  of 
the  roof.  No  rafters  are  needed,  as  the  roof  is  sufficiently 
stiffened  by  the  cross-partitions.  The  doors  by  which  \\\o 
different  apartments  are  entered  are  two  feet  wide,  in.-ide 
also  of  strips,  and  all  are  furnished  with   locks,  so   that 


IKCrBATOR     CELLAR 


203 


when  the  owner  is  absent,  the  feed  boxes  and  water  vessels, 
if  the  fowls  are  shut  out  of  the  yards,  may  be  filled  from 

the  passageway,  and  no  one 
can  interfere  with  either  the 
fowls  or  their  eggs.  A  lock  on 
the  outer  door  makes  all 
secure  at  night.  The  slant 
of  the  paling  forming  that 
part  of  the  yard  fence 
1^  against  the  house  is  given 
to  it  in  order  that  it  shall  not 
cut  off  the  sunlight  from 
the  windows.  As  the  house 
is  arranged  for  nine  varieties,  where  fewer  are  kept  two 
or  more  apartments  may  be  thrown  together,  and  thus 
larger  flocks  can  be  accommodated. 

AX     INCUBATOR     CELLAR 

Many  insurance  companies  will  not  allow  the  use  of  an 
incubator  in  the  house;  hence  in  order  to  make  one's 
insurance  policy  good,  it  is  necessary  to  run  the  machine 
in  another  building.  The  ordinary  outbuilding  is  too 
poorly  constructed  to  allow  the  successful  operation  of  an 


Fig.  202- 


-SECTION  OF  HOUSE 


Fig.     203 — CROSS-SECTION     OF     INCUBATOR     CELLAR 

incubator,  as  an  even  degree  of  temperature  cannot  be 
maintained.  Even  the  best  incubators,  with  the  most  deli- 
cate regulating  apparatus,  will  not  work  where  the  tem- 


204 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


perature  varies  from  twenty  to  thirty  degrees  between  day 
and  night,  as  it  will  do  in  some  outbviildings. 

An  incubator  room  partially  underground  is  desirable, 
because  it  is  easier  to  control  the  temperature  in  such  a 
building.  The  sides  and  roof  should  be  made  double  with 
a  good  air  space  between,  and  well  insulated  with  building 
paper.  Windows  and  doors  should  likewise  be  made 
double.  Figure  203  shows  a  cheap  and  easily  constructed 
incubator  room  built  upon  the  surface  of  the  ground, 
yet  surrounded  by  earth  which  is  banked  up  against  its 
stone  walls.  It  is  banked  on  three  sides,  leaving  one  side 
unbanked  for  the  entrance  door  and  a  window.  This  side 
should  preferably  face  the  east  or  west.  A  room  eight  or 
ten  feet  square  will  hold  several  incubators. 

A     PRACTICAL     BROODER     HOUSE 

The  average  farmer  does  not  wish  to  go  to  the  expense 
of  a  hot  water  system  for  brooding  early  chickens,  but 


Fig.    204 — VIEWS    OF 


A     BANK     BROODER     HOUSE 


there  are  many  who  would  like  an  economical  plan  for 
brooding  a  few  hundred  early  chickens.  Figure  204 
shows  a  house  biiilt  against  a  bank  that  can  be  twelve 
feet  or  more  in  length.  The  cross-section  shows  exactly 
how  the  homemade  brooder  is  located,  with  respect  to 
the  run  for  the  chicks.  Set  on  legs  as  it  is,  the  attend- 
ant does  not  have  to  stoop  over  his  work,  and  with  thf 


A    BROODER     HOUSE  205 

raised  run  for  the  chicks,  they  are  brought  on  a  level 
with  the  brooder,  so  they  can  easily  run  in  and  out. 

This  run  is  coated  with  gravel  and  cemented.  The 
brooder  is  three  feet  square.  Allow  six  feet  for  each 
brooder  and  pen  and  you  have  three  feet  at  the  end  of 
each  brooder — sufficient  space  to  give  access  to  each  pen, 
which  can  be  cleaned  from  the  walk  with  a  short-handled 
hoe  or  rake.  The  house  is  twelve  feet  wide,  the  walk  or 
alley  six  and  the  run  six.  The  top  of  the  brooder  is 
hinged,  to  give  easy  access,  and  the  partition  in  front  of 
the  runs  is  tight,  to  keep  in  the  warmth  that  is  produced 
by  the  sunshine  coming  in  at  the  window.  If  a  bank  of 
earth  is  not  at  hand,  earth  can  be  heaped  up  to  form  a 
bench  on  which  to  locate  the  runs,  or  the  walk  may  be 
sunk. 

A  CHEAP  AND  ECONOMICAL  BROODER  HOUSE 

The  plan  of  a  brooder  house  as  built  and  run  by  J.  R. 
Little  of  Sulphur  Springs,  Mo.,  is  shown  at  Figure  205. 
The  ideas  embodied  in  this  house  are  new,  novel  and 
economical,  having  proven  to  be  an  excellent  system  for 
brooder  houses. 

Any  cast  iron  furnace  front  of  suitable  size — a  large 
stove  front,  preferably  with  upper  and  lower  doors — will 
answer  for  constructing  the  furnace,  which  is  built  in 
the  ground,  sixteen  to  twenty  inches  wide  and  long  enough 
to  take  in  four-foot  cord  wood.  If  coal  is  to  be  used  the 
furnace  need  not  be  so  long  by  half.  The  flue  extends 
from  the  furnace  the  entire  length  of  the  house  to  a 
pipe  or  chimney  outside,  is  bricked  at  the  sides  and 
covered  with  galvanized  sheet  iron,  on  which  is  filled  in 
about  six  inches  of  coarse  sand.  Fine  sand  will  not 
give  so  good  results. 

Individual  tastes  and  resources,  together  with  the  loca- 
tion and  purpose  in  view,  can  all  be  consulted  to  advan- 
tage in  the  planning  and  constructing  of  the  runs.     The 


206 


15ARX      PLANS     AXD     ULTIiriLUINGS 


chicks  from  tlio  incubators  are  put  over  the  furnace  and 
moved  toward  the  other  ends  of  the  house  as  they  grow, 
to  make  room  for  new  hatches.  The  sand  is  placed  in  a 
trench,  about  two  feet  wide,  six  inches  deep  and  the 
entire  length  of  the  house,  and  directly  over  the  flue, 
which  latter  should  be  about  two  or  two  and  a  half  f»et 
from  the  back  or  lower  end  of  the  house.     One  of  the 


INTERIOR     OK     BROODER     HOUSE 


best  and  essential  features  of  this  system  is  the  ventila- 
tion. Fresh  air  from  the  outside  passes  through  pipes 
in  the  sand,  where  it  is  heated  before  passing  into  the 
hovers  through  upright  branch  iiijies.  one  in  each  hover. 
The  vitiated  air  finds  its  way  out  thi'ough  a  three-incli 
opening,  left  between  the  froni  or  upper  wall  plate  and 
the  roof  sheathing,  the  entire  length  of  the  building. 
With  a   i)ra{'tically  air-tight   furnace  front  a  medium- 


SMALL     I'OULTKV     IIOUSK 


207 


sized  cord-wood,  stick  loid  on  a  bed  of  coals  and  hot  ashes 
will  maintain  a  steady  and  efficient  heat  in  the  hovers 
for  twelve  hours  in  cold  weather.  Ordinarily,  iip  and 
down  boards  weather  boarded,  having  light  tarred  paper 
between  them,  make  the  cheapest  and  best  walls.  Tarred 
paper  should  also  be  put  on  the  sheathing  before  laying 
the  shingles.  For  a  house  eight  feet  wide,  back  wall 
three  feet  and  front  wall  seven  feet  high  and  fifty  feet 
long,  the  material  should  not  cost  more  than  fifty  dollars, 
and  usually  less. 

SMALL  HOUSES  FOR  POULTRY 

Small  houses  are  often  desirable  in  order  to  mate  up 
a  few  birds  for  breeding  purposes  or  in  which  to  place  a 


"^irs^^ 


Fig.     206 — SUMMER     HOUSE     FOR     POULTRY 

brooder  with  young  chicks.  After  the  chicks  are  a  few 
weeks  old  the  brooder  can  be  removed,  roosts  put  in  and 
the  chicks  left  there  all  siimmer  safe  from  veniiin  and 
thieves  if  the  doors  are  locked  at  night.  The  window 
should  be  replaced  with  a  wire  netting  screen.  Several 
houses  of  this  kind  in  use  by  the  West  Virginia  Experi- 


208  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

ment  Station  are  six  feet  square,  six  feet  high  in  front 
and  four  feet  high  behind.  They  are  constructed  of 
planed  and  grooved  hard  pine,  which  costs  there  seven- 
teen dollars  and  fifty  cents  per  thousand  feet.  The  frame 
is  composed  of  hemlock  two  by  fours. 

The  cost  of  these  little  houses  is  approximately  as  fol- 
lows :  206  feet  flooring  for  floor,  sides  and  roof,  $3.50 ; 
sixty-five  linear  feet  of  hemlock  two  by  fours,  $1;  one 
window,  $1;  roofirig,  $1.75;  nailing  together,  $1.50;  total, 
$8.75.  About  fifty  chicks  are  put  in  a  brooder  in  each  of 
these  houses  and  allowed  to  remain  until  the  chicks  have 
no  further  use  for  it.  It  is  then  removed  and  perches 
nailed  up  for  the  chicks.  If  the  cockerels  are  sold  as  soon 
as  they  are  ready  for  market,  the  houses  are  large  enough 
to  accommodate  the  pullets  until  they  are  placed  in  lay- 
ing houses  in  the  fall. 

CHEAP     SUMMER     SHELTER     FOR     CHICKS 

Growing  chicks  can  be  kept  in  a  most  vigorous  con- 
dition by  having  pure  air  at  night.     Shut  up   in  close 

coops  they  cannot  have  this.  Get 
them  to  roosting  out  of  doors  as 
early  as  possible,  but  provide 
a  shelter  for  the  roosts.  This  can 
ILc^-T'  he  made  very  cheaply  by  put- 
ting up  a  rough  board  and  stake 
frame,  as  shown  in  Figure  207, 
and  covering  it  with  tarred  paper,  tacking  lath  on  the  out- 
side, over  each  rafter.  This  will  protect  the  chicks  from 
showers  in  the  night,  but  will  not  shut  out  any  pure  air. 
A  better,  but  more  expensive  shelter  is  also  shown  in 
Figure  20G.  This  consists  of  a  single  boarded  building 
of  any  size  desired,  having  the  front  of  wire  netting.  If 
the  door  is  closed  and  locked  at  night  the  chickens  are 


*  •—*--'■   ••>*  .tf^  ~- -"  "rj 
Fig.  207 CHEAP     SHELTER 


FOR     PIGEONS    AND     DUCKS 


209 


pafe  from  thieves  or  vermin.  Such  a  house  is  suitable 
for  turkeys  in  cold  weather,  as  they  are  healthier  when 
kept  out  of  doors  rather  than  in  a  closed  building. 

A     PLACE     FOR     PIGEOXS 

Pigeons  need  the  least  care  of  any  poultry  and  raising 
squabs  is  agreeable  and  profitable  work.  To  raise  them 
on  a  large  scale,  a  proper  loft  must  be  constructed.  A 
suitable  place  for  them  is  on  a  floor,  in  the  top  of  a  barn. 
The  size  of  a  loft  does  not  matter,  one  fifteen  by  thirty 


Fig.     208 — PIGEON     LOFT 

feet  is  large  enough.  Get  high  enough  and  away  from 
rats  and  cats.  Cut  small  holes  in  the  south  side  of  the 
loft,  as  shown  in  Figure  208,  and  place  an  alighting  board 
on  a  level  with  the  bottom.  Xail  boxes  for  nests  along 
the  sides. 

DUCKS    AND     DUCK     HOUSES 

There  is  a  satisfactory  profit  in  raising  ducks;  but  the 
conditions  must  be  favorable,  and  these  include  a  water- 
run,  either  a  stream  or  pond,  in  which  the  ducks  can 
gather  food,    and    a  house    conveniently  arranged    for 


210 


BARX    PLANS    AND    OUTBUILDINGS 


Becuring  the  eggs.  Young  ducks  are  best  raised  with  only 
enough  water  to  drink,  but  breeding  stock  does  mucb 
better  with  a  place  to  swim.  A  house  may  be  made  for 
them  on  the  bank  of  a  pond  adjoining  a  brook  in  which 
there  are  abundance  of  water  cresses  and  other  food, 
both  vegetable  and  animal.  The  water  cress  is  eaten  with 
avidity  by  ducks,  and  has  myriads  of  snails  and  other 
water  animals  unon  it.     A  plan  of  a  house  is  shown  in 


Fig.     209 — ^VIEW     OF     A     CONVENIENT    DUCK     HOUSE 


Figures  209  and  210.  For  fifty  to  100  ducks  it 
sliould  be  thirty  feet  long,  twelve  feet  high,  and  from 
four  feet  high  at  the  front  to  six  or  eight  feet  in  tlie  rear. 
Entrance  doors  are  made  in  the  front,  which  should  have 
a  few  small  windows.  At  the  rear  are  the  nests ;  these 
are  boxes  open  at  the  front.  Behind  each  nest  is  a  small 
door  through  which  the  eggs  may  be  taken.  It  is  neces- 
sary to  keep  the  ducks  shut  iip  in  the  morning  until  they 


VENTILATING  POULTRY  HOUSE 


211 


have  laid  their  eggs;  a  strip  of  wire  netting  two  feet 
high  will  be  required  to  inclose  a  narrow  yard  in  front  of 
the  house.  Twine  netting  should  not  be  used,  as  the 
ducks  put  their  heads  through  the  meshes  and  twist 
the  twine  about  their  necks,  often  so  effectively  as  to 
strangle  themselves. 

THE    VENTILATION     OF     POULTRY     HOUSES 

The  principle  of  the  King  system  of  ventilating  barns 
is  best  for  poultry  houses.  In  this  the  ventilator  extends 
to  within  a  few  inches  of  the  floor,  and  goes  out  at  the 


Fig.     210 GROUND     PLAN     OF     THE     HOUSE 

highest  point  in  the  roof.  It  is  unnecessary  in  poultry 
houses  to  provide  for  the  admission  of  fresh  air,  as  enough, 
and  generally  too  much,  comes  in  around  the  doors  and 
windows.  If  a  poultry  house  is  constructed  so  thoroughly 
as  to  keep  out  the  cold,  and  ventilation  is  not  provided, 
there  is  great  liability  of  its  becoming  damp,  particularly 
if  a  large  number  of  fowls  are  confined. 

A  ventilator  should  be  provided  to  carry  out  the  moist 
air  and  yet  not  remove  at  the  same  time  all  warm  air. 
If  the  opening  is  at  or  near  the  roof,  it  will  take  out  the 
warm  air,  but  if  the  ventilating  shaft  is  brought  down 
near  the  floor,  it  will  only  remove  the  foul  air  unless  too 
large  for  the  house. 

The  cheapest  and  best  ventilator  is  built  of  two  boards 
six  inches  wide,  and  two  boards  eight  inches  wide.     These 


212  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

are  nailed  together  to  make  a  shaft  six  inches  square, 
inside  dimensions.  If  the  building  has  a  roof  sloping 
one  way,  set  this  shaft  at  the  front  of  the  house,  and 
allow  it  to  extend  one  foot  above  the  roof.  Bore  some 
inch  holes  in  the  top  to  allow  the  air  to  escape  and  cover 
it  to  keep  out  the  rain.  Provide  a  slide  in  the  shaft  to 
open  and  close  in  order  to  control  the  ventilation.  Near 
the  roof  cut  out  a  piece  one  foot  long  and  then  replace 
it  in  a  manner  which  will  close  the  shaft  tightly,  yet 
allow  of  its  being  opened  readily  to  take  out  the  warm 
air  during  hot  weather.  Do  not  use  a  tin  or  metal  pipe 
for  a  ventilator,  as  it  will  collect  the  moisture  on  the 
inside  during  cold  weather  and  prove  very  unsatisfactory. 


CHAPTER  YIII 
CARRIAGE    HOUSES    AND    HORSE    BARNS 

COilBIXATlON     HORSE     AND     CABRIAGE     BARN 

The  horse  barn  of  the  Massachusetts  Agricultural  Col- 
lege at  Amherst  also  provides  room  for  tools  and 
machinery.  A  barn  of  this  style  would  give  plenty  of 
carriage  room  for  a  private  stable  if  the  space  was  used  for 
wagons  instead  of  tools.  The  elevation  and  floor  plans 
shown  in  Figures  211  and  212  need  little  description. 
There  are  ten  ordinary  stalls  with  patent  stall  basin  and 
floor,  iron  mangers  and  hay  racks,  and  four  large  box 
stalls  similarly  equipped.  Access  to  this  portion  of  the 
stable  is  gained  through  the  large  door  toward  the  east 
end,  which  in  the  illustration  stands  open.  Opposite  this 
is  a  corresponding  door  on  the  north  side,  so  that  one  can 
drive  directly  through.  Hay  is  put  into  the  loft  through 
large  trap  doors  above  this  passage  by  means  of  a  horse 
fork.  The  building  also  contains  a  small  room  for  tools, 
a  repair  shop,  also  harness  rooms,  closets,  etc.  There  is 
an  open  hitching  shed,  and  in  the  basement  ample  room 
for  vehicles  or  machinery.     The  roof  is  of  steel. 

In  the  tool  room  are  individual  tool  closets  for  the 
permanent  workmen,  in  which  they  keep  their  tools.  The 
large  door  in  the  west  end  leads  into  the  repair  room, 
which  runs  the  full  length  of  the  building.  This  is  pro- 
vided with  bench,  vises,  portable  forge,  anvil,  etc.  In 
the  loft  directly  above  is  space  for  the  storage  of  lumber 
or  other  material.  The  large  doors  at  the  west  end  open 
into  the  basement,  which  is  about  forty  feet  square. 
The  stable  is  finished  with  hard  pine. 


'%%'»:{ 

m 


A    VILLAGE     STABLE 


215 


Fig.  212 FLOOR  PLAN  OF  A  ROOMY  BARN 

STABLE  FOR  A  VILLAGE  LOT 

A  building  twenty-five  by  tbirty-five,  or  twenty-five 
by  fifty  feet,  is  of  good  size  for  a  viHage  stable,  where  two 
or  three  horses  are  kept.  Figure  213  shows  a  very  good 
barn  for  this  purpose.  The  small  window  over  the  door, 
through  which  hay  is  usually  pitched  with  difficulty,  is  in 


Fig.     213 — A     SMALL     CARRIAGE     HOUSE 


216 


BARN     PLANS    AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


this  case  of  generous  size,  and  the  small  gable  in  the 
roof  adds  to  the  attractiveness  of  the  building.  A  box 
stall  ought  to  be  provided  in  every  stable  and  should  be 
at  least  eight  feet  square,  but  eight  by  ten  or  ten  by  twelve 
feet  is  much  better  if  the  space  can  be  spared.  The  box 
stall  may  take  the  place  of  the  extra  stall  that  ought 
always  to  be  provided.  The  carriage  room  should  be  par- 
titioned off  from  tlie  stable  with  a  tight  board  partition 
and  a  separate  room  ought  to  be  provided  for  harnesses 
and  blankets.     The  floor  plan  is  shown  in  Figure  214. 


Fig.  214 — FLOOR  PLAN 


FLOOR  OF  STALL 


STALLS  FOR  HORSES 


A  well  arranged  box  stall  for  horses  is  shown  in  Figure 
216.  The  upper  portion  consists  of  iron  rods  extending 
from  the  top  of  the  sides  to  a  railing  two  feet  above. 
The  front  is  provided  with  screen  doors.  The  stall  is 
nhie  by  four  and  one-half  feet  and  the  maliger  is  twenty- 
one  inches  from  front  to  back.  An  iron  feed  trough  for 
grain  occupies  one  end  of  the  manger,  indicated  by 
dotted  lines  at  G.  The  remainder  is  taken  up  by  the  hay 
box  at  //,  the  bottom  of  which  is  shown  by  the  dotted 
lines.  A  door  in  front  allows  for  cleaning  out  the  feed 
box  and  opens  to  a  closet.  The  box  stalls  are  also  pro- 
vided with  the  iron  rods  for  a  top  finish,  so  that  a  person 


BOX    AND    OPEN    STALLS 


217 


can  easily  see  into  them  without  entering.  The  interior 
exposed  woodwork  is  varnished,  making  a  neat  and  sub- 
stantial finish. 

Where  mares  are  kept  a  tight  floor  in  the  stall  is  not 
especially  inconvenient,  but  with  geldings  the  case  is 
otherwise.  For  them  such  a  floor  as  is  shown  in  Figure 
215  is  best  suited  for  keeping  their  coats  from  becoming 
stained.  The  stable  floor  beneath  the  flooring  of  the  stall 
should  slope  a  little  so  that  the  liquids  that  run  through 
the  openings  in  the  stall  flooring  will  be  conveyed  down 


Fig.  216 — BOX  STALL 


Fig.  217 OPEN  STALL 


behind  the  stall,  where  they  may  be  absorbed  in  the 
litter.  The  pieces  of  which  the  stall  floor  is  made  may 
be  five  inches  wide,  laid  one-half  inch  apart.  They  ai'o 
shown  farther  apart  than  this  in  the  cut  in  order  to 
make  the  matter  plain.  There  shovild  be  four  cross  bear- 
ings under  the  stall  floor  if  two-inch  stuff  is  to  be  used. 
Of  the  many  forms  of  horse  stalls,  the  one  sho\\ai  in 
Figure  217  has  perhaps  the  most  good  points.  All  stall 
floors  should  be  laid  lengthwise  of  the  stall.  The  boards 
should  extend  the  full  length  of  the  stall.  When  badly 
worn  they  can  be  changed  end  for  end  and  if  turned  over 


218  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

much  extra  wear  is  obtained.  Soft  wood,  like  pine  or 
even  elm,  is  superior  to  oak.  There  is  less  danger  of 
the  horse  slipping  when  he  gets  up. 

The  most  important  part  of  the  stall  is  the  hay  rack 
and  manger.  When  the  hay  is  thrown  into  a  deep  manger 
where  the  horse  has  free  access  to  the  entire  quantity, 
he  tosses  and  mixes  it  over  many  times  to  select  tha  most 
desirable  portions.  Often  a  large  share  of  it  is  thrown 
from  the  manger  to  the  floor.  In  the  illustration  the 
manger,  h,  is  only  fourteen  inches  wide  at  the  bottom, 
and  one  foot  high.  It  is  made  from  two-inch  oak  plank, 
with  a  strip  of  well-worn  wagon  tire  nailed  on  the  upper 
edge. 

The  hay  rack  at  a  is  outside  the  stall.  It  should  be 
two  and  one-half  to  three  feet  wide  and  eighteen  inches 
deep.  If  fodder  is  fed  from  above,  the  chute  should 
extend  up  to  the  floor.  The  wooden  gratings  are  at  least 
eight  inches  apart,  so  that  the  horse  may  easily  pass  in 
his  head  up  to  the  eyes  if  need  be,  but  by  making  the 
bottom  of  the  rack  pitch  at  a  sharp  angle  toward  the 
manger  all  litter,  seeds,  etc.,  will  fall  into  the  manger.  In 
this  form  of  rack  the  horse  grasps  a  mouthful  of  hay, 
pulls  it  from  the  rack  and  holds  it  over  the  manger  while 
eating.  It  is  plain  that  all  loose  particles  fall  into  the 
manger  and  are  eaten  at  leisure.  The  uneaten  portion  in 
rack  is  not  mussed  over.  The  feed  box  at  d  is  made  in 
usual  manner.  If  horses  are  in  the  habit  of  throwing  out 
the  grain  nail  a  strip  over  the  edge  of  box,  letting  it 
project  inward  about  one  inch.  By  the  \ise  of  a  door  at 
c  the  grain  is  fed  without  entering  the  stall. 

The  form  of  stall  division  is  important  and  the  one 
shown  is  O  K.  The  shoulder  at  e  (too  low  in  engraving) 
is  very  convenient  to  hang  a  blanket  on  or  to  temporarily 
lay  the  brush  or  currycomb  on  or  even  parts  of  harness. 
For  easy  cleaning  of  stable  the  floor  boards  in  rear  of 
stall  should  run  in  the  direction  shown  at  f,  as  the  sweep- 


CARRIAGE    AND    TOOL    HOUSE 


219 


ings  are  usually  disposed  of  at  one  end  of  stable,  and 
are  more  readily  pushed  lengthwise  instead  of  crosswise 
of  a  board  floor. 

A     COMBINED     CARRIAGE     AND     TOOL     HOUSE 

The  accompanying  engraving^-;  give  plans  of  a  carriage, 
wagon  and  tool  house  in  one  building,  suitable  for  a  large 


Fig.     218 — PLAN     OF     WAGON     HOUSE 


farm.  The  structure  may  be  sixteen  or  eighteen  feet 
high  to  the  eaves,  which  will  give  a  space  of  nine  feet 
in  the  clear  for  the  lower  story,  six  feet  in  the  clear  for 
the  granary  at  the  walls,  and  ten  or  eleven  feet   in  the 


^-^ 

/; 

1              || 

fffr^^tei 

y 

Fig.    219 — PLAN    OF    THE    UPPER    FLOOR,    AND    HOIST 

center  between  the  bins.  It  should  be  at  least  twenty- 
four  feet  wide,  and  forty-eight  feet  long,  to  give  ample 
space  for  moving  about  in  it.  The  wagon  and  cart  room 
is  at  one  end,  and  twenty-four  feet  square,  as  shown  in 


220 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


the  plan,  Figure  218,  to  contain  three  wagons  and  a 
cart.  The  doors  of  this  portion  slide  upon  rollers,  and 
are  in  three  divisions  to  facilitate  the  movements  of  the 
wagons  in  or  oi;t.  The  carriage  house  is  in  the  center, 
with  the  entrance  at  the  front.  Here  is  room  for  two 
carriages,  and  a  tool  house  adjoining,  with  entrance  at  the 
end  opposite  to  that  of  the  wagon  house.     In  the  carriage 


rig.      220 — VIEW      OF     COMBINED      WAGON     AND     TOOT,     HOUSE 


house  there  should  he  a  well  and  a  force  pump  furnished 
with  a  hosG,  for  the  purpose  of  washing  off  the  carriages, 
and  the  floor  should  he  made  slightly  sloping  each  way  to 
the  center,  with  a  gutter  there  to  carry  off  the  water  to 
the  rear.  The  upper  floor  may  he  reached  by  a  stairway 
outside,  or  from  the  inside,  as  may  be  most  convenient. 


AN    ILLIXUIS    llOUbE    BARN 


221 


The  plan  of  the  bins  in  the  granary  is  given  in  Figure 
219.  On  one  side  are  the  three  grain  bins,  and  on  the 
other,  two  lathed  bins  for  corn  in  the  ear.  Between 
these  is  the  hoisting  wheel  and  door.  The  plan  of  the 
hoist  is  shown  in  Figure  219;  a  being  the  winding  barrel, 
h  the  pulley  wheel,  with  an  endless  rope  hanging  upon  it, 
and  c  the  pulley  in  the  cathead.  The  hoist  is  supported  by 
hangers  fastened  to  the  roof  timbers  and  the  plate. 
Figure  220  shows  the  elevation,  which  may  be  changed  to 


Fig.     221 — ILLINOIS     HORSE    BARN 

suit  the  wishes  or  the  means  of  the  builder.    Here  It  Is 
made  perfectly  plain,  in  order  to  be  the  most  economical. 

A     TWENTY-SIDED     HORSE     BARN 

In  Figures  221  and  222  Is  shown  a  twenty-sided 
horse  barn  built  by  John  C.  Baker,  a  lumberman  and 
stock-raiser    of    Manhattan,    111,      The    barn    is    sixteen 


222 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


feet  on  a  side,  320  feet  around  it  and  102l^  feet  in 
diameter.  It  contains  eighteen  box  stalls  fourteen  by 
sixteen  feet  in  size  around  the  outside  and  four- 
teen single  stalls  eight  by  twelve  feet  in  the  center. 
Through  the  barn  is  a  driveway  fourteen  feet  wide.  The 
box  stalls  are  for  stallions,  mares  and  colts  and  are  built 
of  hemlock  two  by  fours  laid  flat  and  spiked  together 
solid.  The  feed  rack,  which  is  built  into  the  outside 
wall,  is  also  of  two  by  fours.     There  is  a  window  in  each 


Fig.   222 — FLOOR     PLAN     OF    ILLINOIS    HORSE    BARN 


stall,  also  an  inside  door.  An  ovitside  door  in  two  stalls 
makes  four  ways  to  get  out.  The  upper  story  is  twelve 
feet  high  and  contains  room  for  200  tons  hay,  5000 
bushels  oats  and  some  room  left.  A  ten-sided  cattle 
barn  built  by  Mr.  Baker  is  shown  on  Page  65.  He  writes 
of  them : 

"I  find  these  barns  all  that  I  could  desire.  They  are 
warm  in  winter  and  cool  in  summer,  and  I  notice  one 
good  thing  about  them  is  that  drafts  never  blow  onto 


AN     OKLAHOMA     HORSE     BARN 


223 


tte  stock  as  in  oblong  barns  or  square  barns.  They  are 
very  convenient  for  feeding,  but  they  must  be  seen  to  be 
appreciated." 


to 

OS 


A     CHEAP    AND     CONVENIENT     HORSE    BARN 


A  part  of  the  large  horse  barn  on  the  farm  of  Zach 
JMulhall    in   Central    Oklahoma   is  shown   in   Figure   223. 


224:  BAR\      PLANS     AND     OLTBLILDINGS 

Mr.  Mulhall's  barn  is  so  arranged  that  each  horse  has  a 
box  stall  and  thus  enjoys  comparative  freedom.  This  is 
necessary  in  the  raising  of  high  class  horses.  Most  of 
the  stables  are  one  story  in  hight,  with  room  for  consid- 
erable hay  and  grain.  It  is  not  necessary  in  this  section 
to  have  as  warm  barns  as  in  other  localities,  but  in  Okla- 
homa and  similar  latitudes,  barns  are  as  necessary  in 
summer  as  in  winter,  because  the  heat  is  intense  during 
July  and  August,  and  flies  are  often  bad.  Unless  horses 
are  kept  in  during  the  day  at  such  times,  they  will  lose 
flesh  rapidly  in  fighting  flies.  By  properly  ventilating  the 
barn  and  darkening  the  windows  and  doors  during  the 
day,  a  properly  constructed  horse  barn  is  a  fairly  com- 
fortable place,  even  during  the  most  disagreeable  seasons 
of  the  year. 

The  barn  as  here  arranged  has  a  double  row  of  stalls 
with  a  central  passageway  in  the  middle.  Many  barns 
have  been  built  with  a  single  row  of  stalls,  having  the 
roof  projecting  several  feet  to  afford  protection  from  sun 
and  storms.  The  stalls  are  arranged  with  a  door  cut  in 
two  in  the  middle,  so  that  the  upper  door  may  be  left 
open  for  light  and  air  and  the  horse  be  still  confined. 
Such  barns  are  much  colder  in  winter  than  those  like 
Mr.  Mulhall's,  and  more  work  is  required  in  caring  for 
and  feeding  the  horses  than  where  there  is  a  central 
passageway  with  stalls  on  either  side. 


/  — 


CHAPTEE   IX 
CORN  HOUSES  AND   CBIBS 

Whatever  temporary  expedients  the  grower  of  Indian 
corn  may  resort  to  for  storing  his  crop,  he  at  last  comes 
to  a  crib  as  a  prime  necessity.  The  rail  pen  is  a  very 
insecure  inclosure,  much  exposed  to  damage  from  the 
storms,  and  an  invitation  for  any  thief  to  plunder.  Stor- 
ing in  the  garret  is  a  very  laborious  business,  and  unless 
spread  very  thin,  the   corn  is  very  liable  to   injure  by 


Fig,    224 — coxxECTicuT   corn 

HOUSE 


Fig.    225 — TIN 

PAN     ON     POST 


mold.  Spread  upon  the  barn  floor,  it  is  always  in  the 
way,  and  free  plunder  to  all  the  rats  and  mice  upon 
the  premises.  Corn  is  more  liable  to  injury  from  im- 
perfect curing  than  any  other  grain  that  we  raise. 
Wheat,  oats,  rye,  barley  and  buckwheat  are  easily  cured 
in  the  field,  so  that  a  few  days  or  weeks  after  cutting 
they  can  be  threshed  there,  and  immediately  stored  in 
bins  or  sent  to  market.    But  Indian  corn  has  a  much 


226  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

larger  kernel,  and  grows  upon  a  thick,  stout  cob,  from 
which  it  takes  months  to  expel  the  moisture  after  it  ia 
fully  ripe. 

THE   CONNECTICUT     CORN     HOUSE 

Figure  224  is  the  common  type  of  the  corn  house 
throughout  the  east.  It  sits  upon  posts  covered  with 
inverted  tin  pans,  Figure  225,  to  make  it  inaccessible 
to  rats  and  mice.  These  posts  are  a  foot  or  more  in 
diameter,  and  two  or  three  feet  from  the  surface  of  the 


Fig.   226 — TWO   CRIBS   roofed   over 

ground  to  the  bottom  of  the  building.  Sometimes  flat 
stones,  two  or  three  feet  broad,  are  substituted  for  the 
tin  pans,  but  the  latter  are  preferred.  The  sides  of  the 
building  are  made  of  slats  nailed  to  sills  and  plates  at 
bottom  and  top,  and  to  one  or  more  girders  between. 
The  bin  upon  the  inside  is  made  by  a  board  partition, 
three  or  four  feet  from  the  siding.  The  boards  are  mov- 
fible,  and  are  put  up  as  the  crib  is  filled.  The  remain- 
ing  space   between    the   bins    is    used   for   shelling   corn. 


AN     IMPROVED     CORN     HOUSE  227 

or  as  a  receptacle  for  bags  and  barrels,  and  the  back  part 
is  sometimes  used  for  a  tool  house,  or  fitted  with  bins 
for  storing  shelled  corn  or  other  grain. 

Figure  226  shows  two  cribs,  with  a  roof  thrown  over 
them  to  form  a  convenient  shed  or  shelter  for  carts, 
wagons  and  farming  tools.  Sometimes  the  passage  is 
boarded  up  at  one  end,  and  furnished  with  doors  at  the 
other.  These  cribs  are  entered  at  one  end  by  a  narrow 
door,  and  the  whole  space  is  occupied  by  the  corn.  They 
are  from  three  to  five  feet  in  width,  and  give  very  perfect 
ventilation  to  the  ears.  They  have  usually  a  stone 
foundation,  with  a  sill  and  board  floor  above.  They  are 
made  of  any  desirable  size,  and  cribs  holding  from  500 
to  1000  bushels  are  common. 

AN     IMPROVED     CORN     HOUSE 

The  waste  caused  by  vermin  in  the  corn  crib  is  fre- 
quently very  serious.  Rats  are  the  especial  enemy  of  the 
farmer  in  this  respect,  and  any  means  whereby  their 
ravages  may  be  prevented,  will  be  productive  of  a  great 
saving.  The  burrowing  rat,  which  makes  its  nest  be- 
neath the  buildings  or  rubbish  piles,  does  the  most  mis- 
chief in  the  corn  house,  and  unless  it  is  so  made  that 
there  are  no  hiding  places,  it  is  impossible  to  dislodge  the 
rats  from  their  retreat.  The  corn  house,  shown  in  end 
view.  Figure  227,  is  made  so  that  it  is  inaccessible  to 
rats  or  mice,  and  there  are  no  hiding  places  beneath  it. 
It  is  elevated  three  feet  above  the  ground,  on  firmly  set 
posts.  The  cribs  are  six  to  eight  feet  wide,  and  of  any 
desired  length.  For  4000  bushels  of  corn  in  the  ear, 
the  building  should  be  forty  feet  long,  with  cribs  eight 
feet  long  and  twelve  feet  high.  The  outside  is  closely 
boarded  and  battened.  The  floor  of  the  cribs  is  made 
of  three-inch  strips,  set  an  inch  and  a  half  apart,  to 
admit  a  current  of  air.     The  space  between  the  cribs  is 


228 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


twelve  feet  wide,  and  is  closed  inside,  from  the  bottom 
of  the  cribs  to  the  ground,  forming  an  inside  shed,  which 
is  not  accessible  to  any  farm  animals  or  vermin.  This 
inner  shed  is  closed  by  sliding  doors  at  each  end.  The 
cribs  are  boarded  up  inside  the  shed  with  three-inch 
strips  placed  a  quarter  of  an  inch  apart,  to  admit  air. 
The  cribs  are  thus  weather-proof  on  the  outside,  and  by 
opening  the  sliding  doors,  free  circulation  of  air  can  be 
obtained    in   fine    weather.     Above,    the    shed   is   floored 


ig.     227 — AX     l.Ml'lUnKD     CORN     IIOUSK 


over,  forming  an  apartment  twelve  feet  wide  by  forty  feet 
long,  for  storage  of  corn.  A  trap  door  may  be  made  in 
the  center  of  this  floor  to  hand  up  corn  from  below.  Any 
corn  that  is  shelled  off  from  the  ears,  and  falls  through 
the  floor,  can  be  picked  up  by  poultry  or  pigs,  and  none 
will  be  wasted.  If  desired,  lean-to  sheds  may  be  built 
against  the  sides  of  the  crib,  giving  valuable  room  for 
many  purposes.  The  shed  between  the  cribs  will  make 
an  excellent  storehouse  for  im])lements.  As  many  doors 
can  be  made  in  th*^  cribs  as  may  be  desired.     These  should 


AVKSTERX     CORN     HOUSES  229 

be  sliding  doors,  and  loose  boards  may  be  placed  across 
llie  doorways  inside,  to  prevent  the  corn  resting  against 
them.  The  roof  should  be  well  shingled,  and  a  door  made 
at  each  end  of  the  upper  loft,  which  may  be  opened  as 
needed  for  thorough  ventilation. 

AVESTERN     CORN     HOUSES 

The  accompanying  illustrations  convey  to  the  reader 
an  idea  of  the  large  corn  houses,  so  frequently  met  with  in 
the  great  corn-growing  west.  The  one  here  described 
belongs  to  W.  S.  Wadsworth,  Franklin  County,  Kan. 
Figure  228  gives  a  side  view  of  the  house,  with  the  end 
or  front  in  side  section.  The  house  is  112  feet  long  by 
twenty-eight  feet  wide,  and  has  a  capacity  of  18,000 
bushels.  The  manner  of  storing  away  corn  in  a  large 
house  like  this  is  an  interesting  feature.  It  is  done  by 
horse  power,  which  operates  a  large  belt  elevator.  On 
the  right  of  the  entrance,  or  floor,  of  the  house,  the  ele- 
vator is  seen  running  from  A  to  B.  This  is  a  strong 
endless  belt  of  leather,  which  passes  over  a  pulley,  above 
and  below,  and  has  a  series  of  "buckets"  attached  to  its 
outer  surface.  The  "buckets"  or  cups  are  about  two 
feet  apart.  The  pulley.  A,  is  connected  with  one  above 
the  letter  D,  and  this  is  turned  by  a  tarred  rope,  which 
connects  it  with  the  large  wooden  wheel,  five  feet  in 
diameter,  at  the  top  of  the  turn  post,  to  which  the  horse 
is  attached.  Thus,  by  a  proper  construction  of  the  pulleys, 
a  sufficiently  rapid  motion  of  the  elevator  belt  is  obtained 
from  the  ordinary  gait  of  the  horse  on  the  "power."  The 
corn  is  fed  to  the  elevator  cups  through  a  hopper  below 
the  floor ;  shown  in  cross-section  only  in  Figure  228. 
The  wagon  is  driven  in  upon  the  floor,  which  is  pro- 
vided with  a  "dump."  A  trap  door,  two  and  one-half 
by  three  feet,  is  opened  at  the  rear  of  the  loaded  wagon. 
At  the  same  time  the  floor  is  so  arranged  that  the  whole 


WESTERN     CORN     HOUSES 


231 


wagon  tips  back,  as  shown  in  side  view  of  Figure  229, 
and  the  end  board  of  the  wagon  box  being  removed, 
the  corn  slides  into  the  large  hopper  below.  It  is  not 
necessary  to  have  the  whole  floor  arranged  to  tip,  but 
simply  two  narrow  sills  upon  which  the  wheels  must 
be  placed.  After  the  corn  is  carried  from  the  hopper 
at  B,  to  the  top  of  the  pulley  A,  where  the  cups  are 
inverted,   it   is  thrown  upon  a  long,   smooth  horizontal 


Fig.     229 END    VIEW    OF    MAIN    PART 


belt,  which  is  run  by  a  cord  connecting  A  with  the 
belt  pulley  at  F,  a  short  distance  below  it.  This  hori- 
zontal belt  runs  the  whole  length  of  the  storing  portion 
of  the  house,  and  just  below  the  ridge  pole,  as  may 
be  seen  in  Figure  228,  a  portion  of  the  roof  being 
omitted  for  the  purpose  of  showing  it.  This  belt  may 
be  shortened  at  any  time  when  the  rear  of  the  house 
becomes  filled.     A  simple  sliding  chute  is  used  at  the 


232 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTJiUILDINGS 


furtliei'  end  of  the  belt,  for  the  purpose  of  turning  the 
corn  to  one  side  or  the  other  of  the  house,  thus  making 
the  distribvition  of  the  grain  an  easy  matter.  Figure  230 
shows  a  cross-section  of  the  storing  room,  and  gives  an 
idea  of  the  way  the  sides  of  the  house  are  braced,  by 
means  of  ordinary  boards,  nailed  to  the  sides  of  the  beams 
which  run  from  the  ground  to  the  roof.  The  house 
stands  on  posts  cut  twenty-six  inches  long,  and  set  in  the 
ground  about  one  foot,  the  ground  being  so  raised  that 
no  water  will  ruza  under  the  corn  house. 


Fig.     280 — CROSS-SECTION     OF     STORE     HOUSE 


ANOTHER     WESTERN     CORN     HOUSE 


It  will  be  seen  from  the  engraving,  Figure  231,  that  this 
corn  house  stands  upon  sloping  ground,  and  thus  while 
the  roof  and  floors  are  level,  the  floor  of  each  section  of 
twenty  feet  drops  down  a  step.  The  entire  building  is 
sixty  feet  in  length  by  thirty  in  width,  and  is  constructed 
as  follows:  It  has  an  alley  or  cartway  nmning  length- 
wise through  the  center,  which  is  ten  feet  wide  at  the  sills 
au.d  eight  feet  wide  at  the  top.  On  each  side  of  the  alley 
is  a  crib  ten  feet  wide  at  the  bottom  and  eleven  feet  at 
the  top.     The  outer  and  inner  sides  of  the  cribs  are  slatted 


A     BIG     WESTERX     CORN     HOUSE 


233 


perpendicularly;  the  g:able  ends  are  close-boarded.  Each 
crib-gable  has  a  door,  and  sliding  doors  upon  rollers  close 
the  cartway  at  each  end.  There  is  a  floored  loft  over  the 
whole,  lighted  by  doors  in  the  ends,  which  is  used 
for  storing  grain  and  agricultural  implements.  The 
building  rests  on  fifty-two  oak  posts,  placed  on  stone 
bases,  set  two  feet  in  the  ground,  and  coming  six  inches 
above  the  surface.     It  is  built  entirely  of  native  oak  and 


Fig.    231 — ANOTHER    WESTERN    CORN     HOUSE 

walnut.  The  posts  at  one  end  are  ten  feet  long;  at  the 
other,  a  little  over  twelve,  on  account  of  the  slope  of  the 
ground.     The  cribs  will  each  hold  6080  bushels  of  corn. 

CEMENT    FLOORS    NOT    SUITABLE 


In  building  a  corn  crib  first  get  good  stone  for  founda- 
tion, and  if  these  are  not  procurable  use  brick  piers  molded 
in  place  from  Portland  cement.  On  these  piers,  which 
should  not  be  more  than  four  feet  apart,  place  two  by 
twelve  sills,  set  up  posts  or  studding  two  by  six.  Figure 


234 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


233,  spacing  them  two  feet  apart,  and  spike  them  to  the 
two  by  ten  floor  joists.  The  floor  lies  the  long  way  and 
ought  not  to  be  matched.  Figure  232  shows  the  rest  of  the 
frame  except  that  the  inner  studding  need  not  all  of  it 
run  up  to  the  roof,  though  each  alternate  one  should 
do  so.  Between  these  double  cribs  is  an  excellent  place 
for  the  wagon  and  above  is  a  useful  scaffold.  What  the 
diagram  does  not  show  is  a  set  of  long  braces  of  two  by  six, 
at  least  twelve  feet  long,  firmly  spiked  diagonally  from 


Fig.     232 — FRAMEWORK     OF     CORN     CRIB 


corner  to  plate  so  as  to  resist  wind  pressure  or  weight 
of  grain  settling  unevenly.  Siding  need  not  be  matched 
stuff  unless  snow  blows  into  cracks  of  buildings.  In  many 
sections  it  is  customary  to  board  up  with  six-inch  stuff 
and  leave  the  cracks  slightly  open.  This  crib  is  as  strong 
and  durable  as  it  need  be  for  any  region.  The  length  will 
depend  on  the  conditions  involved.  The  crib  is  all  of 
two-inch  stuff  nailed  and  spiked  together. 


A    CONVENIENT    CORN    CRIB 


235 


This  crib  will  hold  about  100  bushels  to  the  running 
foot  of  ear  corn,  filling  it  ten  feet  high.  The  same  prin- 
ciple of  construction  applied  to  a  narrower  building,  say 
the  bins  five  feet  wide  instead  of  ten,  would  make  a 
length  of  forty  feet,  which  would  hold  about  1600  bushels. 
As  air  should  be  admitted  through  the  bottom  it  is  evident 
that  a  cement  floor  would  not  do  for  a  corn  crib.  Cement 
piers  to  set  the  posts  on  would  be  excellent  and  are  often 
used.  Have  the  tinner  make  pipes  of  heavy  galvanized 
iron  twelve  inches  in  diameter,  which  should  be  set  on 


■J->t 

I 

.... 

1    ( 

f 

I 

:          ii           .;             :      i.»   vi      :: 

,.j^-iPr 


Fig.  233 — STUDDING  OF  CRIB  Fig.  234 — SMALL  CRIB 

flat  stones  sunk  to  hard  earth  in  the  ground,  the  pipes 
filled  with  cement  concrete  and  the  crib  set  thereon  so  rats 
cannot  climb  them. 

A    CONVENIENT    CORN    CRIB 


Figure  234  shows  a  corn  crib  which  is  satisfactory 
where  a  small  amount  of  corn  is  to  be  kept.  It  can  be 
made  any  size  desired,  but  possibly  one  twenty-five  by 
twelve  feet  is  the  most  satisfactory.  The  sides  may  be 
made  of  any  kind  of  rough  boards  placed  about  two  inches 
apart,  or  strips  of  wood  of  any  character  can  be  used, 
provided  the  opening  between  them  is  not  wider  than  three 
inches.     The  roof  is  made  out  of  ordinary  rough  boards 


"»"i^       «  *       y||l  ill 


SELF-FEEDING     CORN     CRIBS  237 

with  battens  over  the  cracks.  The  crib  should  be  placed 
at  least  a  foot  above  the  ground,  so  that  it  will  not  harbor 
rats.  The  one  shown  in  the  engraving  is  supported  by 
two  large  sills.  Pillars  of  brick  or  blocks  of  wood  can 
be  used. 

A    SELF-FEEDING    CORN     CRIB 

In  portions  of  the  west,  where  corn  is  mainly  fed 
to  stock  in  the  open  field,  a  crib  may  be  used  which 
will  not  only  store  the  corn,  but  will  supply  it  to  the 
stock  as  they  may  need  it,  without  any  further  handling 
than  merely  filling  the  crib.  Corn  being  very  cheap,  and 
labor  dear,  it  is  an  object  to  save  labor  at  the  expense  of 
the  corn.  But  as  hogs  are  usually  kept  along  with  cattle 
under  such  circumstances,  no  corn  is  lost ;  what  is 
dropped  by  the  cattle  is  picked  up  by  the  hogs.  The 
crib  may  be  made  of  logs  or  planks,  but  should  be  strongly 
built.  It  is  of  the  ordinary  form,  but  open  at  the 
bottom,  where  it  is  surrounded  by  a  pen,  reaching  a  foot 
above  the  open  bottom.  The  pen  is  larger  than  the  crib, 
so  as  to  give  room  for  the  stock  to  reach  the  corn,  and  is 
of  a  convenient  bight,  or  about  thirty  inches  to  three 
feet.  The  pen  is  planked  over  about  a  foot  below  the 
bottom  of  the  crib,  and  if  the  space  beneath  is  filled  with 
earth,  it  will  enable  the  building  better  to  resist,  when  it 
is  empty,  the  heavy  winds  of  the  prairie.  The  engraving, 
Figure  235,  shows  the  form  of  one  of  these  feeding  cribs, 
which  may  be  made  of  any  suitable  size,  or  of  any  con- 
venient material. 

A   SELF-DISCHARGING   CORN    CRIB 

A  corn  crib  from  which  the  corn  may  be  taken  when 
wanted,  without  opening  any  part  of  the  upper  portion, 
or  without  the  use  of  a  ladder  or  steps,  may  be  made  as 
shown   in  Figure  236.     The  floor   slopes   from  one  side 


238 


BARN     PLANS     AND    OUTBUILDINGS 


to  the  other,  and  its  lower  margin  projects  heyond  the 
side  of  the  crib  sufficiently  to  permit  of  a  box  in  which  a 
scoop  or  shovel  can  be  used.  The  projecting  part  of  the 
floor  is  made  the  bottom  of  a  box,  that  is  built  upon  it, 
and  which  is  open  on  the  side  next  the  crib,  so  that  the 
corn  will  slide  into  it.  A  cover  is  hinged  to  the  box,  so 
that  it  may  be  turned  up,  when  corn  is  to  be  taken  out,  as 
shown  by  the  dotted  lines.  This  cover  should  be  kept 
locked,  for  obvious  reasons.  To  facilitate  the  use  of  the 
shovel,  the  opening  into  the  crib  is  closed  for  a  space  of 
two  feet,  either  in  the  middle  or  at  each  end.     At  these 


Fig.  236 — SECTION  OF  crib 


237 — board  rafter 


closed  places  there  will  be  no  corn  upon  the  floor  of  the 
box,  so  that  it  will  be  easy  to  shovel  out  the  corn.  In 
one  part  of  the  west  cribs  of  this  kind  are  in  common 
use,  but  they  are  not  frequently  found  elsewhere. 


A    COVER    FOR    CORN    CRIBS 


A  vast  quantity  of  corn  is  destroyed  or  badly  damaged 
by  being  exposed  in  open  cribs  to  the  rains  and  snows  of 
the  winter  and  spring.  A  simple  and  very  cheap  method 
of  protecting  the  log  or  rail  crib,  in  common  use  in  the 
western  states,  is  suggested  by  seeing  hundreds  of  them 


ROOFS  FOR  CORX  CRIBS  239 

filled  with  com  soaking  in  th©  heavy  rains  of  spring. 
Take  two  boards  six  feet  long  and  fasten  them  together 
at  the  end  by  leather  or  iron  strap-hinges,  as  shown  in 
Figure  237.  They  should  then  be  laid  across  the  corn, 
which  is  to  be  heaped  up  into  the  center  of  the  crib. 
As  many  pairs  of  these  boards  are  used  as  may  be  neces- 
sary for  the  length  of  the  crib,  or  two  pairs  for  each  length 
of  boards,  whether  that  be  twelve  feet,  sixteen  feet  or 


Fig.  238 — COVER  FOR  corn  crib 

less.  Boards  are  then  tacked  upon  the  "rafters"  length- 
wise of  the  corn  crib,  commencing  at  the  lower  part, 
each  board  overlapping  two  inches  or  thereabouts.  The 
nails  should  be  only  partly  driven  in,  so  that  when 
the  cover  is  to  be  taken  away  the  nails  are  easily  drawn 
out  with  a  claw  hammer.  Figure  238  shows  a  log  crib 
covered  in  this  manner.  It  will,  of  course,  be  necessary 
to  stay  the  cover  by  some  means  so  that  it  may  not  be 
blovsTi  off  by  heavy  winds. 


CHAPTER  X 

ICE  HOUSES 
ice:  its  uses  and  importance 

Every  year  the  use  of  ice  increases.  It  is  not  merely  a 
luxury,  but  becomes  a  necessity  so  soon  as  its  value  is 
known  by  experience.  As  with  many  other  gifts  of 
nature,  however,  its  very  abundance  causes  it  to  be  disre- 
garded; and  this  mine  of  usefulness  is  formed  once  a 
year,  perhaps  almost  at  the  farmhouse  door,  and  allowed 
to  pass  away  in  spring  un worked.  Ice  in  the  dairy  is 
next  to  indispensable,  for  holding  milk  and  cream  at  a 
proper  temperature  and  for  use  in  working  and  keeping 
butter.  This  fact  is  recognized  by  all  well-regulated 
dairies,  and  especially  in  those  where  high-priced  butter 
is  made.  Successful  dairymen  state  that  the  gain  in  the 
price  obtained  for  their  products  by  the  use  of  ice  m.any 
times  repays  the  cost;  and  in  preserving  meats,  etc.,  its 
worth  is  to  be  estimated  by  computing  the  total  value  of 
the  things  kept  from  spoiling. 

Ice  should  be  cut  with  a  saw  or  ice  plow,  not  with  an 
axe,  into  blocks  of  regular  size,  so  that  they  will  pack  into 
the  ice  house  solidly  and  without  leaving  spaces  between 
them.  If  cut  in  this  manner  ice  will  keep  perfectly  well, 
if  not  more  than  three  inches  in  thickness;  but  a  thickness 
of  six  inches  at  least  is  preferable.  It  should  be  cut  and 
packed  in  cold,  freezing  weather,  and  if,  as  it  is  packed, 
a  pailful  of  water  is  thrown  over  each  layer  to  fill  the 
spaces  between  the  blocks,  and  exclude  the  air,  it  will  keep 
very  much  better  than  otherwise.  For  a  day  or  two  be- 
fore the  house  is  filled  it  is  well  to  throw  it  open  in  order 


A    CHEAP    ICE    HOUSE  241 

that  the  ground  beneath  it  may  freeze,  and  it  may  be  left 
open  for  a  few  days  after  it  is  iilled,  if  the  weather  con- 
tinues cold.  The  ice  house  should  be  finally  closed  during 
cold,  dry  weather.  There  are  some  general  principles  to 
be  observed  in  the  proper  construction  of  any  kind  of  ice 
house,  and  all  else  is  of  secondary  importance.  There 
must  be  perfect  drainage,  and  no  admission  of  air  beneath, 
ample  ventilation  and  perfect  dryness  above,  and  suffi- 
cient non-conducting  material  for  packing  below,  above 
and  around  the  ice,  by  which  its  low  temperature  may  be 
preserved.  The  best  packing  consists  of  sawdust,  either 
of  pine  or  hard-wood,  spent  tan,  charcoal  powder,  or  what 
is  known  as  "braize,"  from  charcoal  pits  or  storehouses, 
and  oat,  wheat  or  buckwheat  chaff,  or  marsh  hay. 

PLAN    OF    AN    ICE    HOUSE 

A  cheap  ice  house  may  be  made  as  follows :  The  founda- 
tion should  be  dug  about  eighteen  inches  to  two  feet  deep 
in  a  dry,  gravelly  or  sandy  soil.  If  the  soil  is  clay,  the 
foundation  should  be  dug  two  feet  deeper,  and  filled  to 
that  extent  with  broken  bricks,  coar*^e  gravel  or  clean, 
sharp  sand.  To  make  a  drain  beneath  the  ice  of  any  other 
kind  than  this  would  be  risky,  and  if  not  made  with  the 
greatest  care  to  prevent  access  of  air,  the  drain  would 
cause  the  loss  of  the  ice  in  a  few  weeks  of  warm  weather. 
Around  the  inside  of  the  foundation  are  laid  sills  of  two 
by  six  plank,  and  upon  this  are  "toe-nailed"  studs  of  the 
same  size,  ten  feet  long,  at  distances  of  four  feet  apart. 
Upon  these,  matched  boards  or  patent  siding  are  then 
nailed  horizontally.  A  door  frame  is  made  at  one  end,  or 
if  the  building  is  over  twenty  feet  long,  one  may  be  made 
at  each  end  for  convenience  in  filling.  When  the  outside 
boarding  reaches  the  top  of  the  frame,  plates  of  two  by 
six  timber  are  spiked  on  to  the  studs.  Rafters  of  two  by 
four  scantling  are  then  spiked  on  to  the  frame  over  the 


242  BARN     PLANS     ANU     OUTBUILDINGS 

studs,  a  quarter  pitch  being  sufficient.  Or  if  felt  roofing 
is  used,  a  flat  roof  with  a  very  little  slope  to  the  rear  may 
be  made.  In  this  latter  case,  however,  the  hight  of  the 
building  should  be  increased  at  least  one  foot,  to  secure 
sufficient  air  space  above  the  ice  for  ventilation.  The 
roof  may  be  of  common  boards  or  shingles,  or  of  asbestos 
roofing,  but  it  must  be  perfectly  waterproof,  and 
should  have  broad  eaves,  to  shade  the  walls  as  much  as 


Fig.    239 — A    FRAME    FOR    AN    ICE    HOUSE 

possible  from  the  sun's  licat.  The  outside  of  the  building, 
roof  included,  should  be  whitewashed,  so  as  to  reflect 
heat.  The  inside  of  the  building  should  be  lined  with 
good  boards,  placed  horizontally,  the  space  between  the 
two  boardings  being  filled  closely  with  the  packing. 

The  frame,  Figure  239,  is  closed  in  on  one  side  and  end, 
and  partly  boarded  on  the  other  side,  the  front  being  left 
open  to  show  the  manner  of  making  the  frame.  A  section 
pf  the  house,  filled  with  ice,  is  seen  in  Figure  240:  the 


A    CHEAP    ICE    HOUSE 


243 


lining  between  the  walls  is  shown  by  the  dark  shading. 
The  packing  around  the  ice  should  be  a  foot  thick  at  the 
bottom  and  the  sides,  and  two  feet  at  the  top.  There 
should  be  a  capacious  ventilator  at  the  top  of  the  house, 
and  the  spaces  above  the  plates  and  between  the  rafters 
at  the  eaves  will  permit  a  constant  current  of  air  to  pass 
over  the  upper  packing,  and  remove  the  collected  vapor. 
The  method  of  closing  the  doors  is  shown  in  Figure  241. 
Boards  are  placed  across  the  inside  of  the  door  as  the  ice 
is  packed,  until  the  top  is  reached.     Eye  or  other  long 


Fig.   240 — SECTION    OF   AN   ICE   HOUSE   FILLED 


straw  is  tied  into  bundles,  as  shown  in  the  illustration, 
and  these  bundles  are  packed  tightly  into  the  space  be- 
tween the  boards  and  the  door.  The  door  is  then  closed. 
These  straw  bundles  will  effectually  seal  up  the  door- 
space  of  an  ice  house  in  summer  as  well  as  the  door  of  a 
root  cellar  during  winter.  When  the  house  is  opened  in 
the  summer,  and  the  upper  packing  is  disturbed  to  reach 
the  ice,  it  should  always  be  carefully  replaced,  and  the 
door  closed  up  again  with  the  straw  bundles.  The  bundles 
of  straw  may  be  fastened  together  by  means  of  two  or 


244  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

three  cross  laths.  They  can  be  very  readily  removed 
and  replaced.  The  material  required  for  a  house  such  as 
is  here  described,  twenty  feet  long,  sixteen  feet  wide  and 
ten  feet  high,  and  which  will  hold  over  sixty  tons  of  ice, 
is  as  follows:  Three  hundred  and  twenty-four  feet  of  two 
by  six  studding;  twelve  rafters  two  by  four,  twelve  feet 
long;  576  feet  of  matched  boards;  720  feet  of  boards  for 
lining;  480  feet  of  roofing  boards;  3000  shingles,  or  480 


Fig.    241 — DOOR   FOR   ICE   HOUSE 

feet  of  roofing  boards;  one  batten  door,  hinges  and  nails. 
About  twenty-five  wagon  loads  of  sawdust  or  some  other 
non-conductor  will  be  required  for  a  house  of  this  size. 

A    CHEAP    ICE    HOUSE 

Figure  242  illustrates  an  ice  house  that  can  be  quickly 
erected  at  a  very  slight  outlay  for  materials,  and  at  the 
cost  of  only  a  few  hours'  labor.  The  size  is  determined 
by  the  length  of  the  planks  or  boards  to  be  used.  Nine 
posts,  rough,  sawed  or  hewn,  of  suitable  length,  are  pro- 
vided, and  two  put  up  at  each  corner,  as  in  Figure  243, 


ANOTHER    CHEAP    ICE    HOUSE 


246 


resting  upon  a  block  of  wood  or  a  stone,  or  set  in  the 
ground.  The  ninth  post  is  placed  at  one  side  of  tlie  front, 
to  serve  as  one  side  of  the  door.  The  bottom  planks,  all 
around,  are  nailed  to  the  posts,  which  may  be  more  firmly 
secured  in  place  by  cleats  connecting  those  at  each  corner ; 
the  front  posts  are  a  foot  or  so  longer  than  the  others,  to 
permit  of  a  shed  roof.  A  plate  of  light  scantling  secures 
the  tops  in  place.     Now  it  is  ready  for  the  ice,     First, 


Fig.    242 — CHEAP    AND    PICTURESQUE    ICE    HOUSE 


sprinkle  on  the  ground  a  layer  of  sawdust,  shavings  or  cut 
hay,  so  that  it  will  be  at  least  six  inches  deep,  when  firmly 
packed  down.  Then  put  in  the  first  tier  of  ice,  keeping 
the  blocks  a  foot  away  from  the  plank  wall;  fill  the  space 
solidly  with  the  sawdust  or  other  packing  material,  a, 
Figure  243 ;  place  the  second  tier  of  ice ;  next,  put  in  posi- 
tion more  planks,  and  so  on,  until  the  house  is  filled, 
storing  the  ice,  and  carrying  up  the  wall  together,  and 
filling  in  between  with  sawdust,  etc.,  as  the  work  pro- 
gresses.    The  planks  need  only  be  slightly  nailed,  to  keep 


246 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


them  up  when  the  ice  is  removed,  as  they  will  be  held  in 
position  by  the  posts  without,  and  the  pressure  from 
within.  A  door,  h,  is  made  by  simply  using  two  lengths 
of  plank  on  the  front  side,  as  indicated  by  the  posts  in 


6       D O" 

Fig.  243 — GROUND  PLAN  OF  FIGURE  244 


Fig.  244 — ICE  HOUSE  of  donald  g.  mitchell 


Figure  243.  When  the  house  is  full  a  thick  layer  of  the 
packing  material  is  put  on  the  top  of  the  ice.  Drainage 
is  secured  by  placing  the  structure  on  sloping  ground. 
A  roof  of  slabs,  a  thatch,  or  anything  to  keep  out  rain, 


A     SMALL    ICE    HOUSE  247 

is  sufficient.  With  a  little  taste  this  may  be  made  quite 
pleasing  in  appearance.  Figure  244  represents  the  ice 
house  on  the  Connecticut  river  of  Donald  G.  Mitchell 
(Ik  Marvel),  made  picturesque  by  a  roof  and  ends  of 
rough  slabs.  The  main  part  of  the  ice  room  is  below 
the  surface  of  the  ground,  and  may  be  constructed  of 
stones  or  timber.  Ice  houses  can  have  their  appearance 
improved  by  the  free  use  of  climbing  vines.  These  answer 
not  only  as  an  embellishment,  but  serve  a  i;seful  end  in 
breaking  the  force  of  the  sun's  rays  and  keeping  the 
building  much  cooler  that  it  would  be  under  full  ex- 
posure. It  costs  but  little  more  to  make  the  smaller  farm 
buildings  tasteful  and  picturesque  in  appearance  than  to 
have  them  look  ugly  and  cheap. 

A    SMALL    ICE     HOUSE 

The  base,  Figure  245,  is  a  frame  of  eight  by  eight-inch 
hewn  or  sawed  timber,  forming  a  square,  twelve  by 
twelve  feet.  This  is  laid  on  a  stone  foundation,  or  on 
corner  posts  set  in  the  ground,  and  filled  underneath  with 
stones  and  mortar  if  accessible;  earthing  up  will  answer. 
A  similar  square  frame  is  made  for  the  plates,  and  this 
is  supported  at  the  four  corners  with  eight  by  eight-inch 
posts,  eight  feet  long,  and  by  two  by  eight-inch  studs,  say 
three  on  each  of  three  sides,  and  two  as  door  posts  on  the 
front  side.  Figure  246  shows  a  vertical  section  through 
the  middle.  The  outside.  Figure  247,  is  covered  with 
inch  boards.  Rough  pine  boards,  somewhat  knotty,  will 
answer.  The  cracks  may  be  covered  with  narrow 
battening.  Inch  boards,  laid  horizontally,  line  the 
inside  up  to  the  plates,  and  the  eight-inch  space  be- 
tween is  filled  with  sawdust.  The  flooring  is  simply 
boards  laid  upon  the  ground  or  upon  small  cobble  stones. 
The  roof  is  only  one  thickness  of  inch  boards,  with  bat- 
ten pieces  over  the  cracks,  and  is  supported  by  three  hori- 


S48 


BARN     PLAX3     AN"D     OUTBUILDINGS 


zontal  strips  on  each  side,  laid  across  rafters.  The  rafters 
are  scantling,  beveled  and  nailed  together  at  the  top,  and 
set  into  or  firmly  spiked  to  the  plates.  About  half  of  the 
middle  of  the  ridge  is  cut  out,  leaving  an  opening  four  oi* 
five  inches  wide,  and  over  this  is  a  cap,  supported  by  a 
saddle  piece  at  each  end  of  it,  leaving  an  opening  on  each 
side  under  it  for  ventilation.  The  cap  extends  far  enough 
over  to  keep  out  the  rain.  The  doors  are  of  a  single  thick- 
ness of  inch  boards.  The  outside  boards  can  be  rough,  or 
planed  and  painted  to  correspond  with  the  house  or  other 
buildings.     When  filling  the  house,  five  or  six  inches  of 


Fig.    245 — THE   WALLS 


Fig.   246 VERTICAL    SECTIOIi 

OF   ICE   HOUSE 


straw  and  sawdust  are  put  on  the  floor.  The  ice  is  packed 
solidly  on  this,  but  a  space  of  six  or  eight  inches  is  left  on 
all  sides,  which  is  packed  in  with  sawdust.  Any  spaces 
or  cracks  between  the  cakes  of  ice  are  also  filled  with 
sawdust.  Short  pieces  of  horizontal  loose  boards  support 
the  sawdust  inside  the  door.  These  are  put  in  as  the 
filling  proceeds,  and  taken  out  as  the  ice  is  removed  from 
time  to  time.  The  ice  is  filled  in  some  distance  above 
the  plates,  and  finally  covered  over  with  a  foot  or  so 
of  sawdust.     This  suffices  to  keep  out  the  sun  and  air. 


UKDElRGROUND    ICE     HOUSES 


249 


heat.  Experience  proves  that  this  surrounding  of  sawdust 
on  all  sides  will  keep  the  ice  well  during  the  entire  summer 
season. 

Those  not  having  access  to  lakes  or  ponds  can  easily 
make  an  artificial  pond  in  a  prairie  slough,  or  other 
depression  of  ground,  large  enough  to  furnish  ice  for 
filling  a  small  house  like  the  above.  In  this  house  there 
is  a  mass  of  ice  say  nine  feet  square,  or  about  two  and 
one-third  tons  for  each  foot  in  hight. 


247 SMALL     ICE     HOUSE     COMPLETE 


UNDERGROUND    ICE    HOUSES 

Figure  248  shows  an  ice  house  built  partly  under- 
ground. Where  the  soil  is  gravelly  and  porous,  it  may  be 
built  more  cheaply  than  one  wholly  above  ground.  The 
excavation  may  be  made  as  deep  as  desirable,  perhaps  six 
or  eight  feet  will  be  sufficient.  There  must,  however,  be 
perfect  freedom  from  surface  water,  or  the  house  will  be 
a  failure.  The  bottom  may  be  made  of  a  layer  of  large 
stones,  two  feet  deep.  Upon  this  smaller  stones  should  be 
laid,  to  fill  all  the  inequalities  and  form  a  level  surface, 
and  there  should  be  placed  upon  these  a  layer  of  coarse 


250 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


gravel.  This  may  form  the  floor  of  the  house.  The 
walls,  up  to  a  foot  above  the  surface,  may  be  built  of  stone 
laid  in  mortar  or  cement,  and  the  sill  of  the  upper  frame 
should  be  bedded  in  the  stone  work  and  cement.  The 
posts  and  studs,  ten  inches  wide  and  two  inches  thick, 
should  be  framed  into  the  sill,  as  in  Figure  249 — a  being 
the  sill  shown  in  section,  i  the  stud,  and  c  the  tenon  at  the 
foot  of  the  stud,  and  the  mortise  in  the  siU.    In  Figure 


Fig.  248 — SECTION  OF  um>i;i;i;imund  ice  house 


250  the  manner  of  framing  the  corners  is  given,  a,  a,  be- 
ing the  sills,  and  h,  h,  h,  the  studs.  One  stud  is  placed 
at  the  end  of  one  sill,  and  another  one  inch  from  it,  at 
the  shoulder  of  the  adjoining  sill.  Thus  the  outer  boards 
may  be  nailed  firmly  at  each  corner,  and  a  good  joint  also 
be  made  inside,  by  inserting  the  boards  on  one  side  be^ 
tween  the  two  corner  studs  at  c.  This  plan  saves  the  cost 
of  heavy  corner  posts,   and  gives  equal  firmness  to   the 


ICE    HOUSE    IX    THE    BARN 


251 


building.  The  corner  can  also  be  filled  with  sawdust, 
making  it  a  poorer  conductor  of  heat  than  a  solid  post. 
For  convenience  in  taking  out  the  ice,  a  ladder  should  be 


FRAMING 


Fig.  250 — FRAMING  THE 
CORNER 


built  against  the  inner  wall.  This  is  covered  by  the 
packing,  when  the  house  is  filled,  but  as  the  ice  is  taken 
out,  the  ladder  is  exposed  for  use. 

AN    ICE    HOUSE    IN    THE    BARN 

The  following  is  a  method  of  putting  up  ice  in  a  cor- 
ner of  the  barn,  without  anything  more  than  a  few 
boards    and    some   sawdust.      The    coolest    corner   of   the 

barn  is  set  apart  for  the  ice 
and  a  board  is  nailed  to  the 
floor  on  each  side  of  the  cor- 
ner, or  across  it.  One  of  these 
should  be  just  beneath  a  beam 
of  the  upper  floor.  Some 
rough  boards  are  tacked  to 
the  posts  of  the  barn  wall,  i;p 
to  near  the  top.  A  batten  is 
then  nailed  to  the  floor,  one 
inch  from  the  board;  this 
makes  the  foundation,  the 
i^round  plan  of  which  is  shown  in  Figure  251.  The  spaces, 
a,  a,  are  filled  with  sawdust.     The  ice  is  then  packed  in 


Fig.  251 — PLAN  OF   ICE 
HOUSE  IN  A  BARN 


^52 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


the  space  bounded  by  the  dotted  lines,  a  foot  of  sawdust 
being  placed  beneath  it.  The  sawdust  is  kept  in  at  the 
sides,  h  and  c,  by  upright  boards  placed  against  those 
nailed  to  the  floor  and  a  beam  above  it,  or  the  board 
nailed  to  the  beam.  When  all  the  ice  is  in,  it  is  well 
covered  on  the  top,  a  space  for  a  door  being  left  in  the 
boarding  above  the  ice.     Then  a  second  row  of  boards  is 


II  bH 


Fig.  252 — A  VIEW  OF   AN  ICE  HOUSE  IN  A  BARN 


placed  outside  of  the  wall  already  built,  and  fastened 
to  it,  as  may  be  most  convenient,  a  door  space  being 
made  to  match  the  inner  one.  The  space  between  these 
walls  may  be  filled  with  cut  straw,  sawdust,  clover  chaff 
or  any  other  non-conducting  material,  up  to  the  hight  of 
the  ice  within.  There  is  no  need  of  closing  the  door 
space;  it  will  be  better  to  leave  that  open  for  ventilation. 
Figure  252  shows  the  outside  of  this  ice  room  as  it  ap- 
pears from  the  barn  floor.  Such  a  space  as  this  may  be 
easily  arranged  in  many  barns. 


A     CHEAP    ICE     HOUSE 


253 


A    CHEAPLY    CONSTRUCTED    ICE    HOUSE 

The  house  shown  in  Figure  253  is  the  cheapest  building 
that  can  be  constructed  for  storing  ice.  It  may  be  built 
as  long  or  short  as  desired,  varying  with  the  amount  of 
ice  to  be  stored.  It  is  not  made  for  beauty,  but  for  ser- 
vice. Evergreens  should  be  planted  on  each  side,  as  they 
help  to  keep  the  house  more  cool  in  hot  weather.  For  its 
construction,  boards  sixteen  feet  long  are  used,  longer  or 


Fig.    253 — A-SHAPED    ICE    HOUSE 


shorter  according  to  the  capacity  desired.  The  girths  may 
be  of  two  by  three  or  two  by  four-inch  scantling  and  three 
feet  apart.  Shingles  are  not  required.  The  cracks  on 
the  outside  may  be  covered  with  boards  or  battened.  Such 
a  house  will  be  in  serviceable  use  at  least  twenty  years. 
The  ground  should  be  dug  out  a  foot  deep.  Two  doors 
may  be  made,  one  above  the  other  and  each  three  by  five 
feet.    At  A  the  boards  are  cut  sufiSciently  to  allow  putting 


254 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


in  sawdust.  The  filling  in  the  spaces  B  is  also  made  with 
sawdust.  The  filling  is  less  at  the  top  than  the  bottom, 
as  the  top  will  be  used  before  hot  weather  sets  in.  Being 
built  in  this  shape  there  will  be  no  pressure  on  the  sides 
should  the  ice  melt  more  at  the  bottom  than  the  top.  An 
ice  house  of  the  dimensions  here  described  will  contain 
about  thirty-five  tons. 


Fig.    254 — AN    ICE    STACK   AGAINST   A   BANK 


ICE    WITHOUT    HOUSES 


In  England,  when  they  have  an  unexpectedly  good 
crop  of  ice,  the  blocks  are  gathered,  stacked  up  in  some 
favorable  place  and  covered  with  a  thick  layer  of  straw. 
In  that  cool  climate  such  stores  of  ice  frequently  last  the 
season  through ;  in  this  country  a  similar  stack  might 
often  be  made  to  help  out  the  regular  supply.  Figure  254 
shows  one  of  these  temporary  storehouses,  built  against 
a  bank.    The  ice  is  shown  at  A.    The  outer  wall,  B,  is  of 


STACKING     ICE  255 

"fern,"  but  straw  would  answer  equally  well,  held  in 
place  by  boards  and  braces,  as  shown  at  B.  The  stack  of 
ice  is  covered  by  a  little  straw,  then  eighteen  inches  oi 
fern,  and  the  thatched  roof,  C,  is  put  over  the  whole. 
An  ice  stack  of  this  kind  answers  perfectly  when  placed 
on  an  incline  so  that  the  water  may  naturally  drain  away. 


••...^:... 
^%'^.. 


:    i      .■•••J^fe,-.      ' 


CHAPTEK  XI 

ICE  HOUSES  AND  COOL  CHAMBERS 

The  principal  requisites  for  an  ice  house  with  a  cool 
shamber  below  it  for  milk  or  fruit  are :  A  locality  where 
the  ice  can  be  expeditiously  placed  in  the  upper  part  and 
provision  for  drainage  to  carry  off  the  waste  from  the 
ice.  A  hillside  is  the  most  convenient  position  for  such 
a  house.     The  method  of  construction  is  the  same  as  for 


Fig.   255 — INTERIOR   VIEW   OF   A   COOL   CHAMBER 


any  other  ice  house,  excepting  in  the  floor.  The  walls 
are  double,  and  are  filled  in  between  with  sawdust 
or  other  non-conducting  material.  The  roof  should  be 
wide  in  the  eaves  so  as  to  shade  the  walls  as  much  as  pos- 
sible, and  it  will  be  found  convenient  to  have  a  porch 
around  the  building,  on  a  level  with  the  floor  of  the  ice 
'^ouse.  The  floor  of  the  ice  house  must  be  made  not  only 
•ater  tight,  but  air  tight.     If  a  current  of  air  can  be 


ICE     HOUSE     FOR     DAIRYMEN 


257 


established  by  any  means  through  the  floor  of  the  house 
fhe  ice  will  melt  away  in  a  very  short  time.  A  double  floor 
of  matched  boards  should  be  laid,  tarred  at  the  joints 
and  between  the  floors.  The  joists  are  placed  so  that 
the  floor  slopes  from  both  sides  to  the  center,  to  collect 
all  waste  water  from  the  ice.     A  channel  is  made  along 


Fig.  256 — ICE  HOUSE  and  milk  room 

the  center  to  carry  the  water  to  the  side  of  the  building, 
where  it  passes  off  by  means  of  a  pipe,  with  an  co  curve 
in  it,  to  prevent  access  of  air.  Or  the  pipe  may  be 
brought  down  through  the  lower  chamber  and  made  to 
discharge    into    a   cistern,    where    the    water    is   kept   al-. 


258 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


ways  above  the  level  at  which  it  is  discharged  from  the 
pipe.  The  method  of  this  arrangement  of  the  floor  is 
shown  in  Figure  255,  which  represents  a  section  through 
the  floor  and  lower  chamber.  The  shelves  are  seen  in 
place  upon  the  sides. 

Such  cool  chambers  may  be  used  to  preserve  fruit,  vege- 
tables  or    other   perishable    matters.      Some    ventilation 


Fig.   257 — ANOTHER  ICE   HOUSE 


and  circdlation  of  air  in  them  is  necessary  to  prevent 
mold  or  mildew,  and  it  would  be  preferable  to  build  the 
lower  story  of  brick  or  stone  rather  than  of  wood.  The 
upper  part  of  the  building  could  be  built  of  wood  as  well 
as  of  any  other  material.  A  temperature  of  forty  de- 
grees has  been  maintained  in  such  a  chamber  throughout 
the  summer,  but  this  can  only  be  done  where  the  soil  is 
very  dry  and  gravelly. 


ICE     HOUSE     AND     REFRIGERATOR 


259 


Another  plan  of  an  ice  house,  including  an  apartment  in 
which  meat  or  milk  may  be  kept  cool,  is  shown  in 
Figure  256.  A  drain  should  be  made  to  carry  off  all  water 
from  the  melted  ice.  A  piece  of  lead  pipe,  bent  in  the 
shape  represented  at  a,  Figure  256,  should  be  made  to  carry 
off  the  water.  Any  current  of  air,  which  would  be  fatal  to 
the  preservation  of  the  ice,  would  thus  be  prevented  from 
entering  at  the  bottom.  The  size  of  the  ice  room  should 
not  be  less  than  ten  feet  inside.     The  walls  should  be 


Fig.    25S — ICE   HOUSE   AND   REFRIGERATOR 


double;  they  may  be  of  common  boards,  battened  over 
the  cracks,  with  a  space  of  ten  inches  left  between  them. 
This  space  may  be  filled  with  any  light,  dry,  porous  mate- 
rial. Sawdust,  tan  bark,  swamp  moss,  chaff  or  charcoal 
dust  would  any  of  them  be  excellent  material  for 
this  purpose.  The  filling  should  be  carried  up  to  the 
eaves.  The  roof  need  not  be  double,  but  it  should  be 
tight,  and  ventilators  will  be  required  just  below  the  eaves 


260  BARN      PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

and  out  of  the  roof,  to  allow  a  free  current  of  air  through 
the  top  of  the  house.  The  doorway  leading  to  the  milk 
room  requires  no  door,  but  simply  short  boards  put  across 
as  the  ice  is  built  up.  The  ice  should  be  cut  in  blocks 
nearly  of  a  size,  and  packed  away  as  closely  as  possible, 
all  crevices  being  filled  with  small  pieces.  Choose  cold 
weather  for  this  business,  and  open  the  house  so  that  it 
may  be  thoroughly  reduced  in  temperature.  The  milk 
or  meat  room  is  seen  in  the  lower  portion  of  the  plan, 
with  ranges  of  shelves  on  each  side,  and  windows  also,  for 
ventilation.  They  may  be  closed  with  wire  gauze  double 
screens  and  shutters,  to  exclude  the  heat  in  summer. 
Figure  25Y  shows  the  whole  building;  it  is  all  the  better 
if  shaded  by  a  few  large  trees.  A  coat  of  whitewash 
over  the  whole,  including  roof,  would  keep  the  interior 
cooler,  as  the  heat  would  be  reflected  and  not  absorbed. 

A    CHAMBER    REFRIGERATOR 

The  engraving,  Figure  258,  represents  a  section  of  a 
building,  with  a  room  partitioned  off  in  such  a  manner 
that  it  has  ice  on  three  sides  and  the  top,  and  its  floor  is 
below  the  surface  a  few  feet,  in  order  to  take  advantage 
of  the  coolness  of  the  earth.  The  double  wall  of  the 
ice  house  extends  in  front  of  the  open  room,  and  the  door 
is  protected  by  a  porch.  A  shallow  cellar  under  the  floor 
•)f  the  ice  house  admits  ventilation  by  the  passage  of  cool 
air  under  the  ice,  and  thence  off  through  a  flue.  The 
floor  and  ceiling  of  the  room  slope,  to  secure  the  necessarv 


DAIRY 


CHAPTER  XII 

HOUSES,   CREAMERIES  AND   CHEESE 
FACTORIES 


Perfect  control  of  the  temperature  of  the  dairy  is  t 
great  step  gained  toward  making  the  best  butter.  It  is 
only  by  means  of  ice,  or  very  cold  spring  water,  that  we 
-jan  keep  the  most  desirable  temperature  in  very  warm 


Pig.   259 — AX   ICE   HOUSE  AND  A  DAIRY   COMBINED 


weather.  During  much  of  the  year  there  is  little  difficulty 
in  maintaining  sufficient  coolness.  In  winter  the  problem 
is  how  to  keep  a  dairy  warm  enough,  and  not  get  it  too 
hot.  A  combination  of  the  dairy  and  ice  house  may  be 
made,  and  is  entirely  i)ractical. 


2G2 


BARX      I'LANS     AND     UL  TBL ILUIXGS 


ICE     HOUSE     AXD     SUMMER     DAIRY     COMBINED 

The  plan  proposes  an  ice  house  above  ground,  and  a 
dairy  half  below.  The  ice  room  half  covers  the  dairy, 
the  rest  of  the  dairy  being  below  the  cool  room,  which 
forms  the  entrance  to  the  ice  house.     The  exterior  walls 


Fig.     260 GROUND     PLAN 


of  the  ice  house  are  of  wood;  those  of  the  dairy  are 
of  stone.  The  floor  of  each  room  is  laid  in  cement,  with 
a  slope  sufficient  to  carry  off  the  water.     The  drainage  of 


_(££: 


c>"^   — >, 70-^ 


Eig.  261 PLAX  OF  UPPER  PART  OK  ICK  HOUSE 


the  ice  house  is  collected  and  made  to  pass  by  a  pipe  into 
a  vessel  in  the  dairy,  where  the  end  of  the  pipe  is  always 
covered  with  water.  The  water  is  allowed  to  flow  through 
shallow  troughs   in   which   milk  pans  may  be  set.     The 


A    COOL     DAIRY     ROOM 


2G3 


amonnt  of  water  would  not  be  large,  but  it  will  be  cold, 
and  ought  not  to  be  wasted.  Its  use  will  not  interfere 
with  the  employment  of  water  from  springs  or  wells  for 
the  same  purpose. 

The  building  represented  in  the  perspective  elevation, 
Figure  259,  is  twenty-eight  feet  long  by  fourteen  feet 
wide.  The  ice  room  seen  in  Figures  260  and  261  is  ten  by 
twelve  feet  on  the  ground,  and  about  twelve  by  sixteen 
feet,  including  the  space  above  the  dairy.  The  sides  of  the 
building  are  nine  feet  above  the  ground,  and  the  hight 
of    the    dairy    seven    feet    in    the    clear.     The    outside 


Fig.   262 — SECTION   OF   ICE   HOUSE   AND  DAIRY 


walls  of  the  ice  house  are  made  of  two-inch  plank, 
ten  inches  wide,  set  upright,  with  inch-and-a-half  planks 
nailed  on  the  inside.  They  are  weather-boarded  on  the 
outside,  and  filled  with  spent  tan  bark,  or  other  dry,  non- 
conducting substance.  The  partition  wall  between  the 
dairy  and  the  ice  house,  and  between  the  cool  room  and 
the  ice  house,  is  half  the  thickness,  and  not  filled,  thus 
forming  closed  air  spaces  between  the  studs.  These 
spaces  communicate  with  the  dairy,  by  little  doors  near 


COOLING     A     DAIRY     ROOM 


265 


the  floor,  and  so  currents  of  cold  air  may  be  established 
and  perfectly  regulated,  entering  the  dairy  on  the  side 
toward  the  ice  house.  These,  with  a  ventilator  at  the 
top  of  the  room  for  carrying  off  the  warmest  air,  easily 
regulate  the  temperature. 

A    BUTTER    DAIRY 

Figures  263,  26-i  and  265  illustrate  a  dairy  managed 
upon  the  old-fashioned  shallow-pan  system,  the  pans  used 
being   the   common   tin   ones,    holding   about   ten    quarts. 


Fig.    264 INTERIOR   OF    THE   MILK    ROOM 


Such  a  building  is  also  well  adapted  for  any  other  system, 
such  as  a  separator  or  creamer. 

The  building  should  be  of  stone,  or  if  of  wood,  bui't 
with  at  least  six-inch  studs,  and  closely  boarded  with  joints 
broken  upon  the  studs  and  battened,  the  inside  being  well 
lathed  and  plastered.     For  thirty  cows  the  size  required 


26G 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


would  be  thirty-six  by  sixteen  feet,  and  ten  feet  liigh; 
twenty-six  feet  of  it  sunk  four  feet  below  the  ground. 
The  milk  room  and  ice  house  are  placed  in  this  sunken 
part,  the  other  portion  being  used  for  the  churning  room. 
Steps  lead  from  the  churning  room  down  into  the  milk 
room.  The  ceiling  is  plastered,  and  an  attic  is  left  above 
to  keep  the  rooms  cool;  a  ventilator  also  opens  from  the 
milk  room  and  passes  through  the  roof.  Figure  263  shows 
the  general  elevation  of  the  dairy,  which  is  one  belonging 


Fig.  265 — ICE  HOUSE  and  pipes 


to  a  successful  dairy  farmer  in  the  state  of  New  York. 
The  churning  is  done  by  horse  power,  and  the  position 
of  the  power  outside  of  the  building  is  seen  in  the  en- 
graving. The  churning  room  contains  a  pump,  sink  and 
wash  bench. 

Figure  264  shows  the  milk  room,  four  feet  below  the 
level  of  the  churning  room.  There  are  three  ranges  of 
shelves  around  the  room,  with  a  table  in  the  center.  In 
the  winter  this  room  is  kept  at  n  regular  temperature  of 


A     PEXXSYLVAM.V     DAIRY  267 

sixty  degrees  by  means  of  a  stove,  and  in  summer  is  coole<.l 
to  the  same  temperature  by  an  inflow  of  cold  air  from 
the  ice  house  which  adjoins  it.  This  is  admitted  through 
two  openings  in  the  wall  at  the  right  and  just  above  the 
lower  shelf.  Figure  265  shows  the  arrangement  of  these 
cold  air  pipes  in  the  ice  house.  A  tube  passes  downward 
through  the  center  of  the  ice,  and  at  the  bottom  of  the 
ice  branches  into  two  arms,  which  are  made  to  turn  at 
right  angles,  and  after  passing  through  the  ice  appear  in 
the  wall  of  the  milk  room.  Whenever  desirable,  a  current 
of  cold  air,  moved  by  its  own  gravity,  passes  through  these 
pipes  into  the  milk  room,  filling  it,  and  displacing  the 
warmer  air,  which  is  forced  out  through  the  ventilators  in 
the  ceiling.  In  this  manner  the  necessary  regular  tem- 
perature is  kept  in  the  milk  room  without  regard  to  the 
degree  of  cold  or  heat  which  may  exist  outside.  The  size 
of  the  milk  room  is  sixteen  feet  square;  it  has  but  one 
window,  and  that  upon  the  north  side. 

A     PEXXSYLVAXIA    DAIRY 

A  building,  owned  by  'Mr.  E.  Reeder,  Bucks  County,  Pa., 
is  shown  in  Figure  2()6.  It  is  thirty-four  feet  long  and 
fifteen  feet  wide,  and  stands  at  a  distance  from  any  other 
building  or  any  contaminating  influence.  It  is  divided 
into  five  apartments,  viz.,  the  ice  house,  seen  at  a, 
Figure  267,  the  milk  room,  h,  the  vestibule,  c,  with  stairs 
leading  to  the  winter  milk  room  below,  and  an  attic  above, 
for  the  storage  of  sawdust  for  the  ice.  The  ice  house  is 
twelve  feet  square  and  fourteen  feet  deep,  holding  thirty- 
six  loads  of  ice,  or  over  2000  cubic  feet.  It  is  six  feet 
below  ground  and  eight  feet  above.  The  walls  are  of 
stone,  eighteen  inches  thick.  The  frame  building  above 
the  wall  is  eight  feet  high.  The  lining  boards  of  the  ice 
house  extend  down  the  face  of  the  wall  to  the  bottom, 
making  an  air  space  of  eighteen  inches,  which  is  filled 


268 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


with  sawdust.  The  ice  house  is  filled  through  three 
doors,  one  above  the  other,  at  the  rear  end.  There  is 
perfect  drainage  at  the  bottom  of  the  house,  with  ample 
ventilation  above,  and  no  currents  of  air  reach  the  ice. 
The  milk  room,  h,  is  twelve  feet  square,  and  is  one  foot 
lower  than  the  ice  room.  It  is  divided  into  two  stories  of 
seven  and  one-half  feet  each,  for  winter  and  summer  use. 


Fig.    266 A    PENNSYLVANIA    DAIRY    HOUSE 


A  ventilator  enters  the  ceiling  of  the  lower  room,  and 
leads  to  the  cupola  at  the  top,  furnishing  complete  ven- 
tilation for  both  rooms.  The  vestibule,  c,  is  four  feet 
wide  and  eight  feet  long.  Here  the  milk  is  strained  and 
skimmed,  the  butter  worked  and  the  pans  are  stored. 
The  floor  is  of  flagging  laid  in  cement,  as  is  that  of  the 
winter  or  lower  dairy.  The  pool,  d,  which  contains  ice 
water,  is  thirty-six  inches  long,  sixteen  inches  wide  and 


A    PENNSYLVANIA     DAIRY     HOUSE 


269 


twenty  inches  deep;  in  this  the  deep  pans  and  cream 
cans  are  immersed.  The  waste  from  the  ice  box,  e, 
can  be  turned  into  this  pool.  If  the  deep  can  system  of 
setting  milk  should  be  practiced,  this  pool  can  be  length- 
ened to  twelve  feet.  A  drain,  f,  carries  off  all  the  waste 
water  from  the  room.  At  g,  Figures  267  and  268,  is  a  cool- 
ing cupboard,  located  in  the  wall  between  the  ice  house 
and  the  milk  room,  six  feet  high,  four  feet  wide  and 
eighteen  inches  deep.  This  is  lined  with  galvanized  sheet 
iron,  has  a  stone  slab  at  the  bottom,  and  two  slate 
shelves  fifteen  inches  wide,  on  which  the  cakes  of  butter 
are  hardened  before  they  are  packed  for  market.  A  cur- 
rent of  cold  air  can  circulate  around  the  shelves,  as  they 


^N»y&»«^^g»^;y^'^^i>^:^j^»^;^^-<^i       ^^\^v^^\\\\^ 


in^ 


ou 


w 


i 


^\y>?^;s;y;y:;^tx•^"^^^^''^^•^^^'%v.;^'<^  kN\Ar 


Fig.    267 — PLAN    OF    THE    DAIRY    HOUSE 

are  three  inches  narrower  than  the  depth  of  the  cup- 
board. There  are  latticed  blinds  in  the  doors  of  the 
cupboard,  seen  at  i,  i,  Figures  268  and  269,  where  the  doors 
are  shown  as  opened  and  closed.  A  ciarrent  of  cold  air 
can  pass  through  the  lower  lattices,  and  this  causes  an 
equal  current  of  warmer  air  to  pass  through  the  upper 
ones.  This  warmer  air,  cooled  by  contact  with  the  ice 
box,  e,  passes  down  and  out  into  the  milk  room,  where  a 
temperature  of  sixty  degrees  is  easily  maintained.  By 
closing  or  opening  these  lattices  the  change  of  tempera- 
ture is  regulated  as  may  be  desired.  At  h,  Ji,  Figure  267, 
are  ventilating  pipes,  which  are  provided  with  registers, 
seen  at  r,  r.  Figures  268  and  269.  These  communicate 
with  the  air  chamber  beneath  the  ice  box,  and  also  with 


270 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


air  flues  at  each  end  of  it.  Thus  two  additional  currents 
of  cold  air  can  be  created  when  they  may  be  needed.  The 
windows  of  the  lower  milk  room  are  close  to  the  ceiling, 
and  above  the  surface  of  the  ground  outside.  They  are 
three  feet  eight  inches  high,  and  are  made  with  outer 
wire  cloth  screens,  glazed  sashes  and  inner  shutters  or 
blinds.  The  milk  room  can  thus  be  aired  and  dark- 
ened at  the  same  time,  if  it  is  desired.  In  operating 
this  dairy  it  has  been  found  necessary  to  use  ten  to  fifteen 
bushels  of   ice   weekly,   in   the   hottest   weather   in   sum- 


d 


Fig.  2G8 — DOORS  OPEN 


r 


r 

© 


Fig.  269 — DOORS  CLOSED 


mer,  the  ice  box  then  requiring  filling  two  or  three  times 
each  week.  The  air  within  the  milk  room  has  always 
been  dry,  so  that  the  floor  will  not  remain  damp  longer 
than  a  few  hours  after  it  is  washed. 


A     DAIRY     HOUSE     FOR     HOT     CLIJIATES 

Where  the  summer  heat  is  excessive,  to  keep  dairy  prem- 
ises cool  and  at  an  even  temperature  is  frequently  a  ques- 
tion of  grave  importance.  Where  water  can  be  procured 
and  economically  applied,  there  is  perhaps  no  cheaper  or 
more  simple  plan  of  cooling  a  dairy  than  that  adopted 
by  Mr.  Henry  Fredricks  of  Australia.  Mr.  Frcdricks 
has  the  good  fortune  to  own  a  hill  farm,  on  which  numer- 
ous springs  of  pure,  cool,  fresh  water  find  their  source. 
Many  of  these  springs  are  of  considerable  volume,  and 
have  ample  fall.  One  of  these  Mr.  Fredricks  has  utilized 
by  piping  it,  and  running  it  on  to  the  top  of  his  dairy 


COOLING     A     DAIRY 


271 


by  gravity.  As  will  be  observed  by  reference  to  Figure 
270,  a  pipe  is  run  up  the  side  of  the  dairy,  and  connects 
with  other  pipes  traversing  the  roof  horizontally.  One 
of  these  pipes  is  on  the  ridge,  and  another  pipe  surrounds 
the  building  about  half  way  down  the  roof.  Both  these 
pipes  are  perforated,  and  the  water  is  forced  out  on  to 
the  roof  in  small  jets  and  sprays,  and  runs  down  and  is 
caught  in  the  gutter,  like  rain. 


Fig.     270 — AX     AUSTRALIAN     DAIRY 

The  dairy  is  constructed  on  improved  principles.  It 
has  a  double  roof,  and  is  virtually  double-walled,  as  an 
enclosed  veranda  surrounds  it  on  all  sides,  and  apart 
from  the  application  of  water  to  the  roof  for  cooling  pur- 
poses, it  is  a  model  dairy  in  every  respect.  By  its  con- 
strviction,  and  the  means  adopted  to  apply  water  to  the 
roof,  this  dairy  can  be  cooled  to  almost  any  temperature 
desirable,  in  the  hottest  day  in  summer,  in  a  very  short 
time.  After  the  water  is  applied  for  cooling  purposes  it 
is  used  to  irrigate  the  fields  when  necessary. 


A     FARM     CREAMERY 


In  Figures  271  and  272  we  give  perspective  and  ground 
plan  for  a  farm  creamery,  or  dairy  house,  not  connected 


272 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


with,  other  buildings.  Dimensions  have  been  purposely 
omitted,  because  the  general  arrangement  adapts  itself 
to  almost  any  size  that  may  be  required.     A  represents 


Fig.     271 — MODEL     FARM     CREAMERY 

the  main  work  room,  containing  separator,  d,  chum,  e, 
and  butter  worker,  f,  with  space  for  ripening  tank,  sink, 
table,  scales,  etc.  B  is  the  store  room  or  refrigerator 
with  ice  box,  g.  C  is  the  power  room,  in  which  may  be 
located  a  small  engine  and  boiler,  or  a  one  or  two-horse 
tread  power. 

In  locating  this  building,  the  double  doors  opening  out  of 
C  should  look  to  the  barn  and  stable  and  the  opening  in 
the  opposite  side,  from  A,  leads  to  the  house.     The  dotted 

line,  hj  represents  a  pipe  for 

01  conducting  water  from  a  tank 

^______  in    the    windmill    tower,    not 

^f^'X '     only    into    the    building,    but 

n  n i iJ_n_  _  "^  . 

.  with  branches  leading  to  the 

I    '  1^      ''^  butter     worker     and     chum. 

Other  branches  should  lead  to 
the    ripening    tank    and    sink, 
when  these  are  located  to  suit 
parties  building.     Some    would 


Fig.    272 INTERIOR 


the    preference   of    the 

doubtless  prefer  to  locate  the  sink  under  the  main  shaft,, 


MODEL     I'AK.M     CREAMERY  273 

h,  either  against  the  inner  partition,  or  under  the  win- 
dow, between  churn  and  separator.  Others  might  prefer 
it  in  the  very  center  of  the  room,  and  still  others  in  some 
other  place.  If  an  engine  is  tised  for  power,  pipes  should 
lead  from  the  boiler  to  the  ripening  tank,  sink,  churn  and 
butter  worker  for  delivering  steam.  It  would  also  be  in 
the  line  of  ultimate  economy,  if  steam  is  to  be  used  fcr 
power,  to  provide  sufficient  boiler  capac::y  to  furnish 
steam  for  heating  the  building. 

If  steam  is  not  used  for  motive  power,  get  a  good  coal 
heater,  set  it  in  the  power  room,  put  in  a  coil  of  pipe  and 
arrange  to  warm  the  work  room  with  a  circulating  sys- 
tem of  hot  water,  with  pipes  and  faucets  for  delivering  hot 
water,  wherever  it  may  be  needed  for  use.  And  theu 
use  freely. 

There  is  a  windmill  shown  in  the  illustration.  If  you 
will  provide  a  tank  holding  ten  or  fifteen  barrels  of  water 
— enough  for  three  days — this  windm'ul  will  do  all  the 
necessary  pumping.  A  large  tank,  conveniently  placed 
for  the  purpose  and  arranged  to  receive  the  overflow  from 
the  smaller  one,  and  the  mill,  will  supply  all  needed  water 
for  stock  also. 

When  it  comes  to  details  of  construction,  there  is  prac- 
tically no  limit  to  the  variations  that  might  be  suggested, 
but  whatever  is  worth  doing  at  all,  is  worth  doing  well. 
If  the  building  be  located  on  level  ground,  the  foundation 
should  not  only  go  down  below  the  frost  line,  but  it  should 
also  be  raised  sufficiently  to  allow  for  enough  filling  in 
and  grading  to  provide  for  drainage  in  all  directions. 
There  should  be  a  slant  of  not  less  than  one  inch  to  the 
foot  in  all  directions  from  the  exterior  walls.  For  this 
purpose,  throw  out  the  surface  soil  from  the  interior,  and 
refill  with  broken  stone,  brickbats,  coarse  gravel,  all  so 
well  tamped  that  it  will  never  settle  or  give  way,  and  then 
nover  with  a  cement  floor,  laid  with  just  a  perceptible. 


274  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

incline  to  a  common  outlet  or  drain,  laid  below  frost  and 
well  trapped. 

The  top  of  the  foundation  wall  should  be  about  four 
inches  above  the  surface  of  the  ground,  after  the  perma- 
nent grade  is  made,  and,  if  the  building  is  of  wood,  the 
successive  courses  of  brick  or  stone  should  be  battered 
back  so  that  the  top  of  the  wall  will  be  only  eight  inches 
wide.  A  two-inch  air  chamber  in  this  wall  will  assist 
very  materially  in  excluding  frost. 

For  the  superstructure,  use  two-inch  stuff,  eight  inches 
wide,  for  sills,  laying  two  courses,  breaking  joints,  and 
well  spiked  together.  Nail  a  strip,  a  scant  one  inch 
square,  all  around  the  outer  edge  of  the  sills,  and  on 
the  inner  side  of  this  set  up  the  studding,  two  by  four 
inches,  flatwise.  Cover  this  studding  on  both  sides  with 
common  lumber,  brought  to  a  uniform  thickness  by  sur- 
facing, and  then  cover  these  sheathing  boards,  inside  and 
outside,  with  best  quality  of  inodorous  building  paper,  well 
lapped  at  the  edges  and  ends.  On  the  inside  set  up 
another  row  of  studding,  sheath  and  paper  as  before. 

We  have  now  two  dead  air  spaces  in  our  side  walls,  and 
may  apply  our.  outside  covering  directly  over  the  paper, 
or,  better  yet,  set  iip  one-inch  furring  strips  and  lay  the 
siding  on  them,  leaving  the  space  made  by  the  strips  open, 
both  at  top  and  bottom.  This  will  allow  a  circulation 
of  air  and  thus  prevent  the  transfer  of  heat  by  convec- 
tion. Use  similar  furring  strips  on  the  inside,  and  ceil, 
or  lath  and  plaster,  as  may  be  preferred. 

The  side  walls  should  be  not  less  than  ten  feet  high, 
and  twelve  feet  would  be  better,  as  this  would  allow  more 
space  above  the  ceiling.  And  provision  for  the  escape 
from  this  space  of  the  heated  air  under  the  roof  should 
be  made  either  through  the  cupola,  or,  if  this  is  omitted, 
by  a  window  in  either  end. 

Provide  storm  windows  and  door  for  winter  and  screens 
for  summer,  and  there  will  be  a  most  satisfactory  dairy 


CO-OPERATIVE     MILK     STATION 


275 


house,  but  little  affected  by  the  heat  of  sunimer  or  cold 
of  winter.  A  less  satisfactory  building  can  be  put  up 
for  somewhat  less  money,  but  the  saving  in  this  respect 
will  be  much  less  than  one  would  be  liable  to  expect. 

PLANS      FOR      A      CO-OPERATIVE      MILK      STATION 

There  is  considerable  difference  of  opinion  as  to  the 
size  and  general  management  of  a  co-operative  milk 
station   for   farmers   in   the   New   York    territory.     The 


Fig.     273 — END     ELEVATION     OF     MILK     STATION 


arrangement  of  the  building  at  Earlville,  N.  Y.,  shown 
in  Figures  273  and  274,  is  very  convenient  and  the  cost 
of  construction  low  as  compared  with  many  other  plants. 
The  general  floor  plan  is  shown  in  the  line  drawing 
figure,  accompanying  this.  The  building  is  thirty- 
two  by  120  feet,  with  engine  room  eight  by  sixteen  feet 
in  addition.  The  wall  is  eighteen  inches  thick  and  two 
feet  high  raid  laid  in   the  best  lime  mortar.     Piers  for 


2TG 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


posts  under  girders  and  pools  should  not  be  less  than 
two  feet  square.  The  floor  in  the  engine  room  is  of  con- 
crete and  plastered  with  Portland  cement.  The  chim- 
ney is  sixteen  by  twenty  inches,  made  of  hard-burned 
bricks  and  started  on  a  solid  foundation  the  proper  hight 
to  receive  the  pipe  from  engine,  and  extends  four  feet 
above  the  roof  of  the  main  building. 

The  sizes  of  timbers  are  as  follows:  Ice  house  sills, 
four  by  ten  inches;  girders,  eight  by  ten;  sleepers,  two 
by  ten  and  eighteen  inches  from  centers;  joists,  two  hy 


Ice  Hou^e 
jo-sa 


/ee  Howse 

Cnrrwie  /tM/n     { 

' «n rn ' 

Pig.     274 — FLOOR     PLAN     OF     JIILK     STATION 

ten,  eighteen  inches  fro:n  centers ;  posts,  six  by  ton ; 
studding  for  ice  house,  two  by  ten,  eighteen  inches  fro:n 
centers,  twenty  feet  long;  plates,  four  by  ten;  posts, 
six  by  ten,  twentj'-  feet  long;  studding  for  work  room, 
two  by  six,  eighteen  inches  from  centers,  twenty  feet 
long;  posts,  six  by  six,  twenty  feet;  all  rafters,  two  by 
six,  twenty- four  inches  from  centers;  roof  on  ice  house, 
six  by  six  trusses,  six  by  six  pier  line.  The  ice  house  ^.a^3 
six  rods,  three  at  bottom  and  three  at  top.  All  rafters 
on  work  room  have  collar  beams,  tv.-o  by  six  trussed  with 


MODERN     CHEESE     FACTORY  277 

one  by  six,  roof  of  one-third  pitch,  covered  with  Wash- 
ington red  cedar  shingles,  laid  five  inches  to  the  weather. 
The  ice  house  is  sheathed  with  straight-edged  hemlock 
boards,  lined  with  best  tarred  paper  underneath.  The 
whole  building  is  covered  with  good  pine  cove  siding  and 
lined  with  tarred  paper.  The  cornice  has  three  mem- 
bers, size  fourteen  by  fourteen  inches.  Sixty  feet  of 
the  building  is  used  for  the  ice  house ;  twenty-two  feet  for 
pool  room  and  twenty-eight  feet  for  work  room.  The 
floors  of  the  work  and  pool  rooms  are  laid  with  one  and 
one-quarter-inch  hard  pine;  in  the  upper  rooms  seven- 
eighths-inch  hard  pine.  There  are  seventeen  windows  in 
the  building. 

One-half  of  the  second  floor  is  finished  with  three- 
eighths-ineh  hard  pine  for  a  curing  room.  The  windows 
and  doors  are  cased  with  hard  pine  and  all  rooms  are 
finished  with  the  same  material.  The  floor  of  the  work 
room  pitches  to  center  with  galvanized  iron  drain.  The 
pool  room  is  fitted  with  two  cypress  pools,  eight  by  sixteen 
^et,  two  feet  four  inches  high;  one  eight  by  eight- 
foot  ice  box  with  hinged  cover  on  solid  foundation.  The 
cold  storage  room  in  the  corner  of  the  ice  house  is  six  by 
twelve  feet.  The  ice  house  is  fitted  with  a  well-hole  four 
by  five  feet,  with  a  chute  and  chair  for  taking  Ice.  There 
is  a  receiving  platform  for  taking  in  milk  and  a  covered 
driveway.  The  inside  is  given  two  coats  of  oil,  while 
on  the  outside  two  heavy  coats  of  good  paint  are  applied. 
Several  plants  of  this  character  are  now  in  operation  and 
can  be  built  along  any  line  of  railroad  within  the  New 
York  city  milk  territory  for  $2500.  A  building  of  this 
sort  can  be  fully  equipped  for  cheese  for  an  additional 
$500,  making  $3000  in  all. 

A    :moderx    cheese   factory 

The  factory  of  the  Leon  C.  Magaw  cheese  company 
in   Crawford   County,  Pa.,   is   thirty  by  sixty-eight  feet 


278 


BARN     PLAiSS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


in  size,  double  boarded  and  papered  on  the  outside,  with 
a  cement  floor.  The  work  room  is  thirty  by  thirty  feet, 
with    a    slanting    floor    that    falls    about    four    inches    in 


Fig.     275 THE     MAGAW     CHEESE     FACTOBY 


^on/  Bini 


Boilrrffoom 


(unm  ffoo/Ji 
ZS'  30 
fo/r/  ffoo^ 


funnijffoofi 


6  00  00/ /or 


h'orA  ffoom 


Jo  .  Jo- 


6oo(j(/lVfft\ 


Ci/rr/  Dri/mer 


'fiijhJ/ieil 


Fig.     276 — FLOOR     PLAN     OF     CHEESE     FACTORY 


twenty-six   feet,   while  the   other   four   feet   slants  to  it, 
forming  a  gutter  for  all  slops  to  run  off. 

There  are  two  curing  rooms.     The  small  one  is  papered 
and    ceiled    on    the    inside.     Tn    this   the   new    cheese   is 


MODERN     CHEESE    FACTORY  279 

placed  for  eight  to  twelve  aays,  after  which  they  are 
moved  to  room  No.  2,  which  is  called  the  cold  room. 
This  room,  was  sheathed  on  the  inside,  papered  on 
sheathing,  put  on  two  by  two-inch  pieces  up  and  down, 
papered  on  those,  then  ceiled  over  the  paper,  thus  making 
two  air  chambers,  one  of  four  inches  and  one  two  inches. 
It  was  ceiled  and  papered  overhead  and  filled  with  saw- 
dust level  with  the  joists. 

Two  twelve-inch  ventilators  run  from  the  ceiling  up 
through  the  roof.  The  windows  in  this  room  are  of  two 
thicknesses  of  glass.  There  are  also  two  small  openings 
in  the  wall  in  opposite  corners,  to  allow  cold  air  to  come 
in  when  the  night  is  cooler  than  the  day.  The  build- 
ing is  also  provided  with  a  cold  air  duct  which  brings 
in  the  cold  air  below  ground  to  the  curing  room.  Figures 
275  and  276  show  the  exterior  and  interior  plans. 


4^ 


CHAPTEK   XIII 


SPRING   HOUSES 


The  main  points  to  look  at  in  constructing  a  spring 
house  are,  coohiess  of  water,  purity  of  air,  the  preserva- 
tion of  an  even  temperature  during  all  seasons,  and  per- 
fect drainage.     The  first  is  secured  by  locating  the  house 


Fig.  277 — INTERIOR  OF  SPRING  HOUSE,  WITH  ELEVATED  TROUGH 


near  the  spring,  or  by  conducting  the  water  through  pipes, 
placed  at  least  four  feet  under  ground.  The  spring 
should  be  dug  out  and  cleaned,  and  the  sides  evenly  built 
up  with  rough  stone  work.     The  top  should  be  arched  over, 


A    SPRING     HOUSE    FOK    MILK 


281 


or  shaded  from  tue  sun.  A  spout  from  the  spring  carries 
the  water  into  the  house.  If  the  spring  is  sufficiently 
high,  it  would  be  most  convenient  to  have  the  water 
trough  in  the  house  elevated  upon  a  bench,  as  shown  in 
Figure  277.  There  is  then  no  necessity  for  stooping, 
to  place  the  pans  in  the  water,  or  to  take  them  out. 
"Where  the  spring  is  too  low  for  this,  the  trough  may 
be  made  on  a  level  with  the  floor,  as  in  Figure  278.     The 


,t!i;i-!!a.iiiiiiliiii:ii!iiiriiii;ni\ij.iii>iiiL.rtii.u|i.'ia;AU«'v4^^j^j 


Fig.    27S— LXTERIOR    OF    SPRING    HOUSE^    WITH    LOW    TROUGH 


purity  of  the  air  is  to  be  secured  by  removing  all  stag- 
nant water  or  filth  from  around  the  spring.  All  decay- 
ing roots  and  muck  that  may  have  collected  should  be 
removed,  and  the  ground  around  the  house  either  paved 
roughly  with  stone  or  sodded.  The  openings  which 
admit  and  discharge  the  water  should  be  large  enough 
to  allow  a  free  current  of  air  to  pass  in  or  out.     These 


CONCRETE    SPRING    HOUSE  383 

openings  are  to  be  covered  with  wire  gauze,  to  prevent 
insects  or  vermin  from,  entering  the  house.  The  house 
should  be  smoothly  plastered,  and  frequently  white- 
washed with  lime,  and  a  large  ventilator  should  be  made 
in  the  ceiling.  There  should  be  no  wood  used  in  the 
walls  or  floors,  or  water  channels.  An  even  temperature 
can  best  be  secured  by  building  of  stone  or  brick,  with 
walls  twelve  inches  thick,  double  windows  and  a  ceiled 
roof.  In  such  a  house  there  will  be  no  danger  of  freez- 
ing in  the  winter  time.  The  drainage  will  be  secured  by 
choosing  the  site  so  that  there  is  ample  fall  for  the 
waste  water.  The  character  of  the  whole  building  is 
shown  in  Figure  279.  The  size  will  depend  altogether 
upon  the  number  of  cows  in  the  dairy.  For  a  dairy  of 
twenty  cows  there  should  be  at  least  100  square  feet  of 
water  surface  in  the  troughs.  The  troughs  should  be 
.made  about  eighteen  inches  in  width,  which  admits  a 
pan  that  would  hold  eight  to  ten  quarts  at  three  inches 
in  depth.  A  house,  twenty-four  feet  long  by  twelve  wide, 
would  give  sixty  feet  of  trough,  eighteen  inches  wide,  or 
ninety  square  feet.  The  furniture  of  the  house  should 
consist  of  a  stone  or  cement  bench,  and  an  oak  table  in 
the  center,  upon  which  the  cream  jars  and  butter  bowls 
may  be  kept. 

A     DOME-SHAPED,     CONCRETE     SPRING     HOUSE 

Figure  280  presents  a  plan  for  a  spring  milk  house. 
The  inside  diameter  is  ten  feet;  hight,  eight  feet.  The 
walls  are  eighteen  inches  thick  at  the  base,  one  foot  at 
the  top,  and  are  made  of  concrete;  that  is,  cement-mortar, 
one-third  cement,  two-thirds  sand,  in  which  as  many 
stone  chips  from  a  quarry  are  placed  as  can  be  com- 
pletely embedded  in  the  mortar.  This  should  be  handled 
when  freshly  mixed,  and  as  liquid  as  possible,  and  yet  set 
solid.  A  complete  dome  is  built  of  hemlock  boards 
and  the  concrete  laid  upon  that,  the  outside  being  rough. 


284 


I'.AliX      I'LAXS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


SO  that  vines  will  cling  to  and  cover  it.  The  door  ia 
very  strong  and  tight,  horizontally  and  diagonally 
boarded,  of  matched  pine,  fastened  throughout  with 
clinch  nails.  Ventilating  doors,  opening  outward,  are 
shown  in  the  front,  and  this  opening  is  protected  on  the 
iiiside  with  wire  cloth.  The  building  is  lighted  by  a  cir- 
cular plate  of  rough  glass,  such  as  is  used  in  floors  under 
sky-lights,  fully  half  an  inch  thick,  and  two  feet  in 
diameter. 

Figure  281  is  the  ground  plan.     In  this,  B  is  the  door, 
entering  at  which  one  comes  upon  the  cement  floor,  F, 


Fig.    280 — FRONT    vn:w    of    spring    house 


that  is  half  surrounded  by  the  pool  against  the  wall 
opposite  the  door.  The  pool  is  designated  by  W  in  the 
plan.  Figure  281.  The  spring  rises  through  its  pebbly 
bed  at  S;  there  is  a  partition  at  A,  over  which  the  water 
flows,  and  this  consequently  separates  the  pool  into  fresh 
water,  and  that  less  directly  from  the  fountain  head, 
with  prohably  a  difference  of  one  degree  in  the  temper- 
ature. The  pool  has  a  raised  rim  six  inches  wide,  and 
three  or  four  inches  high,  to  prevent  water  splashing  out 
upon  the  floor,  at  about  the  level  of  which  the  water  is 
intended  to  stand.     The  milk  is  placed  in  "coolers"   in 


CONCRETE     SPRING     HOUSE 


285 


the  coldest  part  of  the  pool.     Jars  and  stone  pots  of  hvitter 
may  be  set  in  the  pool  nearer  the  outlet. 

Figure  282  is  a  section  on  the  line  A,  B,  which  iy 
■'through  the  doorway.  This  shows  the  depth  of  the  pool, 
the  foundations  (also  laid  in  cement,  so  as  to  exclude 
surface  water  entirely),  the  window  in  the  top,  the  form 
of  the  entrance,  etc.  The  outflow  of  water  takes  place 
at  the  part  of  the  pool  farthest  from  the  spring.  A  chan- 
nel surrounds  the  floor,  for  conducting  away  any  water 


Fig.     281 — THE     GROUND     PLAN     OF     SPRING     HOUSE 


that  may  be  spilled  upon  it.  The  ventilation  through  the 
door,  being,  as  it  is,  very  near  to  the  highest  part  of  the 
dome,  which  is  seven  feet  high  inside,  is  abundant.  The 
light  may  be  too  great  on  sunny  days,  in  which  case  a 
screen  on  the  outside  will  keep  out  both  light  and  heat. 
Light  is,  however,  no  disadvantage  in  a  dairy,  if  unac- 
companied by  heat  and  flies.  As  to  warmth,  in  case  it 
should  seem  best  to  use  such  a  spring  house  in  winter 
to  work  the  butter  in,  it  would  be  necessary  to  heat  it. 
This  is  easily  done  by  using  a  charcoal  stove,  from  wh"eh 


286 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


no  odors  come.  The  pipe  should  lead  directly  np  and 
out  through  a  two  and  one-half-inch  hole.  Sufficient 
warmth  to  make  the  room  comfortable  does  not  percept- 
ibly affect  the  temperature  of  the  pool,  unless  very  long 
continued.  Should  the  size  of  the  spring  house  here 
given  be  too  large  and  expensive,  it  may  be  reduced  to 


Fig.     282 — SECTIONAL    VIEW     OP     SPRING!    HOUSE 


*ig¥:^.  feet  inside  diameter  and  six  feet  high,  or  six  in 
diameter,  and  of  proportionate  hight,  the  pool  being  in 
this  case  a  good  deal  contracted  in  size,  and  the  floor 
lowered  to  secure  head  room. 


CHAPTER   XIV 

GRANARIES,   ETC. 

As  a  rule  it  will  be  found  most  profitable  to  thresh 
grain  as  soon  as  it  lias  been  harvested.  There  is  a  sav- 
ing of  time  and  labor  in  drawing  the  sheaves  from  the 
field  directly  to  the  threshing  machine,  and  mowing  away 
the  straw  in  the  barn  at  once.  The  threshing  may  be 
done  in  the  field,  and  the  straw  stacked  there,  especially 
now  that  steam-threshers  are  coming  into  more  frequent 
use.  When  this  plan  becomes  general,  the  granary  will 
become  as  conspicuous  a  farm  building  as  the  barn.  For 
storing  the  crops,  it  will  be  substituted  to  a  great  extent 
for  the  barn,  and  instead  of  the  barn  being  a  storehouse, 
it  will  only  be  a  place  for  lodging  and  feeding  the  stock. 

A     GRANARY     WITH     ITS     GRAIN     BINS 

When  grain  is  threshed  directly  from  the  field,  and  is 
stored  in  bulk,  it  goes  through  a  process  of  sweating,  and 
if  not  turned  or  ventilated  is  liable  to  heat  and  spoil. 
It  is  a  work  of  considerable  labor  to  turn  the  grain,  or 
move  it  from  one  bin  to  another.  A  granary,  with  venti- 
lating bins,  as  here  illustrated  and  described,  saves  this 
labor.  The  granary  is  shown  in  Figure  283.  That  it  may 
not  be  accessible  to  rats  and  mice,  it  is  made  two  stories 
in  hight,  the  lower  one  being  used  as  an  open  shed  for 
storing  wagons  and  implements,  or  as  a  workshop. 
Access  to  the  granary  is  gained  by  an  open  stairway, 
which,  if  thought  proper,  may  be  hinged  at  the  top,  and 
slung  up  when  not  in  use.  The  engraving  represents  a 
building   twenty-four   feet   long,   twenty   feet   wide,   and 


CONVENIENT     GRAIN     BINS 


289 


twenty-one  feet  high.  The  shed  is  nine  feet  high,  the 
granary  eight  feet,  and  the  loft  for  the  storage  of  corn 
is  four  feet  to  the  eaves,  and  if  the  roof  is 
one-third  pitch,  it  is  eleven  feet  high  at  the 
center.  The  frame  is  of  heavy  timber,  to 
support  the  weight.  The  posts  may  be 
mortised  into  sills,  bedded  in  concrete  or 
lime  mortar,  to  preserve  them  below  the  level 
of  the  ground,  or  the  sills  may  be  on  stone 
underpinning.  The  posts  should  be  twelve 
inches  square,  the  studs  four  by  twelve,  and 
the  frame  well  braced  with  girths.  The  floors 
should  be  of  one  and  one-quarter-inch  plank, 
and  be  supported  by  beams  of  ten  by  three 
timber,  placed  sixteen  inches  apart.  There 
is  a  wheel-hoist  in  the  loft,  by  which  bags 
of  grain  are  elevated  from  the  wagons  with  a  rope,  at 
the  end  of  which  is  a  loop  or  sling,  made  by  a  piece 
of  wood,  with  a  hole  at  each  end,  through  which  the  rope 


Tig.    284 

— SLING 


-EXTERIOR    OF 


GRAIN    BIN 


jtasses,  as  seen  in  Figure  284.     The  bins  are  made  with  a 
substantial    frame   of    two    by    four    timber,    mortised 


290 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


together,  and  boarded  with  matched  inch  boards  insido 
of  the  frame.  The  bottom  is  made  slofjing,  and  is  raised 
above  the  floor,  so  that  the  latter  can  be  washed  or  swept 
when  needed.  The  form  of  the  bins  is  shown  In  Figure 
285.  There  is  a  slide  at  the  bottom,  by  raising  whicli 
the  grain  may  be  let  out  on  the  floor,  and  shoveled  into 
bags,  or  through  the  spout  seen  at  a,  in  Figure  286,  into 


Fig.     286 — SECTION     OF    A     GRAIN     BIN 


bags  on  a  wagon  in  the  shed  below.  A  spout  in  the  front 
filso  enables  a  portion  of  the  grain  to  be  run  into  bags 
without  shoveling,  and  if  thought  advisable,  a  spout 
may  be  carried  through  the  floor  from  each  of  the  slide 
doors,  with  very  little  expense.  The  spouts  are  provided 
with  hooks  at  the  bottom,  upon  which  cloth  guides,  seen 
at  a,  a,  Figure  288,  are  hung,  to  direct  the  grain  into  the 
bags.     A   space   is   left   sufficient   to   allow   a   boy  ic   go 


VENTILATOR    FOR    GRANARIES  291 

behind  the  bins  and  sweep  the  floor  and  walls,  and  there 
is  a  space  of  at  least  four  feet  in  the  middle  of  the  gran- 
ary between  the  rows  of  bins.  The  bins  may  be  made  of 
any  desired  size,  and  separate  from  each  other,  or  in 
one  continuous  bin,  divided  by  movable  partitions.  Every 
care  should  be  taken  to  have  no  cracks  or  crevices  in  the 
bins,  floors  or  building,  in  which  weevils  can  hide,  and 
the  windows  should  be  covered  with  fine  wire  gauze.  The 
ventilators  in  the  roof  should  also  be  covered  to  prevent 
the  entrance  of  the  grain  moth. 

To  provide  against  injury  from  heating,  the  ventilators 
shown  at  Figure  287,  and  at  h,  h.  Figures  285  and  286, 
are  constructed.  These  are  strips  of  half-inch  wood, 
nailed  together,  so  as  to  form  angular  troughs  about  sis 


VENTILATOR 


inches  wide.  The  sides  are  bored  full  of  small  holes, 
that  will  not  permit  the  grain  to  pass  through  them,  and 
the  ends  are  covered  with  fine  wire  gauze.  They  are 
fitted  into  the  bins,  running  from  front  to  back,  with 
the  open  side  downward.  When  the  grain  is  poured  into 
the  bins,  vacant  spaces  are  left  beneath  these  ventilators, 
and  if  it  heats,  the  moist  warm  air  escapes  through  them. 
Small  pieces  of  wire  gauze  are  also  fastened  over  holes, 
in  the  bottom  of  the  bins,  as  shown  at  c,  c.  Figure  286, 
through  which  cool  air  enters  the  bin,  as  the  heated  air 
escapes  above.  In  this  way  the  grain  is  cooled  rmd 
aerated.  Even  buckwheat,  which,  when  newly  threshed, 
heats  so  rapidly  as  to  be  troublesome  in  damp,  warm 
weather,  may  be  kept  in  perfect  order,  in  such  a  bin  as 
this,  without   trouble. 


282 


BARN     PLAJSS     ANU     OUTBUILDINGS 


A  section  through  the  center  of  the  building,  given  in 
Figure  288,  shows  the  position  of  the  bins  and  the  pas- 
sages. A  granary  twenty-four  feet  long,  with  bins  six 
feet  wide  and  five  feet  deep,  will  hold  about  1200  bushels 
of  grain  on  the  first  floor,  but  a  large  amount  in  addi- 
tion can  be  stored  upon  the  second  floor  in  heaps  or  bins. 
If  more  room  is  needed  for  the  grain,  a  great  many  filled 
bags  can  be  piled  upon  the  bins,  so  that  in  case  of  neces- 
sity 2500  bushels  can  be  stored  in  a  granary  of  this  size. 


Fig.     288 SECTION     THROUGH     THE     GRANARY 


ANOTHER     GRANARY     WITH     PLAN     OF     GRAIN     BINS 


Without  proper  bins  for  grain,  much  that  is  hard 
earned  in  the  field  is  easily  wasted  in  the  barn.  The 
floor  of  a  granary  should  be  of  double  hemlock  boards 
one  inch  in  thickness,  dressed  and  tongued  and  grooved. 
Sometimes  it  may  be  desirable  to  lay  a  floor  of  plank. 


CORN    CRIB   AND    GRANARY 


293 


and  cover  this  with  a  layer  of  hydraulic  lime  cement 
three-quarters  of  an  inch  in  thickness.  Either  of  these 
floors  will  be  rat-proof. 
There  should  be  a  win- 
dow in  every  granary, 
with  fine  wire  gauze 
shades,  to  exclude  weevils 
and  grain  moths.  Figure 
289  is  a  plan  of  a  gran- 
ary; Figure  290  shows 
the  mode  of  constructing 
the  bins.  The  posts,  B,  B, 
have  grooves,  into  which 
the  boards  are  slipped  as  the  bins  are  filled;  they  can  be 
removed  when  not  needed.  The  boards  should  be  num- 
bered, that  they  may  always  be  properly  placed.  Portable 
steps,  E,  are  very  convenient  when  the  bins  are  deep. 


6^-^ 

^y4- 

>f  >'«- 

4->:4- 

ALLEY 

6x-f- 

■ 

^^4- 

A^y.4- 

4x4^ 

Fig.  289 — PLAN  OF  GRANARY 


Fig.  290 — ARRANGEMENT  OF  BINS  IN  GRANARY 


PLAN  OF  CORN  CRIB  AND  GRANARY 


The  following  Figure  291,  is  a  plan  of  a  combined  corn 
crib  and  granary,  which  is  thirty-two  feet  long,  twenty 


294 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


feet  wide  and  ten  feet  high  from  the  stone  foundation  to 
the  eaves  of  the  roof.  It  has  a  driveway  through  the 
middle,  ten  feet  wide,  and  double  doors  at  each  end,  by 


DRIVING  FLOOf? 


CORN  CRIB 


Fig.     291 — PLAN    OF     CRIB    AND    GRANARY 

which  ample  ventilation  may  be  secured  in  fine  weather. 
The  bins,  B,  B,  six  feet  square,  and  five  in  number,  are 
upon  one  side;  the  corn  crib   is  on  the  other.     A  stair- 


Fig.    292 — ^VIEW    OP    CORN    CRIB    AND    GRANARY 

way,  three  feet  wide,  leads  to  the  floor  above,  where 
damp  grain  may  be  spread  beneath  the  roof  to  dry.  The 
corn  crib  is  so  arranged  that  the  corn  may  be  shoveled 


AUTOMATIC     MEASURING     SPOUT 


296 


out  at  the  bottom,  by  nailing  cross-boards  to  the  scant- 
ling, projecting  twelve  inches;  a  board  ten  inches  wide 
is  nailed  to  these  to  make  a  long  spout  or  trough.  An 
exterior  view  of  the  building  is  given  in  Figure  292. 


A     MEASURING     GRAIN     BIN 

A  grain  bin,  with  an  attachment  for  measuring,  is 
given.  Figure  293.  There  can  be  no  waste,  as  the  bag  or 
sack  may  be  hooked  upon  the  lower  end  of  the  spout, 
and  when  filled  can  be  easily  re- 
moved. The  spout  requires  the 
bin  to  be  sufficiently  elevated  for 
the  bag,  when  attached  to  the 
spout,  to  just  clear  the  floor  or  a 
box  placed  for  it  to  rest  upon. 
In  drawing  from  the  bin,  the 
slide  marked  A  is  closed,  and 
the  slide,  D,  is  opened  long  enough 
for  space,  C,  to  fill,  when  D  is 
closed,  and  A  opened,  and  the 
grain  passes  into  the  bag.  The 
size  of  the  measuring  chamber 
in  the  spout  is  ten  by  ten  inches 
square,  and  twenty-one  and  one- 
half  inches  high.  This  holds  just 
one  Winchester  bushel;  but  if  a 
half -bushel  chamber  is  preferred,  then  the  proper  size  would 
be  ten  by  ten  inches  square,  and  ten  and  three-quarter 
inches  high.  Of  course,  these  measurements  are  for  the 
inside  of  the  chamber.  By  inserting  a  pane  of  glass  in 
the  face  of  the  bin,  or  in  the  spout  at  D,  one  could  always 
tell  the  quantity  of  grain  in  the  bin.  In  constructing  a 
bin  like  this,  the  bottom  should  have  a  rise  of  five  inches 
to  the  foot.  For  example,  a  bin  six  feet  from  front  to 
back,  for  wheat  or  corn,  should  have  a  rise  of  thirty 
inches  in  the  bottom  to  secure  a  flow;  oats  require  more. 


GrcLiJiBitL 

Li. 

O 

a 

loin 

►-  1- 

^O 

c 

"a! 

M 

o 

a: 

o 

ti 

— fB\ 

FLOOn 

293— A 


Fi„ 

MEASURING     GRAIN 


BIN 


m 


fiARN     PLANS     AND    OUTBUiLDlNCJS 


SLIDING     SPOUT     FOR    A     BARN     OR    GRANARY 

A  spoilt  through  which  bags  of  grain  or  feed  may  be 
sent  from  one  floor  to  ahother,  iil  barns  or  granaries, 
is  repres'ented  in  Figure  294.  This  sliding  spout  will 
be  found  very  useful  for  other  purposes  than  the  one 
mentioned,  and  may  be  readily 
made  to  serve  as  a  ventilating 
trunk  as  well.  It  consists  of  a 
wooden  spout  about  two  feet 
square,  made  as  shown  in  the 
engraving,  and  passing  at  each 
turn  from  one  floor  to  another. 
A  bag  of  grain  or  feed  dropped 
in  at  the  top  will  slide  from  floor 
to  floor  until  it  reaches  the  table 
at  the  bottom.  The  openings, 
a,  a,  are  closed  by  doors  which 
may  be  shut  down  across  the 
spout,  when  it  is  required  to  de- 
liver the  bags  upon  any  inter- 
mediate floor.  This  spout  is 
necessarily  used  in  connection 
with  a  hoisting  apparatus  or  an 
elevator,  by  which  the  grain  or  feed  is  raised  to  an 
upper  floor.  In  high  barns  provided  with  a  hoist  and 
a  sliding  spout  of  this  kind,  it  will  generally  be  found 
convenient  to  store  the  grain  upon  the  top  floor,  where  it 
will  be  well  ventilated,  and  may  be  made  free  from  vermin. 

CONVENIENT     GRAIN     BIN 


Fig.  29-1— SLIDING  SPOUT 


The  strain  of  body  and  rush  of  blood  to  the  head  that 
are  very  often  experienced,  in  getting  grain  or  meal 
from  a  deep  bin  when  the  supply  runs  low,  are  avoided 


Haxdy   grain  Boxes 


297 


by  tlie  bin  shown  in  Figure  295.  Bins  are  made  in  whieli 
the  two  top  boards  in  front  are  hinged,  being  fastened  up 
by  hooks  at  the  ends,  and  let  down  as  desired.  The  front 
edge  of  the  bin  is  about  four  feet  high. 


Fig.     295 — GRAIN    BIN 


CHAPTER  XV" 

SMOKE  BOUSES 

A  good  smoke  house  should  be  found  upon  every  farm, 
large  or  small,  and  there  are  many  other  families  besides 
those  of  farmers  which  would  be  vastly  benefited  by  one. 
The  object  is  to  be  able  to  expose  meats  to  the  action  of 
creosote  and  the  empyreumatic  vapors  resulting  from 
the  imperfect  combustion  of  wood,  etc.  The  peculiar 
taste  of  smoked  meat  is  given  by  the  creosote,  which  is 
also  the  preservative  principle,  but  sundry  flavors,  agree- 
able to  those  who  like  fhem,  are  also  imparted  by  other 
substances  in  the  smoke.  All  that  is  necessary  for  a 
smoke  house  is  a  room,  from  size  of  a  barrel  to  that  of 
a  barn,  which  can  be  filled  with  smoke  and  shut  up  tight, 
with  conveniences  for  suspending  the  articles  to  be  cured. 
In  common  smoke  houses  the  fire  is  made  on  a  stone 
slab  in  the  middle  of  the  floor.  In  others,  a  pit  is  dug, 
say  a  foot  deep,  in  the  ground,  and  here  the  fire  is  placed ; 
sometimes  a  stone  slab  covers  the  fire  at  the  hight  of  a 
common  table. 

A    CONVENIENT    SMOKE    HOUSE 

The  accompanying  plan,  Figure  296,  is  of  a  good  smoke 
house;  it  diffuses  the  rising  smoke,  and  prevents  the 
direct  heat  of  the  fire  affecting  the  meats  hanging  im- 
mediately above.  A  section  of  the  smoke  house  is  shown, 
and  though  somewhat  expensive,  is  warmly  praised.  It 
is  eight  feet  square,  and  built  of  brick.  If  of  wood  it 
should  be  plastered  on  the  inside.  It  has  a  chimney,  C, 
with  an  eight-inch  flue  and  a  fireplace,  B,  which  is  out' 


BRICK     SMOKE     HOUSE 


299 


side  below  the  level  of  the  floor.  From  this  a  flue,  F, 
is  carried  under  the  chimney  into  the  middle  of  the  floor, 
where  it  opens  under  a  stone  table,  E.     In  kindling  the 


Fig.     29() — I.NTERIOR     OF     SMOKE     HOUSE 


Fig.    297 AN    IMPROVED    SMOKE    HOUSE 

Sre  a  valve  is  drawn  directing  the  draft  up  the  chimney. 
The  green  chips  or  cobs  are  thrown  on,  and  the  valve  is 
then  placed  so  as  to  turn  the  smoke  into  the  house.     Both 


800 


Barn   plans   and   outbuildings 


in  the  upper  and  lower  parts  of  the  chimney  there  are 
also  openings,  G,  G,  closed  by  valves  regulated  from  the 
outside.  The  door  has  to  be  made  to  shut  very  closely, 
and  all  parts  of  the  building  must  be  as  tight  as  possible. 
The  advantage  of  such  a  house  as  this  is,  that  the  smoke 
is  cooled  considerably  before  it  is  admitted.  No  ashes 
rise  with  the  smoke.  Meats  may  be  kept  in  it  the  year 
round,   without   being  very  much   smoked,   inasmuch   as 


\     ^ 


Fig.     298 — INTERIOR     OF     SMOKE     HOUSE 

the  smoking  need  be  only  occasionally  renewed,  so  as  to 
keep  the  flies  away.  The  table  placed  in  the  center  will 
be  found  a  great  convenience  in  any  smoke  house. 

IMPROVED     SMOKE     HOUSES 


Figure  297  is  an  engraving  of  a  brick  smoke  house, 
built  over  an  ash  pit  or  cellar,  six  feet  deep,  the  entrance 
to  which  cellar  is  through  the  door  shown  at  the  side.  The 
roof  is  arched,  and  there  is  no  wood  about  the  structure, 
except   the   doors.     The  floor   of   the  house   is  made  of 


IMPROVED     SMOKE     HOUSES  301 

narrow  iron  bars,  three  inches  wide,  and  a  quarter  of  an 
inch  thick,  set  on  edge  about  two  inches  apart,  so  as  to 
form  a  grating.  The  ends  of  these  bars  are  seen  set  in 
the  bricks  at  the  lower  part  of  the  house.  They  are  made 
for  laying  side  pieces  of  bacon  upon  them  during  the 
smoking.  The  hams  are  hung  upon  round  iron  bars, 
stretched  across  the  upper  part  of  the  house; 
the  ends  of  these  bars  are  bent  down,  thus 
forming  stays  or  braces  to  the  building,  as 
seen  in  the  engraving.  A  few  spaces  are  left 
in  the  front  of  the  house,  over  the  door,  for 
ventilation.  The  interior  of  the  house  is 
^.  2QQ  shown  in  Figure  298.  The  hams  are  hung 
^^'  upon  wire  hooks.  Figure  299,  which  slide  upon 

the  rods.  This  house  required  in  building  2000  bricks, 
and  two  masons'  labor  for  one  and  a  half  days.  Figure 
300  represents  a  section  of  a  smoke  house  of  wood, 
which  is  very  cleanly  in  use,  there  being  no  fire,  and 
consequently  no  ashes,  upon  the  floor.  The  floor  is 
made  of  cement,  or  of  hard  wood  laid  in  cement  or 
mortar.  Either  of  these  floors  will  exclude  rats,  and 
may  be  washed  when  necessary.  The  fire  ovens,  made 
of  brick,  are  built  on  each  side  of  the  house,  or  two 
of  them  may  be  erected  at  the  rear  end.  They  are 
constructed  upon  the  outside,  but  spaces  are  left  between 
the  bricks  on  the  inside,  through  which  the  smoke  es- 
capes. The  outer  part  of  the  oven  is  open  at  the  front, 
but  may  be  closed  by  an  iron  door,  or  a  piece  of  flat  stone 
or  slab  of  cement.  When  the  fire  is  kindled  in  the  ovens, 
the  doors  are  closed  and  fastened,  and  the  smoke  has  no 
means  of  escape  except  through  the  inside  spaces.  From 
being  so  confined,  the  fire  cannot  burn  up  briskly,  but 
slowly  smolders,  making  a  cool  and  pungent  smoke. 
In  any  smoke  house,  the  less  brisk  the  fire  is  kept,  the 
more  efi'ective  is  the  smoke,  as  the  slow  combustion  of 
the  wood  permits  the  escape  of  most  of  the  wood  acids, 


302 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


which  give  their  flavor  and  their  antiseptic  properties  to 
the  meat.  When  the  fire  is  brisk,  these  are  consumed  and 
destroyed,  and  the  meat  is  injured  by  the  excess  of  heat. 
These  outside  ovens  may  be  fitted  to  any  kind  of  a  smoke 
house,  by  simply  cutting  the  necessary  openings  at  the 
bottom  of  the  walls,  and  protecting  the  woodwork  by 
strips  of  sheet  iron  around  the  bricks. 


Fig.     300 — WOODEN     SMOKE     HOUSE     WITH     OVENS 


CHEAP    SMOKE     HOUSES 


Figure  301  presents  a  sectional  view  of  a  brick  smoke 
house,  which  may  be  made  of  any  size.  One  seven  by 
nine  feet  will  be  large  enough  for  private  use,  but  the 
plan  admits  of  application  for  the  largest  sized  building. 
At  the  bottom  of  the  structure  is  a  brick  arch,  with 
bricks  left  out  here  and  there  to  afford  passage  for  the 
smoke.  Above  the  arch  are  two  series  of  iron  rods,  sup- 
plied with  hooks  with  grooved  wheels,  by  which  the  ring, 
with  its  burden,  may  be  pushed  back,  or  drawn  forward, 
as  desired.     The  wheel-hook  is  shown  in  Figure  301  and 


CHEAP     SMOKE     HOUSES 


303 


can  be  procured  at  any  hardware  store.  In  Figure  302 
the  house  is  seen  in  perspective,  with  the  open  archway 
for  the  fire,  and  the  door  provided  with  steps.  Above 
the  lower  bar  and  below  the  upper  one,  is  a  series  of  ven- 
tilating holes  through  which  the  smoke  may  escape. 
These  are  made  by  leaving  out  bricks,  and  they  can  be 


Tig.    301 — SECTIOXAL    VIEW 


Fig.    302 ELEVATION 


closed  by  inserting  bricks  in  the  vacancies.  In  Figure  303 
is  the  arch  which  confines  the  fire  and  ashes,  and  prevents 
any  meat  that  may  fall  from  being  soiled  or  burned.  A 
few  open  spaces  will  be  sufficient  to  permit  the  smoke  to 
pass  through.     This   arch  is  constructed  over  a  wooden 


#*=^^^^ 


FRAME     FOR     ARCH 


frame,  Figure  30i,  made  of  a  few  pieces  of  board,  cut  into 
an  oval  arch-shape,  to  which  strips  of  wood  are  nailed. 
Wlien  the  brick  work  is  dry  the  center  is  knocked  down 
and  removed.  For  safety  and  economy  a  loose  door  may 
be  made  to  shut  up  the  arch  when  the  fire  is  kindled. 
Figure  305  shows  a  smoke  house  common  in  Maryland 


304  BARN     PLAKS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

and  Pennsylvania.  It  is  built  upon  a  brick  wall,  and 
over  a  brick  arch,  through  which  a  number  of  holes  or 
spaces  are  left  in  the  brick  work  for  the  smoke  to  pass 
through.  Beneath  the  arch  is  the  ash  pit,  and  a  door 
opens  into  this,  as  shown  in  the  engraving.  The  door  tc 
the  meat  room  cannot  be  reached  without  a  ladder. 


Fig.     305 — A     PENN!5YL\AMA     SMOKE     HOUSE 
SMOKING    MEATS    IN    A    SMALL    WAY 

It  sometimes  happens  that  one  needs  to  smoke  some 
hams  or  other  meat,  and  no  smoke  house  is  at  hand. 
In  such  a  case  a  large  cask  or  barrel,  as  shown  in 
Figure  306,  may  prove  a  very  good  substitute.  To  make 
this  effective,  a  small  pit  should  be  dug,  and  a  flat  stone  or 
a  brick  i)laced  across  it,  upon  which  the  edge  of  the  cask 


BARREL     SMOKE     HOUSE 


305 


will  rest.  Half  of  the  pit  is  beneath  the  barrel  and  half 
of  it  outside.  The  head  and  bottom  may  be  removed,  or 
a  hole  can  be  cut  in  the  bottom  a  little  larger  than  the 
portion  of  the  pit  beneath  the  cask.  The  head  is  re- 
moved, while  the  hams  are  hung  upon  cross  sticks.  These 
rest  upon  two  cross-bars,  made  to  pass  through  holes 
bored  in  the  sides  of  the  cask,  near  the  top.  The  head  is 
then  laid  upon  the  cask  and  covered  with  sacks  to  confine 
the  smoke.    Some  coals  are  put  into  the  pit  outside  of  the 


Fig.    306 — SUBSTITUTE    FOR   A   SMOKE   HOUSE 

cask,  and  the  fire  is  fed  with  damp  corn  cobs,  hardwood 
chips  or  fine  brush.  The  pit  is  covered  with  a  flat  stone, 
by  which  the  fire  may  be  regulated,  and  it  is  removed  when 
necessary  to  add  more  fuel. 

A    SMOKE    HOUSE    CONVENIENCE 


A  method  of  hanging  the  meat  in  a  smoke  house  without 
the  necessity  for  reaching  up,  or  using  a  ladder,  is  shown 
in  Figure  307.     The  smoke  house  may  be  of  any  shape, 


306 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


but    it    should    be    provided    with    cleats    fixed    to    the 
sides,   upon   which   the   hanging-bars   rest.      A   pulley   is 

fitted  inside  to  the  top 
of  the  building,  and  a 
hoisting  rope  is  passed 
over  it.  The  hanging- 
bar  is  fastened  to  the 
rope  by  two  spreading 
ties,  so  that  it  will  not 
easily  tip  when  it  is 
loaded.  The  hams  or 
bacon  arc  hung  upon 
hooks  fixed  in  the  bar, 
and  the  whole  is  hoisted 
to  the  cleats,  when  the 
bar  is  swung  around  so 
that  the  ends  rest  upon 
the  cleats.  The  rope  is 
then  released  from  the 
bar  by  means  of  a  small 
rod,  and  another  bar 
may  be  loaded  and 
raised  in  the  same  way. 


i'ig.  307 — A  SMOKK  HOUSE  con- 
venience 


AN    OVEN   AND    SMOKE    HOUSE    COMBINED 


The  bricks  chosen  for  an  oven  shovild  be  hard,  well 
burned  and  molded,  and  with  straight  edges.  This  is 
especially  necessary  for  the  hearth.  It  is  best  to  have  the 
oven  detached  from  the  house,  and  yet  so  near  to  the 
kitchen  door  that  it  may  be  easily  reached.  The  founda- 
tion of  the  oven  is  made  by  building  two  nine-inch  walls 
of  the  projior  length,  or  about  six  feet,  and  six  feet  apart, 
to  a  hight  of  two  feet  above  the  ground.  T"]ion  the 
walls  are  laid  cross  pieces  of  four-inch  oak  plank,  or  flat 


COMBINED     SMOKE     HOUSE     AND     OVEN 


SOY 


timbers,  made  somewhat  like  railroad  ties.  These  lie  on 
the  wall  for  the  length  of  half  a  brick,  so  that  a  course 
of  half  bricks  or  whole  bricks  placed  lengthwise  may  be 
built  to  enclose  them.  At  the  front  an  iron  bar  may  be 
built  into  the  wall,  and  the  front  course  of  bricks  laid 
upon  it.  The  spaces  between  the  timbers  are  filled  with 
mortar,  and  a  layer  of  mortar  at  least  an  inch  thick  is 


Fig.  308 — FRONT  VIEW  OF  COMBINED  OVEN  AND  SMOKE  HOUSE 


placed  upon  them.  Dry  sand  is  thrown  upon  the  mortar, 
and  the  whole  bed  is  beaten  with  a  mallet  until  it  is  made 
hard  and  compact.  Dry  sifted  coal,  or  wood  ashes,  or 
sand,  is  then  laid  upon  this  bed  to  a  depth  of  six  inches 
and  smoothed  dowm.  Upon  this  non-conducting  floor 
the  oven  hearth  is  placed.    The  best,  smoothest  and  hard- 


mn 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


est  bricks  are  chosen  for  this.  The  bricks  are  laid  very 
evenly  and  closely  together,  with  mortar,  in  which  a  good 
proportion  of  wood  ashes  is  mingled.  When  the  floor  is 
secured  the  walls  are  built  in  the  same  manner  with  bricks 
placed  endwise  from  the  inside  to  the  outside.  "When 
the  walls  are  about  a  foot  high  the  frames  for  the  center 
are  fixed  in  their  proper  places.     These  are  cut  out  of 


REAR  VIEW  OF  COMBINED  OVEN  AND  SMOKE   HOUSE 


common  inch  boards  of  the  shape  to  fit  the  arched  roof. 
The  rise  of  the  arch  is  about  eight  inches,  giving  a  total 
hight  in  the  middle  of  the  oven  of  twenty  inclies,  and 
twelve  inches  at  the  sides.  The  boards  should  be  cut  in 
two  through  the  middle  and  lightly  tacked  together,  so 
that  they  can  be  readily  knocked  apart  and  removed  from 


COMBINED    SMOKE    HOUSE    AND    OVEN 


309 


the  door  wlien  the  arch  is  dry.  The  wall  around  the  oven 
and  the  arched  roof  should  be  well  bound  together,  and 
brick  work  placed  around  the  outside  of  the  top  of  the 
arch,  so  as  to  make  the  connection  between  the  walls  and 
arch  firm  and  solid.  The  inside  of  the  oven  will  then 
consist  of  a  solid  nine-inch  wall  of  brick  laid  with  the 
ends  toward  the  middle  of  the  oven,  or  nearly  so.  This 
will  serve  to  retain  the  heat  a  long  time,  and  will  make  a 
yery  serviceable  oven.    The  outside  wall  should  be  carried 


310 — COMBINED    SMOKE    HOUSE   AND   OVEN 


a  few  inches  above  the  line  of  the  top  of  the  oven,  and 
fine  dry  sand  thrown  in  the  space  to  level  it  off.  A  plank 
floor  may  then  be  placed  across  the  top,  which  can  serve 
for  the  floor  of  part  of  the  smoke  house  above.  Figure 
308  shows  the  front  of  the  oven  when  complete.  The  rear 
of  the  combined  oven  and  smoke  house  is  shown  in 
Figure  309. 

Figure  310  represents  another  plan  for  a  bake  oven  and 
smoke  house  combined  in  one  building.     The  oven  occu- 


'Mi)  BARN     PLAKS     AND     OUTfeUlLDmGS 

pies  the  front  and  that  part  of  the  interior  whicli  is 
represented  by  the  dotted  lines.  The  smoke  house 
occupies  the  rear  and  extends  over  the  open.  The  ad- 
vantages of  this  kind  of  building  are  the  perfect  dryness 
secured,  which  is  of  great  importance  in  preserving  the 
meat,  and  the  economy  in  building  the  two  together,  as 
the  smoke  that  escapes  from  the  oven  may  be  turned  into 
the  smoke  house. 


^ S^" 


CHAPTER   XVI 

DOG  KENNELS 

The  dog  is  frequently  left  to  find  shelter  as  best  he  can 
on  the  lee  side  of  the  house  or  barn,  or  under  the  barn. 
He  may  have  sufficient  sagacity  to  know  when  he  is  well 
or  ill  treated,  and  he  may  very  reasonably  lose  his  self- 
respect  and  take  to  evil  courses,  such  as  prowling  abroad, 
marauding  and  killing  sheep,  when  not  taught  better,  and 


-A    DOG    KENNEL 

provided  %\'ith  decent  quarters  at  home.  The  conduct 
and  attitude  of  a  roughly  used,  half-starved  cur  is  en- 
tirely different  from  that  of  a  well-fed  and  decently  kept 
dog,  and  everyone  who  keeps  a  dog  should  certainly  take 
pains  to  treat  him  well  and  thoroiighly  train  him.  A 
shelter  of  some  kind  should  be  provided,  which  the  animal 
will  recognize  as  his  home,  and  the  more  comfortable 
this    is   made    the    more    contented   he    will   be,    not   to 


312  BARN     PLAKS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

speak  of  the  freedom  from  disease  and  vermin  to  be 
enjoyed.  The  disrepute  into  which  these  animals  have 
fallen  in  the  estimation  of  sheep  and  poultry  keepers  and 
gardeners  is  greatly  owing  to  the  liberty  given  them  by 
owners  to  prowl  about  and  commit  depredations. 

FARM   DOG   KENNELS 

The  kennel  shown  in  Figure  311  is  seven  feet  long  by 
three  feet  six  inches  wide,  and  has  two  doors,  one  opening 
inward   and  one  outward.     The   latter  door   is   provided 


Fig.   312 A  NEAT  DOG   KENNEL 

with  a  bell,  by  which  the  owner  can  tell  when  the  dog 
goes  out  at  night.  In  summer  one  door  may  be  used  for 
ventilation,  but  in  the  winter  both  shoiild  be  let  down. 

The  manner  of  making  a  very  neat  kennel  is  shown  in 
Figure  312.  The  bottom  is  two  feet  six  inches  by  fo\ir 
feet,  and  from  this  to  the  top  of  the  roof  it  is  three  feet 
nine  inches.  The  door  has  an  arched  top  and  should  be 
of  any  size  from  eight  by  twelve  inches  up  to  twelve  by 
twenty-two  inches,  to  suit  the  size  of  the  occupant.     It 


CHEAP     DOG     KENNELS 


313 


is  painted  light  brown,  with  the  corners,  base  and  win- 
dow planks  painted  darker.  Brackets  may  be  placed  be- 
neath the  cornice  molding.     A  cheap  and  equally  service- 


Fig.    313 — A    CHEAP    KENNEL 


Fig.    311 KENNEL    WITH    YARD    FOR    DOGS 


314  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

able  kennel  is  shown  in  Figure  313.  It  has  a  floor  the 
same  size  as  the  preceding,  is  three  feet  four  inches  high 
in  front,  and  the  roof  has  a  fall  of  eight  inches.  A 
yet  cheaper  one  is  made  by  taking  a  square  box,  three  by 
four  feet,  and  cutting  a  door  in  one  end.  During  winter, 
if  the  kennel  be  in  an  exposed  situation,  tack  a  piece  of 
heavy  carpeting  over  the  door  on  the  inside,  so  that  it 
will  cover  the  entire  doorway.  Where  several  dogs  are 
kept,  a  roomy  kennel  and  yard  should  be  provided,  in 
which  to  confine  them.  A  dog  yard  with  kennel  is  shown 
in  Figure  314.  It  is  roomy,  so  as  to  admit  of  exercise, 
well  shaded,  and  furnished  with  water,  and  a  sleeping 
house.  A  water  tank  is  indispensable,  and  generally 
there  should  be  a  place  for  bathing. 


, "•^fe-" ,, 


CHAPTER  XVrt 

BIRD  HOUSES 

It  is  a  mistake  to  have  bird  houses  too  showy  and  too 
much  exposed.  Most  birds  naturally  choose  a  retired 
place  for  their  nests,  and  slip  into  them  quietly,  that  no 
enemy  may  discover  where  they  live.  All  that  is  required 
in  a  bird  house  is  a  hiding  place,  with  an  opening  just 


Fig.  315 — HAT  HOUSE    i'lg.  31(5— KEG  HOUSE 


1  i"  317  -LAiion 


large  enough  for  the  bird,  and  a  water-tight  roof.  There 
are  so  very  many  ways  in  which  these  may  be  provided 
any  boy  can  contrive  to  make  all  the  bird  houses  that 
may  be  needed.  An  old  hat,  with  a  hole  for  a  door, 
tacked  by  the  rim  against  a  shed,  as  in  Figure  315,  will  be 
occupied    by    birds    sooner    than     a    showy    bird    house. 


316 


BARN     PLANS     AND    OUTBUILDINGS 


Figure  316  shows  how  six  kegs  may  be  placed  together  to 
rest  upon  a  pole;  the  kegs  are  fastened  to  the  boards  by 
screws  inserted  from  beneath.  Figure  317  shows  how  a 
two-story  house  may  be  made  separate  from  two  shallow 
boxes,  each  divided  into  four  tenements.  Each  box  has 
a  bottom  board,  projecting  two  inches  all  around,  to 
answer  as  a  landing  place.  The  roof  should  be  tight  and 
the  whole  so  strongly  nailed  that  it  will  not  warp.  It 
should  be  well  painted. 


Fig.     318 — FRAMEWORK     OP     BIRD     HOUSE 


The  foundation  of  the  house  shown  in  Figure  318  is 
•xny  convenient  sized  box,  such  as  may  be  had  at  the 
stores.  A  piece  is  nailed  to  each  end,  cut  to  the  slope 
it  is  desired  to  have  the  roof.  As  the  roof  is  to  be 
thatched,  it  had  better  be  pretty  steep;  it  will  not  only 
shed  the  rain  the  more  readily,  but  the  house  will  look 
better.  The  upper  end  of  the  pole  which  is  to  support 
the  house  is  made  square;  it  passes  through  a  hole  in 
the  bottom  of  the  box  and  extends  far  enough  above  the 
ridge  of  the  roof  to  form  the  chimney.     A  ridge  pole  is 


BIRD     AND     PIGEON     HOUSE 


317 


then  passed  through  the  upright  pole  and  the  end  pieces, 
as  shown  in  the  figure.  Places  for  the  windows  are  to  be 
cut  out,  but  the  door  may  be  only  a  dummy,  and  painted 
black.  Small  branches  of  any  straight,  easy-splitting 
wood  are  to  be  cut  of  the  proper  lengths  and  split 
lengthwise.  These,  with  the  bark  on,  are  fastened  by 
small  nails  all  over  the  exterior  of  the  house,  as  shown  in 
Figure  319,  which  gives  this  form  of  bird  house  complete. 


Fig.    319 — BIRD    HOUSE    COMPLETE 


PIGEON   HOUSES 


Pigeons  are  valued  both  as  ornamental  birds  and  as 
furnishing  an  exceedingly  delicate  article  of  food.  If 
kept  for  use,  or  if  reared  purely  for  fancy,  pigeons  must 
be  housed  over  the  stable  or  some  outbuilding,  to  se- 
cure them  from  cats,  rats,  weasels,  etc.  This  gives  the 
owner  access  at  all  times  to  the  birds  and  their  nests. 
The  room  is  subdivided  by  latticework  partitions  into 
as   many   apartments  as   are   desirable.     When,  however, 


318 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


persons  do  not  desire  to  make  a  business  of  raising  pigeons, 
and  wish  to  keep  only  one,  or  possibly  two,  orna- 
mental varieties,  it  is  very  well  to  make  the  houses  as 
well  as  the  birds  contribute  to  the  ornamentation  of  the 


Fig.    320 — RUSTIC     PIGEON    HOUSE 


Fig.  321 — TOG  CABIN   PIGEON   HOUSE 


place.  Herewith  are  given  some  engravings  of  simple 
"pole  houses,"  and  one  which  may  appropriately  be  set, 
as  exhibited,  upon  a  roof.  For  convenience  of  examina- 
tions pigeon  houses  should  have  the  roof  keyed  on  so  as 
to  be  lifted  off.     The  roofs  should  have  wide,  projecting 


SWISS    PIGEON    HOUSE 


319 


eaves  and  gable  ends,  to  keep  out  the  rain.  The  houses 
should  be  fastened  very  securely  by  iron  straps,  shaped 
like  the  letter  L  inverted,  screwed  to  the  bottom  of 
the  structures  and  to  the  side  of  the  post.  The  post 
should  be  very  smooth  for  several  feet  below  the  top,  and 
painted,  to  prevent  vermin  getting  to  the  pigeons. 

Figure  320  represents  a  simple  house,  twenty  by  twenty 
inches,  for  a  single  pair  of  pigeons.  It  has  two 
brooding  rooms,   and   a   vestibule   or   outside   room   con- 


,^-^^^^^-^>\^  %^S?^' ' 


Fig.   322 — SWISS   pigeon   cottage 


necting  them.  This  house,  as  also  the  log  cabin, 
Figure  321,  is  constructed  of  round  and  half  round  sticks 
of  as  nearly  a  uniform  size  as  possible,  which,  after  drying 
with  the  bark  on,  are  tacked  upon  a  box  made  or  adapted 
to  the  purpose.  Figure  322  is  a  Swiss  pigeon  cottage;  it 
is  a  good  deal  larger  than  the  pole  house,  and  will  accom- 
modate as  many  pairs  of  birds  as  there  are  distinct  apart- 
ments. No  vestibules  are  provided,  but  each  tenement 
is    big    enough    for    two    nests,    if   needed.     The    Swise 


Fig.  323 — A  KEAT  PIGEON  HOUSE 


Fig.  324 — INTERIOR  OF  A  LARGE  PIGEON  HOUSE 


HOUSE    FOR    SQUAB    RAISING  321 

cottage  is  very  elaborate  and  will  require  a  skillful  hand 
and  patience  to  make  it.  Each  story  of  the  house  should 
be  made  separate,  the  lower  one  at  least  eight  inches 
high  and  the  lower  piazza  eight  inches  wide.  The  stones 
upon  the  roof  should  be  wired  to  the  cross-strips. 

Those  who  go  into  pigeon  raising  as  a  matter  of  profit 
should  make  suitable  arrangements  for  the  birds,  and  not 
only  provide  them  with  a  desirable  house,  but  see  to 
their  feeding,  and,  what  is  quite  important,  insure  pro- 
tection from  cats,  rats  and  all  other  enemies.  A  house 
of  this  kind  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  engravings. 
The  outside.  Figure  323,  is  ten  by  sixteen  feet,  eight  feet 
high  at  the  eaves,  with  a  tight,  shingled  roof.  Figure  324 
shows  one  side  of  the  interior,  where  there  are  platforms, 
K,  K,  upon  which  the  birds  enter,  and  which  holds  three 
nesting  and  hatching  boxes,  P,  P.  A  building  of  this 
kind  should  be  placed  where  it  can  be  shaded  by 
trees  in  the  heat  of  the  day,  and  in  a  quiet  place,  where 
the  nesting  birds  will  not  be  disturbed  by  noises.  Be- 
sides abundant  feed,  the  birds  should  be  constantly  sup- 
plied with  water,  and  have  a  mixture  of  salt,  sulphur 
and  gravel  placed  where  they  can  always  get  at  it. 

A   HOUSE    FOR    SQUAB   RAISING 

Squab  raising  offers  some  inducements  in  the  way  of 
profit  for  those  who  like  pigeons  and  have  an  hour  or 
two  of  spare  time  every  day.  The  most  important  thing 
in  starting  right  is  the  site,  which  must  be  in  a  spot  well 
drained,  facing  east  or  south,  sheltered  from  prevailing 
winds  and  not  exposed  to  extremes  of  heat,  cold  or  wind. 
A  shallow  stream  of  pure  running  water  for  drinking  and 
bathing  is  desirable.  The  house  is  as  important  as  the 
site. 

It  should  be  built  in  sections  for  no  more  than  250 
pairs,  and  not  more  than  fifty  pairs  in  each  section,  and 


Fig.    325 — INTERIOR    VIEW    OF    PIGEON    HOUSE 


Fig.   326 — PIGEON    HOUSE    AND    COVERED    FLY 


HOUSE     FOR     Sl^UAB     UAISIAG  323 

designed  so  as  to  be  well  ventilated,  easily  kept  clean, 
secure  from  attacks  of  mice,  rats  and  other  animals,  and 
not  subject  to  drafts  of  air.  The  houses  of  Mr.  "William  E. 
Rice,  a  successful  New  Jersey  squab  raiser,  are  forty  feet 
long,  twelve  feet  wide,  nine  feet  to  peak  of  roof.  Nest 
boxes  are  made  twelve  inches  wide,  nine  inches  high  and 
twelve  inches  long,  as  shown  in  interior  view.  Figure  325. 
An  alleywr.y  at  the  rear  allows  of  access  to  each  pen  with- 
out disturbing  all  the  occupants.  A  covered  yard  or  fly 
thirty-two  feet  long  and  eight  feet  high  is  attached  to 
the  house,  as  shown  in  Figure  326. 


CHAPTER  XVIII 
81L0S 

The  past  two  decades  have  seen  the  rapid  adoption  of 
silos  as  a  part  of  American  farm  buildings.  They  are 
used  for  the  preservation  of  forage  in  a  green  state,  and 
are  commonly  employed  for  keeping  corn  fodder,  although 
other  crops  are  often  put  in  them.  The  silo  is  essentially 
a  building  having  practically  air-tight  bottom  and  sides, 
with  a  roof  to  protect  the  contents.  It  may  be  built  of 
wood,  stone,  brick  or  a  combination  of  these  materials. 
The  process  of  preserving  green  crops  in  silos  is  to  exclude 
the  air  so  as  to  prevent  decomposition.  A  partial  fer- 
mentation takes  place,  due  to  the  air  which  is  in  the  spaces 
between  the  particles  of  silage,  but  when  the  oxygen  is 
used  up  this  fermentation  ceases  entirely,  or  proceeds  very 
slowly.  The  common  practice  is  to  cut  corn  fodder  at 
about  the  stage  when  the  kernels  begin  to  glaze  or  harden. 
Stalks  are  then  run  through  a  cutter  and  cut  fine,  into 
lengths  varying  from  one-half  to  one  inch.  This  material 
is  at  once  put  into  the  silo  and  packed  solidly  around  the 
edges.  Other  crops,  such  as  cowpeas,  are  sometimes  mixed 
with  the  corn  in  order  to  increase  the  feeding  value  of  the 
silage.  After  the  silo  is  filled  the  silage  may  be  covered 
with  any  material  at  hand,  such  as  straw,  poor  hay,  swale 
grass  cut  green,  or  even  earth  or  sawdust.  Some  do  not 
cover  at  all,  in  which  case  a  foot  or  more  of  the  green 
fodder  spoils  and  is  thrown  out  before  feeding. 

The  first  silos  were  pits  in  the  ground,  but  they  were  very 
expensive  to  build,  and  much  labor  was  entailed  in  taking 


SOME     EARLY     SILOS  325 

out  the  material.  Square  silos  above  ground  came  next 
into  vogue,  and  were  largely  used,  but  the  difficulty  was 
encountered  of  building  them  strong  enough  so  that  the 
sides  did  not  bulge  and  let  in  the  air  after  the  silage  set- 
tled, in  which  case  considerable  of  the  material  would  be 
spoiled  at  the  edges.  Of  late  years  the  round  silo  has  come 
into  great  favor,  owing  to  the  cheapness  of  construction 
and  its  superior  form  and  strength.  Difficulty  is  always 
encountered  in  a  square  silo  in  getting  the  corners  solidly 
filled.  The  silo  may  be  built  in  the  barn,  or  as  a  separate 
structure  outside.  Both  methods  have  their  advocates, 
but  which  to  adopt  must  be  considered  by  every  builder 
in  accordance  with  his  conditions. 

Inside  the  silo  must  be  perfectly  smooth  and  free  from 
obstructions  in  order  to  allow  the  silage  to  settle  evenly. 
It  should  be  painted  every  two  or  three  years,  but  never 
with  a  paint  containing  white  lead,  as  this  will  peel  off 
when  the  silage  is  removed  and  i^rove  injurious,  if  not 
fatal,  to  cattle.  Gas  tar  put  on  top  is  often  employed  for 
painting  the  inside  and  will  answer  the  purpose  very  well. 

Each  two  inches  of  corn  silage  will  weigh  from  five 
pounds  per  square  foot  at  the  top  to  ten  pounds  at  the 
bottom,  or  an  average  of  seven  and  one-half  pounds.  On 
this  basis  the  proper  surface  area  is  five  square  feet  per 
cow  per  day.  This  must  be  borne  in  mind  in  building  the 
silo,  to  make  it  in  diameter  proportionate  to  the  number 
of  cattle  kept.  If  the  feeding  area  is  larger  than  six  or 
six  and  one-half  feet  per  head,  the  silage  will  spoil  faster 
than  it  can  be  fed  out.  The  following  table,  compiled  by 
Prof.  F.  H.  King  of  Wisconsin,  gives  the  capacity  of 
round  silos  of  different  diameters  and  different  depths 
for  well  matured  corn  silage  in  tons.  In  this  table  the 
horizontal  lines  give  the  number  of  tons  held  by  a  silo 
having  the  depth  given  at  the  top  of  the  column,  the  first 
number  of  each  line  being  the  diameter  of  the  silo : 


21 

62.00 

71.56 

80.79 

90.57 

100.9 

22 

67.35 

76.52 

8G.38 

96.84 

107.9 

23 

71.73 

81.61 

92.14 

103.3 

11.5.1 

24 

76.12 

86.61 

97.78 

109.6 

122.1 

25 

80.62 

89.64 

103.6 

116.1 

129.3 

2t; 

&-).45 

97.23 

109.8 

123.0 

137.1 

27 

90.17 

102.6 

115.8 

129.8 

144.7 

28 

94.99 

108.1 

122.0 

136.8 

152.4 

29 

99.92 

113.7 

128.3 

143.9 

160.3 

30 

105.0 

119.4 

124.8 

151.1 

168.4 

31 

109.8 

124.9 

141.1 

158.2 

176.2 

32 

115.1 

135.9 

147.8 

105.7 

184.0 

,y26  B.VRX     PLANS     AND     OUTBIILDI.NGS 


CAPACITY    OF    ROUND    SILOS 

15  16  17  18  19        20         21        22        23        24       25        26 

20      .58.84     66.95     75.58     84.74     94.41   104.6  115.3  126.6  138.3  150.6  163.4  170.8 

111.8  123.3  135.3  147.9  IGl.O  174.7  189.0 
119.6  131.8  144.7  l.->8.1  172.2  186.8  202.1 
127.5  140.6  154.3  108.7  183.0  199.3  215.5 
135.3  149.2  103.7  179.0  194.9  211.5  228.7 
143.3  158.0  173.4  189.5  20G.4  22.:!,9  242.2 

151.9  167.5  183.8  200.9  218  8  237  4  250.7 
100.3  170.7  194.0  212.0  230.8  250  5  270.9 
108.9  180.2  204.3  223.3  243.2  2ZX'J  285.4 
177.0  195.8  214.9  2,34.9  255.8  277.0  300.2 
180.0  205.7  225.8  243.8  268.7  291.6  315.3 
195.2  215.3  230.3  2.58.2  281.8  305.1  330.0 
2M.0  225.5  247.5  270.5  294.6  319.6  ;i45.7 

THE     STAVE     SILO 

Silos  have  come  to  be  an  article  of  commerce,  the  same 
as  mowing'  machines  and  wagons.  Such  silos  are  built 
of  staves  in  the  same  manner  as  water  tanks.  These 
staves,  which  are  usually  two  inches  thick  and  six  inches 
wide,  are  of  various  kinds  of  material,  such  as  cypress, 
white  pine,  California  redwood,  cedar  and  hemlock,  and 
the  cost  varies  largely  with  the  grade  of  material  used. 
It  is  important  that  the  staves  be  of  sound  stuff,  free  from 
knots  and  sappy  places,  and  of  a  uniform  grade  through- 
out. If  there  are  any  poor  sections  in  the  silo  they  will 
give  out  in  a  few  years,  and  the  expense  of  putting  in  a 
new  stave  is  considerable;  sometimes  it  is  necessary  to 
rebuild  the  entire  silo.  The  stave  silo  of  E.  W.  Moody  of 
North  Andover,  Mass.,  shown  in  Figure  327,  is  hooped 
with  five-eighths-inch  rods  which  run  through  two  lugs, 
and  have  a  long  screw  threaded  on  each  end  iu  order  to 
take  up  slack.  Roofs  of  stave  silos  are  put  on  in  various 
ways  to  meet  the  fancy  of  the  owner.  These  silos  are 
commonly  set  on  a  stone  or  brick  foundation  outside  the 
barn. 

CONSTRUCTING    A    ROUND    SILO 

A  round  wooden  silo  is,  as  a  rule,  the  most  satisfactory. 
In   Bulletin    59    of    tb.e    Wisconsin    Experiment    Station, 


Fig.    327 — A    MODERN    ROUND    SILO 


328 


BARN     PLANS    AND    OUTBUILDINGS 


F.  H.  King,  professor  of  agricultural  physics,  described 
in  detail  the  construction  of  silos,  from  which  the  accom- 
panying illustration  and  the  following  description  is  sub- 
stantially an  abstract :  There  should  be  a  good,  substantial 
masonry  foundation  for  all  forms  of  wood  silos,  and  the 


I    ,'9 1    '    'I    -  I       ■ 

•                                             '• 
•  ^ 

♦ 

.      .      •      .     •.      ; 
.     H      ,      .      .      . 


Fig.    328 — CONSTRUCTION   OF   SILO   IN    DETAIL 


woodwork  should  everywhere  be  at  least  twelve  inches  above 
the  earth,  to  prevent  decay  from  dampness.  There  are 
few  conditions  where  it  will  not  be  desirable  to  have  the 
bottom  of  the  silo  three  feet  or  more  below  the  feeding 
floor  of  the  stable,  and  this  will  require  not  less  than  four 


DETAILS     OF     A     ROUND     SILO  329 

to  six  feet  of  stone,  brick  or  concrete  wall.  For  a  silo 
thirty  feet  deep  tlie  foundation  wall  of  stone  should  be 
one  and  one-half  to  two  feet  thick. 

Upon  the  outer  edge  of  this  wall  is  laid  the  sill,  made 
of  two  by  fours,  cut  in  two-foot  lengths,  with  the  ends 
beveled  so  that  they  may  be  toe-nailed  together  and  bedded 
in  cement  mortar.  The  studding  need  not  be  larger  than 
two  by  four  inches  unless  the  diameter  is  to  exceed  thirty 
feet,  but  they  should  be  set  as  closely  together  as  one  foot 
from  center  to  center,  in  the  manner  shown  at  B  in 
Figure  328.  This  number  of  studs  is  not  required  for 
strength,  but  they  are  needed  in  order  to  bring  the  three 
layers  of  lining  very  close  together  so  as  to  press  the  paper 
closely  and  prevent  air  from  entering  where  the  paper 
laps.  Where  studding  longer  than  twenty  feet  are  needed, 
short  lengths  may  be  lapped  one  foot  and  simply  spiked 
together  before  they  are  set  in  place  on  the  wall.  This 
will  be  cheaper  than  to  pay  the  higher  price  for  long 
lengths.  All  studding  should  be  given  the  exact  length 
desired  before  putting  them  in  place. 

To  stay  the  studding  a  post  should  be  set  in  the  ground 
in  the  center  of  the  silo  long  enough  to  reach  about  five 
feet  above  the  sill,  and  to  this  stays  may  be  nailed  to 
hold  in  place  the  alternate  studs  until  the  lower  five  feet 
of  outside  sheeting  has  been  put  on.  The  studs  should 
be  set  first  at  the  angles  formed  in  the  sill  and  carefully 
stayed  and  plumbed  on  the  side  toward  the  center.  When 
a  number  of  these  have  been  set  they  should  be  tied 
together  by  bending  a  strip  of  half -inch  sheeting  around 
the  outside  as  high  up  as  a  man  can  reach,  taking  care 
to  plumb  each  stud  on  the  side  before  nailing.  When  the 
alternate  studs  have  been  set  in  this  way  the  remainder 
may  be  placed  and  toe-nailed  to  the  sill  and  stayed  to  the 
rib,  first  plumbing  them  sideways  and  toward  the  center. 
On  the  side  of  the  silo  where  the  doors  are  to  be  placed 
the  studding  should  be  set  double  the  distance  apart  to 


330  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

give  the  desired  width.  A  stud  should  be  set  between  the 
two  door  studs,  as  though  no  door  were  to  be  there,  and 
the  doors  cut  out  at  the  places  desired  afterward.  The 
construction  of  the  door  is  shown  at  F  and  G,  Figure  328, 

The  character  of  the  siding  and  sheeting  will  vary 
considerably  according  to  conditions  and  size  of  silo. 
"Where  the  diameter  of  the  silo  is  less  than  eighteen  feet 
inside  and  not  much  attention  need  be  paid  to  frost,  a 
single  layer  of  beveled  siding,  rabbeted  on  the  inside  of 
the  thick  edge  deep  enough  to  receive  the  thin  edge  of  the 
board  below,  will  be  all  that  is  absolutely  necessary  on  the 
outside  for  strength  and  protection  against  weather.  This 
statement  is  made  on  the  supposition  that  the  inside 
lining  is  made  of  three  layers  of  fencing  split  in  two,  the 
four  layers  constituting  the  hoops.  If  the  silo  is  larger 
than  eighteen  feet  inside  diameter,  there  should  be  a  layer 
of  half-inch  sheeting  outside,  under  the  siding.  If  bass- 
wood  is  used  for  siding,  care  should  be  taken  to  paint  it 
at  once,  otherwise  it  will  warp  badly  if  it  gets  wet  before 
painting.  In  applying  the  sheeting,  begin  at  the  bottom, 
carrying  the  work  upward  until  staging  is  needed,  follow- 
ing this  at  once  with  the  siding.  Two  eightpenny  nails 
should  be  used  in  cajh  board  in  every  stud,  and  to  prevent 
the  walls  from  getting  "out  of  round,"  the  succeeding 
courses  of  boards  should  begin  on  the  next  stud,  thus 
making  the  ends  of  the  boards  break  joints. 

When  the  stagings  are  put  up,  new  stays  should  be 
tacked  to  the  studs  above,  taking  care  to  plumb  each  one 
from  side  to  side.  The  siding  itself  will  bring  them  into 
place  and  keep  them  plumb  the  other  way  if  care  is  taken 
to  start  new  courses  as  described  above.  When  the  last 
staging  is  up,  the  plate  should  be  formed  by  spiking  two 
by  fours  cut  in  two-foot  lengths,  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  sill,  and  as  represented  at  C  in  cut,  down  upon  the 
tops  of  studs,  using  two  courses,  making  the  second  break 
joints  with  the  first. 


DETAILS     OF     A     ROUND     SILO  331 

The  lining  of  the  silo  should  he  three  layers  of  half-inch 
boards.  This  is  obtained  by  having  good  fencing,  with 
only  very  small  knots,  and  these  thoroughly  sound  and  not 
black,  split  in  two  at  a  mill,  with  two  layers  of  paper  be- 
tween the  three  layers  of  boards;  see  D  in  illustration. 
The  precaution  to  be  observed  with  this  type  of  lining  is 
that  the  boards  may  not  press  the  two  layers  together  close 
enough  so  but  that  some  air  may  arise  between  the  two 
sheets  where  they  overlap  and  thus  gain  access  to  the 
silage.  It  would  be  a  good  plan  to  tack  down  closely  with 
small  carpet  tacks  the  edges  of  the  paper  where  they  over- 
lap, and  if  this  is  done  a  lap  of  two  inches  will  be 
sufficient.  The  first  layer  of  lining  should  be  put  on  with 
eightpenny  nails,  two  in  each  board  and  stud,  and  the 
second  and  third  layers  with  tenpenny  nails,  the  funda- 
mental object  being  to  draw  the  two  layers  of  boards  as 
closely  together  as  possible.  It  is  very  important  that  a 
good  paper  be  used,  one  that  is  both  water  and  acid  proof. 
A  paper  that  is  not  acid  and  water  proof  will  dinistegrate 
at  the  joints  in  a  very  short  time  and  thus  leave  the  lining 
very  defective. 

If  the  silo  is  no  larger  than  fifteen  feet  inside  diameter, 
no  rafters  need  be  used  in  putting  on  the  roof,  which  may 
be  only  a  single  circle  like  that  shown  at  C.  This  is  made 
of  two-inch  stuff  cut  in  sections  in  the  form  of  a  circle, 
and  two  layers  spiked  together,  breaking  joints.  The  roof 
boards  are  put  on  by  nailing  them  to  the  inner  circle  and 
to  the  plate  as  shown  at  C,  the  boards  having  been  sawed 
diagonally,  as  represented  at  E,  making  the  wide  and 
narrow  ends  the  same  relative  widths  as  the  circumferences 
of  the  outer  edge  of  the  roof  and  of  the  inner  circle. 

If  the  silo  has  an  inside  diameter  exceeding  fifteen  feet 
it  will  be  necessary  to  use  two  or  three  hoops  according 
to  diameter.  When  the  diameter  is  greater  than  twenty- 
five  feet  it  will  usually  be  best  to  use  the  rafters  and  head- 
ers cut  in   for   circles  four  feet  apart  to  nail  the  roof 


332  BARK     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDIKGS 

boards  to,  whicli  are  cut  as  represented  at  H.  The  conical 
roof  may  be  covered  with  ordinary  shingles,  splitting  those 
wider  than  eight  inches.  By  laying  the  butts  of  the 
shingles  one-eighth  to  one-fourth  inch  apart  it  is  not 
necessary  to  taper  any  of  the  shingles  except  a  few  courses 
near  the  peak  of  the  roof.  In  laying  the  shingles  to  a 
true  circle  and  with  the  right  exposure  to  the  weather  a 
good  method  is  to  use  a  strip  of  wood  as  a  radius  which 
works  on  a  center  set  at  the  peak  of  the  roof  and  provided 
with  a  nail  or  pencil  to  mark  on  the  shingles  where  the 
butts  of  the  next  course  are  to  come.  Every  silo  which 
has  a  roof  should  be  provided  with  ample  ventilation  to 
keep  the  underside  of  the  roof  dry,  and,  in  the  case  of 
wood  silos,  to  prevent  the  walls  and  lining  from  rotting. 
One  of  the  most  serious  mistakes  in  the  early  construc- 
tion of  wood  silos  was  the  making  of  the  walls  with  dead 
air  spaces,  which,  on  account  of  the  dampness  from  the 
silage,  led  to  rapid  dry  rot  of  the  lining.  In  the  wood 
silo  it  is  important  to  provide  ample  ventilation  for  the 
spaces  between  the  studs,  as  well  as  for  the  roof  and  the 
inside  of  the  silo,  and  a  good  method  of  doing  this  is 
shown  at  E,  where  the  lower  portion  represents  the  sill 
and  the  upper  the  plate  of  the  silo.  Between  each  pair  of 
studs  at  the  bottom,  and  on  the  outside  of  the  silo,  a  one 
and  one-fourth-inch  auger  hole  is  bored  to  admit  air,  and 
covered  with  wire  netting  to  keep  out  mice  and  rats.  At 
the  top  of  silo  on  the  inside  the  lining  is  left  off  for  a 
space  of  two  inches  below  the  plate,  and  this  space  is 
covered  with  wire  netting  to  prevent  silage  from  falling 
into  the  studding  spaces.  This  arrangement  permits  dry 
air  from  outside  to  enter  at  the  bottom  between  each 
pair  of  studs,  and  to  pass  up  and  into  the  silo,  thus  keeping 
the  lining  and  studding  dry  and  at  the  same  time  drying 
the  underside  of  the  roof  and  the  inside  of  the  lining  as 
fast  as  exposed.  There  should  be  a  ventilator  on  the  roof. 
It  may  take  the  form  of  a  cupola  to  serve  for  an  orna- 


ROUND     BRICK     SILO  333 

ment  as  well,  or  it  may  be  a  simple  galvanized  iron  pipe 
twelve  to  twenty-four  inches  in  diameter,  rising  a  foot 
or  two  through  the  peak  of  the  roof. 

After  the  silo  has  been  completed  the  ground  forming 
the  bottom  sliould  be  thoroughly  tamped,  so  as  to  be  solid, 
then  covered  with  two  or  three  inches  of  good  cement  made 
of  one  part  of  cement  to  three  or  four  of  sand  and  gravel. 
The  amount  of  silage  which  will  spoil  on  a  hard  clay  floor 
will  not  be  large,  but  enough  to  pay  a  good  interest  on  the 
money  invested  in  the  cement  floor.  If  the  bottom  of  the 
silo  is  in  dry  sand  or  gravel  the  cement  bottom  is  impera- 
tive to  shut  out  the  soil  air.  A  silo  constructed  after  the 
manner  described  will  prove  to  be  a  durable  building  and 
will  give  satisfactory  results. 

A    SUBSTANTLiL    AND    DURABLE    SILO 

A  round  brick  silo  was  put  up  by  Daniel  Brothers  of 
^Middlesex  County,  Ct.  It  is  shown  in  Figure  329, 
and  is  thirty  feet  high,  twenty  feet  in  diameter  and  built 
eleven  feet  in  the  ground.  It  has  a  capacity  of  200  tons 
and  cost  complete  $300.  The  wall  was  built  eight  inches 
chick  of  swelled  brick  which  cost  $3  per  1000  and  $2  for 
cartage.  It  took  21,000  brick  to  put  up  the  silo.  Six  hoops 
of  three-sixteenths-inch  flat  iron  two  inches  wide,  with 
one  lug  each,  were  used  around  the  silo.  The  windows 
for  throwing  out  the  silage  are  two  by  two  and  one-half 
feet  and  placed  four  feet  apart.  A  frame  of  three  by 
six-inch  chestnut  was  set  in  the  wall,  and  inside  this  was 
nailed  one  by  two-inch  cleats,  against  which  were  placed 
tight  boards  as  the  silo  was  filled.  The  silo  is  filled 
through  the  roof.  The  roof,  which  is  flat,  is  covered  with 
tight  boards  and  then  with  tarred  paper.  On  the  paper 
was  put  a  coat  of  hot  coal  tar,  then  another  layer  of  paper, 
some  more  hot  tar,  and  a  third  layer  of  paper  and  again 
hot  tar. 


Fig.     329 — DANIEL,     BUOTHERS'    BKICK    SILO 


SILOS     FOR    CATTLE     FEEDING  S35 

The  exi^eiise  for  cement  and  lime  was  $48,  mason  work, 
foundation  and  roof  $120,  hoops  $20,  material  for  roof  $15. 
iJilo  was  plastered  inside  with  a  coat  of  three-fourths 
Portland  cement  and  one-fourth  sand.  After  filling,  the 
silage  was  covered  with  sawdust  and  not  a  pound  of  it 
spoiled.  Several  other  brick  silos  have  been  put  in  the 
immediate  vicinity  and  all  are  giving  satisfaction, 
TTliere  brick  can  be  had  at  moderate  prices  it  would 
seem  that  this  kind  of  silo  would  in  the  end  prove  much 
cheaper  than  a  wooden  one. 

THE   SILO   IN   BEEF   FEEDING 

The  silo  has  come  to  be  a  feature  in  the  feeding  of 
cattle  in  the  middle  west,  particularly  in  Illinois  and 
states  east.  Some  of  these  silos  are  of  immense  size, 
holding  many  hundred  tons  of  silage,  and  they  are  seldom 
roofed.  On  the  farm  of  Humphrey  Jones  in  Fayette 
County,  Ohio,  is  a  concreie  silo  of  1500  tons  capacity, 
besides  two  other  silos  of  large  capacity,  which  are  shown 
in  Figure  330.  The  concrete  silo  is  thirty-six  feet  inside 
diameter,  forty-seven  feet  high,  with  an  unfinished  wood 
top  of  six  feet.  It  is  built  of  solid  concrete  from  gravel 
and  cement,  and  the  walls  are  one  foot  thick.  Mr.  Jones 
says  these  walls  are  thicker  than  is  necessary,  and  if  he 
were  to  build  another  it  would  be  with  walls  only  four 
inches  thick. 

In  the  midst  of  these  cement  walls  are  imbedded  strands 
of  00  wire,  which  are  as  thick  as  a  lead  pencil,  and  have 
enormous  strength.  These  strands  go  clear  around  the 
silo  and  the  ends  are  looped  about  each  other  and  are 
imbedded  in  the  cement  about  eight  inches  apart  verti- 
cally. With  a  thin  wall  the  wires  should  be  put  as  close 
as  six  inches  at  the  lower  part  of  the  silo,  where  the  pres- 
sure is  greatest.  The  outside  hoops  were  put  on  this  silo 
temporarily,  because  it  was  filled  before  it  was  finished, 


336 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


and  the  cement  had  not  time  to  harden  properly.  He 
estimates  that  he  can  build  silos  in  this  manner  for  less 
than  one  dollar  per  ton  capacity. 

The  tubes  on  the  outside  of  the  silos  are  chutes  for 
throwing  down  the  silage.  Inside  these  chutes  are  doors 
opening    into    the    silo,    through    which    the    material    is 


Fig.  330 — HUMPHREY   JONE*-'   SILOS   AND  BEEF  CATTLE 


thrown.  The  bottom  of  the  chute  should  be  high  enough 
from  the  ground  so  that  a  wagon  can  be  driven  under  it 
and  the  silage  dropped  directly  into  this  without  extra 
handling.  The  bottom  of  tlie  silo  is  raised  slightly  above 
the  surrounding  ground,  in  order  to  i^rovide  suitable  drain- 


CHEAP     SQUARE     SILO 


337 


age.  The  silo  is  covered  with  six  inches  of  sawdust,  which 
ahnost  wholly  prevents  spoiling.  The  wooden  top  holds 
the  silage  until  it  has  time  to  settle. 

BUILDING    A    CHEAP    SILO 

Edward  Van  Alstyne  of  Columbia  County,  N.  Y.,  has 
three  silos  which  he  built  himself.  One  has  been  filled 
thirteen  times,  and  another*  for  nine  winters.  Anyone 
can  build  one  of  this  sort  who  can  handle  a  level  and  saw, 


Fig.    331 — SQUARE    SILO 


or  use  a  hammer  and  nails,  and  a  good  thing  about  them 
is  that  they  can  be  set  anywhere  and  made  to  conform 
to  the  size  of  the  barn,  if  you  want  to  put  them  inside. 
Figure  331  shows  clearly  how  the  silo  is  built.  The 
foundation  is  below  frost  made  of  stones  laid  in  cement 
mortar.  On  this  are  placed  sills  of  two  by  six  or  two  by 
eight.  Matched  pine  siding  is  stood  up  and  braced  with 
two  by  eight  or  two  by  ten-inch  scantling  placed  as  shown. 
The  corners  are  put  in  on  a  bevel  to  avoid  the  square 
corner,  and  also  to  allow  of  braces  to  strengthen  the  eilo. 


338 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


A  second  thickness  of  siding  should  be  put  on  to  break 
joints.  Do  not  use  paper  between  the  boards,  as  it  will 
rot  out. 

FASTENING    A    SILO    TO    THE    BARN 

Where  round  silos  are  built  outside  of  the  barn  in  an 
exposed  situation  it  is  sometimes  necessary  to  stay  them, 
in  order  to  prevent  their  being  blown  down,  when  empty, 


Born  p/of^e 

Fig.    332 TYING  A    SILO 


by  high  winds.  A  heavy  rod  or  five-eighths-inch  wire  rope 
can  be  placed  around  the  silo  and  fastened  to  the  plate 
of  the  barn  as  shown  in  Figure  332. 


A    CHEAP    HOMEMADE     SILO 

By  building  it  octagonal,  or  eight-sided  in  shape,  and 
ceiling  perpendicularly  with  two  thicknesses  of  inch  hem- 
lock boards,  with  felt  paper  between,  a  perfect  silo  may 
be  made  at  small  cost.  Alonzo  Devenpeck  of  New  York 
built  one  of  this  shape  and  it  has  given  perfect  satisfac- 
tion. TTo  says:  "Every  silo  that  has  been  built  in  this 
vicinity  since,  and  I  know  of  twelve,  has  been  built  after 


AN     OCTAGON     SILO 


339 


the  same  plan,  and  others  will  be  built  the  coming  year. 
They  can  be  built  any  size  wanted.  "With  2500  feet  good 
hemlock  boards,  900  two  by  sevens,  three  feet  long,  and 
$6  worth  of  felt  and  nails,  three  men  can  build  a  silo  in 
three  days.  The  expense  for  roof  and  bottom  would  be 
the  same  as  for  any  other  shape  or  style. 

"I  got  out  the  lumber  for  mine,  and,  paying  the  saw 
bill,  cement,  nails,  paper,  mason  work  and  all  complete. 


Fig.    333 OCTAGONAL    SILO 


Fia4  FIGS  FlCLb 

Fig.    334 DIVIDING   A    SILO 


it  cost  me  $29.70.  The  size  is  twelve  feet  inside  and 
twenty-four  feet  high.  It  will  hold  silage  enough  to 
feed  twelve  head  of  cattle  twice  a  day  for  sis  months. 
When  the  foundation  is  completed,  place  the  sills  on  and 
nail  the  corners  together.  Then  set  the  boards  up  at  the 
corners  and  plumb  them  with  a  level  or  plumb  staff,  let 
one  man  hold  the  joist  on  the  outside  where  they  belong, 
place  two  feet  apart  and  nail  them  from  the  inside.  Spike 
the  joist  at  the  corners  as  you  go  for  the  first  twelve  feet, 
then  put  the  upper  section  up  the  same  way.  The  joist 
may  be  sawed  the  same  length  with  a  crosscut  saw  by 
bunching  them  together."  By  the  ground  plan  in 
Figure  333  it  will  be  seen  that  the  joist  and  boards  at  the 
corners  all  have  to  be  the  same  slant,  which  is  a  square 
miter  or  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees.  ^ 


340  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

DIVIDING    A    ROUND    SILO 

It  is  sometimes  desirable  to  put  a  partition  in  a  silo  in 
order  to  diminish  the  feeding  surface.  In  Figure  334 
Eigs.  1,  2  and  3  show  the  three  plans.  By  putting  the 
partition  as  in  Figs.  1  and  2,  the  silage  from  one  half 
must  be  thrown  across  the  other,  which  means  much  extra 
work  in  emptying  a  silo.  The  partition  should  be  placed 
as  in  Fig.  3,  and  good  doors  made  to  fit  the  opening  in 
each  side.  Use  acid  and  water  proof  paper,  or,  what  is 
better,  felt,  to  make  the  joints  air-tight. 

It  would  be  impossible  to  make  a  partition  air-tight 
when  the  boards  are  cut  and  the  partition  put  in  as  the 
silo  is  filled.  Too  much  care  cannot  be  taken  in  putting 
in  such  a  partition.  The  ends  will  have  to  have  much 
work  where  joined  to  the  walls  or  air  will  get  through 
when  one  side  is  empty.  The  work  should  be  done  in  a 
good  and  substantial  manner,  as  there  is  great  pressure. 
Both  sides  should  be  filled  simultaneously  and  well  com- 
pacted at  all  times.  It  would  break  down  the  best  made 
partition  if  one  side  was  put  in  at  a  time.  After  it  is  well 
settled  if  one  side  is  taken  out  the  pressure  is  not  so  great. 

When  taking  out  the  first  side  have  a  large  number  of 
braces  ready  ths  proper  length,  and  as  fast  as  the  silage  is 
used  put  in  the  braces.  Fig.  4  shows  the  braces  in  posi- 
tion from  the  sides  of  the  silo  to  the  partition.  These 
braces  should  have  some  pieces  at  the  ends  running  the 
opposite  direction  to  the  material  against  which  the  brace 
is  to  support.  That  is,  if  the  silo  is  stave  and  the  parti- 
tion horizontal  to  the  brace,  the  end  pieces  should  be  as  in 
Fig.  5.  If  the  timber  of  the  outside  of  the  silo  is  hori- 
zontal, the  brace  should  be  as  in  Fig.  G.  Wlien  one  side 
of  Ihe  silo  is  empty  there  is  no  danger  of  the  wall  giving 
way  if  these  precautions  are  taken.  Next  year,  when 
filling,  the  braces  as  well  as  the  end  pieces  should  be  taken 
011^  and  laid  away  for  another  year.     By  this  method  the 


PRESERVING    BREWERS*    GRAINS 


341 


man  with  a  small  herd  can  build  a  moderate  sized  silo 
and  have  silage  through  the  dry  time  as  well  as  winter  at 
a  very  small  outlay  of  money. 


SILO     FOR     brewers'     GRAINS 

E.  B.  Brady,  Westchester  County,  N.  Y.,  has  a  silo 
which  is  used  for  storing  brewers'  grains.  Figure  335 
shows  shape  and  mode  of  constructing  the  "Westchester 


Fig.     ?/r]o — VIEW     OF     SILO 

county  silo,  and  Figure  336  the  manner  in  which  it  is 
used.  The  silo,  shown  in  Figure  335,  consists  of  a  sort 
of  basement  cellar,  with  the  door  opening  into  the  cow 
stable,  and  the  rear  sunk  for  the  most  part  beneath  the 
ground.  A  road  passes  the  end  of  it,  where  there  is  a 
door,  shown  by  dotted  lines,  for  the  purpose  of  unloading 
the  grains.  The  walls  are  of  stone,  and  the  floor  is  of 
cement.     The   silo   is   covered   with   an   ordinary   shingle 


342 


BARN     PLANS     AND     Or^TBUILDINGS 


roof.  The  grains  are  packed  in  solidly,  until  they  reach 
the  level  of  the  door  at  the  top,  when  they  are  covered 
with  boards,  and  some  straw  is  thrown  over  the  boards. 
The  lower  door  is  opened  when  the  grain  is  required,  and 
it  is  dug  out  as  bright  as  when  put  in,  but  somewhat 
soured.  As  the  mass  is  cut  away,  nothing  is  done  to  the 
surface,  which  is  left  exposed  to  the  air;  the  surface  is 
made  fresh  every  day  by  the  removal  of  what  was  left 
exposed  the  day  before. 


Fig.     336 — SILO,    MANNER    OP    COVERING 


BEST     HOOPS     FOR     SILO 


For  hoops  five-eighths-inch  wire  rope  is  very  satisfactory. 
It  can  be  bought  for  the  same  price  as  the  five-eighths- 
inch  rods,  but  the  tensile  strength  of  the  iron  rope  is 
very  much  greater  than  the  tensile  strength  of  the  iron 
rod  and  it  has  this  advantage,  that  it  gives  and  takes 
the  expansion  and  contraction  of  heat  and  cold  better, 
and  only  needs  one  buckle  or  coupling,  and  it  is  very 
much  more  easy  to  put  around.  The  round  silo  is  best 
in  one  respect,  and  that  is  because  it  has  no  corners. 


CHAPTER   XIX 

BOOT   CELLARS  AND   BOOT  HOUSES 

The  leading  features  of  a  good  root  cellar  are :  cheap- 
ness, nearness  to  the  place  where  the  roots  are  consumed, 
dryness,  ventilation,  and,  above  all,  it  should  be  frost- 
proof. If  a  hillside  is  handy,  it  can  aid  much  in  secur- 
ing all  of  these  important  points.  First  make  an  ex- 
cavation in  the  hillside,  in  size  according  to  the  desired 
capacity  of  the  cellar.     Erect  in  this  excavation  a  stout 


.  337 — CROSS-SECTION  OF  A  ROOT  CELLAR 


frame  of  timber  and  planks,  or  of  logs,  which  latter  are 
often  cheaper.  Over  this  frame  construct  a  strong  roof. 
Throw  the  earth  which  has  been  excavated  over  the 
structure  until  the  whole  is  covered,  top  and  all,  to  a 
depth  of  two  feet  or  more.  A  door  should  be  provided 
upon  the  exposed  side  or  end.  This  door  may  be  large 
enough  to  enter  without  stooping.  Or  it  may  be  simply  a 
manhole,  which  is  better  than  a  regular  door,  so  far  as 
protection  from  frost  is  concerned,  but  not  so  convenient 
for  putting  in  and  taking  out  roots.     Sometimes,  when 


344 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


the  bank  Is  a  stiff  clay,  such  houses  are  built  without  con 
structing  any  side  walls,  the  roof  resting  directly  on  the 
clay.  A  cross-section  of  such  a  root  cellar  is  shown  in 
Figure  33Y.  In  such  cases,  the  facing,  or  front,  of  the 
cellar  may  be  built  np  with  planks,  logs  or  stones,  as 
circumstances  determine.  In  Figure  338  a  facing  of  stone 
is  shown.  This  is  a  large  cellar  provided  with  a  wide 
door;  it  has  also  a  window  on  each  side.  Two  tight 
fences,  of  stakes  and  planks,  two  feet  apart,  with  earth 
filled  in  between,  or  of  logs,  or  stout  rails  used  in  the 
same  manner,  make  a  cheaper  front,  and  is  a  better  pro- 
tection against  cold  than  stone.     If  there  is  no  hillside 


Fig.     338 — STONE     FACING     OF     HILLSIDE     CELLAR 


convenient,  a  knoll  or  other  dry  place  should  be  selected, 
and  the  soil  removed  over  a  space  a  trifle  larger  than  the 
ground  plan  of  the  house,  and  to  the  depth  of  two  feet  or 
more,  provided  there  is  no  danger  that  the  bottom  will 
be  wet.  In  the  construction  of  the  house,  select  poles  or 
logs  of  two  sizes,  the  larger  ones  being  shortest;  these 
are  for  the  inside  pen,  as  it  is  subjected  to  greater  strain. 
The  ends  of  the  logs  are  cut  flat,  so  that  they  will  fit 
down  closely  together,  and  make  a  pen  that  is  nearly 
tight.  At  least  two  logs  in  each  layer  of  the  inner  pen 
should  be  cut  long  enough  to  pass  through  and  fit  into 
the  outer  pen,  to  serve  to  fasten  the  two  walls  together — ■ 


SMALL    ROOT    HOUSES 


345 


the  space  between  the  two  being  two  feet  on  each  side. 
Figure  339  shows  the  excavation,  and  beginning  of  the 
root  house  walls,  with  the  method  of  "locking"  them 
together.     The  doorway  is  built  up  by  having  short  logs, 


Fig.     339 — EXCAVATION     AXD     BASE     OF     ROOT     HOUSE 


which  pass  from  one  layer  of  poles  to  the  other,  and 
serve  as  supports  to  the  ends  of  the  wall  poles.  This  is 
shown  in  Figure  340,  where  the  house  is  represented  as 
completed.     The   space  between   the   two   walls   is   filled 


Fig.     340 — ROOT    HOUSE    COMPLETED 


with  earth,  sods  being  used  to  fill  in  between  the  logs  to 
block  the  earth.  It  is  best  to  begin  putting  in  the  earth 
before  the  walls  are  completed,  as  otherwise  it  will  require 
an  undue  amount  of  hard  lifting.     Wlien  the  walls  are 


346  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

Iniilt  lip  five  to  six  feet  on  one  side,  and  about  two  feet 
higher  on  the  other,  to  give  the  necessary  slope,  the  roof 
is  put  on.  The  latter  should  be  of  poles  placed  close 
together,  well  secured  to  the  logs,  and  covered  with  sod, 
eighteen  inches  of  earth,  and  sodded  again  on  the  top. 
Two  doors  should  be  provided,  one  on  the  inner,  and  the 
other  on  the  outer  wall,  both  to  fit  closely.  A  filling  of 
straw  can  be  placed  between  the  doors,  if  it  is  found 
necessary  to  do  so  in  order  to  keep  out  the  frost.  Figure 
340  shows  the  root  house  as  thus  constructed,  and  is  a 
structure  that  will  last  for  many  years,  paying  for  its 
moderate  cost  many  times  over. 

WELL-ARRANGED    ONION     STORAGE    HOUSE 

The  storage  house  of  J.  G.  Rowley  of  Michigan,  shown 
in  Figure  341,  is  located  on  the  south  side  of  a  hill  and 
faces  south  and  east.  It  is  forty  feet  long  by  twenty- 
four  feet  wide,  and  has  a  stone  basement.  The  stone 
walls  on  either  side  are  seven  and  one-half  feet  high  and 
two  feet  thick;  wall  at  west  is  twelve  feet  high,  the  one 
at  the  east  end  eight  feet.  There  are  two  stories  above 
the  basement.  The  floors  are  formed  of  boards  three  and 
one-half  inches  wide  by  one  and  one-quarter  inches  thick, 
with  a  half-inch  space  between  boards.  The  roof  is  made 
of  matched  lumber,  well  put  together,  covered  with  sev- 
eral thicknesses  of  building  paper  and  shingled.  The 
interior  of  the  building  is  lathed  and  plastered  and  the 
onions  will  stand  zero  weather  without  freezing. 

On  the  ground  floor  there  is  an  alley  into  which  a 
wagon  may  be  backed  for  convenience  in  loading.  The 
building  is  provided  with  a  return  steam  heater,  so  that 
it  may  be  warmed  in  coldest  weather.  There  is  also  a 
forcing  window  on  the  south  side,  next  to  the  east  end. 
The  cost  of  storage  house,  steam  heater  and  1000  crates 
for  onions  was  $1000. 


STORING    OXIOXS    AND    CELERY 


341 


When  well  cured  Mr.  Rowley  stores  his  onions  with  tops 
on,  and  they  keep  just  as  well  as  hay  that  is  well  cured. 
They  are  not  topped  until  sold.  For  convenience  in 
putting  in  the  crop,  there  is  a  track  on  the  west  end  of 
building  running  from  the  ground  to  top  floor.  The 
onions  are  carried  vip  in  a  small  car  and  dumped  into 
the  bins  below. 


Fig.  341 — STORAGE  HOUSE  FOR  OXIONS 


STORAGE  HOUSE  AND  PITS  FOR  CELERY 


Several  methods  of  storing  celery  are  described  and 
illustrated  in  Farmers'  Bulletin  148,  on  celery  culture, 
issued  by  the  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture, 
from  which  Figures  342  and  343  are  taken.  "Wliere  only 
a  small  quantity  of  celery  is  to  be  stored  for  winter,  a 
cheap  method  is  to  bank  it  up  with  earth  and  cover  where 
f?roT\Ti.  Place  enough  earth  around  the  base  of  the  plants 
'^o  hold  them  in  good  form,  and  allow  them  to  remain 
\rithout  further  banking  as  long  as  there  is  any  danger 


348 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


of  a  hard  frost.  When  necessary,  the  earth  should  be 
thrown  up  to  the  very  tops  of  the  plants,  almost  covering 
them,  and  as  the  weather  becomes  cooler,  cover  the  ridge 
with  coarse  manure,  straw  or  corn  fodder  held  in  place 
by  means  of  stakes  or  boards. 

Trenching  is  employed  by  large  growers.  The  celery 
is  partly  banked  with  earth  and  allowed  to  remain  where 
grown  until  in  danger  from  heavy  frosts.  Set  two  par- 
allel lines  of  twelve-inch  boards  eighteen  or  twenty  inches 
apart  between  which  the  celery  is  packed  with  the  roots 


Fig.     342 — CELERY     STORAGE     HOUSE 


imbedded  in  soil.  When  the  space  between  the  boards  is 
filled  the  soil  is  thrown  up  on  the  outside  to  the  tops  of 
the  boards,  which  are  then  lifted  out  and  the  soil  allowed 
to  come  in  contact  with  the  celery.  Trenches  are  usually 
made  from  fifty  to  sixty  feet  long,  or  small  enough  to  per- 
mit the  removal  of  the  whole  trench  at  one  time.  As 
colder  weather  approaches,  the  celery  is  either  removed 
and  marketed  or  covered  with  boards,  straw  or  corn  fodder 
on  top  for  protection. 

Another  method  of  trenching  is  to  excavate  a  pit  about 
twenty-four  inches  deep,  three  feet  wide  and  of  any  de- 


FOR     STORIXG     CEL^ERY 


J49 


sired  length,  as  shown  in  Figure  343.  Loosen  the  soil  in 
the  bottom  and  set  the  roots  in  this.  Pack  the  trench 
full  of  plants,  placing  the  roots  close  together  with  con- 
siderable soil  attaching  to  them.  As  the  celery  is  placed 
in  the  trench  it  should  be  well  watered  and  then  allowed 
to  remain  open  long  enough  for  the  tops  to  become  dry. 
Place  a  twelve-inch  board  on  edge,  along  each  side  of  the 
trench,  and  bank  up  with  earth  on  the  outside.  Cover 
the  trench  with  a  roof  of  boards,  sash,  straw,  poles  or 
cornstalks,  and  as  the  weather  becomes  cooler  increase 
the  covering  to  keep  out  frost.  Celery  stored  in  this  man- 
ner will  keep  until  late  in  winter.  This  method  is  recom- 
mended for  farmers  and  small  gardeners. 

Large  growers  who  wish 
to  store  celery  for  late 
keeping  employ  a  stor- 
age house  similar  to  the 
one  illustrated  in  Figure 
342.  A  cross-section  shows 
a  house  twenty-four  feet 
wide,  its  side  walls  two 
feet  high  and  eleven  feet 
to  the  ridge.  The  roof  should 
be  of  heavy  planks  with 
one  end  resting  on  top  of  the  wall  and  the  other  on  a 
ridge  pole  supported  by  a  line  of  posts  through  the  center. 
The  cracks  between  the  roof  planks  may  be  battened  with 
old  celery  blanching  boards,  and  the  whole  covered  to  a 
depth  of  four  inches  with  earth  and  sodded  over  or 
double  roofed  to  keep  out  frost.  The  ends  of  the  house 
should  be  built  double  with  a  dead-air  space  between, 
and  there  should  be  a  large  door  in  each  end.  The  floor 
of  the  house  should  have  a  covering  of  three  or  four 
inches  of  sand  or  fine  earth  in  which  to  pack  the  roots  of 
the  celery.  It  is  desirable  to  have  the  storehouse  sub- 
divided lengthwise   into  beds  six   to   eight   feet  wide  by 


Pig.     343 CELERY     TRENCH 


350  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

means  of  six-inch  boards  raised  three  or  four  inches  from 
the  ground  and  fastened  to  stakes.  These  partitions  in- 
crease the  circulation  of  air  through  the  celery  and  tend 
to  keep  the  plants  up  in  good  condition. 

CONVENIENT     DOORS     TO     A     CELLAR 

Where  there  is  no  barn  cellar,  the  roots  to  be  fed  the 
stock  are  usually  stored  in  the  house  cellar  and  carried 
out  daily,  entailing  a  great  amount  of  work.  Where  the 
barn  has  some  space  beneath  it,  a  dry  location  and  a  tight 
foundation,    a   pit   can   be    dug   under    some    convenient 

point  in  the  feeding  floor 
and  a  light  wall  of  brick  or 
stones  laid  up  about  the 
sides,  extending  up  to  the 
barn  floor.  Through  this  floor 
an  opening  is  cut  and  "bulk- 
head" doors  arranged  over  it, 
\  \'.    '  as     shown     in     Figure     344. 

Bank  up  the  brick  or   stone 

Fig.     344-HATCHWAY  ^^jj   ^^^^^  ^j^^  p-^  ^-^j^  ^^^^j^ 

on  the  outside,  heaping  up  this  banking  nearly  to  the 
barn  floor,  and  there  should  be  no  trouble  from  freezing. 

A  CAVE  FOR  STORING  APPLES 

For  storing  fruit  on  the  farm,  nothing  can  equal  a  good 
cave.  J.  F.  Record,  a  leading  western  orchardist,  built 
a  cave  seven  years  ago  and  has  found  it  an  exoellent 
place  in  which  to  store  apples.  The  cave  was  dug  into 
a  north  hill  slope  and  the  dirt  removed  with  a  spade 
and  wheelbarrow.  It  is  sixteen  feet  wide  by  fifty  feet 
deep  and  will  hold  two  carloads  of  apples.  The  clay 
walls  need  nothing  to  hold  them  in  place. 

The  roof  is  made  of  bridge  plank,  held  in  place  by 
posts  along  the  sides.     The  plank  are  covered  with  dirt 


FIELD    ROOT     CELLAR 


351 


and  sodded  over  to  turn  the  rain.  Two  twelve-inch  tiles 
at  the  top  provide  ventilation.  Eats  have  not  bothere  I 
much.  A  few  got  in,  but  were  caught  with  a  wire  trap. 
A  fruit  house,  Figure  345,  sixteen  by  twenty  feet,  is 
built  in  front  of  the  cave.  Double  doors  open  on  the 
north,  so  that  two  wagons  can  be  backed  in  for  unload- 
ing. There  is  an  orchard  and  timber  on  the  south,  so 
that  hot  south  winds  have  no  chance  to  enter  this  cave. 
Apples  are  stored  in  barrels,  which  are  kept  oS  the  ground 
by  setting  them  on  timbers  laid  down  for  this  purpose. 


Fig.  345 — ENTRANCE  TO  APPLE  CAVE 


A  FIELD  ROOT  CELLAR 


A  field  root  cellar  may  be  cheaply  built,  from  the  fol- 
lowing directions :  Dig  in  dry  ground  a  trench  five 
feet  deep,  eight  feet  wide,  and  ten  feet  longer  than  it  is 
intended  to  make  the  cellar.  Along  each  side,  one  and 
one-half  feet  below  the  surface,  cut  out  a  groove  such  as 
is  shown  at  g,  g,  in  Figure  346.  so  as  to  form  an  oblique 
support  for  a  board  eight  inches  wide  lying  against  its 
lower    side.     Procure    for    rafters    either    light    chestnut 


352 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


posts,  or  two  by  fire  spruce  joists;  saw  them  to  a  length  of 
five  feet,  and  set  up  a  pair  (spiked  together  at  the  top) 
every  three  feet  of  the  length  of  the  building.  Nail  cheap 
boards  or  slabs  on  top  of  these  rafters,  so  as  to  com- 
pletely  cover   it.     Openings   an    inch  wide   between   the 


Tn 


346 — CROSS-SECTION    OF     A     FIELD     ROOT     CELLAR 


boards  will  do  no  harm.  Cover  this  roof  twelve  or 
eighteen  inches  thick  with  earth,  and  sod  it  neatly,  draw- 
ing the  sod  on  each  side  to  a  gutter,  h,  h,  which  will  lead 
away  the  water  of  rains.     The  ends  may  be  closed  with 


347 — LENGTHWISE  SECTION 


ROOT  CELLAR 


double  boarding  filled  in  with  sawdust,  leaves,  seaweed 
or  other  litter,  and  provided  with  doors  wide  enough  to 
admit  a  bushel  basket.  The  gable  over  the  tops  of  the 
doors  should  be  left  open  for  ventilation,  or,  what  is 
better,    supplied    with     movable     shutters.     Figure     347 


STORAGE     riT    FUH     ROOTS  353 

shows  the  longitudinal  section  of  such  a  cellar  about 
thirty  feet  long,  with  an  area  five  feet  long  at  each,  end, 
having  steps,  h^  a,  for  the  approach.  The  earthen  wall 
of  the  cellar  is  shown  at  c,  d  the  board  roof,  e  the  earth 
covering,  and  f  the  rafters.  In  light  soils  it  will  bo 
necessary  to  place  a  stone,  brick,  or  post  and  board  wall 
against  the  side  of  the  cellar,  and  similar  protection 
should  always  be  given  to  the  area  at  the  ends.  Such 
a  cellar  will  last  for  twenty  years,  and  is  thoroughly 
frost  proof.  If  made  thirty  feet  long  it  will  hold,  being 
filled  only  to  the  eaves,  about  700  bushels.  It  may,  of 
course,  be  made  wider  and  higher,  and  have  root  bins  on 
each  side  with  a  passageway  between  them- 

riTS    FOR    STORING    ROOTS 

When  properly  put  away  in  pits,  roots  of  all  kinds 
keep  better  than  when  stored  in  cellars.  The  chief  diffi- 
culties in  the  way  of  keeping  roots  in  pits  are,  the  danger 
that  frost  will  penetrate  the  covering,  and  the  risk  of 
heating  for  want  of  ventilation.  By  the  use  of  board 
coverings  shown  in  Figure  348,  these  difficulties  may, 
with  care,  be  wholly  removed.  The  covering  boards  are 
made  of  a  length  to  cover  one  side  of  the  pit,  and  of 
such  a  width  as  to  be  handy  and  portable.  Six  feet 
square  will  be  found  a  convenient  size.  The  cheapest 
kind  of  boards  will  answer  the  purpose.  These  are  cut 
into  the  required  lengths  and  nailed  to  cross  pieces  or 
cleats  at  least  four  or  six  inches  wide,  placed  edgewise,  as 
shown  in  Figure  348.  When  the  roots  are  heaped  in  the 
usual  manner,  and  covered  with  straw  placed  up  and' 
down  on  the  heaps,  the  boards  are  laid  on  the  straw  so 
that  they  nearly  meet  on  the  top,  as  shown  in  Figure  349. 
Space  is  left,  through  which  the  ends  of  the  straw  pro- 
ject. The  straw  is  turned  down  over  the  edges  of  the 
hPATfls  when  th^  earth  is  thrown  on  thena..    The  boards 


354 


BARX     PLANS     AND     OUTBLILUINGS 


are  placed  upon  the  straw,  with  the  cleats  down,  and  so 
that  they  lie  horizontally.  There  is  then  an  air  space  of 
four  to  six  inches  besides  the  thickness  of  straw  as  a 
protection  to  the  roots.  In  addition  there  may  be  as 
thick  a  covering  of  earth  thrown  upon  the  boards  as  may 
be  required.  In  many  places  no  earth  will  be  needed, 
but  it  will  always  be  useful  in  keeping  the  roots  at  an 
even  temperature,  and  so  low  that  they  will  not  sprout 
or  heat.  If  a  covering  of  earth  is  put  on,  the  projecting 
straw   should  be   turned   down   on   the   opposite   side   to 


Pig.   348 — SHUTTER 
FOR   PIT 


Fig.   349 — SECTION  OF  FIN- 
ISHED  PIT 


that  on  which  it  is  laid,  and  the  ends  covered  with  earth. 
The  extreme  top  of  the  heap  need  not  be  covered  at  all 
unless  severe  cold  is  expected,  when  a  few  places  should 
be  left  uncovered  for  ventilation.  Figure  350  shows  a 
root  pit  for  use  in  the  open  prairies,  where  shelter  is 
scarce,  and  the  means  of  building  are  not  abundant. 
An  excavation  is  made  in  the  ground  six  or  seven  feet 
deep  and  as  wide  as  may  be  suitable  to  the  length  of 
the  poles  with  which  it  is  to  be  covered.  The  length 
will  be  according  to  tlie  necessities  of  the  builder.    It  is 


STORAGE     PIT    FOR    ROOTS 


355 


covered  with  rough  poles,  over  which  some  coarse  hay 
IS  thrown.  The  sod,  which  should  be  cut  from  the  sur- 
face m  strips  with  the  plow  and  an  as,  is  then  laid  closely 
on  top,  and  earth  is  heaped  over- the  sod.  A  manhole 
at  one  corner,  or,  if  it  is  a  long  cellar,  in  the  middle  is 
constructed  with  small  poles  and  about  two  feet  high 
A  ladder  or  row  of  steps  is  made  from  this  to  the  bottom.' 
ihe  manhole  when  not  used  is  filled  with  straw  or  hay 
which  IS  thrown  upon  a  loose  door  or  boards  resting  upon 


Fig.     350— PRAIRIE     ROOT     CELLAR 


the  logs  and  a  stone  or  log  is  laid  upon  the  straw  to 
keep  It  from  being  blown  away.  Openings  may  be  made 
along  the  side  opposite  to  the  entrance,  through  which 
the  roots  or  potatoes  may  be  shoveled  or  dumped.  These 
openmgs  may  be  closed  with  sods  and  earth  during  the 
winter.  ^ 

A     CAVE     FOR     ROOTS 

An   oblong   cellar   is   dug  twenty-four   feet   in   length, 
about    twelve  feet    wide  and    three  feet    deep.     This    is 


356 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


planked  around  with  ordinary  slabs  and  roofed  over  with 
the  same  material.  The  sides  and  roof  are  covered  with 
the  earth  thrown  out  of  the  cellar,  and  is  then  sodded 
over,  appearing  as  shown  in  the  annexed  engraving, 
Figure  351.  The  door  is  double,  and  steps  are  provided 
to  descend  to  it.  For  such  a  cave  it  is  not  necessary  to 
dig  into  a  hillside;  the  north  end,  however,  should  be 
protected  by  extra  covering.  Caves  of  this  kind  are  often 
the  only  kind  that  the  pioneer  can  provide,  and  they 
will  frequently  be  found  useful  on  old  farms.  It  is  far 
better  to  have  a  cave  like  this  for  loots  than  to  store  them 


Fig.     351 — CAVE     FUR     ROOTS 

in  the  cellar  of  the  house.  ITnless  on  loose,  sandy,  or 
very  dry  land,  special  care  should  be  taken  to  have  all 
water  conducted  away,  either  by  good,  deep  drains,  or  by 
grading  the  surface  around  to  carry  rain  water  to  a  dis- 
tance, or  by  both  of  these  methods,  if  necessary. 

PRESERVING    ROOTS    IN    HEAPS 


The  pits  for  roots  may  be  made  in  the  field  where  the 
crop  is  harvested,  or  in  a  yard  ov  field  near  the  barn.     A 


COVERING  ROOTS  WITH  EARTH 


351 


slightly  elevated  spot  should  be  chosen  which  will  be  dry 
at  all  seasons.  On  this  the  roots  should  be  heaped  in  a 
pile  about  six  feet  wide  at  the  bottom  and  four  feet  high, 
sloping  to  a  point  at  the  top,  as  shown  in  Figure  352. 


Fig.     352 — BUILDIXG     A     ROOT     HEAP 

The  heap  may  be  made  of  any  length,  or  the  roots  may  be 
placed  in  several  heaps. 

The  roots  should  not  be  put  up  until  they  have  dried 
somewhat,  or  be  covered  with  earth  until  there  is  immi- 
nent danger  of  frost.     There  is  then  much  less  risk  of 


353 — COVERING 


WITH    EARTH 


lieating  and  decay  than  when  they  are  covered  before  be- 
coming dry.  The  straw  covering  should  be  a  foot  thick. 
A  foot  of  straw  and  three  inches  of  earth  are  better  than 
a  foot   of  earth   and   three  inches  of  straw.     The  straw 


oo8  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

should  be  laid  on  straight  and  evenly  so  as  to  shed  rain. 
It  ought  to  be  gathered  closely  at  the  top  for  the  same 
reason.  The  covering  of  earth,  free  from  stones,  should 
be  about  six  inches  thick,  laid  on  compactly  and  well 
beaten  down,  as  shown  in  Figure  353.  At  spaces  of  about 
six  feet  apart  there  should  be  wisps  of  straight  straw 
placed  upright  and  projecting  through  the  earth  covering. 
These  are  for  ventilators,  and  serve  to  carry  off  the  mois- 
ture and  heat  from  the  roots  during  the  sweating  or 
fermentation  which  they  are  sure  to  undergo  to  some 
extent.  One  of  these  pits  may  be  opened  at  any  time 
during  the  winter  in  moderate  weather,  and  when  a  stock 
of  roots  sufficient  to  last  a  week  has  been  taken  out  it 
may  be  closed  again,  care  being  had  that  it  is  done  as 
quickly  as  possible. 


^^^ 


CHAPTEE  XX 
BUILDINGS   OF   VARIOUS  KINDS 

COLD  STORAGE  HOUSE  FOR  APPLES 

The  cold  storage  house  shown  in  Figure  354  was  built 
in  1889  by  J.  H.  Dunn  of  Linn  County,  Mo.,  and  has 
been  in  successful  operation  every  year  since.  It  was 
built  more  pfirticularly  for  eggs,  but  has  been  used  for 
apples,  and  with  splendid  success.  The  temperature  is 
quite  uniform,  ranging  from  thirty-six  to  thirty-eight 
degrees  Fahrenheit.  Capacity  of  storage  room,  about  500 
barrels;  capacity  of  ice  chamber,  175  wagon  loads;  cost 
of  building,  $2000.  The  building  is  twenty-four  by  fifty 
feet,  twenty  feet  high.  It  is  placed  on  a  solid  rock 
foundation.  The  walls  are  constructed  of  two  by  ten- 
inch  studding,  on  which  is  first  nailed  building  paper  and 
over  this  shiplap,  on  outside  of  building.  On  inside  of 
studding  is  nailed  building  paper  and  over  this  rough 
sheathing  boards.  The  ten-inch  space  between  is  filled 
with  sawdust.  A  two  by  two-inch  piece  is  then  nailed 
on  the  inside  sheathing  opposite  each  of  the  two  by  ten 
studding,  and  on  these  two  is  nailed  rough  sheathing 
lumber.  The  two-inch  space  thus  made  is  left  for  an 
air  space.  On  the  last  inside  sheathing  mentioned  is 
nailed  a  two  by  four-inch  piece,  so  as  to  form  a  four- 
inch  space  for  charcoal.  The  charcoal  is  used  to  absorb 
excessive  moisture  and  impure  odors  and  would  not  be 
necessary  in  a  house  for  apples  alone,  as  sawdust  would 
answer  as  well  instead. 

Through  the  center  of  the  building  lengthwise,  are 
placed  four  posts  or  pillars  twelve  by  twelve  inches,  eight 


360  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBTTILDINGS 

feet  in  hight,  ten  feet  apart,  on  which  rests  a  plate 
twelve  by  twelve  inches.  On  this  plate  the  joists  are 
placed  twelve  inches  apart  from  center  to  center.  The 
joists  are  three  by  twelve  inches,  eleven  feet  eight  inches 
long,  the  ends  lacking  four  inches  of  coming  together 
on  plate  in  center  of  building.  The  outer  ends  of  joists 
rest  on  a  two  by  ten-inch  piece  let  into  the  two  by  ten- 
inch  studding  and  are  nailed  securely  to  the  studding. 
The  top  corners  of  joists  over  center  plate  are  hewed  off 
to  admit  the  trough  with  a  fall  of  six  inches  to  the  cen- 
ter. The  under  sides  of  joists  are  ceiled  and  sawdust  is 
filled  in  to  top  of  joists.  On  top  of  joists  is  nailed  a  two- 
inch  floor  for  bracing  the  building.  On  this  floor  is 
placed  another  set  of  joists  of  the  same  length  and 
thickness  as  the  first  set,  but  nine  inches  wide  at  outside 
end  and  three  inches  wide  at  inside  end.  On  these  slop- 
ing joists  is  nailed  another  two-inch  floor  diagonally  to 
further  strengthen  and  brace  the  building. 

A  covering  of  galvanized  iron  is  placed  on  the  diag- 
onal floor,  which,  as  will  be  seen,  has  a  fall  of  six  inches 
to  the  center  to  carry  off  water.  The  edges  of  this  cov- 
ering are  turned  up  six  inches  against  the  wall  all 
around,  to  prevent  leakage  down  the  walls,  but  the  two 
edges  that  come  together  in  the  center  are  turned  down 
over  the  ends  of  the  sloping  joists.  From  this  the  leak- 
age drips  into  the  galvanized  iron  trough  below  and  is 
carried  to  the  center  of  biiilding,  where  it  empties  into 
a  pipe  which  conveys  it  from  the  building.  On  the  gal- 
vanized covering  is  placed  another  sot  of  sloping  joists 
of  exactly  the  same  dimensions  as  the  other  set  already 
described,  but  these  have  the  wide  end  inside  and  the 
narrow  end  outside.  This  brings  up  the  line  to  a  level 
again.  On  these  top  joists  are  nailed  two  by  four-inch 
pieces  twelve  inches  apart  from  center  to  center,  on  which 
directly  rests  the  ice. 


STOIUGE    HOUSE    FOR    APPLES 


361 


A  much  cheaper  house  may  be  constructed  on  the  same 
general  plan  for  the  keeping  of  apples  alone.  In  the 
first  place  a  better  and  in  some  sections  a  cheaper  stor- 
age room  could  be  constructed  under  ground ;  say  an  exca- 
vation eight  feet  deep  and  walled  up  with  rock,  brick  or 


Fig.     354 — PLA^"     OF     CONSTRUCTIOX 


any  other  material  at  hand.  Upon  this  the  structure 
might  be  built  essentially  as  described,  except  that  the 
heavy  posts  and  plates  might  be  replaced  with  lighter 
ones.     The  extra  bracing  to  support  the  heavy  weight  of 


362  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINQS 

ice  might  be  dispensed  with  unless  it  was  desired  to  store 
a  large  quantity  of  ice,  which,  by  the  way,  is  not  neces- 
sary to  the  successful  operation  of  the  house  in  the 
keeping  of  apples. 

It  has  been  demonstrated  that  one  and  one-half  or  two 
feet  of  ice  will  reduce  the  temperature  the  same  as  when 
the  house  is  filled  full.  A  cheap  house  may  be  built  on 
the  bank  of  a  stream  or  pond,  where  it  is  not  desirable  to 
build  the  storage  house  in  such  a  situation,  and  the  ice 
can  be  very  economically  harvested.  It  should  be  re- 
membered that  ice  used  in  keeping  winter  apples  must  be 
kept  through  the  entire  summer  before  it  can  be  used, 
hence  it  will  be  seen  that  there  would  be  more  expense 
and  waste  of  ice  in  a  cold  storage  house  than  in  a  well 
constructed  ice  house. 

The  storage  house  could  then  be  iced  from  time  to 
time  as  needed.  When  the  weather  is  cold  icing  is  un- 
necessary if  the  house  is  filled  with  cold  air  and  kept 
closed  when  the  weather  outside  is  changeable  or  warm. 
Great  care,  however,  must  be  used  to  maintain  a  low, 
even  temperature.  At  any  rate  the  waste  of  ice  in  cold 
weather  is  slight,  as  compared  with  warm  weather,  and 
fortunately  we  do  not  usually  have  long  spells  of  warm 
weather  after  winter  apples  are  stored. 

The  ice  is  placed  in  the  ice  chamber  the  same  as  in 
any  ice  house.  The  cold  air,  descending  into  the  spaces 
between  the  joists,  finds  its  way  into  storage  or  cooling 
room  by  an  opening  between  the  trough  and  the  gal- 
•  vanized  covering  above.  This  opening  varies  in  width 
from  four  to  eight  inches,  caused  by  the  fall  of  the 
trough  to  the  center.  In  Figure  354,  a,  foundation;  h, 
ten-inch  space  for  sawdust ;  c,  two-inch  air  space ;  d,  four- 
inch  space  for  charcoal;  e,  center  post  twelve  by  twelve 
inches;  f,  plate  on  center  post  twelve  by  twelve  inches; 
fj,  ceiling;  h,  joist  three  by  twelve  inches  and  twelve  feet 
long;    i,    end    of    two    by    ten-inch    on    which    the    joist 


A    MASSACHUSETTS     APPLE     HOUSE 


363 


rests;  ;,  two-inch  floor;  Ic,  sloping  joist  three  by  nine 
inches  and  three  by  three  inches  at  ends ;  I,  diagonal  floor ; 
m,  galvanized  floor;  n,  sloping  rafters  inverted;  o,  two 
by  fours,  on  which  ice  rests;  p,  waste  water  trough;  q, 
four-inch  space  for  conveying  warm  air  from  storage 
room;  r,  space  for  descending  cold  air;  s,  sheathing  lum- 
ber; t,  floor. 

A     MASSACHUSETTS     APPLE     HOUSE 

A  house  that  will  hold  several  hundred  barrels  of  apples 
has  been  built  by  John  W.  Clark  of  Xorth  Hadley,  Mass., 


/rofi'/r  ROOM  \ 

J — 


fmsMr  f/enr    ^ZxJZ 


f>fO/fff/rOO^  /4''2.2. 


Fig.   355 — MR.   Clark's   apple  house 


who  has  very  large,  extensive  apple  orchards.  The  ac- 
companying plan.  Figure  355,  shows  in  detail  the  con- 
struction of  the  house.  Two  air  spaces  well  insulated 
with  building  paper  are  provided  at  a  and  c,  space  b  be- 
tween studs  being  filled  with  charcoal  or  sawdust.  The 
ice  box,  six  by  nine  feet  in  size,  extends  the  full  length  of 


164: 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


the  building,  and  is  filled  as  occasion  requires  from  a 
large  ice  house  in  which  about  1500  tons  are  stored  each 
winter.  The  bottom  of  this  ice  box  is  well  supported  on 
posts,  which  do  not  show  in  the  engraving.  It  has  a 
sloping  floor  covered  with  galvanized  iron,  and  the  waste 
water  is  led  off  through  pipes.  Attached  to  the  build- 
ing is  a  work  room,  in  which  the  picking  and  sorting  are 
done.     There  are  double  doors  into  the  cold  storage  room. 


Fig.  356 — SECTIONAL  VIEW  OF  STORAGE  HOUSE 


A  NOVEL  APPLE  STORAGE  HOUSE 


A  somewhat  novel  type  of  apple  storage  house  is 
projected  by  Arthur  11.  Hill,  a  large  apple  grower  of 
Grand  Isle  County,  Vt.,  to  suit  rather  imusual  condi- 
tions. He  has  an  old  stone  quarry  on  the  bank  of  Lake 
Champlain.  The  stone  has  been  cut  out  in  such  a 
manner  as  to   leave  a  perpendicular   wall  a  little  over 


A    AEHMO.NT    AITLE     HOUSE 


365 


twenty  feet  high  facing  the  hike.  He  proposes  to  build 
the  storage  hoase  against  the  face  of  this  rock  wall,  thus 
.living  the  constrviction  of  the  west  wall  of  his  storage 
house.  The  other  three  walls  will  be  built  of  stone  taken 
from  the  quarry  on  the  spot. 

The  site  has  two  other  natural  and  unusual  advan- 
tages. The  position  on  the  very  shore  of  the  lake  makes 
it  very  easy  to  secure  a  supply  of  ice,  and  the  plan  is 
to  use  ice  in  cooling  the  fruit  rooms.  In  the  second 
place,  the  apples  are  often  shipped  by  boat,  and  a  dock 

can  easily  be  provided  with- 
in a  few  feet  of  the  build- 
ing, so  that  barrels  can  be 
loaded  directly  out  of  the 
house  and  into  the  boat. 

The  proposed  plan,  shown 
in  Figures  356  and  357, 
calls  for  a  building  fifty 
feet  square  and  twenty-four 
feet  high  to  the  eaves,  with 
four  stories  and  a  garret. 
Each  story  of  the  storage 
space  proper  is  made  low, 
only  six  and  one-half  feet 
between  floor  and  ceiling. 
This  will  accommodate  two 
tiers  of  barrels  on  end, 
and,  in  case  of  crowd- 
ing, another  tier  on  the  side.  This  makes  less  work 
in  handling  than  when  barrels  are  piled  three  tiers  high, 
and  there  is  consequently  less  rough  handling  of  the 
fruit. 

In  the  center  is  a  shaft  eight  by  eight  feet  in  size, 
which  serves  the  triple  purpose  of  elevator,  ventilator 
and  support  for  the  floors.  This  will  be  open  on  all  four 
sides,  but  with  doors  arranged  so  as  to  control  ventila- 


357 FLOOR     PLAN     OF 

STORAGE     HOUSE 


366  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

tion  when  necessary.  The  upper  floor,  the  one  opening 
on  the  bank,  will  be  used  as  a  packing  room.  The  fruit 
will  be  received  here,  and  may  be  discharged  either  from 
here  or  from  the  lower  story.  This  room  will  be  used 
also  for  icing  the  pipes  in  cooling  the  rooms  below. 

Pipes  of  galvanized  iron  eight  inches  in  diameter  will 
extend  from  the  icing  trough  on  the  upper  floor  to  the 
waste  trough  on  the  lower  floor.  These  can  be  filled  with 
the  crushed  ice  and  salt  mixture  when  desired.  If  only 
a  part  of  the  storage  space  is  in  demand,  the  lower  room 
will  be  cooled  by  filling  the  tubes  as  high  as  the  ceiling 
of  that  room.  The  necessary  ice  house  will  be  built 
against  the  storage  house,  probably  on  the  edge  of  the 
bluif  above,  and  on  a  level  with  the  floor  of  the  icing 
room. 

A  lining  of  rough  sheathing  will  be  used  between  the 
stone  wall  and  the  cooling  pipes,  and  another  lining  or 
curtain  of  lighter  material  will  be  placed  inside  the  range 
of  pipes.  Other  details  of  construction  have  not  yet 
been  determined,  but  will  be  sufiiciently  obvious  so  that 
any  practical  builder  can  follow  the  general  outlines  of 
this  plan  and  make  the  necessary  adaptations  under  any 
circumstances  which  make  a  similar  construction  seem 
desirable. 

AN     APPLE     EVAPORATOR 

The  evaporated  apple  industry  centers  in  a  few  towns 
in  Wayne  County,  N.  Y.,  bordering  the  southern  shore  of 
Lake  Ontario.  Here  almost  every  farm  has  a  large  apple 
orchard,  and  from  a  very  early  time  the  drying  of  this 
fruit  has  been  a  special  industry.  Out  of  these  years  of 
experience  has  grown  the  present  kiln  or  dry  house  and 
the  labor-saving  machinery.  The  farm  dry  house  as 
now  constructed  usually  consists  of  two  rooms,  each 
sixteen  feet  square.  Whenever  the  land  permits  it  is  built 
upon  a  hillside,  which  admits  of  a  deep  basement  under 


AN     APPLE     EVAPORATOR 


367 


one  end  of  the  building,  while  the  floor  of  the  other  end 
is  level  with  the  ground,  as  shown  in  Figure  358.  In 
the  outside  or  receiving  room,  h,  the  apples  are  pared, 
oleached  and  sliced,  while  the  inner  room,  a,  is  used 
exclusively  for  drying. 


Fig.    358— SHOWING    ARRANGEMENT    OF    EVAPORATOR 

The  peculiarity  of  this  drying  room  is  in  the  floor, 
which  is  made  of  wooden  strips  about  one  inch  wide  an^l 
thick,  and  beveled  on  both  sides,  set  wide  side  up  and 
about  one-half  inch  apart  on  top.  This  makes  a  slatted 
floor,  the  spaces  of  which  are  wider  apart  on  the  under 
side  than  on  top.     The  heat  passes  through  this  form  of 


368 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


floor  better  than  one  made  of  square-edged  strips.  In 
the  roof  is  a  ventilator,  through  which  the  heated  air  and 
vapor  pass  off. 

The  basement,  c,  below  the  drying  floor,  is  generally 
twelve  feet  high  and  sometimes  more.  In  the  center  is 
placed  a  large  furnace,  in  which  a  coal  fire  is  kept  day 
and  night.  To  assist  in  distributing  the  heat  evenly,  the 
gases  pass  through  pipes  that  circle  around  the  room 
about  two  feet  from  the  floor  above,  Figure  361,  finally 
uniting  and  entering  a  chimney  at  the  side  of  the  building. 


Fig.  359 FLOOR  PLAN  AND  END  VIEW 


In  some  of  the  modern  houses  the  chimney  is  carried 
through  the  center  of  the  floor  and  through  the  ventilator 
in  the  roof,  thus  causing  a  more  rapid  circulation  of  air. 
The  basement,  and  sometimes  the  drying  room  above, 
is  often  ceiled  with  lath  and  plaster  as  a  protection  against 
fire.  The  entire  basement  is  practically  a  hot  air  furnace, 
cool  air  being  admitted  through  holes  in  the  foundation 
wall,  and  when  heated  passing  through  the  slatted  floor 
above.  The  object  is  to  create  a  rapid  circulation  of  hot, 
dry  air.. 


A     MAPLE     SUGAR     HOUSE  369 

Apples  are  stored  in  sheds  or  convenient  piles  outside 
and  brought  into  the  operating  room  as  needed.  Here 
they  are  pared  and  cored  by  a  large  machine,  a,  Fig.  359. 
The  pared  fruit  falls  upon  a  table,  h,  at  which  operatives 
sit,  who  examine  each  apple  and  cut  off  fragments  of  the 
skin,  decayed  spots,  etc.,  finally  throwing  the  perfect  fruit 
into  bushel  crates,  c  c.  This  is  then  placed  in  the  bleach- 
ing box,  d,  for  half  an  hour,  where  it  is  subjected  to  the 
fumes  of  burning  sulphur,  after  which  the  apples  are 
sliced  with  a  machine,  e.  The  sliced  apples  fall  into 
bushel  crates,  which  when  full  are  emptied  on  the  floor 
of  the  drying  room.  The  floor  can  be  covered  to  a  depth 
of  four  to  six  inches  of  fresh  fruit.  After  drying  for 
several  hours  the  fruit  is  shoveled  over,  and  when  the 
proper  degree  of  evaporation  is  reached  it  is  shoveled  into 
barrels  or  bags  and  sold. 

In  Wayne  county  it  is  estimated  that  a  dry  hoi;se  with 
a  sixteen-foot  kiln  can  be  built  and  equipped  for  $300  to 
$350.  The  cost  of  equipment  is,  furnace  $20,  pipes  $20, 
parer  $13,  slicer  $20,  bleaching  box  and  crates  $15, 
total  $88.  Some  consider  a  better  furnace,  costing  $40, 
more  economical.  Commercial  drying  houses,  i.  e.,  those 
purchasing  green  fruit  for  drying,  are  on  the  same  general 
plan  as  the  farm  evaporators,  but  larger. 

A   MODERN    MAPLE    SUGAR   HOUSE 

The  sugar  house  of  A.  J.  Harmon  of  Ohio,  shown  in 
Figures  360  and  361,  is  sixteen  by  thirty-six  feet,  twelve 
feet  high,  with  syrup  and  packing  room  in  front, 
twelve  by  sixteen  feet,  with  room  for  sap  pails 
directly  above.  These  rooms  are  ceiled  with  a  tight  parti- 
tion between  evaporator  rooms,  except  doors,  and  there- 
fore exclude  all  steam  from  the  tins  stored  in  them.  The 
house  is  built  on  a  side  hill,  so  that  sap  can  be  drawn  from 
gnthering  wagon  or  sled  tn  store  tank,  there  to  evaporator 


370 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


without  any  pumping  or  handling.  The  camp  consists  oi 
1000  sugar  maples,  a  large  proportion  being  thrifty  sec- 
ond growth,  set  in  orchard  style  about  forty  years  ago. 


Fig.    360 — AN    OHIO     MAPLE    SUGAR    HOUSE 


Fig.    361 — FLOOR    PLAN    OF    SUGAR    HOUSE 


A   MODERN  BACON    HOG  FACTORY 


Small  bacon  factories  are  spread  all  over  Europe, 
notably  in  Sweden  and  Denmark,  for  in  remote  districts 
where  farmers  carry  on  large  dairy  business  and  feed  skim 
milk  in  large  quantities  to  pigs  it  is  often  impossible  to 
dispose  of  live  pigs  to  advantage.  These  factories  have  the 
advantage  of  being  small  atid  cost  comparatively  little 
to  build.     The  ilhistration  given  in  Figure  362,  from  the 


A     BACON     FACTORY 


371 


journal  of  the  Royal  Agricultural  Society  of  England, 
is  capable  of  handling  about  fifty  pigs  per  week,  and 
cheapness  of  construction  is  what  is  aimed  at  in  many  of 
these  factories.  The  cellar  and  engine  room  is  sub- 
stantially built,  but  the  rest  of  the  building  is  put  up  as 
cheaply  as  possible. 

Preferably,    a   site   should   be   selected   where   there    is 
plenty  of  space  and  an  abundance  of  water.     The  pigs 


.  Sc»J«  of  Tftt 


Fig.  362 GROUND  PLAN  AND  ELEVATION  OF  BACON  FACTORY 


are  slaughtered,  dressed  and  pushed  along  the  bars  into 
the  hanging  house,  whence  they  are  passed  into  the  chill 
room  and  then  into  the  cutting  up  room.  From  this  latter 
place  the  various  sections  are  distributed  to  their  various 
departments.  The  factory  is  equipped  with  the  necessary 
machinery  for  lard  making  and  sausage  making,  etc.,  and 
the  offal  is  converted  into  fertilizer, 


372  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

After  being  killed  and  hung  a  few  moments  to  bleed, 
the  pigs  are  pushed  through  on  to  the  dumping  table  and 
into  the  scalding  vat,  eight  by  five  by  two  and  one-half 
feet,  which  is  fitted  with  a  cradle  and  lever  attachment 
to  lift  the  carcasses  to  the  scuttling  table.  The  water  is 
kept  at  140  degrees  for  fine-skinned  pigs  and  150  for  those 
that  are  coarse.  Above  the  scuttling  table  is  arranged  a 
series  of  cold  water  sprinklers,  which  are  allowed  to  play 
upon  the  warm  carcasses  while  the  scraping  is  proceeding. 
The  carcasses  are  then  singed  upon  the  singeing  stack, 
which  is  the  most  important  of  the  appliances  of  the 
slaughtering  department.  It  consists  of  a  vertical  stack 
built  strongly  of  fire  brick  bound  together  and  arranged 
on  the  top  of  four  columns  by  means  of  a  platform.  The 
flue  in  the  center  is  circular  and  just  large  enough  to  hold 
pigs. 

From  the  top  is  hung  a  heavy  chain,  which  is  lowered 
down  by  means  of  a  windlass.  A  gob  hook  is  inserted  in 
the  lower  jaw  and  the  pigs  are  pushed  down  an  oblique 
board  from  the  scuttling  table  and  are  then  suspended 
by  a  hook.  They  are  pushed  forward  luitil  they  come 
under  the  flue  of  the  singer,  when  the  hook  is  caught  up 
by  the  singeing  chain.  The  windlass  is  set  in  motion  and 
the  carcass  is  raised  through  the  fire.  It  is  then  dropped 
into  a  bath  of  cold  water  and  the  hooks  withdrawn.  The 
toenails  are  removed  and  the  gambrel  stick  is  inserted 
in  the  hind  legs.  The  pigs  are  then  hung  up,  scraped  and 
disemboweled.  The  pigs  go  from  here  to  the  hanging 
room,  where  they  are  partially  cooled  before  being  put 
into  the  chill  room,  which  is  kept  at  a  temperature  of 
about  forty  degrees.  After  hanging  until  thoroughly 
cooled  through  they  are  taken  down  and  cut  up. 

A  CONNECTICUT  VALLEY  TOBACCO  BARN 

In  the  accompanying  illustrations  is  shown  in  detail 
the  construction  of  a  tobacco  curing  barn,  the  plans  of 


A    MASSACHUSETTS    TOBACCO    BAUN 


;73 


which  were  made  by  Mr.  C.  M.  Hubbard  of  Sunderland, 
Mass.,  a  successful  grower  of  cigar  leaf  in  the  Connecticut 
valley.  The  lumber  was  bought  on  the  stump  at  $5  per 
M,  hauled  one  and  one-half  miles  to  a  mill  and  sawed  out. 
The  cost  of  two  barns,  each  twenty-four  by  105  feet,  was 
$500,  not  including  his  own  time  and  that  of  the  hired  man 
and  team.  While  the  sheds  were  made  twenty-four  feet 
wide,  Mr.  Hubbard  says  that  if  he  were  to  build  again  he 
would  make  them  twenty-seven  or  thirty.  Each  bent 
contains  eight  poles  and  seven  rows  of  lath  are  hung  across 
the  bent ;  lath  are  three  and  one-half  feet  long. 


y—^^ 


\\p 


JL. 

Fig.    363 — END   VIEW 


Fig.    364 — VENTILATOR 


The  barn  is  twenty-four  by  105  feet,  seventeen  feet  to 
eaves,  contains  seven  bents  (although  only  six  are  shown 
in  Figure  365),  and  four  tiers.  The  space  between  the 
ground  and  second  tier,  Figure  363,  is  seven  feet,  and 
between  second,  third  and  fourth  tiers  five  feet,  while  the 
upper  hanging  pole  is  four  feet  from  the  ridge.  No  poles 
are  used  in  the  peak  and  there  are  no  purlin  plates.  The 
rafters  are  placed  three  feet  apart  and  collar  boards  are 
nailed   to   the  rafters  five   feet   above  the   plate   and   the 


374 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


slats  are  hung  on  these  boards.  In  the  peak,  at  each  end 
of  the  barn,  is  a  window  for  ventilation.  As  shown  in 
Figure  363,  the  center  piece,  c,  is  a  round  pole  stripped 
of  bark  much  like  a  telegraph  pole,  twenty  feet  long,  six 
inches  at  upper  end,  ten  inches  at  the  butt,  set  three  feet 
in  ground.  From  the  ground  to  the  eaves  is  seventeen 
feet,  the  tips  of  the  lower  tier  of  tobacco  being  two  feet 
above  the  ground. 

Figure  364  shows  the  plan  of  ventilation.  The  doors 
are  made  of  the  common  sideboards,  c,  hung  on  a  slat,  h, 
which  rests  on  girth,  a.  The  slat  is  nailed  across  board,  c, 
and  projects  from  each  side  of  board,  c,  two  inches.  From 
beam,  on   crosspiece,   h,   the  board  swings  outward  from 


/OS' 

Fig.  365 — PLAN  OF  BENTS  IN  TOBACCO  CURING  BARN 


the  bottom,  as  shown.  Lining  laths,  three  inches  wide, 
are  put  permanently  in  place  from  beam,  a,  to  the  ground, 
but  from  beam,  a,  to  the  eaves  or  top  no  lining  lath  is 
used,  as  ventilating  door,  c,  swings  inward,  thus  prevent- 
ing the  use  of  lining  lath  above  the  beam,  a.  If  it  is 
desired  to  wholly  remove  board,  c,  it  may  be  done  by 
drawing  the  board  outward,  as  if  to  hook  in  position,  and 
then  tip  to  the  right  or  left  and  forward  and  slip  out. 

Figure  366  shows  how  board,  c,  is  held  in  place.  A 
staple  is  driven  in  the  inside  of  board,  c,  at  h,  shown  on 
dotted  lined  board,  in  the  center  of  the  board  abou1 
eighteen  inches  from  the  bottom.  In  the  board  next  to  c 
is  a  staple,  and  in  the  staple  is  fnstoned  a  hook  lonir 
enough  to  reach  from  the  staple  across  c  to  center  of  next 


A     11 ASSACHL  SETTS     TOBACCO     BARN 


375 


board.  When  tlie  bam  is  to  be  ventilated  the  hook  i^^ 
raised,  board,  c,  swung  out  on  hinge,  h,  shown  in 
Figure  366,  and  the  hook  slipped  into  eye,  h,  on  the  under 


\  /V-' 


i 


Fig.    366 — VENTILATOR   HOOK  Fig.    367 SroEBOARDS 

side  of  board,  c.  The  hooks,  a,  are  about  eighteen  inches 
long,  which  allow  the  bottom  of  the  board  being  tipped 
out  about  two  feet.  The  top  will  be  swung  in  about  nine 
inches.     The    hinge    is    placed    on    the    beam    five    feet 


Fig.    368 — ARRAXGEMEXT    OF    DOUBLE    DOORS 

below  eaves.  By  this  method  of  swinging  the  door 
more  air  can  be  obtained  in  the  shed  than  if  the  board? 
are  hung  at  the  top;  there  is  also  no  expense  for  hinges. 


876  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

The  wire  for  hooks,  a,  cost  thirty-five  cents,  and  Mr. 
Hubbard  bent  them  in  a  few  minutes.  The  staples  for 
fastening  hooks  cost  ten  cents.  As  there  are  thirty-five 
doors  on  a  side,  seventy  hooks  were  used  to  each  barn. 

The  sideboards  are  placed  in  position  as  shown  by 
Figure  367.  One  board,  a,  is  nailed  in  place  and  the 
three-inch  wide  lining  strip,  h,  is  slipped  under.  Another 
board  is  nailed  so  as  to  cover  the  uncovered  part  of  lining 
board.  A  lining  strip  is  slipped  under  the  edge  of  the 
second  board  and  nailed,  and  so  on. 

As  shown  by  Figure  368,  the  double  doors  at  each  end 
are  fastened  securely  to  posts,  a,  ten  feet  long,  three  feet 
of  which  are  set  in  the  ground.  An  eye  is  driven  in  each 
post  so  that  the  wire  hook  attached  to  the  door  can  be 
slipped  into  them;  this  holds  the  doors  securely  in  place, 
prevents  them  blowing  about  or  against  tobacco  when 
being  drawn  out.  All  four  doors  swing  out.  Each  door 
is  five  by  ten  feet. 

A   WELL    BUILT    TOBACCO   CURING   BARN 

The  curing  barn  portrayed  in  Figure  369  was  built  for 
Mr.  W.  J.  Clark  of  New  Milford,  Ct.,  at  a  cost  of  nearly 
$900.  It  is  twenty-eight  by  ninety-six  feet,  with  twenty- 
foot  posts.  It  will  contain  tobacco  from  about  three  and 
one-half  acres.  There  is  a  driveway  through  it  lengthwise 
by  removing  one  tier  of  slip  poles.  This  building  has  a 
very  strong  frame  and  foundation  and  is  covered  with 
splendid  materials.  It  is  well  arranged  for  ventilation  on 
sides,  ends  and  ridge.  Of  course  anyone  can  use  cheaper 
material  and  with  nearly  like  results  in  curing. 

A    farmer's    GREENHOUSE 

To  build  an  all-over  glass  house  for  growing  early 
plants  is  both  expensive  and  difficult,  while  the  building 
is  fit  for  nothing  else  should  the  growing  of  early  plants 


Fig.     369 — A     CONNECTICUT     TOBACCO     SHED 


Fig.    370 — USEFUL     FOR     MANY     PURPOSES 


378  BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 

be  given  up.  A  small  house  that  has  a  great  deal  of  sun- 
light in  it,  that  is  inexpensive  and  easy  to  build,  and  can 
be  used  for  other  purposes,  should  occasion  warrant,  is 
shovpn  in  Figure  370.  The  three  windows  face  the  south, 
with  a  window  in  both  east  and  west  ends. 

The  house  can  be  made  of  any  dimensions  desired  and 
can  be  heated  by  a  small  stove.  There  is  a  walk  along  the 
back  side,  with  a  wide  bench  before  the  windows.  The 
stove  can  occupy  the  farther  end  of  the  walk,  with  a 
slight  partition  of  galvanized  iron  to  keep  the  strong 
heat  from  the  plants  that  are  near.  A  shed-roofed  house 
can  be  built,  but  it  would  have  to  be  high  enough  in  the 
rear  to  aiford  a  walk,  so  there  would  be  but  little  if  any 
saving  in  expense,  and  a  decided  loss  in  attractiveness 

A    HOUSE    APIARY 

A  bee  house  in  use  by  F.  G.  Herman  of  EnglewoodjN.  J., 
was  built  of  common  inch  matched  boards  planed  on  one 
side.  The  frame  was  made  of  two  by  four-inch  wall  strips. 
The  roof  was  covered  with  paper  and  is  perfectly  water- 
tight. The  building,  Figure  371,  is  nine  by  fourteen  feet, 
with  a  window  in  each  end  and  one  opposite  the  door, 
which  faces  northward.  The  building  rests  on  large  stones, 
has  a  good  floor,  is  neatly  painted,  was  bviilt  by  a  mechanic, 
and  cost  $53.  It  is  located  on  a  berry  farm,  two  and  one- 
half  miles  from  his  home  apiary.  It  contains  twenty 
colonies  of  bees  in  two  tiers  of  hives.  The  broad  side  of 
the  house  which  is  in  view  faces  eastward  and  the  end 
southward.    There  are  no  hives  facing  the  other  two  sides. 

The  hives  used  are  known  as  the  Long  Ideal  and  are 
made  to  order.  They  hold  twenty  Langstroth  frames 
crosswise  and  are  expressly  used  for  extracted  honey.  The 
total  cost  of  the  hives,  fixtures  and  house  was  $125.  not 
counting  the  bees.  The  top  row  of  hives  rests  on  a  frame 
just  high  enough  so  one  can  raise  the  covers  and  look 


A     HOUSE     APIARY 


379 


into  them  comfortably,  as  the  interior  view  in  Figure  372 
shows ;  the  other  row  rests  on  the  floor.  The  hives  are  only 
one  story,  so  there  is  no  use  for  queen  excluders  and  no 
tiering  up  to  be  done.  There  are  no  bees  at  large  in  the 
house  excepting  a  few  which  leave  the  combs  while  hand- 
ling them,  and  these  quickly  make  their  escape  by  way  of 


Fig.    371 — A    HOUSE    APIARY 


the  windows,  which  are  left  open  all  summer  for  ventila- 
tion. The  netting  on  the  windows  is  so  arranged  that 
the  bees  can  leave  the  room,  but  cannot  enter  it.  The 
awning  over  the  windows  is  to  prevent  the  rain  from 
coming  in  while  the  windows  are  left  open. 


380 


BAKX      PLANS     AXD     OUTBUILDINGS 


The  nive  entrances  match  the  corresponding  slots  in 
the  side  of  the  house,  and  when  the  bees  enter  the  slot 
or  entrance  they  go  direct  into  their  respective  hives. 
Each  alternate  entrance  is  painted  a  darker  color  for  the 
purpose  of  helping  the  bees  to  mark  their  hive.  The  berry 
plantation  is  worked  by  a  practical  nurseryman  and  berry 
grower,  who  is  desirous  of  having  bees  on  the  farm.     He 


IMfl/ 


Fig.     372 — INTERIOR     OF     APIARY 

said  the  yield  of  berries  was  unusually  large  the  year  fol- 
lowing the  establishment  of  the  apiary,  and  thinks  the 
bees  were  responsible  for  the  extra  yield.  The  bees  got 
some  very  nice  honey  from  the  raspberry  and  blackberry 
blossoms. 

FRUIT    AND    FARM    COLD    STORAGE    HOUSE 

Temporary  structures  for  storing  ice  can  be  made  very 
cheaply,  but  we  strongly  recommend  that  a  cold  storage 
house  be  built  with  the  view  of  permanence  and  contin- 
uous use.  Such  a  house  is  illustrated  in  detail  in  Figures 
373  and  374,  which  are  taken  of  a  house  built  by  the  Kan- 
sas State  Experiment  Station.     The  building  is  designed 


COMBINED     COLD     STORAGE     HOUSE  381 

to  be  located  on  a  hillside  of  such  a  slope  that  the  first  floor 
will  be  on  the  level  of  the  surface  at  one  end  and  the  sec- 
ond floor  a  few  feet  above  the  surface  at  the  other.  The 
building  is  eighteen  by  thirty-eight  feet,  interior  meas- 
urement, two  stories  in  hight,  and  divided  into  four 
rooms,  two  on  each  floor.  On  the  second  floor 
is  the  ice  storage  room,  eighteen  by  twenty-one 
feet,  in  which  the  future  supply  of  ice  is  stored,  and 
the  ice  chamber,  fifteen  by  sixteen  feet,  in  which  is  held 
the  ice  that  cools  the  refrigerating  room  directly  below. 
A  door  in  the  ice  chamber  communicates  with  the  outside. 
This  is  for  the  unloading  of  ice  and  is  the  only  outside 
entrance  into  the  second  story.  The  refrigerating  room 
is  sixteen  by  eighteen  feet,  and  is  the  compartment  in 
which  the  temperature  is  to  be  reduced,  and  in  which 
perishable  products  are  to  be  stored.  Leading  into  this 
room  is  the  cooling  room,  eighteen  by  twenty-one  feet, 
which  is  to  be  used  as  a  general  purpose  storage  cellar. 
A  small  entrance  room  protects  the  doorway  into  the  cool- 
ing room.  This  is  the  only  entrance  into  the  ground  floor. 
The  building  rests  upon  a  twenty-inch  stone  founda- 
tion. Between  the  foundation  walls  is  bedded  twelve 
inches  of  broken  stone.  Over  this  pass  the  two  by  ten-inch 
sills,  sixteen  inches  on  centers.  The  floor  joists  are  bedded 
in  dry  sand  or  dry,  well-packed  cinders.  The  floor  is 
double,  with  two  layers  of  building  paper  between  the  two 
thicknesses.  Three  rows  of  ten  by  ten-inch  posts,  carry- 
ing eight  by  ten-inch  caps,  support  the  ten  by  twelve-inch 
beams,  upon  which  are  laid  the  six  by  eight-inch  joists 
for  the  second  floor.  Two-inch  flooring  is  laid  over  these. 
The  flooring  is  laid  tight  in  the  storage  room  and  provided 
with  a  slope  toward  the  center.  A  gutter  catches  the 
drainage  and  carries  it  into  the  gutter  from  the  ice 
chamber  (not  shown  in  the  drawing).  To  prevent  leakage 
the  floor  of  the  storage  room  must  have  a  sheet  iron  cover- 
ing.    The  floor  of  the  ice  chamber  is  laid  with  two  by 


382 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


four-inch  lumber,  with  one-inch  spaces  between.  This 
provides  for  air  circulation  and  water  drainage.  A  sloping 
catch  floor,  shown  in  Figure  373,  leads  the  water  into  the 
gutter  which  carries  it  down  and  out  through  the  cooling 
room.     The  upright  studding,  outside  of  the  walls,  two  by 


Fig.    373 — CROSS-SECTION      OF     THE     STORAGE      HOUSE 

six  inches,  are  twenty  inches  apart.  On  the  inside  is  an 
inch  of  rough  boarding,  two  layers  of  building  pa^oer,  a 
second  inch  board,  then  an  inch  air  space,  then  two  other 
thicknesses  of  inch  boarding  with  double  thicknesses  oi" 
building  paper  between.     On  the  outside  of  the  studding 


COJiIBIXED     COLD     STORAGE     HOUSE  383 

is  a  double  thickness  of  inch  boarding  with  two  layers  of 
building  paper  between.  Beyond  that,  building  paper, 
an  inch  space  and  the  weather  boarding.  The  space  be- 
tween the  studs  should  be  packed  a  foot  from  the  founda- 
tion with  mineral  wool  or  sawdust.  The  inch  dead  air 
spaces  and  the  double  layers  of  building  paper  should  be 
continuous  around  the  room.  If  there  is  a  break  that 
admits  air  the  dead  air  space  loses  all  its  qualities  of 
insulation  and  becomes  an  air  conductor.  The  ceiling 
over  the  ice  chamber  and  storage  should  have  a  double 
thickness  of  boards  and  paper  the  same  as  the  walls.  The 
spaces  between  the  joists  should  be  filled  tightly  with  dry 
sawdust,  or,  better  yet,  mineral  wool. 

Much  of  the  efficiency  of  the  building  for  cold  storage 
depends  upon  the  insulation  of  walls,  ceiling  and  floor. 
These  parts  should  be  constructed  so  that  they  will  be 
almost  non-conductors  of  heat.  Hence,  the  use  of  mineral 
wool,  sawdust,  building  paper  and  "dead"  air  spaces. 
These  are  all  poor  heat  conductors.  Air  conveys  heat 
rapidly  by  circulation,  but  where  confined,  so  that  the 
process  must  go  on  by  conduction,  it  is  very  slow.  On 
this  account  still  or  "dead"  air  becomes  one  of  our  most 
useful  insulating  materials  in  cold  storage  construction. 

The  lumber  for  the  insulation  should  be  free  from 
offensive  odors.  Pine  is  objectionable  on  this  account. 
The  outside  lumber  that  comes  in  contact  with  the  soil 
should  be  hard  and  durable.  A  coat  of  crude  petroleum 
and  a  layer  of  tarred  paper  before  the  soil  is  banked  will 
make  it  almost  indestructible.  The  lower  story  may  be 
made  of  stone,  but  the  insulation  will  have  to  be  provided 
besides,  as  a  stone  wall  will  allow  the  passage  of  heat  very 
freely.  The  whole  building,  roof  and  all,  should  be 
painted  white  in  order  to  retard  the  absorption  of  heat 
from  the  sun. 

For  windows  in  the  storage  room  three  sashes  should  be 
used,  thus  giving  two  air  spaces.     The  sashes  should  be 


384 


BARN     PLANS     AND     OUTBUILDINGS 


immovable,  air-tight,  and  protected  from  the  rays  of  the 
sun.  The  doors  should  be  tight  fitting,  and  to  this  end, 
should  be  padded  on  the  edge.  There  should  be  two  doors 
for  each  passage,  one  opening  in,  the  other  out.  Doors 
should  be  made  of  two  thicknesses  of  lumber,  with  an 
inch  of  sawdust  packed  between.  An  anteroom  should 
protect  the  entrance  to  the  building.  This  also  should  be 
supplied  with  double  packed  doors. 

The  interior  of  the  storage  house  must  not  be  subject 
to  rapid  fluctuation  in  temperature.     For  this  reason  the 


Fig.     374 LONGITUDINAL    SECTION     OF     COLD    STORAGE    HOUSE 


refrigerating  room  should  have  no  door  opening  directly 
outside.  The  plan  of  approaching  the  refrigerating  room 
llirough  both  the  anteroom  and  the  cooling  room  is  not 
an  undue  precaution. 

The  ice  chamber  is  fifteen  feet  in  width.  A  space  of 
eighteen  inches  extends  on  either  side  from  the  refrig- 
erating room  to  the  ceiling,  and  continues  over  the  ice  in 
the  chamber.  This  is  for  the  passage  of  the  warm  air 
from  the  refrigerating  room,  to  the   ice  chamber.     The 


COMBINED     COLD     STORAGE     HOUSE  385 

current  of  air  is  controlled  by  means  of  valves  in  the 
lower  part  of  the  passage.  The  circulation  depends  upon 
the  fact  that  cold  air  is  heavier  than  warm  air  and  tends 
to  fall,  crowding  the  warm  air  out  of  place.  The  ice  in 
the  chamber  being  in  blocks  without  packing  material 
between,  allows  the  air  to  pass  through.  In  contact  with 
the  ice  it  becomes  cooled  and  settles  down  through  the 
cold  air  duct  into  the  refrigerating  room  and  forces  the 
warm  air  upward  through  the  passages  on  the  sides  of  the 
room  and  over  the  ice,  where  it  is  cooled.  After  cooling 
it  falls,  and  thus  the  circulation  is  kept  up. 

A  system  of  ventilation,  though  not  shown  in  the 
figures,  will  be  necessary  in  the  building.  Ventilation 
pipes  leading  from  the  ice  chamber  through  the  roofs  are 
all  that  will  be  necessary.  These  should  be  arranged  so 
that  they  may  be  opened  or  closed  at  will. 

The  meltage  water  from  the  ice  chamber  and  storage 
room  will  serve  a  very  useful  purpose  if  conducted  through 
a  tank  in  the  cooling  room.  This  provides  an  excellent 
place  for  cooling  and  keeping  milk.  This  is  indicated  in 
Figure  374. 

If  the  storage  room  and  ice  chamber  are  filled  with 
good  ice  during  the  winter  the  quantity  will  be  sufficient 
to  last  throughout  the  season.  The  ice  in  the  storage  room 
may  be  packed  in  chaff  or  sawdust,  but  that  in  the  Ice 
chamber  should  be  without  packing.  When  the  ice  in 
the  chamber  is  exhausted  it  should  be  replenished  from 
the  storage  room.  After  the  building  is  supplied  with  ice 
in  the  winter  the  outside  door  should  be  packed  with 
sawdust  and  not  again  opened.  An  inside  ladder  provides 
sufficient  passageway  into  the  ice  chamber.  Such  a  struc- 
ture is  large  enough  for  the  requirements  of  an  ordinary 
fruit  farm,  but  the  plan  will  work  successfully  with  eithep 
Jarger  or  smaller  dimensions. 


INDEX 


PAGE. 

Apiary,  A  House 37? 

Barn,  A  Good  Farm 39 

Another    Small 53 

Cattle,  A  Second  Western...  73 

A   Western 72 

Cheap,  with  Connecting  Sta- 
bles     

Dairy,  A  Model 86 

An  Orange  Co 107 

Another  Orange  Co Ill 

A  Westchester  Co 108 

Enlarging   115 

Extension    112 

For  100  Cows 97 

Modern  Addition 102 

Mr.   H.  A.   Browning's 93 

Mr.    John   Donaldson's 99 

Mr.  P.  H.  Monroe's 95 

Dakota    Stock 66 

Dr.   C.  F.  Heywards 68 

Enlarging  F.  G.  Roman's...  55 

Farm  and  Yard  21 

For   Early   Lambs 134 

For  Feeding  Loose  Cattle...  60 

For  Mixed  Farming 42 

For  Raising  Winter  Lambs. 137 

Horse  and  Carriage 213 

Mr.   John  C.  Baker's 221 

Mr.    Zach    Mulhall's 223 

Mass.   Agri.   College 5 

Mr.   C.  E.  Colburn's 19 

Mr.  C.  S.  Sargent's 46 

Mr.  David  Lyman's 22 

Mr.  John  C.  Baker's 63 

Mr.  Joihn  L.  Shawver's 10 

Mr.    Kyle's 32 

Mr.  Lawson  Valentine's 28 

Mr.  N.  Martin's 62 

Mr    P.  H.  Reed's 59 

Mr.  Thomas  Convey's 13 

Mr.    William    Burgess's 92 

Mr.   William  B.   Collier's 36 

Plan  for  a  Small 51 

Remodeling   Mr.   B.    Walker 

McKeen's    57 

Round    14 

Sheep   and  Hogpen 149 

Feeding    150 

Minnesota    13S 

\'^Argrinia , , 146 


PAGE. 

Barn,  Teeple  and  Brandt's....  48 
Tobacco,    Mr.    C.    M.    Hub- 
bard's   372 

Mr.   W.  J.    Clark's 376 

Barns  and  Sheds,   Sheep 133 

Cattle,  and  Stables 59 

Cheap,  with   Sheds 78 

Dairy    86 

General   Farm i 

Plank  Frame 9 

Straw   125 

Bin,  A  Measuring  Grain 295 

A  Convenient  Grain 297 

Cave  for  Roots 355 

For  Storing  Apples 350 

Cellar,    Incubator 203 

A  Field  Root 351 

Cellars,  Root  and  Root  Houses. 343 

Cheese  Factory,  Modern 277 

Factorfes  261 

Creamery,  Farm 271 

Creameries  261 

Cover  for  Corn  Cribs 238 

Crib,  A  Convenient  Corn 235 

A  Self-Discharging  Corn 237 

A  Self-Feeding  Corn 237 

Dairy,  A  Butter 265 

A  Pennsylvania  267 

Door,  A   Swinging  for  a  Pig- 
gery    184 

Self-Closing  for  Pigpen 184 

Doors.    Cellar 350 

Evaporator,  Apple 36S 

Granary  and  Corn  Crib 293 

Another  with  Bins 292 

With  Its  Grain  Bins 2S7 

Granaries    2S7 

Greenhouse,  Farmer's 376 

Hog  Factory,   A  Modern   Ba- 
con     370 

Hogpens,  Movable 162 

Twentieth   Century 160 

House,  A   Combined  Carriage 

and  Tool 219 

Brooder,     Cheap    and    Eco- 
nomical   205 

Practical  204 

Celery    Storage 347 

Cold  Storage,  Apple 359 

Fruit  and  Farm 380 


388 


INDEX 


PAGE. 

blouse,  Corn,  An  Improved... 227 

Another   Western 232 

The    Connecticut 226 

Darry,  for  Hot  Chmates 2i0 

Hog,  Mr.  A.  N.  Portman's..l61 

Ice,  A  Cheap 244 

A  Cheaply  Constructed — 253 
And   Summer  Dairy   Com- 
bined    262 

A  Small 247 

In  the  Barn 251 

Plan  of  an 241 

Maple   Sugar 369 

Massachusetts  Apple 363 

Novel  Apple  Storage 364 

Onion  Storage 346 

Poultry,  A  Cheap  and  Con- 
venient     192 

An  Ohio   196 

For  a  Number  of  Breeds.. 201 

Movable    190 

Three-Pen    192 

Smoke,  A  Convenience  for.. 305 

A  Convenient 298 

Substitute    for 305 

Spring,    Dome-Shaped    Con- 
crete     283 

For  Squab  Raising 321 

Houses,    Bird 315 

Carriage,  and  Horse  Barns. 213 

Corn  and  Cribs '. 225 

Western   229 

Dairy    261 

Duck   210 

Ice  240 

And  Cool  Chambers 256 

Underground    249 

Pigeon   317 

Poultry   187 

Concrete  189 

For  Four  Varieties Ifi 

Scratching    Shed 18 

Small    207 

Ventilation  211 

Smoke    298 

Cheap  302 

Improved  30n 

Spring   280 

Ice.  Its  Uses  and  Importance. 240 

Without  Houses 254 

Kennels.  Dog 311 

Farm  Dog 312 

Loft,  Pigeon 209 

Milk  Station,  Co-operative  —  275 
Oven  and  Smoke  House 306 


PAGE. 

Pen,    Feeding,   for   Fattening 

Hogs  164 

Pens  and  Yards  for  150  Hogs. 175 

Piggery  for  Cold  Climates 157 

Plan   of 165 

Piggeries   154 

Pigpen,  A  Cheap 183 

A  Comfortable 173 

A  Convenient  Farm 170. 

Another  Portable 178 

A,  and  Tool  House 181 

Hen    House   and    Corn    Crib 

Combined    179 

Pigpens  of  Mr.  Wm.  Crozier..l72 

Pits  for  Storing  Roots 353 

Refrigerator,  A  Chamber 260 

Roots  in  Heaps 356 

Shed,  A  Temporary  Cattle....  81 

Cow,  and  Pigpen 83 

For  Soiling  Sheep 143 

Sheds,  Sheep,  and  Racks 142 

Shelter,  A  Kansas  Sheep 147 

An  Archway  123 

Cheap  123 

Sheep,  on  the  Plains 151 

Summer  Chicken 208 

Shelters,    Cattle 121 

Cheap,  Temporary 126 

On  the  Plains 130 

Silo,  Best  Hoops  for 342 

Building  a  Cheap 337 

Cheap,  Homemade 338 

Constructing  a  Round 326 

Dividing  a  Round 340 

Fastening  to  the  Barn 338 

For  Brewer's  Grains 341 

In  Beef  Raising 335 

Stave    326 

Substantial  and  Durable 333 

Silos    324 

Capacity  of  Round 326 

Spout.    Sliding,    for    Barn    or 

Granary    296 

Stable,  Cow, Modern  and  San- 

itarv  88 

For  a  Village  Lot 215 

Stables,  Cement  Floors  for... 116 

Improving  Old 84 

Light,     Heat    and    Ventila- 
tion of 1 

Stalls.  Covered,  for  Cattle 75 

Hon  rd   118 

Horse    216 

Ventilation,  King  System 2 

Sheringham  'Valve 2 


STANDARD  BOOKS 

PUBLISHED    BY 

ORANGE  JUDD  COMPANY 

NEW  YORK  CHICAGO 

Ashland  Building  People's  Gas  Building 

315-321  Fourth  Avenue  150    Michigan  Avenue 


Any  of  these  books  rvill  be  sent  by  mail,  postpaid,  to 
any  part  of  the  reorld,  on  receipt  of  catalog  price.  We  are 
always  happy  to  correspond  with  our  patrons,  and  cordially 
invite  them  to  address  us  on  any  matter  pertaining  to  rural 
books.  Send  for  our  large  illustrated  catalog,  free  on  appli- 
cation. 

First  Principles  of  Soil  Fertility 

By  Alfred  Vivian.  There  is  no  subject  of  more  vital 
importance  to  the  farmer  than  that  of  the  best  method 
of  maintaining  the  fertility  of  the  soil.  The  very  evident 
decrease  in  the  fertility  of  those  soils  which  have  been 
under  cultivation  for  a  number  of  years,  combined  with 
the  increased  competition  and  the  advanced  price  of  labor, 
have  convinced  the  intelligent  farmer  that  the  agriculture 
of  the  future  must  be  based  upon  more  rational  practices 
than  those  which  have  been  followed  in  the  past.  We 
have  felt  for  some  time  that  there  was  a  place  for  a 
brief,  and  at  the  same  time  comprehensive,  treatise  on 
this  important  subject  of  Soil  Fertility.  Professor  Vivian's 
experience  as  a  teacher  in  the  short  winter  courses  has 
admirably  fitted  him  to  present  this  matter  in  a  popular 
style.  In  this  little  book  he  has  given  the  gist  of  the 
subject  in  plain  language,  practically  devoid  of  technical 
and  scientific  terms.  It  is  pre-eminently  a  "First  Book," 
and  will  be  found  especially  valuable  to  those  who  desire 
an  introduction  to  the  subject,  and  who  intend  to  do  subse- 
quent reading.     Illustrated.     5x7  inches.    265  pages.     Cloth. 

Net,  $1.00 

The  Study  of  Corn 

By  Prof.  V.  M.  Shoesmith.  A  most  helpful  book  to  all 
farmers  and  students  interested  in  the  selection  and  im- 
provement of  corn.  It  is  profusely  illustrated  from  photo- 
graphs, all  of  which  carry  their  own  story  ani.'  contribute 
their  part  in  making  pictures  and  text  mattei  a  clear,  con- 
cise and  interesting  study  of  corn.     Illustrated.     5x7  inches. 

100  pages.     Cloth Net,  $0.50 

(1) 


The  Cereals  in  America 

By  Thomas  F.  Hunt,  M.S.,  D.Agri.,  Professor  of  Agron- 
omy, Cornell  University.  If  you  raise  five  acres  of  any  kind 
of  grain  you  cannot  afford  to  be  without  this  book.  It  is  in 
every  way  the  best  book  on  the  subject  that  has  ever  been 
written.  It  treats  of  the  cultivation  and  improvement  of  every 
grain  crop  raised  in  America  in  a  thoroughly  practical  and 
accurate  manner.  The  subject-matter  includes  a  comprehen- 
sive and  succinct  treatise  of  wheat,  maize,  oats,  barley,  rye,i 
rice,  sorghum  (kafir  corn)  and  buckwheat,  as  related  particu- 
larly to  American  conditions.  First-hand  knowledge  has  been 
the  policy  of  the  author  in  his  work,  and  every  crop  treated  is 
presented  in  the  light  of  individual  study  of  the  plant.  If  you 
have  this  book  you  have  the  latest  and  best  that  has  been 
written  upon  the  subject.  Illustrated.  450  pages.  5/^x8 
inches.      Cloth $i-75 

The  Forage  and  Fiber  Crops  in  America 

By  Thomas  F.  Hunt.  This  book  is  exactly  what  its  title 
indicates.  It  is  indispensable  to  the  farmer,  student  and 
teacher  who  wishes  all  the  latest  and  most  important  informa- 
tion on  the  subject  of  forage  and  fiber  crops.  Like  its  famous 
■companion,  "The  Cereals  in  America,"  by  the  same  author,  it 
treats  of  the  cultivation  and  improvement  of  every  one  of  the 
forage  and  fiber  crops.  With  this  book  in  hand,  you  have 
the  latest  and  most  up-to-date  information  available.  Illus- 
trated. 428  pages.     5^x8  inches.     Cloth $i-75 

The  Book  of  Alfalfa 

History,  Cultivation  and  Merits.  Its  Uses  as  a  Forage 
and  Fertilizer.  The  appearance  of  the  Hon.  F.  D.  Coburn's 
little  book  on  Alfalfa  a  few  years  ago  has  been  a  profit  revela- 
tion to  thousands  of  farmers  throughout  the  country,  and  the 
increasing  demand  for  still  more  information  on  the  subject 
has  induced  the  author  to  prepare  the  present  volume,  which 
is  by  far  the  most  authoritative,  complete  aiid  valuable  work 
on  this  forage  crop  published  anywhere.  It  is  printed  on  fine 
paper  and  illustrated  with  many  full-page  photographs  that 
were  taken  with  the  especial  view  of  tlieir  relation  to  the  text. 
336  pages.  6^  X  9  inches.  Bound  in  cloth,  with  gold  stamp- 
ing. It  is  unquestionably  the  handsomest  agricultural  refer- 
ence book  that  has  ever  been  issued.     Price,  postpaid,  .     $2.00 

Clean  Milk 

By  S.  D.  Belcher,  M.D.  In  this  book  the  author  sets  forth 
practical  methods  for  the  exclusion  of  bacteria  from  milk, 
and  how  to  prevent  contamination  of  milk  from  the  stable 
to    the    consumer.      Illustrated.      5x7    inches.      146    pages. 

Cloth $'°° 

(5) 


Bean  Culture 

By  Glenn  C.  Sevey,  cS.  A  practical  treatise  on  the  pro- 
duction and  marketing  of  beans.  It  includes  the  manner  of 
growth,  soils  and  fertilizers  adapted,  best  varieties,  seed  selec- 
tion and  breeding,  planting,  harvesting,  insects  and  fungous 
pests,  composition  and  feeding  value ;  with  a  special  chapter 
on  markets  by  Albert  W.  Fulton.  A  practical  book  for  the 
grower  and  student  alike.  Illustrated.  144  pages.  5x7 
inches.      Cloth $0.50 

Celery  Culture 

By  W.  R.  Beattie.  A  practical  guide  for  beginners  and  a 
standard  reference  of  great  interest  to  persons  already  en- 
gaged in  celery  growing.  It  contains  many  illustrations  giving 
a  clear  conception  of  the  practical  side  of  celery  culture.  The 
work  is  complete  in  every  detail,  from  sowing  a  few  seeds  in 
a  window-box  in  the  house  for  early  plants,  to  the  handling 
and  marketing  of  celery  in  carload  lots.  Fully  illustrated. 
150  pages.     5x7  inches.     Cloth $0.50 

Tomato  Culture 

By  Will  W.  Tracy.  The  author  has  rounded  up  in  this 
book  the  most  complete  account  of  tomato  culture  in  all  its 
phases  that  has  ever  been  gotten  together.  It  is  no  second- 
hand work  of  reference,  but  a  complete  story  of  the  practical 
experiences  of  the  best-posted  expert  on  tomatoes  in  the 
world.  No  gardener  or  farmer  can  afford  to  be  without  the 
book.  Whether  grown  for  home  use  or  commercial  purposes, 
the  reader  has  here  suggestions  and  information  nowhere  else 
available.     Illustrated.     150  pages.    5  x  7  inches.     Cloth.    $0.50 

The  Potato 

By  Samuel  Fraser.  This  book  is  destined  to  rank  as  a 
standard  work  upon  Potato  Culture.  While  the  practical  side 
has  been  emphasized,  the  scientific  part  has  not  been  neglected, 
and  the  information  given  is  of  value,  both  to  the  growej  and 
to  the  student.  Taken  all  in  all,  it  is  the  most  complete,  reliable 
and  authoritative  book  on  the  potato  ever  published  in  Amer- 
ica.   Illustrated.    200  pages.    5x7  inches.    Cloth.    .      .     $0.75 

Dwarf  Fruit  Trees 

By  F.  A.  Waugh.  This  interesting  book  describes  in  detail 
the  several  varieties  of  dwarf  fruit  trees,  their  propagation, 
planting,  pruning,  care  and  general  management.  Where 
there  is  a  limited  amount  of  ground  to  be  devoted  to  orchard 
purposes,  and  where  quick  results  are  desired,  this  book  will 
meet  with  a  warm  welcome.     Illustrated.     112  pages.     5x7 

inches.     Cloth $0.50 

(6) 


Cabbage,  Cauliflower  and  Allied  Vegetables 

By  C.  L.  Allen.  A  practical  treatise  on  the  various 
types  and  varieties  of  cabbage,  cauliflower,  broccoli,  Brussels 
sprouts,  kale,  collards  and  kohl-rabi.  An  explanation  is  given 
of  the  requirements,  conditions,  cultivation  afid  general  man- 
agement pertaining  to  the  entire  cabbage  group.  After  this 
each  class  is  treated  separately  and  in  detail.  The  chapter 
on  seed  raising  is  probably  the  most  authoritative  treatise  on 
this  subject  ever  published.  Insects  and  fungi  attacking  this 
class  of  vegetables  are  given  due  attention.  Illustrated.  126 
pages.    5  X  ;?  inches.    Cloth $0.50 


Asparagus 

By  F.  M.  Hexamer.  This  is  the  first  book  published  in 
America  which  is  exclusively  devoted  to  the  raising  of  aspara- 
gus for  home  use  as  well  as  for  market.  It  is  a  practical 
and  reliable  treatise  on  the  saving  of  the  seed,  raising  of  the 
plants,  selection  and  preparation  of  the  soil,  planting,  cultiva- 
tion, manuring,  cutting,  bunching,  packing,  marketing,  canning 
and  drying,  insect  enemies,  fungous  diseases  and  every  re- 
quirement to  successful  asparagus  culture,  special  emphasis  be- 
ing given  to  the  importance  of  asparagus  as  a  farm  and  money 
crop.     Illustrated.     174  pages.     5x7  inches.     Cloth.     .     $0.50 


The  New  Onion  Culture 

By  T.  Greiner.  Rewritten,  greatly  enlarged  and  brought 
up  to  date.  A  new  method  of  growing  onions  of  largest  size 
and  yield,  on  less  land,  than  can  be  raised  by  the  old  plan. 
Thousands  of  farmers  and  gardeners  and  many  experiment 
stations  have  given  it  practical  trials  which  have  proved  a 
success.  A  complete  guide  in  growing  onions  with  the  great- 
est profit,  explaining  the  whys  and  wherefores.  Illustrated. 
5x7  inches.     140  pages.     Cloth $0.50 


The  New  Rhubarb  Culture 

A  complete  guide  to  dark  forcing  and  field  culture.  Part 
I — By  J.  E.  Morse,  the  well-known  Michigan  trucker  and 
originator  of  the  now  famous  and  extremely  profitable  new 
methods  of  dark  forcing  and  field  culture.  Part  II — Com- 
piled by  G.  B.  FisKE.  Other  methods  practiced  by  the  most 
experienced  market  gardeners,  greenhouse  men  and  experi- 
menters   in    all    parts    of    America.      Illustrated.      130    pages. 

5x7  inches.     Cloth $0.50 

(7) 


Alfalfa 

By  F.  D.  CoBURN.  Its  growth,  uses,  and  feeding  value. 
The  fact  that  alfalfa  thrives  in  almost  any  soil;  that  without 
reseeding,  it  goes  on  yielding  two,  three,  four,  and  sometimes 
five  cuttings  annually  for  five,  ten,  or  perhaps  lOO  years;  and 
that  either  green  or  cured  it  is  one  of  the  most  nutritious 
^orage  plants  known,  makes  reliable  information  upon  its  pro- 
duction and  uses  of  unusual  interest.  Such  information  is 
given  in  this  volume  for  every  part  of  America,  by  the  highest 
authority.    Illustrated.     164  pages.    5x7  inches.    Cloth.    $0.50 

Ginseng,    Its    Cultivation,    Harvesting,    Marketing 
and  Market  Value 

By  Maurice  G.  Kains,  with  a  short  account  of  its  history 
and  botany.  It  discusses  in  a  practical  way  how  to  begin  with 
either  seeds  or  roots,  soil,  climate  and  location,  preparation 
planting  and  maintenance  of  the  beds,  artificial  propagation, 
manures,  enemies,  selection  for  market  and  for  improvement, 
preparation  for  sale,  and  the  profits  that  may  be  expected. 
This  booklet  is  concisely  written,  well  and  profusely  illus- 
trated, and  should  be  in  the  hands  of  all  who  expect  to  grow 
this  drug  to  supply  the  export  trade,  and  to  add  a  new  and 
profitable  industry  to  their  farms  and  gardens,  without  inter- 
fering with  the  regular  work.  New  edition.  Revised  and  en- 
larged.    Illustrated.     5x7  inches.     Cloth,     ....     $0.50 

Landscape  Gardening 

By  F.  A.  Waugh,  professor  of  horticulture,  university  of 
Vermont.  A  treatise  on  the  general  principles  governing 
outdoor  art ;  with  sundry  suggestions  for  their  application 
in  the  commoner  problems  of  gardening.  Every  paragraph  fs 
short,  terse  and  to  the  point,  giving  perfect  clearness  to  the 
discussions  at  all  points.  In  spite  of  the  natural  difficulty 
of  presenting  abstract  principles  the  whole  matter  is  made 
entirely  plain  even  to  the  inexperienced  reader.  Illustrated. 
152  pages.     5x7  inches.     Cloth Net,  $0.75 

Hedges,  Windbreaks,  Shelters  and  Live  Fences 

By  E.  P.  Powell.  A  treatise  on  the  planting,  growth 
and  management  of  hedge  plants  for  country  and  suburban 
homes.  It  gives  accurate  directions  concerning  hedges ;  how 
to  plant  and  how  to  treat  them ;  and  especially  concerning 
windbreaks  and  shelters.  It  includes  the  whole  art  of  making 
a  delightful  home,  giving  directions  for  nooks  and  balconies, 
for  bird  culture  and  for  human  comfort.  Illustrated.  140 
pages.    5x7  inches.    Cloth $0.  ,0 

(8) 


Farm  Grasses  of  the  United  States  of  America 

By  William  Jasper  Spillma^.  A  practical  treatise  on 
the  grass  crop,  seeding  and  management  of  meadows  and 
pastures,  c'escription  of  the  best  varieties,  the  seed  and  its 
impurities,  grasses  for  special  conditions,  lawns  and  lawn 
grasses,  etc.,  etc.  In  preparing  this  volume  the  author's  object 
has  been  to  present,  in  connected  form,  the  main  facts  con- 
cerning the  grasses  grown  on  American  farms.  Every  phase 
of  the  subject  is  viewed  from  the  farmer's  standpoint.  Illus- 
trated.   248  pages.    5x7  inches.    Cloth $1.00 

The  Book  of  Corn 

By  Herbert  Myrick,  assisted  by  A.  D.  Shambia,  E.  A. 
Burnett,  Albert  W.  Fulton,  B.  W.  Snow,  and  other  most 
capable  specialists.  A  complete  treatise  on  the  culture,  mar- 
keting and  uses  of  maize  in  America  and  elsewhere  for 
farmers,  dealers  and  others.  Illustrated.  2>'/2  pages.  5x7 
inches.      Cloth $i-50 


The   Hop — Its   Culture   and    Care,    Marketing   and 
Manufacture 

By  Herbert  Myrick.  A  practical  handbook  on  the  most 
approved  methods  in  growing,  harvesting,  curing  and  selling 
hops,  and  on  the  use  and  manufacture  of  hops.  The  result  oi 
years  of  research  and  observation,  it  is  a  volume  destined  to 
be  an  authority  on  this  crop  for  many  years  to  come.  It  takes 
up  every  detail  from  preparing  the  soil  and  laying  out  the 
yard,  to  curing  and  selling  the  crop.  Every  line  represents  the 
ripest  judgment  and  experience  of  experts.  Size,  5x8; 
pages,  300;  illustrations,  nearly  150;  bound  in  cloth  and  gold; 
price,  postpaid. $i-50 

Tobacco  Leaf 

By  J.  B.  Killebrew  and  Herbert  Myrick.  Its  Culture  and 
Cure,  Marketing  and  Manufacture.  A  practical  handbook 
on  the  most  approved  methods  in  growing,  harvesting,  curing, 
packing  and  selling  tobacco,  with  an  account  of  the  opera- 
tions in  every  department  of  tobacco  manufacture.  The 
contents  of  this  book  are  based  on  actual  experiments  in  field, 
curing  barn,  packing  house,  factory  and  laboratory.  It  is  the 
only  work  of  the  kind  in  existence,  and  is  destined  to  be  the 
standard  practical  and  scientific  authority  on  the  whole  sub- 
ject of  tobacco  for  many  years.  506  pages  and  150  original 
engravings.    5x7  inches.     Cloth %ify? 

(S 


Bulbs  and  Tuberous-Rooted  Plants 

By  C.  L.  Allen.  A  complete  treatise  on  tne  history, 
description,  methods  of  propagation  and  full  directions  for 
the  successful  culture  of  bulbs  in  the  garden,  dwelling  and 
greenhouse.  The  author  of  this  book  has  for  many  years 
made  bulb  growing  a  specialty,  and  is  a  recognized  authority 
on  their  cultivation  and  management.  The  cultural  direc- 
tions are  plainly  stated,  practical  and  to  the  point.  The 
illustrations  which  embellish  this  work  have  been  drawn 
from  nature  and  have  been  engraved  especially  for  this 
book.    312  pages.    5x7  inches.    Cloth $i-50 

Fumigation  Methods 

By  Willis  G.  Johnson.  A  timely  up-to-date  book  on 
the  practical  application  of  the  new  methods  for  destroying 
insects  with  hydrocyanic  acid  gas  and  carbon  bisulphid,  the 
most  powerful  insecticides  ever  discovered.  It  is  an  indis- 
pensable book  for  farmers,  fruit  growers,  nurserymen, 
gardeners,  florists,  millers,  grain  dealers,  transportation  com- 
panies, college  and  experiment  station  workers,  etc.  Illus- 
trated.   313  pages.    5x7  inches.     Cloth $1.00 

Diseases  of  Swine 

By  Dr.  R.  A.  Craig,  Professor  of  Veterinary  Medicine  at 
the  Purdue  University.  A  concise,  practical  and- popular  guide 
to  the  prevention  and  treatment  of  the  diseases  of  swine.  Witl' 
the  discussions  on  each  disease  are  given  its  causes,  symptoms, 
treatment  and  means  of  prevention.  Every  part  of  the  book 
impresses  the  reader  with  the  fact  that  its  writer  is  thor- 
oughly and  practically  familiar  with  all  the  details  upon  which 
he  treats.  All  technical  and  strictly  scientific  terms  are 
avoided  so  far  as  feasible,  thus  making  the  work  at  once 
available  to  the  practical  stock  raiser  as  well  as  to  the  teacher 
and  student.    Illustrated.    5  x  7  inches.    190  pages.    Cloth.    $0.75 

Spraying  Crops — Why,  When  and  How 

By  Clarence  M.  Weed,  D.Sc.  The  present  fourth  edition 
has  been  rewritten  and  set  throughout  to  bring  it  thoroughly 
up  to  date,  so  that  it  embodies  the  latest  practical  information 
gleaned  by  fruit  growers  and  experiment  station  workers.  So 
much  new  information  has  come  to  light  since  the  third  edi- 
tion was  published  that  this  is  practically  a  new  book,  needed 
by  those  who  have  utilized  the  earlier  editions,  as  well  as  by 
fruit  growers  and  farmers  generally.  Illustrated.  136  pages. 
5  X  7  inches.     Cloth $0.50 

(10) 


Successful  Fruit  Culture 

By  Samuel  T.  Maynard.  A  piactical  guide  to  the  culti- 
vation  and  propagation  of  Fruits,  written  from  the  standpoint 
of  the  practical  fruit  grower  who  is  striving  to  make  his 
business  profitable  by  growing  the  best  fruit  possible  and  at 
the  least  cost.  It  is  up-to-date  in  every  particular,  and  covers 
the  entire  practice  of  fruit  culture,  harvesting,  storing,  mar- 
keting, forcing,  best  varieties,  etc.,  etc.  It  deals  with  principles 
first  and  with  the  practice  afterwards,  as  the  foundation,  prin- 
ciples of  plant  growth  and  nourishment  must  always  remain 
the  same,  while  practice  will  vary  according  to  the  fruit 
grower's  immediate  conditions  and  environments.  Illustrated. 
265  pages.     5x7  inches.     Cloth $1.00 

Plums  and  Plum  Culture 

By  F.  A.  Waugh.  A  complete  manual  for  fruit  growers, 
nurserymen,  farmers  and  gardeners,  on  all  known  varieties 
of  plums  and  their  successful  management.  This  book  marks 
an  epoch  in  the  horticultural  literature  of  America.  It  is  a 
complete  monograph  of  the  plums  cultivated  in  and  indigenous 
to  North  America.  It  will  be  found  indispensable  to  the 
scientist  seeking  the  most  recent  and  authoritative  informa- 
tion concerning  this  group,  to  the  nurseryman  who  wishes  to 
handle  his  varieties  accurately  and  intelligently,  and  to  the 
cultivator  who  would  like  to  grow  plums  successfully.  Illus- 
trated.   391  pages.    5x7  inches.    Cloth $150 

Fruit  Harvesting,  Storing,  Marketing 

By  F.  A.  Waugh.  A  practical  guide  to  the  picking,  stor- 
ing, shipping  and  marketing  of  fruit.  The  principal  subjects 
covered  are  the  fruit  market,  fruit  picking,  sorting  and  pack- 
ing, the  fruit  storage,  evaporation,  canning,  statistics  of  the 
fruit  trade,  fruit  package  laws,  commission  dealers  and  deal- 
ing, cold  storage,  etc.,  etc.  No  progressive  fruit  grower  can 
afford  to  be  without  this  most  valuable  book.  Illustrated. 
232  pages.     5x7  inches.     Cloth $1.00 

Systematic  Pomology 

By  F.  A.  Waugh,  professor  of  horticulture  and  landscape 
gardening  in  the  Massachusetts  agricultural  college,  formerly 
of  the  university  of  Vermont.  This  is  the  first  book  in  the 
English  language  which  has  ever  made  the  attempt  at  a  com- 
plete and  comprehensive  treatment  of  systematic  pomology. 
It  presents  clearly  and  in  detail  the  whole  method  by  which 
fruits  are  studied.  The  book  is  suitably  illustrated.  288 
pages.    5x7  inches.    Cloth $1.00 

(11) 


Feeding  Farm  Animals 

By  Professor  Thomas  Shaw.  This  book  is  intended  alike 
for  the  student  and  the  farmer.  The  author  has  succeeded  in 
giving  in  regular  and  orderly  sequence,  and  in  language  so 
simple  that  a  child  can  understand  it,  the  principles  that  govern 
the  science  and  practice  of  feeding  farm  animals.  Professor 
Shaw  is  certainly  to  be  congratulated  on  the  successful  man- 
ner in  which  he  has  accomplished  a  most  difficult  task.  His 
book  is  unquestionably  the  most  practical  work  which  has  ap- 
peared on  the  subject  of  feeding  farm  animals.  Illustrated. 
Syi  xS  inches.    Upward  of  500  pages.    Cloth.     .     .      .     $2.00 

Profitable  Dairying 

By  C.  L.  Peck.  A  practical  guide  to  successful  dairy  man- 
agement. The  treatment  of  the  entire  subject  is  thoroughly 
practical,  being  principally  a  description  of  the  methods  prac- 
ticed by  the  author.  A  specially  valuable  part  of  this  book 
consists  of  a  minute  description  of  the  far-famed  model  dairy 
farm  of  Rev.  J.  D.  Detrich,  near  Philadelphia,  Pa.  On  the 
farm  of  fifteen  acres,  which  twenty  years  ago  could  not  main- 
tain one  horse  and  two  cows,  there  are  now  kept  twenty-seven 
dairy  cattle,  in  addition  to  two  horses.  All  the  roughage, 
litter,  bedding,  etc.,  necessary  for  these  animals  are  grown  on 
these  fifteen  acres,  more  than  most  farmers  could  accomplish 
on  one  hundred  acres.  Illustrated.  5x7  inches.  200  pages. 
Cloth $075 

Practical  Dairy  Bacteriology 

By  Dr.  H.  W.  Conn,  of  Wesleyan  University.  A  complete 
exposition  of  important  facts  concerning  the  relation  of  bac- 
teria to  various  problems  related  to  milk.  A  book  for  the 
classroom,  laboratory,  factory  and  farm.  Equally  useful  to 
the  teacher,  student,  factory  man  and  practical  dairyman. 
Fully  illustrated  with  83  original  pictures.  340  pages.  Cloth. 
5!/^  X  8  inches $i-25 

Modern     Methods     of     Testing     Milk     and     Milk 
Products 

By  L.  L.  VanSlyke.  This  is  a  clear  and  concise  discussion 
of  the  approved  methods  of  testing  milk  and  milk  products. 
All  the  questions  involved  in  the  various  methods  of  testing 
milk  and  cream  are  handled  with  rare  skill  and  yet  in  so  plain 
a  manner  that  they  can  be  fully  understood  by  all.  The  book 
should  be  in  the  hands  of  every  dairyman,  teacher  or  student. 
Illustrated.    214  pages.    5x7  inches $0.75 

(12) 


Animal  Breeding 

By  Thomas  Shaw.  This  book  is  the  most  complete  and 
comprehensive  work  ever  published  on  the  subject  of  which 
it  treats.  It  is  the  first  book  which  has  systematized  the  sub- 
ject of  animal  breeding.  The  leadmg  laws  which  govern  this 
most  intricate  question  the  author  has  boldly  defined  and 
authoritatively  arranged.  The  chapters  which  he  has  written 
on  the  more  involved  features  of  the  subject,  as  sex  and  the 
relative  influence  of  parents,  should  go  far  toward  setting  at 
rest  the  wildly  speculative  views  cherished  with  reference  to 
these  questions.  The  striking  originality  in  the  treatment  of 
the  subject  is  no  less  conspicuous  than  the  superb  order  and 
regular  sequence  of  thought  from  the  beginning  to  the  end 
of  the  book.  The  book  is  intended  to  meet  the  need.s  of  all 
persons  interested  in  the  breeding  and  rearing  of  live  stock. 
Illustrated.     40.S  pages.     5x7  inches.     Cloth.     .      .     .     $1.50 

Forage  Crops  Other  Than  Grasses 

By  Thomas  Shaw.  How  to  cultivate,  harvest  and  use 
them.  Indian  corn,  sorghum,  clover,  leguminous  plants,  crops 
of  the  brassica  genus,  the  cereals,  millet,  field  roots,  eic 
Intensely  practical  and  reliable.  Illustrated.  287  pages.  5x7 
inches.     Cloth $i.og 

Soiling  Crops  and  the  Silo 

By  Thomas  Shaw.  The  growing  and  feeding  of  all  kinds 
of  soiling  crops,  conditions  to  which  they  are  adapted,  their 
plan  in  the  rotation,  etc.  Not  a  line  is  repeated  from  the 
Forage  Crops  book.  Best  methods  of  building  the  silo,  filling 
it  and  feeding  ensilage.  Illustrated.  364  pages.  5x7  inches. 
Cloth $1.50 

The  Study  of  Breeds 

By  Thomas  Shaw.  Origin,  history,  distribution,  charac- 
teristics, adaptability,  uses,  and  standards  of  excellence  of  all 
pedigreed  breeds  of  cattle,  sheep  and  swine  in  America.  The 
accepted  text  hook  m  colleges,  and  the  authority  for 
farmers  and  breeders.  Illustrated.  371  pages.  5x7  inches. 
Cloth $1.50 

Clovers  and  How  to  Grow  Them 

By  Thomas  Shaw.  This  is  the  first  book  published  which 
treats  on  the  growth,  cultivation  and  treatment  of  clovers  as 
applicable  to  all  parts  of  the  United  States  and  Canada,  and 
which  takes  up  the  entire  subject  in  a  systematic  way  and 
consecutive  sequence.  The  importance  of  clover  in  the  econ- 
omy of  the  farm  is  so  great  that  an  exhaustive  work  on  this 
subject  will  no  doubt  be  welcomed  by  students  in  agriculture, 
as  well  as  by  all  who  are  interested  in  the  tilling  of  the  soil. 
Illustrated.    5  x  7  inches.    337  pages.    Cloth.    Net         .     $1.00 

(13) 


The  New  Egg  Farm 

By  H.  H.  Stoddard.  A  practical,  reliable  manual  on 
producing  eggs  and  poultry  for  market  as  a  profitable  business 
enterprise,  either  by  itself  or  connected  with  other  branches 
of  agriculture.  It  tells  all  about  how  to  feed  and  manage, 
how  to  breed  and  select,  incubators  and  brooders,  its  labor- 
saving  devices,  etc.,  etc.  Illustrated.  331  pages.  5x7  inches. 
Cloth $1.00 

Poultry  Feeding  and  Fattening 

Compiled  by  G.  B.  Fiske.  A  handbook  for  poultry  keep- 
ers on  the  standard  and  improved  methods  of  feeding  and 
marketing  all  kinds  of  poultry.  The  subject  of  feeding  and 
fattening  poultry  is  prepared  largely  from  the  side  of  the 
best  practice  and  experience  here  and  abroad,  although  the 
underlying  science  of  feeding  is  explained  as  fully  as  needful. 
The  subject  covers  all  branches,  including  chickens,  broilers, 
capons,  turkeys  and  vraterfowl ;  how  to  feed  under  various 
conditions  and  for  different  purposes.  The  whole  subject  of 
capons  and  caponizing  is  treated  in  detail.  A  great  mass  of 
practical  information  and  experience  not  readily  obtainable 
elsewhere  is  given  with  full  and  explicit  directions  for  fatten- 
ing and  preparing  for  market.  This  book  will  meet  the  needs 
of  amateurs  as  well  as  commercial  poultry  raisers.  Profusely 
illustrated.     160  pages.    5  x  7>2  inches.    Cloth.     .      .      .     $0.50 

Poultry  Architecture 

Compiled  by  G.  B.  Fiske.  A  treatise  on  poultry  buildings 
of  all  grades,  styles  and  classes,  and  their  proper  location, 
coops,  additions  and  special  construction  ;  all  practical  in  de- 
sign, and  reasonable  in  cost.  Over  100  illustrations.  125  pages. 
5x7  inches.     Cloth $0.50 

Poultry  Appliances  and  Handicraft 

Compiled  by  G.  B.  Fiske.  Illustrated  description  of  a 
great  variety  and  styles  of  the  best  homemade  nests,  roosts, 
windows,  ventilators,  incubators  and  brooders,  feeding  and 
watering  appliances,  etc.,  etc.  Over  100  illustrations.  Over 
125  pages.    5x7  inches.     Cloth $0.50 

Turkeys  and  How  to  Grow  Them 

Edited  by  Herbert  Mvrick.  A  treatise  on  the  natural 
history  and  origin  of  the  name  of  turkeys ;  the  various  breeds, 
the  best  methods  to  insure  success  in  the  business  of  turkey 
growing.  With  essays  from  practical  turkey  growers  in 
different  parts  of  the  United  States  and  Canada  Copiously 
illustrated.     154  pages.    5  x  7  inches.     Cloth $1.00 

(18) 


Farmer's  Cyclopedia 
of  Agriculture    ^    in 

A  Compendium  of  Agricultural  Science  and  Prac- 
tice on  Farm,  Orchard  and  Garden  Crops,  and  the 
Feeding  and  Diseases  of  Farm  Animals 

'By    EARLEY   VERNON   WILCOX,    Ph.  D. 
an?    CLARENCE    BEAMAN    SMITH,    M.  S. 

Associate  Editors  in  the  Office  of  Experiment  Stations,  United  States 
Department  of  Agriculture 


THIS  is  a  new,  practical,  and  complete 
presentation  of  the  whole  subject  of  ag- 
riculture in  its  broadest  sense.  It  is  de- 
signed for  the  use  of  agriculturists  who 
desire  up-to-date,  reliable  information 
on  all  matters  pertaining  to  crops  and  stock,  but 
more  particularly  for  the  actual  farmer.  The 
volume  contains 

Detailed  directions  for  the  culture  of  every 
important  field,    orchard,   and   garden    crop 

grown  in  America,  together  with  descriptions  of 
their  chief  insect  pests  and  fungous  diseases,  and 
remedies  for  their  control.  It  contains  an  ac- 
count of  modern  methods  in  feeding  and  handling 
all  farm  stock,  including  poultry.  The  diseases 
which  affect  different  farm  animals  and  poultry 
are  described,  and  the  most  recent  remedies  sug- 
gested for  controlling  them. 

Every  bit  of  this  vast  mass  of  new  and  useful 
information  is  authoritative,  practical  and  easily 
found,  and  no  effort  has  been  spared  to  include 
all  desirable  details.  There  are  between  6,000 
and  7,000  topics  covered  in  these  references,  and 
it  contains  700  royal  8vo  pages  and  nearly  500 
superb  half-tone  and  other  original  illustrations, 
making  the  most  perfect  Cyclopedia  of  Agricul- 
ture ever  attempted. 

Handjomely  bound  in  cloth.  ■^3.50:  half  morocco 
(•Oery  sumptuous).  ^4. 50.  postpaid 

nOAIIPr    llinn  PniJDAIIV    315-321  Fourth  Avenue.  New  Vork.N.  Y. 
UKANUL  JUUU  UUmrAll  I,       Peoples  Gas  Buildino,  Chicago.  IN. 

(19) 


■ill  111  i    PI  i 

;il|<ijiijijji{jlj}n«' 


